Preface

1
SIMATIC S7-400 S7-400 Automation System Module Data

______________
General specifications

2
______________
Rack
SIMATIC
3
______________
Power supply modules

S7-400
4
S7-400 Automation System Module ______________
Digital modules
Data
5
Reference Manual
______________
Analog modules

6
______________
Interface modules

7
______________
S5 interface IM 463-2

PROFIBUS DP master
8
______________
interface IM 467/IM 467 FO

Cable duct and fan

9
______________
subassemblies

10
______________
RS 485 repeater

Parameter sets of signal

A
______________
modules

Diagnostic data of signal

B
______________
modules

C
______________
Accessories and spare parts

Directive on handling
This manual is part of the documentation ______________
D
electrostatic sensitive
devices (ESD)
package 6ES7498-8AA05-8BA0

E
______________
List of abbreviations

Edition 09/2009
A5E00850736-06
Legal information
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into
account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation for the specific task, in particular its warning notices and
safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of
identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be adhered to. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E00850736-06 Copyright © Siemens AG 2009.

Industry Sector Ⓟ 09/2009 Technical data subject to change
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of this manual

The information contained in this manual can be used as a reference for operating, for
descriptions of the functions, and for the specifications of the signal modules, power supply
modules and interface modules of the S7-400.
How to configure, assemble and wire these modules in an S7-400 system is described in the
installation manuals for each system.

Basic knowledge required

This manual requires general knowledge of automation engineering.
In addition, you are required to know how to use computers or devices with similar functions
(e. g. programming devices) under Windows 2000 or xP operating systems. Since S7-400 is
configured with the STEP 7 basic software, you have to have a good working knowledge of
the software. You can acquire this knowledge in the manual "Programming with STEP 7".
Read the notes on the safety of electronic controllers in the appendix of the Installation
manual – especially when using an S7-400 in safety-relevant areas.

Target group
This manual is aimed at people with the required qualifications to commission, operate and
maintain the products described.

Scope of the manual

The manual applies to the S7-400 automation system.

Changes compared to the previous version

The following changes have been made compared to the previous version of this manual S7-
400 Automation System; Module Specifications, Edition 05/2007 (A5E00850735-04):
The revision of the ATEX standard was taken into consideration in chapter Standards,
certificates and approvals (Page 21).

Approvals
You can find details on the certificates and approvals in the chapter General specifications
(Page 21)“General specifications.”

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 3
Preface

Position in the information landscape

This manual forms part of the S7-400 documentation.

System Documentation package

S7-400  S7-400 automation system, installation
 S7-400 automation system, module specifications
 S7-400 automation system, CPU specifications
 S7-400 instruction list

Further Information
You can find further and additional information on the topics in this manual in the following
manuals:
Programming with STEP 7 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/18652056)
Configuring Hardware and Communication Connections with STEP 7
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/18652631)

Recycling and disposal

The S7-400 is environmentally friendly and is thus recyclable. For ecologically compatible
recycling and disposal of your old device, contact a certificated disposal service for electronic
scrap.

Additional support
If you have any questions about the use of the products described in this manual,
please get in touch with your Siemens representative or agent responsible.
http://www.siemens.com/automation/partner
A signpost to the documentation of the various SIMATIC products and systems is available
at:
http://www.siemens.de/simatic-tech-doku-portal
You can find the online catalog and order system under:
http://mall.automation.siemens.com/

Training center
We offer a range of relevant courses to help you to get started with the SIMATIC S7
automation system. Please contact your regional training center or our central training center
in 90327 Nuremberg, Germany for details:
Phone: +49 (911) 895-3200.
Internet: http://www.sitrain.com

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

4 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Preface

Technical support
You can reach the technical support for all SIMATIC products
Through the Support Request web form
http://www.siemens.de/automation/support-request
Phone: + 49 180 5050 222
By fax: + 49 180 5050 223
For further information about Siemens Technical Support, refer to the Internet at
http://www.siemens.de/automation/service

Service & Support on the Internet

In addition to our documentation, we offer a comprehensive knowledge base online on the
Internet at:
http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support
There you will find:
● The newsletter, which constantly provides you with up-to-date information on your
products.
● The right documents for your product on our Service & Support pages.
● A forum, where users and experts from all over the world exchange their experiences.
● Your local partner of Industry Automation.
● Information about repairs, spare parts and consulting.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 5
Preface

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

6 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
Table of contents

Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 General specifications ............................................................................................................................. 21
1.1 Standards, certificates and approvals..........................................................................................21
1.2 Electromagnetic compatibility ......................................................................................................29
1.3 Shipping and storage conditions for modules and backup batteries ...........................................32
1.4 Mechanical and ambient conditions for S7-400 operation...........................................................34
1.5 Information on insulation tests, protection class and degree of protection..................................36
2 Rack ........................................................................................................................................................ 37
2.1 Function and design of the racks .................................................................................................37
2.2 The racks UR1 (6ES7400-1TAx1-0AA0) and UR2 (6ES7400-1JAx1-0AA0) ..............................39
2.3 UR2-H Rack 6ES7400-2JAx0-0AA0) ..........................................................................................41
2.4 Rack CR2 (6ES7401-2TA01-0AA0) ............................................................................................43
2.5 Rack CR3 (6ES7401-1DA01-0AA0) ............................................................................................45
2.6 Racks ER1 (6ES7403-1TAx1-0AA0) and ER2 (6ES7403-1JAx1-0AA0) ....................................46
3 Power supply modules............................................................................................................................. 49
3.1 Common characteristics of the power supply modules ...............................................................49
3.2 Redundant power supply modules ..............................................................................................51
3.3 Backup battery (option)................................................................................................................53
3.4 Operator controls and indicators..................................................................................................55
3.5 Fault/Error messages via LEDs ...................................................................................................59
3.6 Power supply module PS 407 4A (6ES7407-0DA01-0AA0)........................................................65
3.7 Power supply module PS 407 4A (6ES7407-0DA02-0AA0)........................................................68
3.8 Power supply modules PS 407 10A (6ES7407-0KA01-0AA0) and PS 10A R (6ES7407-
0KR00-0AA0) ...............................................................................................................................71
3.9 Power supply modules PS 407 10A (6ES7407-0KA02-0AA0) and PS 10A R (6ES7407-
0KR02-0AA0) ...............................................................................................................................74
3.10 Power supply module PS 407 20A (6ES7407-0RA01-0AA0)......................................................77
3.11 Power supply module PS 407 20A (6ES7407-0RA02-0AA0)......................................................79
3.12 Power supply module PS 405 4A (6ES7405-0DA01-0AA0)........................................................81
3.13 Power supply module PS 405 4A (6ES7405-0DA02-0AA0)........................................................83
3.14 Power supply modules PS 405 10A (6ES7405-0KA01-0AA0) and PS 405 10A R (405-
0KR00-0AA0) ...............................................................................................................................85
3.15 Power supply modules PS 405 10A (6ES7405-0KA02-0AA0) and PS 405 10A R (405-
0KR02-0AA0) ...............................................................................................................................87

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 7
Table of contents

3.16 Power supply module PS 405 20A (6ES7405-0RA01-0AA0)..................................................... 89

3.17 Power supply module PS 405 20A (6ES7405-0RA02-0AA0)..................................................... 91
4 Digital modules ........................................................................................................................................ 93
4.1 Module overview ......................................................................................................................... 93
4.2 Steps in selecting and commissioning the digital module........................................................... 95
4.3 Assigning parameters to digital modules .................................................................................... 96
4.3.1 Parameters.................................................................................................................................. 96
4.3.2 Parameters of digital input modules............................................................................................ 97
4.3.3 Parameters of digital output modules ......................................................................................... 98
4.4 Diagnostics for digital modules ................................................................................................... 99
4.4.1 General information about diagnostic messages........................................................................ 99
4.4.2 Diagnostic messages of the digital modules............................................................................. 100
4.4.3 Causes of errors and remedies for digital modules .................................................................. 101
4.5 Interrupts of the digital modules................................................................................................ 103
4.6 Input characteristic curve for digital inputs................................................................................ 105
4.7 Digital input module SM 421; DI 32 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-1BL01-0AA0)................................. 106
4.8 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-7BH01-0AB0) ................................ 110
4.8.1 Features .................................................................................................................................... 110
4.8.2 Assigning parameters to the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V............................................................ 115
4.8.3 Behavior of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V ................................................................................ 117
4.9 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x AC 120 V (6ES7421-5EH00-0AA0) .............................. 120
4.10 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V (6ES7421-7DH00-0AB0) ........................... 124
4.10.1 Features .................................................................................................................................... 124
4.10.2 Assigning parameters to the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V....................................................... 128
4.11 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V (6ES7 421-1FH00-0AA0) ...................... 130
4.12 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V (6ES7421-1FH20-0AA0) ....................... 134
4.13 Digital input module SM 421; DI 32xUC 120 V (6ES7421-1EL00-0AA0)................................. 138
4.14 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A; (6ES7422-1BH11-0AA0)..................... 142
4.15 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A (6ES7422-5EH10-0AB0) ........... 146
4.15.1 Features .................................................................................................................................... 146
4.15.2 Assigning parameters to the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A ......................................... 150
4.16 Digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A (6ES7422-1BL00-0AA0) ................... 151
4.17 Digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A (6ES7422-7BL00-0AB0) ................... 155
4.17.1 Features .................................................................................................................................... 155
4.17.2 Assigning parameters to the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A ................................................ 159
4.17.3 Behavior of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A ..................................................................... 160
4.18 Digital output module SM 422; DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A (6ES7422-1FF00-0AA0)................ 161
4.19 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A (6ES7422-1FF00-0AA0) ............. 165
4.20 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A (6ES7422-5EH00-0AB0)............... 169
4.20.1 Features .................................................................................................................................... 169
4.20.2 Assigning parameters to the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A ............................................ 173
4.21 Relay output module SM 422; DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A (6ES7422-1HH00-0AA0)........ 174

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

8 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Table of contents

5 Analog modules ..................................................................................................................................... 179

5.1 General information ...................................................................................................................179
5.2 Module overview ........................................................................................................................180
5.3 Steps for commissioning analog modules .................................................................................183
5.4 Representation of analog values ...............................................................................................184
5.4.1 General information ...................................................................................................................184
5.4.2 Representation of analog values of analog input channels .......................................................185
5.4.3 Binary representation of input ranges........................................................................................186
5.4.4 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges.................................................188
5.4.5 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges ...........................................190
5.4.6 Representation of analog values for resistance-type sensors...................................................192
5.4.7 Representation of analog values for resistance thermometer ...................................................193
5.4.8 Representation of analog values for thermocouples .................................................................196
5.4.9 Representation of analog values for analog output channels....................................................201
5.5 Setting the measuring method and ranges of analog input channels........................................205
5.6 Behavior of the analog modules ................................................................................................208
5.6.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................208
5.6.2 Effect of supply voltage and operating mode.............................................................................209
5.6.3 Effect of the value range for analog values ...............................................................................210
5.6.4 Effect of operational limit and basic error limit ...........................................................................211
5.7 Conversion, cycle, settling and response time of analog modules............................................212
5.8 Assigning parameters to analog modules..................................................................................216
5.8.1 General information about parameter assignment ....................................................................216
5.8.2 Parameters of analog input modules .........................................................................................217
5.8.3 Parameters of analog output modules.......................................................................................219
5.9 Connecting sensors to analog inputs.........................................................................................220
5.10 Connecting voltage sensors.......................................................................................................223
5.11 Connecting current sensors .......................................................................................................224
5.12 Connecting resistance thermometers and resistors ..................................................................228
5.13 Connecting thermocouples ........................................................................................................231
5.14 Connecting loads/actuators to analog outputs...........................................................................237
5.15 Connecting loads/actuators to voltage outputs..........................................................................238
5.16 Connecting loads/actuators to current outputs ..........................................................................241
5.17 Diagnostics functions of analog modules ..................................................................................242
5.18 Interrupts of analog modules .....................................................................................................246
5.19 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-1KF00-0AB0) .......................................248
5.19.1 Features .....................................................................................................................................248
5.19.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit .................................................................................254
5.19.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit .......................................255
5.20 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0) .......................................257
5.20.1 Features .....................................................................................................................................257
5.20.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit .................................................................................267
5.20.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit .......................................269
5.21 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0) .......................................274

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 9
Table of contents

5.21.1 Features .................................................................................................................................... 274

5.21.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit................................................................................. 279
5.21.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit ...................................... 281
5.22 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-0HH00-0AB0) ................................... 284
5.22.1 Features .................................................................................................................................... 284
5.22.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit............................................................................... 290
5.22.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit .................................... 291
5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0) ................................... 293
5.23.1 Features .................................................................................................................................... 293
5.23.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit............................................................................... 303
5.23.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit .................................... 306
5.24 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF10-0AB0)........................... 311
5.24.1 Features .................................................................................................................................... 311
5.24.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit ..................................................................... 317
5.24.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit ..................... 320
5.25 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF00-0AB0) ...................................... 321
5.25.1 Features .................................................................................................................................... 321
5.25.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit................................................................................. 328
5.25.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit ...................................... 333
5.26 Analog output module SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7432-1HF00-0AB0).................................. 335
5.26.1 Features .................................................................................................................................... 335
5.26.2 Commissioning the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit............................................................................... 340
5.26.3 Output ranges of the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit............................................................................. 340
6 Interface modules .................................................................................................................................. 343
6.1 Common features of the interface modules .............................................................................. 343
6.2 Interface modules IM 460-0 (6ES7 460-0AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-0 (6ES7 461-0AA01-
0AA0) ........................................................................................................................................ 348
6.3 Interface modules IM 460-1 (6ES7460-1BA01-0AB0) and IM 461-1 (6ES7461-1BA01-
0AA0) ........................................................................................................................................ 351
6.4 Interface modules IM 460-3 (6ES7460-3AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-3 (6ES7461-3AA01-
0AA0) ........................................................................................................................................ 355
6.5 Interface modules IM 460-4; (6ES7460-4AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-4; (6ES7461-4AA01-
0AA0) ........................................................................................................................................ 358
7 S5 interface IM 463-2 ............................................................................................................................ 361
7.1 Using SIMATIC S5 expansion units in an S7-400 .................................................................... 361
7.2 Rules for connecting S5 expansion units.................................................................................. 363
7.3 Operator controls and indicators............................................................................................... 364
7.4 Installing and connecting the IM 463-2 ..................................................................................... 366
7.5 Setting the operating modes of the IM 314 ............................................................................... 367
7.6 Configuring S5 modules for operation in the S7-400................................................................ 370
7.7 Pin assignments of the 721 cable ............................................................................................. 372
7.8 Terminating connector for IM 314 ............................................................................................. 374
7.9 Specifications IM463-2 (6ES7463-2AA00-0AA0) ..................................................................... 375

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

10 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Table of contents

8 PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO .............................................................................. 377

8.1 PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO..................................................................377
8.1.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................377
8.1.2 Indicators and the mode selector...............................................................................................380
8.2 Configuration..............................................................................................................................382
8.3 Connection to PROFIBUS DP ...................................................................................................383
8.3.1 Connection options ....................................................................................................................383
8.3.2 Bus connector ............................................................................................................................383
8.3.3 Optical connection to PROFIBUS DP........................................................................................385
8.3.4 Connecting a fiber-optic cable to the IM 467 FO .......................................................................385
8.4 Specifications .............................................................................................................................389
8.4.1 Specifications of the IM 467 (6ES7467-5GJ02-0AB0)) .............................................................389
8.4.2 Specifications of the IM 467 FO (6ES7467-5FJ00-0AB0) .........................................................390
9 Cable duct and fan subassemblies ........................................................................................................ 393
9.1 Features .....................................................................................................................................393
9.2 Fan monitoring in the fan subassemblies ..................................................................................394
9.3 Cable duct (6ES7408-0TA00-0AA0)..........................................................................................396
9.4 The 120/230 VAC fan subassembly (6ES7408-1TB00-0XA0) ..................................................397
9.5 The 24 V DC fan subassembly (6ES7408-1TA01-0XA0)..........................................................400
10 RS 485 repeater .................................................................................................................................... 403
10.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................403
10.2 Applications and features (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0) ..................................................................404
10.3 Design of the RS 485 repeater (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0)..........................................................405
10.4 RS 485 repeater in ungrounded and grounded operation .........................................................406
10.5 Specifications .............................................................................................................................409
A Parameter sets of signal modules.......................................................................................................... 411
A.1 How to assign the parameters for signal modules in the user program ....................................411
A.2 Parameters of digital input modules ..........................................................................................413
A.3 Parameters of digital output modules ........................................................................................416
A.4 Parameters of analog input modules .........................................................................................418
B Diagnostic data of signal modules ......................................................................................................... 421
B.1 Evaluating diagnostic data of signal modules in the user program ...........................................421
B.2 Structure and contents of diagnostic data bytes 0 and 1...........................................................422
B.3 Diagnostic data of the digital input modules as of byte 2 ..........................................................423
B.4 Diagnostic data of the digital output modules as of byte 2 ........................................................428
B.5 Diagnostic data of the analog input modules as of byte 2 .........................................................435
C Accessories and spare parts.................................................................................................................. 443
C.1 Accessories and spare parts......................................................................................................443

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 11
Table of contents

D Directive on handling electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD)................................................................... 447

D.1 ESD: What are the directives for handling electrostatic sensitive devices? ............................. 447
D.2 Electrostatic charging of persons.............................................................................................. 448
D.3 Basic protective measures against electrostatic discharge ...................................................... 449
E List of abbreviations............................................................................................................................... 451
E.1 List of abbreviations .................................................................................................................. 451
Glossary ................................................................................................................................................ 455
Index...................................................................................................................................................... 469

Tables
Table 1- 1 Use in industry ............................................................................................................................ 22
Table 1- 2 Products that fulfill the requirements of the low-voltage directive............................................... 22
Table 1- 3 Pulse-shaped interference .......................................................................................................... 29
Table 1- 4 Sinusoidal interference................................................................................................................ 30
Table 1- 5 Interference emission of electromagnetic fields.......................................................................... 30
Table 1- 6 Interference emission via the mains AC power supply ............................................................... 30
Table 1- 7 Shipping and storage conditions for modules ............................................................................. 32
Table 1- 8 Mechanical ambient conditions................................................................................................... 34
Table 1- 9 Test for mechanical ambient conditions...................................................................................... 35
Table 1- 10 Climatic ambient conditions ........................................................................................................ 35
Table 1- 11 Test voltages............................................................................................................................... 36
Table 3- 1 Redundant power supply modules.............................................................................................. 51
Table 3- 2 LEDs INTF, 5 VDC, 24 VDC ....................................................................................................... 56
Table 3- 3 LEDs BAF, BATTF ...................................................................................................................... 56
Table 3- 4 LEDs BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F..................................................................................................... 56
Table 3- 5 Function of the operator controls of the power supply modules ................................................. 57
Table 3- 6 Error messages of the power supply modules............................................................................ 59
Table 3- 7 INTF, 5 VDC, 24 VDC LEDs ....................................................................................................... 60
Table 3- 8 BAF, BATTF; BATT.INDIC LEDs on BATT................................................................................. 62
Table 3- 9 BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F, BATT.INDIC LEDs on 1BATT ............................................................. 63
Table 3- 10 BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F, BATT.INDIC LEDs on 2BATT ............................................................. 63
Table 4- 1 Digital input modules: overview of features ................................................................................ 93
Table 4- 2 Digital output modules: overview of features .............................................................................. 94
Table 4- 3 Relay output module: overview of features................................................................................. 94
Table 4- 4 Parameters of digital input modules............................................................................................ 97
Table 4- 5 Parameters of digital output modules ......................................................................................... 98

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

12 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Table of contents

Table 4- 6 Diagnostic messages of the digital modules..............................................................................100

Table 4- 7 Diagnostic messages of the digital modules, causes of errors and remedies...........................101
Table 4- 8 Parameters of SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V...................................................................................115
Table 4- 9 Relationships of the analog input values on the CPU's operating state and on the L+
supply voltage ............................................................................................................................117
Table 4- 10 Relationships between the input values of errors and the configuration ...................................118
Table 4- 11 Parameters of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V........................................................................128
Table 4- 12 Parameters of the SM 421; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A ..........................................................150
Table 4- 13 Parameters of SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A........................................................................159
Table 4- 14 Relationships of the analog output values on the CPU's operating state and on the L+
supply voltage ............................................................................................................................160
Table 4- 15 Parameters of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A .............................................................173
Table 5- 1 Analog input modules: overview of features ..............................................................................180
Table 5- 2 Analog output modules: overview of features............................................................................182
Table 5- 3 Steps from the selection of analog modules to commissioning.................................................183
Table 5- 4 Example: Bit pattern of a 16-bit and 13-bit analog value...........................................................184
Table 5- 5 Supported analog value resolutions ..........................................................................................185
Table 5- 6 Bipolar input ranges ...................................................................................................................186
Table 5- 7 Unipolar input ranges.................................................................................................................186
Table 5- 8 Life-zero input ranges ................................................................................................................187
Table 5- 9 Representation of analog values in the ±1 V to ±10 V voltage measuring ranges....................188
Table 5- 10 Representation of analog values in the ±25 to ±500 mV voltage measuring ranges ................188
Table 5- 11 Representation of analog values in the voltage measuring ranges 1 to 5 V and 0 to 10 V.......189
Table 5- 12 Representation of analog values in the ±3.2 mA to ±20 mA current measuring ranges ...........190
Table 5- 13 Representation of analog values in current measuring ranges 0 to 20 mA...............................190
Table 5- 14 Representation of analog values in current measuring ranges 4 to 20 mA...............................191
Table 5- 15 Analog value representation for resistance-type sensors from 48 Ω to 6 kΩ ............................192
Table 5- 16 Representation of analog values for Pt 100/200/500/1000 resistance thermometers...............193
Table 5- 17 Representation of analog values for Pt 100/200/500/1000 resistance thermometers...............193
Table 5- 18 Analog value representation for resistance thermometers Ni100, 120, 200, 500, 1000 ...........194
Table 5- 19 Analog value representation for resistance thermometers Ni 100, 120, 200, 500, 1000 ..........194
Table 5- 20 Representation of analog values for Cu 10 standard resistance thermometers .......................195
Table 5- 21 Representation of analog values for Cu 10 climatic resistance thermometers .........................195
Table 5- 22 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type B ......................................................196
Table 5- 23 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type E ......................................................196
Table 5- 24 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type J.......................................................197
Table 5- 25 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type K ......................................................197

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 13
Table of contents

Table 5- 26 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type L...................................................... 198

Table 5- 27 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type N ..................................................... 198
Table 5- 28 Representation of analog values for thermocouple types R, S................................................. 199
Table 5- 29 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type T ..................................................... 199
Table 5- 30 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type U ..................................................... 200
Table 5- 31 Bipolar output ranges ................................................................................................................ 201
Table 5- 32 Unipolar output ranges.............................................................................................................. 202
Table 5- 33 Life-zero input ranges ............................................................................................................... 202
Table 5- 34 Representation of analog values in the ±10 V output range..................................................... 203
Table 5- 35 Representation of analog values in the 0 V to 10 V and 1 V to 5 V output ranges................... 203
Table 5- 36 Representation of analog values in the ±20 mA output range.................................................. 204
Table 5- 37 Representation of analog values in the 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA output ranges ................. 204
Table 5- 38 Dependencies of the analog IO values on the CPU's operating State and on the L+
supply voltage ........................................................................................................................... 209
Table 5- 39 Reaction of analog input modules as a function of the actual analog value within the value
range ......................................................................................................................................... 210
Table 5- 40 Behavior of the analog output modules as a function of the position of the analog value
within the value range ............................................................................................................... 210
Table 5- 41 Parameters of analog input modules ........................................................................................ 217
Table 5- 42 Parameters of analog output modules ...................................................................................... 219
Table 5- 43 Diagnostic messages of the analog input modules .................................................................. 243
Table 5- 44 Diagnostic messages of the analog input modules, causes of errors and remedies................ 244
Table 5- 45 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit................................................................................... 254
Table 5- 46 Channels for resistance measurement of the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit ........................................ 255
Table 5- 47 Measuring ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit ........................................................................ 256
Table 5- 48 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit................................................................................... 267
Table 5- 49 Selection of the measuring method for channel n and channel n+1 of the SM 431;
AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)....................................................................................... 270
Table 5- 50 Channels for resistance and temperature measurement of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit............. 271
Table 5- 51 Thermocouple with reference junction compensation via RTD on channel 0........................... 271
Table 5- 52 Measuring ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0) ................................ 272
Table 5- 53 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0) .......................................... 279
Table 5- 54 Interference frequency suppression and filter settling time with smoothing ............................. 280
Table 5- 55 Selection of the measuring method for channel n and channel n+1 of the SM 431;
AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)....................................................................................... 281
Table 5- 56 Channels for resistance measurement of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-
0AB0) ........................................................................................................................................ 282
Table 5- 57 Measuring ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0) ................................ 282

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

14 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Table of contents

Table 5- 58 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit .................................................................................290

Table 5- 59 Selection of the measuring method for channel n and channel n+1 of the SM 431;
AI 16 x 13 Bit..............................................................................................................................291
Table 5- 60 Measuring ranges of the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit .......................................................................292
Table 5- 61 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit .................................................................................303
Table 5- 62 Diagnostic information of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit ................................................................305
Table 5- 63 Selection of the measuring method for channel n and channel n+1 of the SM 431;
AI 16 x 16 Bit..............................................................................................................................306
Table 5- 64 Channels for resistance and temperature measurement of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit ...........307
Table 5- 65 Reference junction compensation via RTD on channel 0 of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit...........307
Table 5- 66 Measuring ranges of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit .......................................................................308
Table 5- 67 Points to note when checking for "Underflow" ...........................................................................310
Table 5- 68 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit ........................................................................317
Table 5- 69 Diagnostic information of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit .......................................................319
Table 5- 70 Measuring ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit ..............................................................320
Table 5- 71 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit ...................................................................................328
Table 5- 72 How response times depend on the configured interference frequency suppression and
smoothing of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit .....................................................................................329
Table 5- 73 Diagnostic information of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit ..................................................................332
Table 5- 74 Measuring ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit .........................................................................333
Table 5- 75 Output ranges of the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit .............................................................................340
Table 6- 1 Interface modules of the S7-400................................................................................................343
Table 6- 2 Overview of the connections......................................................................................................343
Table 6- 3 Cable for different connections ..................................................................................................345
Table 6- 4 Terminators for the Receive IMs................................................................................................345
Table 6- 5 Cables for interface modules .....................................................................................................347
Table 6- 6 Operator controls and indicators on the send IM.......................................................................349
Table 6- 7 Operator controls and indicators of the receive IM ....................................................................349
Table 6- 8 Operator controls and indicators on the send IM.......................................................................353
Table 6- 9 Operator controls and indicators of the receive IM ....................................................................353
Table 6- 10 Operator controls and indicators on the send IM.......................................................................356
Table 6- 11 Operator controls and indicators of the receive IM ....................................................................356
Table 6- 12 Operator controls and indicators on the send IM.......................................................................359
Table 6- 13 Operator controls and indicators of the receive IM ....................................................................359
Table 7- 1 S5 interface modules .................................................................................................................362
Table 7- 2 LEDs of the IM 463-2 .................................................................................................................365
Table 7- 3 Switch position: Interface selector of the IM 463-2 ....................................................................365

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 15
Table of contents

Table 7- 4 Switch position: Cable length selector of the IM 463-2............................................................. 365

Table 7- 5 Settings of the IM 314 using expansion units ........................................................................... 368
Table 7- 6 Settings address areas on the IM 314 ...................................................................................... 369
Table 7- 7 Pin assignments of the 721 cable ............................................................................................. 372
Table 7- 8 Assignment of the terminator 760-1AA11 ................................................................................. 374
Table 8- 1 Operating modes of the IM 467/467 FO ................................................................................... 380
Table 9- 1 Function of fan monitoring......................................................................................................... 394
Table 10- 1 Maximum cable length of a segment ........................................................................................ 404
Table 10- 2 Maximum cable length between two RS 485 repeaters ........................................................... 404
Table A- 1 SFCs for assigning parameters to signal modules ................................................................... 411
Table A- 2 Parameters of digital input modules.......................................................................................... 413
Table A- 3 Data record 1 for parameters of digital input modules.............................................................. 414
Table A- 4 Data record 1 for parameters of digital input modules.............................................................. 415
Table A- 5 Parameters of the digital output modules ................................................................................. 416
Table A- 6 Data record 1 for parameters of digital output modules............................................................ 416
Table A- 7 Data record 1 for parameters of digital output modules............................................................ 417
Table A- 8 Parameters of analog input modules ........................................................................................ 418
Table B- 1 Bytes 0 and 1 of diagnostic data............................................................................................... 422
Table B- 2 Codes of the module types ....................................................................................................... 422
Table B- 3 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V ..................................... 423
Table B- 4 Bytes 4 to 8 of the diagnostic data of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V ........................................ 424
Table B- 5 Diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V ................................................ 425
Table B- 6 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V ................................ 425
Table B- 7 Bytes 4 to 8 of the diagnostic data of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V ................................... 426
Table B- 8 Diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V ................................................ 427
Table B- 9 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A................... 428
Table B- 10 Bytes 4 to 8 of the diagnostic data of the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A...................... 429
Table B- 11 Diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A ............................. 430
Table B- 12 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A.......................... 430
Table B- 13 Bytes 4 to 10 of the diagnostic data of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A........................... 431
Table B- 14 Diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A..................................... 432
Table B- 15 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A...................... 433
Table B- 16 Bytes 4 to 8 of the diagnostic data of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A......................... 433
Table B- 17 Diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A................................. 434
Table B- 18 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit .......................................... 435
Table B- 19 Bytes 4 to 8 of the diagnostic data of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit ............................................. 436

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

16 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Table of contents

Table B- 20 Diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit......................................................437

Table B- 21 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit..................................437
Table B- 22 Bytes 4 to 7 of the diagnostic data of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit.....................................438
Table B- 23 Even diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit ....................................439
Table B- 24 Odd diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit .....................................439
Table B- 25 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 bit .............................................439
Table B- 26 Bytes 4 to 7 of the diagnostic data of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 bit ................................................440
Table B- 27 Even diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 bit ...............................................441
Table B- 28 Odd diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 bit.................................................441

Figures
Figure 1-1 Power supply to the backup battery.............................................................................................26
Figure 2-1 Configuration of a rack with 18 slots ............................................................................................38
Figure 2-2 UR1 rack with 18 slots and UR2 with 9 slots ...............................................................................39
Figure 2-3 Rack dimensions..........................................................................................................................42
Figure 2-4 CR2 rack ......................................................................................................................................43
Figure 2-5 CR3 rack ......................................................................................................................................45
Figure 2-6 ER1 rack with 18 slots and ER2 with 9 slots ...............................................................................47
Figure 3-1 Operator controls and indicators on the PS 407 20A power supply module ...............................55
Figure 3-2 Operator controls and indicators on the PS 407 4A ....................................................................65
Figure 3-3 Operator controls and indicators on the PS 407 4A ....................................................................68
Figure 3-4 Operator controls and indicators of the PS 407 10A and PS 407 10A R ....................................71
Figure 3-5 Operator controls and indicators of the PS 407 10A and PS 407 10A R ....................................74
Figure 3-6 Operator controls and indicators on the PS 407 20 A .................................................................77
Figure 3-7 Operator controls and indicators on the PS 407 20A power supply module ...............................79
Figure 3-8 Operator controls and indicators on the PS 405 4A ....................................................................81
Figure 3-9 Operator controls and indicators on the PS 405 4A ....................................................................83
Figure 3-10 Operator Controls and Indicators on the PS 405 10A and the PS 405 10A R ............................85
Figure 3-11 Operator Controls and Indicators on the PS 405 10A and the PS 405 10A R ............................87
Figure 3-12 Operator controls and indicators on the PS 405 20A ..................................................................89
Figure 3-13 Operator controls and indicators on the PS 405 20A ..................................................................91
Figure 4-1 Input characteristic curve for digital inputs.................................................................................105
Figure 4-2 Wiring and block diagram of the SM 421; DI 32 x DC 24 V.......................................................107
Figure 4-3 Wiring and block diagram of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V.......................................................111
Figure 4-4 Wiring diagram for the redundant supply of sensors of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V .............112

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 17
Table of contents

Figure 4-5 Wiring diagram of the SM 421; DI 16 x AC 120 ........................................................................ 121

Figure 4-6 Wiring and Block Diagram of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V................................................ 125
Figure 4-7 Circuit as for active high or active low input.............................................................................. 129
Figure 4-8 Wiring and block diagram of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V............................................. 131
Figure 4-9 Wiring and block diagram of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V............................................. 135
Figure 4-10 Wiring and block diagram of the SM 421; DI 32 x UC 120 V.................................................... 139
Figure 4-11 Wiring and Block Diagram of the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A............................................. 143
Figure 4-12 Wiring diagram of the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A.................................................... 147
Figure 4-13 Wiring and Block Diagram of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A.......................................... 152
Figure 4-14 Wiring and Block Diagram of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A.......................................... 156
Figure 4-15 Wiring and block diagram of the SM 422; DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A....................................... 162
Figure 4-16 Wiring and block diagram of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A..................................... 166
Figure 4-17 Wiring diagram of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A ....................................................... 170
Figure 4-18 Wiring and block diagram of the SM 422; DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A ............................... 175
Figure 5-1 Example of the relative error of an analog output module ........................................................ 211
Figure 5-2 Scan time of an analog input or output module ........................................................................ 212
Figure 5-3 Example of the effect of smoothing on step responses ............................................................ 213
Figure 5-4 Settling and response times of the analog output channels ..................................................... 214
Figure 5-5 Connecting isolated sensors to an electrically isolated AI ........................................................ 221
Figure 5-6 Connecting non-isolated sensors to an isolated AI................................................................... 222
Figure 5-7 Connecting voltage sensors to an AI ........................................................................................ 223
Figure 5-8 Connecting 2-wire transducers to an isolated AI ...................................................................... 224
Figure 5-9 Connecting 2-wire transducers to an SM 431; 8 x 13 Bit.......................................................... 225
Figure 5-10 Connecting 4-wire transducers to an AI.................................................................................... 226
Figure 5-11 Connecting 4-wire transducers to an SM 431; 8 x 13 Bit.......................................................... 227
Figure 5-12 4-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer to an AI ................................................. 228
Figure 5-13 3-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer to an electrically isolated analog
input........................................................................................................................................... 229
Figure 5-14 2-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer to an electrically isolated analog
input........................................................................................................................................... 230
Figure 5-15 Thermocouple design................................................................................................................ 231
Figure 5-16 Connection of thermocouples without compensation or using the reference temperature
value to an isolated AI............................................................................................................... 233
Figure 5-17 Connection of a thermocouple with reference junction (Order No. M72166-xxx00) to an
Isolated AI ................................................................................................................................. 235
Figure 5-18 Connection of thermocouples of the same type with external compensation by means of a
resistance thermometer, connected to channel 0..................................................................... 236

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

18 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Table of contents

Figure 5-19 4-conductor connection of loads to a voltage output of an electrically isolated analog
output module ............................................................................................................................239
Figure 5-20 2-conductor connection of loads to a voltage output of an electrically isolated analog
output module ............................................................................................................................240
Figure 5-21 Connecting loads to a current output of an isolated AO ............................................................241
Figure 5-22 Start Information of OB 40: Which event has violated limits and triggered a hardware
interrupt ......................................................................................................................................247
Figure 5-23 Block diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit ...............................................................................248
Figure 5-24 Wiring diagram SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit........................................................................................250
Figure 5-25 Block diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit ...............................................................................258
Figure 5-26 Wiring diagram SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit........................................................................................259
Figure 5-27 Step response of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit...............................................................................269
Figure 5-28 Block diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit ...............................................................................274
Figure 5-29 Wiring diagram SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit........................................................................................275
Figure 5-30 Step response of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7 431-1KF20-0AB0)......................................280
Figure 5-31 Block diagram of the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit .............................................................................285
Figure 5-32 Wiring diagram SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit......................................................................................286
Figure 5-33 Block diagram of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit .............................................................................294
Figure 5-34 Wiring diagram SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit......................................................................................295
Figure 5-35 Step response of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)....................................305
Figure 5-36 Block diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit ....................................................................312
Figure 5-37 Wiring diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit...................................................................313
Figure 5-38 Step response of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit....................................................................318
Figure 5-39 Block diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit ...............................................................................322
Figure 5-40 Wiring diagram SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit........................................................................................323
Figure 5-41 Step response at 10 Hz interference frequency suppression of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit.......330
Figure 5-42 Step response at 50 Hz interference frequency suppression of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit.......330
Figure 5-43 Step response at 60 Hz interference frequency suppression of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit.......331
Figure 5-44 Step response at 400 Hz interference frequency suppression of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit.....331
Figure 5-45 Block diagram of the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit .............................................................................335
Figure 5-46 Wiring diagram of the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit ............................................................................336
Figure 6-1 Example: Configuration with send IMs, receive IMs and terminators........................................346
Figure 6-2 Position of the operator controls and indicators of the IM 460-0 and IM 461-0.........................348
Figure 6-3 Position of the operator controls and indicators of the IM 460-1 and IM 461-1.........................352
Figure 6-4 Position of the operator controls and indicators of the IM 460-3 and IM 461-3.........................355
Figure 6-5 Position of the operator controls and indicators of the IM 460-4 and IM 461-4.........................358
Figure 7-1 Layout of the controls and indicators of the IM 463-2................................................................364

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 19
Table of contents

Figure 7-2 Connection variant for CCs and EUs via the IM 463-2 and IM 314.......................................... 371
Figure 8-1 Configuration of the IM 467/467 FO.......................................................................................... 378
Figure 8-2 LEDs of the IM 467/467 FO ...................................................................................................... 380
Figure 8-3 Connecting the bus connector to the IM 467 ............................................................................ 383
Figure 8-4 Optical connection to PROFIBUS DP ....................................................................................... 385
Figure 8-5 Installing the connector ............................................................................................................. 386
Figure 8-6 Inserting the fiber-optic cables into the IM 467 FO ................................................................... 387
Figure 9-1 Example of a message concept................................................................................................ 395
Figure 9-2 Front view of the cable duct ...................................................................................................... 396
Figure 9-3 Controls and indicators of the fan subassembly 120/230 VAC (6ES7408-1TB00-0XA0) ........ 397
Figure 9-4 Controls and indicators of the fan subassembly 24 VDC (6ES7408-1TA00-0XA0) ................. 400
Figure 10-1 RC network with 10 M Ohm for configuration with ungrounded reference potential ................ 407
Figure 10-2 Electrical isolation between the bus segments ......................................................................... 408
Figure 10-3 Block diagram of the RS 485 repeater...................................................................................... 410
Figure A-1 For example, byte 1 with the bits 0 - 7 ...................................................................................... 413
Figure A-2 Data record 1 for the parameters of analog input modules ...................................................... 419
Figure D-1 Electrostatic voltages which can build up on a person ............................................................. 448

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

20 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
General specifications 1
1.1 Standards, certificates and approvals

Information on the type plate

Note
You will find the current approvals on the type plate of the respective product.

WARNING
Open Equipment
Death, serious injury or substantial material damage can occur.
S7 400 modules are classified as open equipment, This means that the S7 400 should only
be installed in an enclosure or cabinet.
Access to the enclosures or cabinets should only be possible with a key or with a tool, and
access should only be permitted for trained or approved personnel.

IEC 61131-2
The S7-400 automation system meets the requirements and criteria of standard IEC 61131-2
(Programmable Controllers, Part 2: Equipment Requirements and Tests.)

CE marking

Our products satisfy the requirements and protection objectives of the EC Directives listed
below and comply with the harmonized European standards (EN) promulgated in the Official
Journals of the European Community for programmable controllers:
● 2006/95/EC "Electrical Equipment Designed for Use within Certain Voltage Limits" (Low-
Voltage Directive)
● 2004/108/EC "Electromagnetic Compatibility" (EMC Directive)
● 94/9/EU "Devices and protection systems for use as prescribed in potentially explosive
areas" (Guidelines for Explosion Protection)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 21
General specifications
1.1 Standards, certificates and approvals

The EC Declarations of Conformity are available to the relevant authorities at the following
address:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Industry Sector
I IA AS RD ST
P.O. Box 1963
D-92209 Amberg
These files are also available for download on the Customer Support Internet pages, under
"Declaration of Conformity".

EMC directive
SIMATIC products are designed for industrial applications.

Table 1- 1 Use in industry

Area of Noise emission requirements Noise immunity requirements

application
Industry EN 61000-6-4: 2001 EN 61000-6-2: 2005

Low voltage directive

The products listed in the table below fulfill the requirements of EU directive 2006/95/EC,
"Low-voltage Directive". Adherence to this EU directive was tested in accordance with
DIN EN 61131-2 (corresponds to IEC 61131-2).

Table 1- 2 Products that fulfill the requirements of the low-voltage directive

Name Order number

Digital input module SM 421;DI 32 x UC 120 V 6ES7 421-1EL00-0AA0
Digital input module SM 421;DI 16 x UC 120/230 V 6ES7 421-1FH00-0AA0
Digital output module SM 422;DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5A 6ES7 422-1FF00-0AA0
Digital output module SM 422;DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2A 6ES7 422-1FH00-0AB0
Relay output module SM 422;DO 16 x UC30/230 V/Rel5A 6ES7 422-1HH00-0AA0
Digital input module SM 421;DI 16 x UC 120/230 V 6ES7421-1FH20-0AA0
The 120/230 VAC fan subassembly 6ES7 408-1TB00-0XA0
PS 407 4A 6ES7 407-0DA01-0AA0
6ES7 407-0DA02-0AA0
PS 407 10A 6ES7 407-0KA01-0AA0
6ES7 407-0KA02-0AA0
PS 407 20 A 6ES7 407-0RA01-0AA0
6ES7 407-0RA02-0AA0
PS 407 10A R 6ES7 407-0KR00-0AA0
6ES7 407-0KR02-0AA0

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

22 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 General specifications
1.1 Standards, certificates and approvals

Note
In the new releases, some of the devices listed above fulfill the requirements of the explosion
protection guidelines instead of those of the low-voltage directive. Please note the
information on the type plate.

Explosion protection guidelines

In accordance with EN 60079-15 (Electrical Apparatus for Potentially Explosive

Atmospheres; Type of Protection "n") and EN 60079-0 (Electrical apparatus for explosive
gas atmospheres - Part 0: General requirements)
II 3 G Ex nA II Parts 4 to 6

Marking for Australia and New Zealand

Our products comply with the requirements of the AS/NZS CISPR 11 standard (Class A).

Note
You will recognize the UL/CSA or cULus approvals given to your product from the markings
on the type plate.

UL approval

UL approval label
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) to the UL 508 Standard:
● Report E 248953

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 23
General specifications
1.1 Standards, certificates and approvals

CSA certification

CSA certification
Canadian Standard Association (CSA) to Standard C 22.2 No. 142:
● Certification Record 212191-0-000
or

cULus approval

Underwriters Laboratories Inc., to

● UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
● CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)

or cULus approval, Hazardous Location

+$=/2&

CULUS Listed 7RA9 INT. CONT. EQ. FOR HAZ. LOC.

Underwriters Laboratories Inc., complying with
● UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
● CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)
● UL 1604 (Hazardous Location)
● CSA-213 (Hazardous Location)
APPROVED for Use in
● Cl. 1, Div. 2, GP. A, B, C, D T4A
● Cl. 1, Zone 2, GP. IIC T4
Observe the following note.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

24 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 General specifications
1.1 Standards, certificates and approvals

or cULus Approvals, Hazardous Location for Relay Modules

+$=/2&

CULUS Listed 7RA9 INT. CONT. EQ. FOR HAZ. LOC.

Underwriters Laboratories Inc., complying with
● UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
● CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)
● UL 1604 (Hazardous Location)
● CSA-213 (Hazardous Location)
APPROVED for Use in
● Cl. 1, Div. 2, GP. A, B, C, D T4A
● Cl. 1, Zone 2, GP. IIC T4
● Cl. 1, Zone 2, AEx nC IIC T4
Read the following information

Note
This product must be installed according to the NEC (National Electric Code) stipulations.
When used in environments according to class I, division 2 (see above), S7-400 must be
mounted in an enclosure that corresponds to at least IP54 according to EN 60529.
You can find information about the use of S7-400 in hazardous areas of zone 2 in a separate
document, which is included in this documentation package.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 25
General specifications
1.1 Standards, certificates and approvals

CuULu requirements for hazardous location on the battery power supply for CPUs
The power supply to the backup battery of a CPU must be via a fire-resistant plug. The figure
below portrays the concept of such connection.

1 2

(1) Battery or voltage supply

(2) CPU with "Ext. Batt." connector
Figure 1-1 Power supply to the backup battery

The following conditions apply to the performance characteristics of this connection:

Voc (no load voltage) = 15V Vmax = 15V

Isc (short-circuit current) = 50 mA Imax = 50 mA
Ca = Battery/voltage supply capacity Ci = 25 nF maximum
La = Battery/voltage supply inductance Li = 2 mH maximum
The battery/voltage supply which provides the fire-resistant connection must have the
following values:

Battery/Power supply CPU input "Ext. Batt." with cable

Voc ≤ Vmax (15V)
Isc ≤ Imax (50 mA)
Ca ≥ Ci + Cc (25nF + Cc)
La ≥ Li + Lc (2mH + Lc)
Cc = Cable capacity
Lc = Cable inductance
The batteries used must have the following properties:
● Battery technology: Li/SOCL2
● Model: AA
● Voltage: 3.6 V
The batteries stipulated by Siemens fulfill requirements that go beyond the ones mentioned
above.
You may only use batteries approved by Siemens!

Note
If you do not know the capacity and inductance of the cable, you can use the following
values:
Cc = 197 pF/m (60 pF/ft.), Lc = 0.66 pF/m (0.2 mH/ft)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

26 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 General specifications
1.1 Standards, certificates and approvals

Example
The Varta 4022 battery together with a 1.5 m long cable and a Leonhardy 02-02.1500 plug
meet these conditions.

FM Approval

Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3611, Class I, Division 2,

Group A, B, C, D.
Temperature class: T4 at 60° C ambient temperature

WARNING
Personal injury or property damage can result.
In hazardous areas, personal injury or property damage can result if you create or break an
electrical circuit during operation of an S7-400 (for example, by means of plug-in
connections, fuses, switches).
Do not create or break live electrical circuits unless you are certain there is no danger of
explosion.
If you use S7-400 under FM conditions, it has to be mounted in a housing, which at least
corresponds to IP54 in accordance with EN 60529.

Marine Approvals
Classification societies:
● ABS (American Bureau of Shipping)
● BV (Bureau Veritas)
● DNV (Det Norske Veritas)
● GL (Germanischer Lloyd)
● LRS (Lloyds Register of Shipping)
● Class NK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 27
General specifications
1.1 Standards, certificates and approvals

Safety requirements for installation

The S7-400 programmable controllers are "open type" equipment to the IEC 61131-2
standard and therefore adhere to the EU directive 2006/95/EC "Low-Voltage Directive" and
are UL/CSA certified as such.
To fulfill requirements for safe operation with regard to mechanical stability, flame
retardation, stability, and shock-hazard protection, the following alternative types of
installation are specified:
● Installation in a suitable cabinet
● Installation in a suitable housing
● Installation in a suitably equipped, enclosed operating area.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

28 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 General specifications
1.2 Electromagnetic compatibility

1.2 Electromagnetic compatibility

Introduction
In this section you will find details of the noise immunity of S7-400 modules and details of
radio interference suppression.
All the components of S7-400 automation system meet the requirements of the standards
that apply in Europe provided they are installed in accordance with all the appropriate
regulations (see Installation Manual, Chapters 2 and 4).

Definition of "EMC"
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical installation to function
satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without interfering with that environment.

WARNING
Personal injury or property damage can result.
Installation of expansions that have not been approved for the S7-400 can result in
violations of the requirements and regulations for safety and electromagnetic compatibility.
Use only expansions that have been approved for the system.

Pulse-shaped interference
The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of modules with regard to pulse-
shaped interference. Compliance of the S7-400 system with specifications and directives on
electric design is prerequisite.

Table 1- 3 Pulse-shaped interference

Pulse-shaped interference Test voltage Degree of

severity
Electrostatic discharge Air discharge: ±8 kV 3
conforming to IEC 61000-4-2 Contact discharge: ±6 kV
Bursts (fast transient interference in 2 kV (power supply lines) 3
accordance with IEC 61000-4-4) 2 kV (signal lines > 30 m)
1 kV (signal lines < 30 m)
High-energy single pulse (surge) to 3
IEC 61000-4-5
 Asymmetrical coupling 2 kV (supply line) DC voltage with
protective elements
2 kV (signal/data line > 30 m only),
possibly with protective elements
 Symmetrical coupling 1 kV (supply line) DC voltage with
protective elements
1 kV (signal line > 30 m only), possibly
with protective elements

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 29
General specifications
1.2 Electromagnetic compatibility

Sinusoidal interference
The table below shows the EMC behavior of the S7-400 modules with regard to sinusoidal
interference.

Table 1- 4 Sinusoidal interference

Sinusoidal interference Test values Degree of

severity
HF irradiation (electromagnetic fields) 80 MHz to 1 GHz and 1.4 GHz to 2 GHz
in accordance with IEC 61000-4-3 10 V/m with 80 % amplitude modulation
at 1 kHz 3
In the ranges 87 MHz
to 108 MHz, 174 MHz to 230 MHz
and 470 MHz to 790 MHz: 3 V/m
2 GHz through 2,7 GHz
1 V/m with 80 % amplitude modulation
at 1 kHz
HF conductance on cables and cable Test voltage 10 V, with 80% amplitude 3
shields in accordance with IEC 61000-4-6 modulation of 1 kHz in the 10 MHz to 80
MHz range

Emission of radio interference

Interference emission of electromagnetic fields in accordance with EN 55011: Limit value
class A, Group 1.

Table 1- 5 Interference emission of electromagnetic fields

Frequency band Limit

20 MHz to 230 MHz 30 dB (µV/m)Q
230 MHz to 1000 MHz 37 dB (µV/m)Q
Measured at a distance of 30 m
Emitted interference via the mains AC power supply in accordance with EN 55011: Limit
value class A, Group 1.

Table 1- 6 Interference emission via the mains AC power supply

Frequency band Limit

0.15 MHz to 0.5 MHz 79 dB (µV)Q
66 dB (µV)M
0.5 MHz to 5 MHz 73 dB (µV)Q
60 dB (µV)M
5 MHz to 30 MHz 73 dB (µV)Q
60 dB (µV)M

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

30 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 General specifications
1.2 Electromagnetic compatibility

System perturbation
The S7-400 AC Power Supply Modules fulfill the requirements of the following standards for
system perturbation:
Harmonic current: EN 61000-3-2
Voltage fluctuations and flicker: EN 61000-3-3

Additional measures
If you want to connect an S7-400 system to the public network, you must ensure Limit Value
Class B in accordance with EN 55022.
Suitable additional measures must be taken if you need to enhance the noise immunity of
the system as a result of high external noise levels.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 31
General specifications
1.3 Shipping and storage conditions for modules and backup batteries

1.3 Shipping and storage conditions for modules and backup batteries

Shipping and storage of modules

S7-400 modules surpass the requirements of IEC 61131-2 with respect to shipping and
storage requirements. The following details apply to modules shipped and/or stored in their
original packing.
Climatic conditions correspond to IEC 60721-3-3, Class 3K7 for storage and IEC 60721-3-2,
Class 2K4 for transportation.
Mechanical conditions are compliant with IEC 60721-3-2, Class 2M2.

Table 1- 7 Shipping and storage conditions for modules

Permissible range
Free fall ≤ 1m (to 10 kg)
Temperature -40 to +70° C
Barometric pressure 1080 to 660 hPa (corresponds to an elevation of -1000 to 3500
m)
Relative humidity (at +25° C) 5 to 95%, without condensation
Sinusoidal vibration in 5 - 9 Hz: 3.5 mm
accordance with IEC 60068-2-6 9 - 500 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
Shock in accordance with 250 m/s2, 6 ms, 1000 shocks
IEC 60068-2-29

Shipment of backup batteries

Backup batteries should always be shipped in their original package. No special measures
are required for the transport of the backup batteries used in the S7-400 system. The lithium
component of the backup battery is less than 0.5 g.

Storing backup batteries

Always store backup batteries in a cool and dry place. The batteries have a maximum shelf
life of 10 years.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

32 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 General specifications
1.3 Shipping and storage conditions for modules and backup batteries

WARNING
Risk of injury, material damage, release of hazardous substances.
Lithium batteries can explode if handled improperly. Their improper disposal may result in
the release of hazardous substances. Strictly adhere to the following instructions:
Do not throw a new or low battery into an open fire and do not perform any soldering work
on the cell casing (max. temperature 100° C). Do not recharge the battery - risk of
explosion! Do not open a battery. Replace a faulty battery only with the same type.
Replacement batteries can be ordered from SIEMENS (for order numbers, refer to the
"Module Specifications" reference manual, in Appendix C (Page 443)).
Always try to return low batteries to the manufacturer or deliver these to a registered
recycling company.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 33
General specifications
1.4 Mechanical and ambient conditions for S7-400 operation

1.4 Mechanical and ambient conditions for S7-400 operation

Operating conditions
S7-400 systems are designed for stationary use in weather-proof locations. The S7-400
fulfills the requirements for use in accordance with IEC 60721-3-3:
● Class 3M3 (mechanical requirements)
● Class 3K3 (climatic ambient conditions)

Use with additional measures

The S7-400 may not be used under the conditions outlined below without taking additional
measures:
● at locations with a high degree of ionizing radiation
● in aggressive environments caused, for example, by
– the development of dust
– corrosive vapors or gases
– strong electric or magnetic fields
● in installations requiring special monitoring, for example
– elevators
– electrical plants in potentially hazardous areas
An additional measure would be to install the S7-400 in a cabinet or housing.

Mechanical ambient conditions

The mechanical ambient conditions for S7-400 modules are listed in the following table in the
form of sinusoidal vibrations.

Table 1- 8 Mechanical ambient conditions

Frequency range in Hz Test values

10 ≤ f < 58 0.075 mm amplitude
58 ≤ f < 500 1 g constant acceleration

Reducing vibrations
If your S7-400 modules are exposed to severe shock or vibration, take appropriate measures
to reduce acceleration or the amplitude.
We recommend the installation of the S7-400 on damping materials (for example, rubber-
metal vibration dampers.)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

34 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 General specifications
1.4 Mechanical and ambient conditions for S7-400 operation

Testing mechanical ambient conditions

The table below provides important information with respect to the type and scope of testing
of mechanical ambient conditions.

Table 1- 9 Test for mechanical ambient conditions

Condition tested Test standard Remarks

Vibrations Vibration test in Type of vibration: frequency sweeps with a rate of
accordance with change of 1 octave/minute.
IEC 60068-2-6 10 Hz ≤ f < 58 Hz, constant amplitude 0.075 mm
(sinusoidal)
58 Hz ≤ f < 500 Hz, constant acceleration 1 g
Duration of vibration: 10 frequency sweeps per axis
in each of three axes perpendicular to each other.
Shock Shock test in accordance Type of shock: half-sine
with IEC 60068-2-29 Severity of shock: 10 g peak value, 6 ms duration
Direction of shock: 100 shocks in each of the 3
axes arranged vertically to each other.

Climatic ambient conditions

The S7-400 may be operated under the following climatic ambient conditions:

Table 1- 10 Climatic ambient conditions

Ambient conditions Permissible range Remark

Temperature 0 to +60° C
Temperature change Max. 10° C / h
Relative humidity Max. 95% at +25° C No condensation
Barometric pressure 1080 to 795 hPa (corresponds to an elevation of -
1000 to 2000 m)
Concentration of pollutants SO2: < 0.5 ppm; Test: 10 ppm; 10 days
RH < 60%, no condensation
H2S: < 0.1 ppm; Test: 1 ppm; 10 days
RH < 60%, no condensation
ISA-S71.04 severity level G1; G2; G3 -

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 35
General specifications
1.5 Information on insulation tests, protection class and degree of protection

1.5 Information on insulation tests, protection class and degree of

protection

Test voltages
Insulation resistance was demonstrated in routine testing with the following test voltages in
accordance with IEC 61131-2:

Table 1- 11 Test voltages

Circuits with nominal voltage Ue to other circuits or ground Test voltage

0 V < Ue ≤ 50 V 350 V
50 V < Ue ≤ 100 V 700 V
100 V < Ue ≤ 150 V 1300 V
150 V < Ue ≤ 300 V 2200 V

Protection class
Protection class I in compliance with IEC 61140; this means that a grounding terminal to the
power supply module is required!

Protection against the ingress of foreign matter and water

Degree of protection IP 20 to IEC 60529. In other words, there is protection against contact
with standard probes.
There is no protection against the ingress of water.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

36 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
Rack 2
2.1 Function and design of the racks

Introduction
The racks for the S7-400 have the following functions:
● They physically hold the modules.
● They supply the modules with operating voltage.
● They connect the individual modules to each other via the signal busses.

Design of the racks

A rack consists of the following elements:
● Mounting rail with threaded bolts for fixing the modules and lateral cutouts for mounting
the rack
● Plastic parts that function, among other things, as guides when swinging the modules into
place
● A backplane bus, an I/O bus and, if necessary, a communication bus with bus connector
● Connection for local ground
The following figure shows the mechanical configuration of a rack (UR1).

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 37
Rack
2.1 Function and design of the racks

1 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

4
(1) Mounting rail
(2) Plastic parts
(3) Bus connector (covered when shipped)
(4) Connection for local ground
Figure 2-1 Configuration of a rack with 18 slots

UL/CSA note
Special requirements should be taken into consideration in the area of influence of the
UL/CSA; these may be fulfilled by installing the system in a cabinet.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

38 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Rack
2.2 The racks UR1 (6ES7400-1TAx1-0AA0) and UR2 (6ES7400-1JAx1-0AA0)

2.2 The racks UR1 (6ES7400-1TAx1-0AA0) and UR2 (6ES7400-1JAx1-

0AA0)

Order number
The "x" variable has the following meaning for order numbers 6ES7400-1TAx1-0AA0
and 6ES7400-1JAx1:
● x=0: Mounting rail made of sheet steel
● x=1: Mounting rail made of aluminum

Introduction
The UR1 and UR2 racks are used for assembling central racks and expansion racks. The
UR1 and UR2 racks have both an I/O bus and a communication bus.

Suitable modules for UR1 and UR2

You can use the following modules in the UR1 and UR2 racks:
● When the UR1 or UR2 is used as a central rack:
All S7-400 modules except for receive IMs
● When the UR1 or UR2 is used as an expansion rack:
All S7-400 modules except for CPUs and send IMs
Special case: Power supply modules cannot be used in conjunction with the IM 461-1
receive IM.

Design of the UR1 and UR2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2
290 mm 190 mm

4 3

40 mm

465 mm 240 mm
482,5 mm 257,5 mm

(1)+(2) I/O bus

(3)+(4) Communication bus
Figure 2-2 UR1 rack with 18 slots and UR2 with 9 slots

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 39
Rack
2.2 The racks UR1 (6ES7400-1TAx1-0AA0) and UR2 (6ES7400-1JAx1-0AA0)

Specifications of the UR1 and UR2 racks

Rack UR1 UR1 UR2 UR2

6ES7 400-1TA01- 6ES7 400-1TA11- 6ES7 400-1JA01- 6ES7 400-1JA11-
0AA0 0AA0 0AA0 0AA0
Number of single-width slots 18 18 9 9
Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 482.5x 290 x 27.5 482.5x 290 x 27.5 257.5x 290 x 27.5 257.5x 290 x 27.5
Material of the mounting rail Sheet steel Aluminum Sheet steel Aluminum
Weight (in kg) 4,1 3,0 2,15 1,5
Busses I/O bus and communication bus

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

40 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Rack
2.3 UR2-H Rack 6ES7400-2JAx0-0AA0)

2.3 UR2-H Rack 6ES7400-2JAx0-0AA0)

Order number
The "x" variable has the following meaning for order number 6ES7400-2JAx0-0AA0:
● x=0: Mounting rail made of sheet steel
● x=1: Mounting rail made of aluminum

Introduction
The UR2-H rack is used for assembling two central racks or expansion racks in one rack.
The UR2-H rack essentially represents two electrically isolated UR2 racks on the same
mounting rail. The main area of application of the UR2-H is in the compact structure of
redundant S7-400H systems (two devices or systems in one rack).

Suitable modules for UR2-H

You can use the following modules in the UR2-H rack:
● When the UR2-H is used as a central rack:
All S7-400 modules except for receive IMs
● When the UR2-H is used as an expansion rack:
All S7-400 modules except for CPUs, send IMs, the IM 463-2, and the adapter module
Special case: Power supply modules cannot be used in conjunction with the IM 461-1
receive IM.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 41
Rack
2.3 UR2-H Rack 6ES7400-2JAx0-0AA0)

Design of the UR2-H

The following figure shows the design of the UR2-H rack with 2x9 slots.

1 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

290 mm 190 mm

40 mm

465 mm

482,5 mm

(1) System I
(2) System II
Figure 2-3 Rack dimensions

CAUTION
Danger of damage to equipment.
If you insert the power supply module in a slot that is not intended for power supply
modules, the module may be damaged. Slots 1 to 4 are permitted, whereby power supply
modules starting from slot 1 must be inserted without leaving gaps.
Make sure that power supply modules are only inserted in permitted slots. Take particular
notice of the option of swapping modules in slot 1 on rack II and slot 9 on rack I.

Specifications of the UR2-H rack

Rack UR2-H UR2-H

6ES7 400-2JA00-0AA0 6ES7 400-2JA10-0AA0
Number of single-width slots 2x9 2x9
Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 482.5 x 290 x 27.5 482.5 x 290 x 27.5
Material of the mounting rail Sheet steel Aluminum
Weight (in kg) 4,1 3,0
Busses Segmented I/O bus,
segmented communication bus

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

42 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Rack
2.4 Rack CR2 (6ES7401-2TA01-0AA0)

2.4 Rack CR2 (6ES7401-2TA01-0AA0)

Introduction
The CR2 rack is used for the design of segmented central racks. The CR2 has both an I/O
bus and a communication bus. The I/O bus is split into two local bus segments with 10 or 8
slots.

Suitable modules for the CR2

You can use the following modules in the CR2 rack:
● All S7-400 modules except for receive IMs

Design of the CR2

1 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

5 3
290 mm 190 mm

40 mm

465 mm
482,5 mm

(1) Segment 1
(2) Segment 2
(3) I/O bus segment 2
(4) Communication bus
(5) I/O bus segment 1
Figure 2-4 CR2 rack

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 43
Rack
2.4 Rack CR2 (6ES7401-2TA01-0AA0)

Specifications of the CR2 rack

Rack CR2
Number of single-width slots 18
Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 482.5 x 290 x 27.5
Material of the mounting rail Sheet steel
Weight (in kg) 4,1
Busses Segmented I/O bus,
full-length communication bus
Only one power supply module required

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

44 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Rack
2.5 Rack CR3 (6ES7401-1DA01-0AA0)

2.5 Rack CR3 (6ES7401-1DA01-0AA0)

Introduction
The CR3 rack is used for the design of central racks in standard systems (not in fault-tolerant
systems). The CR3 has both an I/O bus and a communication bus.

Suitable modules for the CR3

You can use the following modules in the CR3 rack:
● All S7-400 modules except for receive IMs
● You can only operate only one CPU 41x-4H at a time.

Design of the CR3

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

290 mm 190 mm

40 mm

115 mm

132 mm

Figure 2-5 CR3 rack

Specifications of the CR3 Rack

Rack CR3
Number of single-width slots 4
Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 132 x 290 x 27.5
Material of the mounting rail Sheet steel
Weight (in kg) 0,75
Busses I/O bus and communication bus

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 45
Rack
2.6 Racks ER1 (6ES7403-1TAx1-0AA0) and ER2 (6ES7403-1JAx1-0AA0)

2.6 Racks ER1 (6ES7403-1TAx1-0AA0) and ER2 (6ES7403-1JAx1-0AA0)

Order number
The "x" variable has the following meaning for order numbers 6ES7403-1TAx0-0AA0
und 6ES7403-1JAx01-0AA0:
● x=0: Mounting rail made of sheet steel
● x=1: Mounting rail made of aluminum

Introduction
The ER1 and ER2 racks are used for the design of expansion racks.
The ER1 and ER2 racks have only one I/O bus with the following restrictions:
● Interrupts from modules in the ER1 or ER2 have no effect since there are no interrupt
lines provided.
● Modules in the ER1 or ER2 are not supplied with 24 V. Modules requiring a 24 V supply
are not provided for use in the ER1 or ER2.
● Modules in the ER1 or ER2 are not backed up either by the battery in the power supply
module or by the voltage supplied externally to the CPU or the receive IM (EXT.-BATT.
socket).
There is therefore no advantage in using backup batteries in the power supply modules in
ER1 and ER2.
Battery faults and backup voltage faults are not reported to the CPU. The battery
monitoring function of a power supply module installed in the ER1 or ER2 should
therefore always be switched off.

Suitable modules for ER1 and ER2

You can use the following modules in the ER1 and ER2 racks:
● All power supply modules
● Receive IMs
● All signal modules provided the above-mentioned restrictions are observed.
Special case: Power supply modules cannot be used in conjunction with the IM 461-1
receive IM.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

46 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Rack
2.6 Racks ER1 (6ES7403-1TAx1-0AA0) and ER2 (6ES7403-1JAx1-0AA0)

Design of the ER1 and ER2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 1
290 mm 190 mm

40 mm

465 mm 240 mm
482,5 mm 257,5 mm

(1) I/O bus

Figure 2-6 ER1 rack with 18 slots and ER2 with 9 slots

Specifications of the ER1 and ER2 racks

Rack ER1 ER1 ER2 ER2

6ES7 403- 6ES7 403-1TA11- 6ES7 403-1JA01- 6ES7 403-1JA11-
1TA01-0AA0 0AA0 0AA0 0AA0
Number of single-width 18 18 9 9
slots
Dimensions 482.5 x 290 x 2 482.5 x 290 x 27. 257.5 x 290 x 27. 257.5 x 290 x 27.
W x H x D (in mm) 7.5 5 5 5
Material of the Sheet steel Aluminum Sheet steel Aluminum
mounting rail
Weight (in kg) 3,8 2,5 2,0 1,25
Busses Restricted I/O bus

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 47
Rack
2.6 Racks ER1 (6ES7403-1TAx1-0AA0) and ER2 (6ES7403-1JAx1-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

48 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
Power supply modules 3
3.1 Common characteristics of the power supply modules

Functions of the power supply modules

The power supply modules of the S7-400 supply the other modules in the rack with their
operating voltages via the backplane bus. They do not provide load voltages for the signal
modules.

Common characteristics of the power supply modules

The power supply modules share the following characteristics in addition to their individual
specifications:
● Encapsulated design for use in racks of the S7-400 system
● Cooling via natural convection
● Plug-in connection of the supply voltage with AC - DC coding
● Protection class I (with protective conductor) in accordance with IEC 61140; VDE 0140,
Part 1
● Limitation of the inrush current in accordance with NAMUR Recommendation NE 21
● Short-circuit-proof outputs
● Monitoring of both output voltages. If one of these voltages fails, the power supply
module signals a fault to the CPU.
● Both output voltages (5 VDCand 24 VDC) share a common ground.
● Primary clocked
● Battery backup as option. The parameters set and the memory contents (RAM) are
backed up via the backplane bus in the CPUs and programmable modules. In addition,
the backup battery enables you to carry out a restart of the CPU. Both the power supply
module and the backed up modules monitor the battery voltage.
● Operating and fault/error LEDs on the front plate.

NOTICE
A mains disconnecting device must be provided when installing AC power supply
modules.

Switching the line voltage Off/On

The power supply modules have an inrush current limiter in accordance with NAMUR.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 49
Power supply modules
3.1 Common characteristics of the power supply modules

Power supply module in invalid slot

If you insert the power supply module of a rack in an invalid slot, it will not power up. In this
case, proceed as follows to start up the power supply module correctly:
1. Disconnect the power supply module from the mains (not just the standby switch).
2. Remove the power supply module.
3. Install the power supply module in slot 1.
4. Wait at least 1 minute and then switch the line voltage on again.

CAUTION
Danger of damage to equipment.
If you insert the power supply module in a slot that is not intended for power supply
modules, the module may be damaged. Slots 1 to 4 are permitted, whereby power
supply modules starting from slot 1 must be inserted without leaving gaps.
Make sure that power supply modules are only inserted in permissible slots.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

50 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Power supply modules
3.2 Redundant power supply modules

3.2 Redundant power supply modules

Order numbers and function

Table 3- 1 Redundant power supply modules

Type Order number Input voltage Output voltage See section

PS 407 10A R 6ES7407-0KR00-0AA0 85 to 264 VAC 5 VDC/10 A 3.8 (Page 71)
or 88 to 300 VDC and 24 VDC/1 A
PS 407 10A R 6ES7 407-0KR02-0AA0 85 to 264 VAC 5 VDC/10 A 3.9 (Page 74)
or 88 to 300 VDC and 24 VDC/1 A
PS 405 10A R 6ES7405-0KR00-0AA0 19.2 to 72 VDC 5 VDC/10 A 3.14 (Page 85)
and 24 VDC/1 A
PS 405 10A R 6ES7 405-0KR02-0AA0 19.2 to 72 VDC 5 VDC/10 A 3.15 (Page 87)
and 24 VDC/1 A

Redundant operation
Using two power supply modules of type PS 407 10A R or PS 405 10A R, you can design a
redundant power supply for a rack. We recommend this if you want to increase the
availability of your programmable controller, particularly if you are operating it on an
unreliable power system.

Designing a redundant power supply

Redundant operation is possible with any of the S7 CPUs and racks described in this
manual. STEP 7 as of V4.02 is also required.
To design a redundant power supply, insert a power supply module into slots 1 and 3 of the
rack. You can then insert as many modules as can be supplied by a single power supply
module. In other words, in redundant operation all the modules can only draw a total of 10 A.

Features
The redundant power supply of an S7-400 has the following characteristics:
● The power supply module features an inrush current in accordance with NAMUR.
● Each of the power supply modules can take over the supply of power to the whole rack if
the other one fails. There is no loss of operation.
● Each of the power supply modules can be exchanged while the system is in operation.
No loss of power and no peak stress occurs with the effective voltages when the modules
are removed or inserted.
● Each of the power supply modules monitors its function and sends a message if it fails.
● Neither of the power supply modules can generate an error which affects the output
voltage of the other power supply module.
● A redundant battery concept (backup concept) is only provided when two backup
batteries are used in each of the power supply modules. If only one battery is used in
each module, only non-redundant backup is possible, since both batteries are being used
at the same time.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 51
Power supply modules
3.2 Redundant power supply modules

● The failure of a power supply module is registered via a plug and remove interrupt
(default STOP). If used in the second segment of the CR 2 no message is sent if the
power supply module fails.
● If two power supply modules are inserted but only one is switched on, there is a power-up
delay of up to one minute when the line voltage is switched on.

Note
The check box "Startup if preset configuration not equal to actual configuration" should be
activated in the "Properties" dialog box of the CPU.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

52 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Power supply modules
3.3 Backup battery (option)

3.3 Backup battery (option)

Introduction
The power supply modules of the S7-400 have a battery compartment for one or two backup
batteries. Use of these batteries is optional.

Function of the backup batteries

If backup batteries have been installed, the parameters set and the memory contents (RAM)
will be backed up via the backplane bus in CPUs and programmable modules if the power
supply module is turned off or the supply voltage fails. The battery voltage must be within the
tolerance range.
In addition, the backup battery enables you to carry out a restart of the CPU after power-on.
Both the power supply module and the backed up modules monitor the battery voltage.

Insert backup battery

Activate battery monitoring once you have installed one or two backup batteries. Make sure
that neither the respective LED BATT1F or BATT2F nor the LED BAF are illuminated. Only
then is the backup battery working properly and backup guaranteed as described above.

NOTICE
Insert the power supply module in the rack and switch it on before you insert the backup
battery for the first time. This will increase the service life of the backup battery.

Power supply modules with two backup batteries:

Some power supply modules contain a battery compartment for two batteries. If you use two
batteries and set the switch to 2BATT, the power supply module defines one of the two
batteries as the backup battery. This assignment remains in force until the battery is empty.
When the backup battery is completely discharged, the system switches to the reserve
battery which is then in turn used as the backup battery for the duration of its life. The status
"backup battery" is also stored in the event of a power failure.

Battery type
You may only use batteries certified by Siemens! (see Appendix C: Spare parts (Page 443)).
The batteries can form a passivation layer. Depassivation takes place when the batteries are
inserted in the power supply module.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 53
Power supply modules
3.3 Backup battery (option)

Specifications of the backup battery

Backup battery
Order number 6ES7971-0BA00
Type 1 x lithium AA
Nominal voltage 3.6 V
Nominal capacity 2,3 Ah

Backup times
The maximum backup time is based on the capacity of the backup batteries used and the
backup current in the rack. The backup current is the sum of all individual currents of the
inserted backed-up modules as well as the requirements of the power supply module when
the power is switched off.

Example for the calculation of backup times

The capacity of the batteries is listed in the technical specifications of the power supply. The
typical and maximum backup current of the backed-up module is listed in the technical
specifications of the module.
The typical backup current of a CPU is an empirically determined value. The maximum
backup current is a worst-case value that is calculated based on the corresponding
manufacturer specifications for the memory blocks.
The following technical specifications produce backup times for a CR with a PS 407 4A
(6ES7407-0DA02-0AA0) and a CPU 417-4 (6ES7417-4XT05-0AB0) as the only backed-up
module:
● Capacity of the backup battery: 2,3 Ah
● Maximum backup current (including own requirement at power off) of the power
supply: 100 µA
● Typical backup current of the CPU 417-4: 225 µA to 40° C.
A nominal capacity of less than 100% is to be assumed when calculating the backup time
because the backup battery is also affected at power on by regular depassivation.
A battery capacity of 63% of the nominal capacity produces the following values:
Backup time = 2,3 Ah * 0.63 / (100 + 225) µA = (1,449 / 325) * 1 000 000 = 4458 h
This produces a maximum backup time of 185 days.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

54 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Power supply modules
3.4 Operator controls and indicators

3.4 Operator controls and indicators

Introduction
The power supply modules of the S7-400 have essentially the same controls and indicators.
The main differences are:
● Power supply modules with a backup battery have an LED (BATTF) that indicates an
empty, defective, or missing backup battery.
● Power supply modules with two redundant backup batteries have two LEDs (BATT1F and
BATT2F) to indicate empty, defective or missing backup battery.

Operator controls and indicators

The figure shows you an example of a power supply module (PS 407 20A) with two
(redundant) backup batteries. The LEDs are at the top left of the module front plate.

36$

 ; 
 
 0RXQWLQJVFUHZ
5$$$

,17)

%$) /('V,17)%$)
%$77)
%$77) %$77)%$77)9
'&9 '&9'&
'&9

)05 )05EXWWRQ )DLOXUH0HVVDJH5HVHW


6WDQGE\VZLWFK GRHVQRWFXWRIIPDLQV
8QGHUFRYHU
%$77 %$77
 

%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW

 

%$77,1',&
%$77
6ZLWFK%$77,1',&
2))
%$77 %$772))%$77

SLQSRZHUFRQQHFWRU

0RXQWLQJVFUHZ

Figure 3-1 Operator controls and indicators on the PS 407 20A power supply module

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 55
Power supply modules
3.4 Operator controls and indicators

Meaning of the LEDs

The meaning of the LEDs on the power supply modules is described in the tables below. The
following section contains a list of the faults indicated by these LEDs and notes on how to
acknowledge the faults.
LEDs INTF, 5 VDC, 24 VDC

Table 3- 2 LEDs INTF, 5 VDC, 24 VDC

LED Color Meaning

INTF Red Lights up in the event of an internal fault
5 VDC green Lights up as long as the 5 V voltage is within the tolerance limits
24 VDC green Lights up as long as the 24 V voltage is within the tolerance limits
LEDs BAF, BATTF
Power supply modules with a backup battery have the following indicators:

Table 3- 3 LEDs BAF, BATTF

LED Color Meaning

BAF Red Lights up if the battery voltage on the backplane bus is too low and the
BATT.INDIC switch is at the BATT position
BATTF Yellow Lights up if the battery is empty, if the polarity is reversed, or if the
battery is missing, and the BATT.INDIC switch is at the BATT position
LEDs BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F
Power supply modules with two backup batteries have the following indicators:

Table 3- 4 LEDs BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F

LED Color Meaning

BAF Red Lights up if the battery voltage on the backplane bus is too low and the
BATT.INDIC switch is at the 1 BATT or 2 BATT position
BATT1F Yellow Lights up if battery 1 is empty or if the polarity is reversed or if the battery
is missing, and the BATT.INDIC switch is at the 1 BATT or 2 BATT
position
BATT2F Yellow Lights up if the battery 2 is empty, if the polarity is reversed, or if the
battery is missing, and the BATT.INDIC switch is at the 2 BATT position

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

56 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Power supply modules
3.4 Operator controls and indicators

Battery voltage on the backplane bus

The battery voltage is either supplied by the backup battery or externally to the CPU or
receive IM. In its normal state, the level of the battery voltage is between 2.7 V and 3.6 V.
The battery voltage is monitored for the lower limit. Violation of the lower limit is indicated by
the BAF LED and reported to the CPU.
BAF lights up if the battery voltage on the backplane bus is too low. Possible causes of this
include:
● Battery (batteries) empty or battery polarity has been reversed.
● External supply via CPU or receive IM is defective or supply from secondary power
supply module is defective or missing.
● Short-circuit or overload on the battery voltage.

Note
Due to internal capacities, if you remove the battery or switch off the external supply,
some time may elapse before BAF, BATT1F, or BATT2F lights up.

Function of the operator controls of the power supply modules

Table 3- 5 Function of the operator controls of the power supply modules

Control Function
FMR button For acknowledging and resetting a fault indicator after correcting the fault
Standby switch Switches the output voltages (5 V VDC24 VDC) to 0 V by intervening in the
control loop (no mains disconnection).
 Output voltages at nominal value
 Output voltage 0 V
Switches Used for setting LEDs and battery monitoring
BATT.INDIC Where one battery can be used (PS 407 4A, PS 405 4A):
 OFF: LEDs and monitor signals inactive
 BATT: BAF/BATTF LEDs and monitor signals active
Where two batteries can be used (PS 407 10A, PS 407 20A, PS 405 10A,
PS 405 20A):
 OFF: LEDs and monitor signals inactive
 1 BATT: Only BAF/BATT1F LEDs (for battery 1) active.
 2 BATT: BAF/BATT1F/BATT2F LEDs (for batteries 1 and 2) active.
Battery For backup battery (batteries)
compartment
Power connection 3-pin connector for the power main
(do not pull and plug under power)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 57
Power supply modules
3.4 Operator controls and indicators

Cover
The battery compartment, battery selector switch, voltage selector switch and power
connection are housed under one cover. The cover must remain closed during operation in
order to protect these operator controls and to prevent static electricity from affecting the
battery connections.
Discharge your body before you start taking any measurements on a module. Do so by
touching grounded metallic parts. Always use grounded measuring instruments.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

58 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Power supply modules
3.5 Fault/Error messages via LEDs

3.5 Fault/Error messages via LEDs

Introduction
The power supply modules of the S7-400 indicate module faults and backup battery faults
via LEDs on the front plate.

Overview of the error messages of the power supply modules

Table 3- 6 Error messages of the power supply modules

Type of fault/error LED

Module error INTF
5 VDC
24 VDC
Backup battery fault Power supplies with 1 backup battery:
BAF
BATTF
Power supplies with 2 backup battery:
BAF
BATT1F
BATT2F

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 59
Power supply modules
3.5 Fault/Error messages via LEDs

INTF, 5 VDC, 24 VDC LEDs

The following table shows the faults indicated by the INTF, 5 VDC, and 24 VDC LEDs and
lists how to remedy the faults. The status of the BAF, BATTF, BATT1F, and BATT2F LEDs is
not relevant here.

Table 3- 7 INTF, 5 VDC, 24 VDC LEDs

INTF LED LED Cause of fault Remedy

LED DC5V DC24V
D D D Standby switch in position Set standby switch to the |
position
Line voltage missing Check line voltage
Internal fault, power supply module Replace power supply module
defective
Cutoff after overvoltage on 5 V or Disconnect from mains and
non-permissible external supply reconnect after approximately 3
minutes; if necessary, remove
external supply
Power supply module operated in Install the power supply module
wrong slot in the correct slot (slot 1)
Short-circuit or overload on 5 V Switch off the power supply
module, remove the source of the
short-circuit; after
approximately 3 seconds, the
power supply module can be
switched on with the standby
switch or via the power system.*
D H D Overvoltage on 24 V Check if there is an external
supply; if not, replace power
supply module.
H D* D Short-circuit or overload on 5 V Check the load on the power
and 24 V and overheating supply module. Remove module
if necessary. Wait 5 minutes
before switching the power
supply module again.
H H D If the standby switch is set to the Remove all modules; determine
position, illegal external supply which module is faulty.
on 5 V
If the standby switch is set to the | Check the load on the power
position, short-circuit or overload supply module. Remove module
on 24 V. if necessary.
D B H Voltage restored after short-circuit or Press FMR button: Flashing
overload on 5 V if faults occur in changes to steady light
operation
Dynamic overload on 5 V Check load on the power supply
module. Possibly remove
modules.
D B B Voltage restored after short-circuit or Press FMR button: Flashing
overload on 5 V and 24 V if faults changes to steady light
occur in operation

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

60 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Power supply modules
3.5 Fault/Error messages via LEDs

INTF LED LED Cause of fault Remedy

LED DC5V DC24V
D B B Dynamic overload on 5 V and 24 V Check load on the power supply
module. Possibly remove
modules.
D = LED is dark; H = LED lights up; B = LED flashing;
* If the power supply module does not start up again after a few seconds once the overload
has been removed, remove power to the module for 5 minutes and then switch it on again. If
the module stills does not start up, you must replace it. This applies to the following power
supply modules:
● 6ES7407-0KA01-0AA0, Release 3
● 6ES7407-0KR00-0AA0, Release ≤ 5
● 6ES7407-0KA01-0AA0, Release ≥ 10
● 6ES7405-0DA02-0AA0, 6ES7407-0DA02-0AA0
● 6ES7405-0KA02-0AA0, 6ES7407-0KA02-0AA0
● 6ES7405-0KR02-0AA0, 6ES7407-0KR02-0AA0
● 6ES7405-0RA02-0AA0, 6ES7407-0RA02-0AA0
The same characteristic is displayed by the built-in overtemperature protection is triggered.
If either the 5 VDC or 24 VDC LEDs remains dark after switching on, the system has not
powered up.
If either of the 5 VDC or 24 VDC LEDs of the PS 407 10AR remains dark for longer than 1
or 2 seconds after it is switched on, the power supply module will not start up.
The following power supply modules will switch off in the event of a short-circuit or overload
after 1 to 3 seconds. The module will try to restart after no more than 3 seconds. If the error
has been eliminated by then, the module will start up. This applies to the following modules:

Modules
PS 405 4A (6ES7405-0DA01-0AA0) PS 407 4A (6ES7407-0DA01-0AA0)
PS 405 4A (6ES7405-0DA02-0AA0) PS 407 4A (6ES7407-0DA02-0AA0)
PS 405 10A (6ES7405-0KA01-0AA0) PS 407 10A (6ES7407-0KA01-0AA0),
release ≥5
PS 405 10A (6ES7405-0KA02-0AA0) PS 407 10A (6ES7407-0KA02-0AA0)
PS 405 10A R (6ES7405-0KR00-0AA0) PS 407 10A R (6ES7407-0KR00-0AA0),
release ≥7
PS 405 10A R (6ES7405-0KR02-0AA0) PS 407 10A R (6ES7407-0KR02-0AA0)
PS 405 20A (6ES7405-0RA01-0AA0) PS 407 20A (6ES7407-0RA01-0AA0)
PS 405 20A (6ES7405-0RA02-0AA0) PS 407 20A (6ES7407-0RA02-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 61
Power supply modules
3.5 Fault/Error messages via LEDs

Overload at 24 V
In the event of overload at 24 V the output current is electronically limited to a value
between 100% and 150% of the rated value. If the voltage then goes below the undervoltage
threshold of 19.2 V (-0/+ 5% corresponds to 19.2 V to 20.16 V), the modules respond as
follows:
● For the power supply modules, the 24 V voltage is disconnected and reconnected at a
repeat rate of approx. 0.5 to 1 seconds until there is an output voltage that exceeds the
undervoltage threshold.
● For the power supply modules 6ES7407-0KA01-0AA0, 6ES740x-0KR00-0AA0
and 6ES740x-0KR01-0AA0, the voltage reaches the level determined by the load
impedance, the module is in the characteristic operating range.
After the overload has been eliminated, the voltage returns to the nominal range and the
green 24 V LED flashes. The CPU sets the EXTF LED (external fault) and saves the fault in
the diagnostic buffer. You can trigger other responses, such as CPU STOP or a message to
a control room, in OB 81 (power supply error). If OB 81 is not configured, the CPU continues
as normal.

Overload at 5 V
In the event of an overload at 5 V, the power supply modules with 10 A or 20 A output
current can retain an output current of 16 A or 26 A for 300 ms. The power supply modules
with 4 A output current can retain an output current of 6 A for 300 ms. The CPU will then go
to DEFECT afterwards. If the 5 VDC LED flashes on the power supply and can be reset with
the FMR button, you will be able to perform a restart. The CPU will remain in STOP
afterwards and will then require a memory reset.

BAF, BATTF
The following table applies to power supply modules with one battery if the BATT.INDIC
switch is set to the BATT position. It shows the faults indicated and lists how to remedy the
faults.

Table 3- 8 BAF, BATTF; BATT.INDIC LEDs on BATT

LED LED Cause of fault Remedy

BAF BATF
H H Battery empty or missing. Insert new battery. Press FMR button.
No external backup voltage available
D H Battery is empty or missing. Insert new battery. Press FMR button.
Battery stored too long. Depassivate battery (see Installation
External backup voltage available. Manual).
H D Battery in order.  Fault after plugging in a module:
No backup voltage available (short- Plugged-in module defective
circuit)  Fault after switching on: Remove all
modules and plug in individually
D D Battery OK. -
External backup voltage available.
D = LED is dark; H = LED lights up;

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

62 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Power supply modules
3.5 Fault/Error messages via LEDs

BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F

The following table applies to power supply modules with two batteries if the BATT.INDIC
switch is set to the 1BATT position. It shows the faults indicated and lists how to remedy the
faults.
Nothing is indicated about the condition of any second battery that may be in use.

Table 3- 9 BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F, BATT.INDIC LEDs on 1BATT

LED LED LED Cause of fault Remedy

BAF BATT1F BATT2F
H H D Battery 1 empty or missing Insert new battery in
No external backup voltage compartment 1. Press FMR button.
available.
D H D Battery 1 empty or missing Insert new battery in
External backup voltage compartment 1. Press FMR button.
available.
Battery stored too long. Depassivate battery (see
External backup voltage Installation Manual)
available.
H D D Battery 1 OK.  Fault after plugging in a module:
No external backup voltage Plugged-in module defective
available (short-circuit)  Fault after switching on:
Remove all modules and plug in
individually
D D D Battery 1 OK. -
External backup voltage
available.
D = LED is dark; H = LED lights up;

BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F

The following table applies to power supply modules with two batteries if the BATT.INDIC
switch is set to the 2BATT position. It shows the faults indicated and lists how to remedy the
faults.

Table 3- 10 BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F, BATT.INDIC LEDs on 2BATT

LED LED LED Cause of fault Remedy

BAF BATT1F BATT2F
H H H Both batteries are empty or Insert new batteries in
missing. compartments 1 and 2 Press FMR
No external backup voltage button.
available
D H H Both batteries are empty or Insert new batteries in
missing. compartments 1 and 2 Press FMR
External backup voltage button.
available

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 63
Power supply modules
3.5 Fault/Error messages via LEDs

LED LED LED Cause of fault Remedy

BAF BATT1F BATT2F
H H D Battery 1 empty or missing Insert new battery in
No external backup voltage compartment 1. Press FMR button.
available (short-circuit or  Fault after plugging in a module:
overload) Plugged-in module defective
 Fault after switching on:
Remove all modules and plug in
individually
D H D Battery 1 empty or missing Insert new batteries in
compartments 1 and 2 Press FMR
button.
Battery has been stored for Depassivate battery (see
too long Installation Manual).
External backup voltage
available
H D H Battery 2 empty or missing Insert new battery in
No external backup voltage compartment 2. Press FMR button.
available (short-circuit or  Fault after plugging in a module:
overload) Plugged-in module defective
 Fault after switching on:
Remove all modules and plug in
individually
D D H Battery 2 empty or missing Insert new batteries in
compartments 1 and 2 Press FMR
button.
Battery has been stored for Depassivate battery (see
too long Installation Manual).
External backup voltage
available
H D D Both batteries in order.  Fault after plugging in a module:
No external backup voltage Plugged-in module defective
available (short-circuit)  Fault after switching on:
Remove all modules and plug in
individually
D D D Both batteries in order. -
External backup voltage
available
D = LED is dark; H = LED lights up;

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

64 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Power supply modules
3.6 Power supply module PS 407 4A (6ES7407-0DA01-0AA0)

3.6 Power supply module PS 407 4A (6ES7407-0DA01-0AA0)

Function
The PS 407 4A power supply module is designed for connecting to either an AC line voltage
of 85 to 264 VAC or a DC line voltage of 88 to 300 VDC and supplies 5 VDC/4 A and 24
VDC/0.5 A on the secondary side.

Operator controls and indicators on the PS 407 4A

36$
; 

 
'$$$
0RXQWLQJVFUHZ

,17)

%$) /('V,17)%$)
%$77)
%$77)
'&9 9'&9'&
'&9

)05
)05EXWWRQ )DLOXUH0HVVDJH5HVHW

6WDQGE\VZLWFK GRHVQRWFXWRIIPDLQV

 8QGHUFRYHU
%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW

%$77,1',& 6ZLWFK%$77,1',&%$77
%$77
2)) 2))

SLQSRZHUFRQQHFWRU

0RXQWLQJVFUHZ

Figure 3-2 Operator controls and indicators on the PS 407 4A

Power connection
An AC power connector is used for connecting the PS 407 4A to both an AC and DC supply.

Polarity reversal of L+ and L-

The polarity reversal of L+ and L- with supply voltages of between 88 and 300 VDC has no
effect on the function of the power supply. The connection should be made as described in
the instructions in the Installation Manual.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 65
Power supply modules
3.6 Power supply module PS 407 4A (6ES7407-0DA01-0AA0)

Specifications of the PS 407 4A

Dimensions, weight, and cable cross-sections

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x290x217
Weight 0.76 kg
Cable cross-section 3 x 1.5 mm2 (litz wire with wire end ferrule with insulating collar;
use only flexible sheath cable)
Cable diameter 3 to 9 mm
Input parameters
Input voltage
 Nominal value 120/240 VDC
20/240 VAC
 Permissible range 88 to 300 VAC
85 to 264 VDC
(varying voltage input)
Mains frequency
 Nominal value 50/60 Hz
 Permissible range 47 to 63 Hz
Nominal input current
 At 120 VAC 0.38 A
 At 120 VDC 0.37 A
 At 240 VAC 0.22 A
 At 240 VDC 0.19 A
Leakage current < 3.5 mA
Output parameters
Output voltages
 Nominal values 5.1 / 24 VDC
Output currents
 Nominal values 5 VDC: 4 A
24 VDC: 0.5 A

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

66 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Power supply modules
3.6 Power supply module PS 407 4A (6ES7407-0DA01-0AA0)

Electrical parameters
Protection class in accordance with I, with protective conductor
IEC 60536
Overvoltage category II
Pollution degree 2
Nominal voltage Ue Test voltage
0 < Ue ≤ 50 V 700 VDC (secondary <-> PE)
150 V < Ue ≤ 300 V 2300 VDC (primary <-> secondary/PE)
Buffering of power failures >20 ms at a repeat rate of 1 s, complies with the NAMUR
recommendation NE 21
Power consumption 240 VDC 52 W
Power loss 20 W
Backup current Max. 100 µA at power off
Backup battery (option) 1 x Lithium AA, 3.6 V/2.3 Ah
Protective separation to Yes
IEC 61131-2

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 67
Power supply modules
3.7 Power supply module PS 407 4A (6ES7407-0DA02-0AA0)

3.7 Power supply module PS 407 4A (6ES7407-0DA02-0AA0)

Function
The PS 407 4A power supply module is designed for connecting to either an AC line voltage
of 85 to 264 VAC or a DC line voltage of 88 to 300 VDC and supplies 5 VDC/4 A and 24
VDC/0.5 A on the secondary side.

Operator controls and indicators on the PS 407 4A

36$
; 

 
'$$$
0RXQWLQJVFUHZ

,17)

%$) /('V,17)%$)
%$77)
%$77)
'&9 9'&9'&
'&9

)05
)05EXWWRQ )DLOXUH0HVVDJH5HVHW

6WDQGE\VZLWFK GRHVQRWFXWRIIPDLQV

8QGHUFRYHU

%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW

%$77,1',& 6ZLWFK%$77,1',&%$77
%$77
2)) 2))

SLQSRZHUFRQQHFWRU

0RXQWLQJVFUHZ

Figure 3-3 Operator controls and indicators on the PS 407 4A

Power connection
An AC power connector is used for connecting the PS 407 4A to both an AC and DC supply.

Polarity reversal of L+ and L-

Reverse polarity of L+ and L- with supply voltages of between 88 and 300 VDC has no effect
on the function of the power supply. The connection should be made as described in the
instructions in the Installation Manual.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

68 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Power supply modules
3.7 Power supply module PS 407 4A (6ES7407-0DA02-0AA0)

Specifications of the PS 407 4A

Dimensions, weight, and cable cross-sections

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x290x217
Weight 0.76 kg
Cable cross-section 3 x 1.5 mm2 (litz wire with wire end ferrule with insulating collar;
use only flexible sheath cable)
Cable diameter 3 to 9 mm
Input parameters
Input voltage
 Nominal value 120/230 VDC
20/230 VAC
 Permissible range 88 to 300 VAC
85 to 264 VDC
(varying voltage input)
Mains frequency
 Nominal value 50/60 Hz
 Permissible range 47 to 63 Hz
Nominal input current
 At 120 VAC 0.42 A
 At 120 VDC 0.35 A
 At 230 VAC 0.31 A
 At 230 VDC 0.19 A
Starting current inrush
 At 230 VAC Peak value 8.5 A
A half-value width 5 ms
 At 300 VDC Peak value 8.5 A
A half-value width 5 ms
Leakage current < 3.5 mA
Output parameters
Output voltages
 Nominal values 5.1 / 24 VDC
Output currents
 Nominal values 5 VDC: 4 A
24 VDC: 0.5 A

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 69
Power supply modules
3.7 Power supply module PS 407 4A (6ES7407-0DA02-0AA0)

Electrical parameters
Protection class in accordance with I, with protective conductor
IEC 61140
Overvoltage category II
Pollution degree 2
Nominal voltage Ue Test voltage
0 < Ue ≤ 50 V 700 VDC (secondary <-> PE)
150 V < Ue ≤ 300 V 2300 VDC (primary <-> secondary/PE)
Buffering of power failures >20 ms at a repeat rate of 1 s, complies with the NAMUR
recommendation NE 21
Power consumption 240 VDC 52 W
Power loss 20 W
Backup current Max. 100 µA at power off
Backup battery (option) 1 x Lithium AA, 3.6 V/2.3 Ah
Protective separation to Yes
IEC 61131-2

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

70 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Power supply modules
3.8 Power supply modules PS 407 10A (6ES7407-0KA01-0AA0) and PS 10A R (6ES7407-0KR00-0AA0)

3.8 Power supply modules PS 407 10A (6ES7407-0KA01-0AA0) and

PS 10A R (6ES7407-0KR00-0AA0)

Function
The power supply modules PS 407 10A (standard) and PS 407 10A R (redundancy-capable,
see section Redundant power supply modules (Page 51)) are designed for connection to an
AC line voltage of 85 to 264 V or DC line voltage of 88 to 300 V and supply 5 VDC / 10 A
and 24 VDC /1 A on the secondary side.

Operator Controls and Indicators on the PS 407 10A and the PS 407 10A R
36$
; 

 
 6HFXULQJVFUHZ
.$$$

,17)

%$)
/('GLVSOD\V,17)
%$77)
%$77) %$)%$77)%$77)
'&9
'&9'&9
'&9

)05EXWWRQ )DLOXUH0HVVDJH5HVHW
)05

6WDQGE\VZLWFK QRGLVFRQQHFWLRQIURP
SRZHU
%$77 %$77
%HORZFRYHU
 
%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW

 
%$77,1',&
%$77
%$77,1',&VZLWFK
2))
%$77 %$772))%$77

SLQSOXJLQSRZHUVXSSO\FRQQHFWRU

6HFXULQJVFUHZ

Figure 3-4 Operator controls and indicators of the PS 407 10A and PS 407 10A R

Power connection
An AC connector is used for connecting the PS 407 10A and the PS 407 10A R to both an
AC and a DC supply.

Polarity reversal of L+ and L-

The polarity reversal of L+ and L- with supply voltages of between 88 and 300 VDC has no
effect on the function of the power supply. The connection should be made as described in
the instructions in the Installation Manual.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 71
Power supply modules
3.8 Power supply modules PS 407 10A (6ES7407-0KA01-0AA0) and PS 10A R (6ES7407-0KR00-0AA0)

Specifications of the PS 407 10A and the PS 407 10A R

Dimensions, weight, and cable cross-sections

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 50x290x217
Weight 1.36 kg
Cable cross-section 3 x 1.5 mm2 (litz wire with wire end ferrule with
insulating collar; use only flexible sheath cable)
Cable diameter 3 to 9 mm
Input parameters
Input voltage
 Nominal value 110/230 VDC
20/230 VAC
 Permissible range 88 to 300 VAC
85 to 264 VDC
(varying voltage input)
Mains frequency
 Nominal value 50/60 Hz
 Permissible range 47 to 63 Hz
Nominal input current
 At 120 VAC 0.9 A
 At 110 VDC 1.0 A
 At 230 VAC 0.5 A
 At 230 VDC 0.5 A
Starting current inrush
 At 230 VAC Peak value 230 A, half-value width 200 µs
Peak value 63 A*, half-value width 1 ms*
 At 300 VDC Peak value 230 A, half-value width 200 µs
Peak value 58 A*, half-value width 1 ms*
Leakage current < 3.5 mA
Output parameters
Output voltages
 Nominal values 5.1 / 24 VDC
Output currents
 Nominal values 5 VDC: 10 A
24 VDC: 1.0 A

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

72 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Power supply modules
3.8 Power supply modules PS 407 10A (6ES7407-0KA01-0AA0) and PS 10A R (6ES7407-0KR00-0AA0)

Electrical parameters
Protection class in accordance with IEC 60536 I, with protective conductor
Overvoltage category II
Pollution degree 2
Nominal voltage Ue Test voltage
0 < Ue ≤ 50 V 700 VDC (secondary <-> PE)
150 V < Ue ≤ 300 V 2300 VDC (primary <-> secondary/PE)
Buffering of power failures > 20 ms
at a repeat rate of 1 s, complies with the NAMUR
recommendation NE 21
Power consumption 105 W, PS 407 10A as of product release 5
105 W, PS 407 10A R as of product release 7
95 W, PS 407 10A as product release 10
Power loss 29.7 W
20 W, PS 407 10A as of product release 10
Backup current Max. 100 µA at power off
Backup batteries (optional) 2 x lithium AA,
3.6 V/2,3 Ah
Protective separation to IEC 61131-2 Yes
*PS 407 10A: As of product version 5
* PS 407 10A R: As of product version 7

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 73
Power supply modules
3.9 Power supply modules PS 407 10A (6ES7407-0KA02-0AA0) and PS 10A R (6ES7407-0KR02-0AA0)

3.9 Power supply modules PS 407 10A (6ES7407-0KA02-0AA0) and

PS 10A R (6ES7407-0KR02-0AA0)

Function
The power supply modules PS 407 10A (standard) and PS 407 10A R (redundancy-capable,
see section Redundant power supply modules (Page 51)) are designed for connection to an
AC line voltage of 85 to 264 V or DC line voltage of 88 to 300 V and supply 5 VDC / 10 A
and 24 VDC /1 A on the secondary side.

Operator Controls and Indicators on the PS 407 10A and the PS 407 10A R
36$
; 

 
 0RXQWLQJVFUHZ
.$$$

,17)

%$)
/('V,17)%$)
%$77)
%$77) %$77)%$77)9
'&9
'&9'&
'&9

)05EXWWRQ )DLOXUH0HVVDJH5HVHW
)05

6WDQGE\VZLWFK GRHVQRWFXWRIIPDLQV

%$77 %$77
8QGHUFRYHU
 
%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW

 
%$77,1',&
%$77
6ZLWFK%$77,1',&
2))
%$77 %$772))%$77

SLQSRZHUFRQQHFWRU

0RXQWLQJVFUHZ

Figure 3-5 Operator controls and indicators of the PS 407 10A and PS 407 10A R

Power connection
An AC connector is used for connecting the PS 407 10A and the PS 407 10A R to both an
AC and a DC supply.

Polarity reversal of L+ and L-

Reverse polarity of L+ and L- with supply voltages of between 88 and 300 VDC has no effect
on the function of the power supply. The connection should be made as described in the
instructions in the Installation Manual.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

74 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Power supply modules
3.9 Power supply modules PS 407 10A (6ES7407-0KA02-0AA0) and PS 10A R (6ES7407-0KR02-0AA0)

Specifications of the PS 407 10A and the PS 407 10A R

Dimensions, weight, and cable cross-sections

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 50x290x217
Weight 1.2 kg
Cable cross-section 3 x 1.5 mm2 (litz wire with wire end ferrule with
insulating collar; use only flexible sheath cable)
Input parameters
Input voltage
 Nominal value 120/230 VDC
20/230 VAC
 Permissible range 88 to 300 VAC
85 to 264 VDC
(varying voltage input)
Mains frequency
 Nominal value 50/60 Hz
 Permissible range 47 to 63 Hz
Nominal input current
 At 120 VAC 0.9 A
 At 120 VDC 1.0 A
 At 230 VAC 0.5 A
 At 230 VDC 0.5 A
Starting current inrush
 At 230 VAC Peak value 63 A, half-value width 1 ms
 At 300 VDC Peak value 58 A, half-value width 1 ms
Leakage current < 3.5 mA
Output parameters
Output voltages
 Nominal values 5.1 / 24 VDC
Output currents
 Nominal values 5 VDC: 10 A
24 VDC: 1.0 A

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 75
Power supply modules
3.9 Power supply modules PS 407 10A (6ES7407-0KA02-0AA0) and PS 10A R (6ES7407-0KR02-0AA0)

Electrical parameters
Protection class in accordance with IEC 60536 I, with protective conductor
Overvoltage category II
Pollution degree 2
Nominal voltage Ue Test voltage
0 < Ue ≤ 50 V 700 VDC (secondary <-> PE)
150 V < Ue ≤ 300 V 2300 VDC (primary <-> secondary/PE)
Buffering of power failures > 20 ms
at a repeat rate of 1 s, complies with the NAMUR
recommendation NE 21
Power consumption 95 W
Power loss 20 W
Backup current Max. 100 µA at power off
Backup batteries (optional) 2 x Lithium AA,
3.6 V/2.3 Ah
Protective separation to IEC 61131-2 Yes

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

76 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Power supply modules
3.10 Power supply module PS 407 20A (6ES7407-0RA01-0AA0)

3.10 Power supply module PS 407 20A (6ES7407-0RA01-0AA0)

Function
The PS 407 20A power supply module is designed for connecting to either an AC line
voltage of 85 to 264 VAC or a DC line voltage of 88 to 300 VDC and supplies 5 VDC/20 A
and 24 VDC/1 A on the secondary side.

Operator controls and indicators on the PS 407 20A

36$

; 
 
  0RXQWLQJVFUHZ
5$$$

,17)

%$)
/('V,17)%$)
%$77)
%$77)
%$77)%$77)9
'&9
'&9'&
'&9

)05EXWWRQ )DLOXUH0HVVDJH5HVHW
)05 
6WDQGE\VZLWFK GRHVQRWFXWRIIPDLQV

8QGHUFRYHU
%$77 %$77
 

%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW

 
%$77,1',&
%$77
6ZLWFK%$77,1',&
2))
%$77 %$772))%$77

SLQSRZHUFRQQHFWRU

0RXQWLQJVFUHZ

Figure 3-6 Operator controls and indicators on the PS 407 20 A

Power connection
An AC power connector is used for connecting the PS 407 20A to both an AC and DC
supply.

Polarity reversal of L+ and L-

Reverse polarity of L+ and L- with supply voltages of between 88 and 300 VDC has no effect
on the function of the power supply. The connection should be made as described in the
instructions in the Installation Manual.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 77
Power supply modules
3.10 Power supply module PS 407 20A (6ES7407-0RA01-0AA0)

Specifications of the PS 407 20A

Dimensions, weight, and cable cross-sections

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 75x290x217
Weight 2.2 kg
Cable cross-section 3 x 1.5 mm2 (litz wire with wire end ferrule with
insulating collar; use only flexible sheath cable)
Cable diameter 3 to 9 mm
Input parameters
Input voltage
 Nominal value 110/230 VDC
20/230 VAC
 Permissible range 88 to 300 VAC
85 to 264 VDC
(varying voltage input)
Mains frequency
 Nominal value 50/60 Hz
 Permissible range 47 to 63 Hz
Nominal input current
 At 120 VAC / 110 VDC 1.5 A
 At 230 VAC / 230 VDC 0.8 A
Starting current inrush Peak value 88 A half-value width 1,1 ms
Leakage current < 3.5 mA
Output parameters
Output voltages
 Nominal values 5.1 / 24 VDC
Output currents
 Nominal values 5 VDC: 20 A
24 VDC: 1.0 A
Electrical parameters
Protection class in accordance with IEC 60536 I, with protective conductor
Overvoltage category II
Pollution degree 2
Nominal voltage Ue Test voltage
0 < Ue ≤ 50 V 700 VDC (secondary <-> PE)
150 V < Ue ≤ 300 V 2300 VDC (primary <-> secondary/PE)
Buffering of power failures >20 ms at a repeat rate of 1 s, complies with the
NAMUR recommendation NE 21
Power consumption 168 W
Power loss 44 W
Backup current Max. 100 µA at power off
Backup batteries (optional) 2 x Lithium AA,
3.6 V/2.3 Ah
Protective separation to IEC 61131-2 Yes

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

78 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Power supply modules
3.11 Power supply module PS 407 20A (6ES7407-0RA02-0AA0)

3.11 Power supply module PS 407 20A (6ES7407-0RA02-0AA0)

Function
The PS 407 20A power supply module is designed for connecting to either an AC line
voltage of 85 to 264 VAC or a DC line voltage of 88 to 300 VDC and supplies 5 VDC/20 A
and 24 VDC/1 A on the secondary side.

Operator controls and indicators on the PS 407 20A

36$

 ; 
 
 0RXQWLQJVFUHZ
5$$$

,17)

%$) /('V,17)%$)
%$77)
%$77) %$77)%$77)9
'&9 '&9'&
'&9

)05 )05EXWWRQ )DLOXUH0HVVDJH5HVHW


6WDQGE\VZLWFK GRHVQRWFXWRIIPDLQV
8QGHUFRYHU
%$77 %$77
 

%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW

 

%$77,1',&
%$77
6ZLWFK%$77,1',&
2))
%$77 %$772))%$77

SLQSRZHUFRQQHFWRU

0RXQWLQJVFUHZ

Figure 3-7 Operator controls and indicators on the PS 407 20A power supply module

Power connection
An AC power connector is used for connecting the PS 407 20A to both an AC and DC
supply.

Polarity reversal of L+ and L-

Reverse polarity of L+ and L- with supply voltages of between 88 and 300 VDC has no effect
on the function of the power supply. The connection should be made as described in the
instructions in the Installation Manual.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 79
Power supply modules
3.11 Power supply module PS 407 20A (6ES7407-0RA02-0AA0)

Specifications of the PS 407 20A

Dimensions, weight, and cable cross-sections

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25x290x217
Weight 1.3 kg
Cable cross-section 3 x 1.5 mm2 (litz wire with wire end ferrule with
insulating collar; use only flexible sheath cable)
Cable diameter 3 to 9 mm
Input parameters
Input voltage
 Nominal value 120/230 VDC
20/230 VAC
 Permissible range 88 to 300 VAC
85 to 264 VDC
(varying voltage input)
Mains frequency
 Nominal value 50/60 Hz
 Permissible range 47 to 63 Hz
Nominal input current
 At 120 VAC / 120 VDC 1.4 A
 At 230 VAC / 230 VDC 0.7 A
Starting current inrush Peak value 88 A half-value width 1,1 ms
Leakage current < 3.5 mA
Output parameters
Output voltages
 Nominal values 5.1 / 24 VDC
Output currents
 Nominal values 5 VDC: 20 A
24 VDC: 1.0 A
Electrical parameters
Protection class in accordance with IEC 60536 I, with protective conductor
Overvoltage category II
Pollution degree 2
Nominal voltage Ue Test voltage
0 < Ue ≤ 50 V 700 VDC (secondary <-> PE)
150 V < Ue ≤ 300 V 2300 VDC (primary <-> secondary/PE)
Buffering of power failures >20 ms at a repeat rate of 1 s, complies with the
NAMUR recommendation NE 21
Power consumption 158 W
Power loss 35 W
Backup current Max. 100 µA at power off
Backup batteries (optional) 2 x Lithium AA,
3.6 V/2.3 Ah
Protective separation to IEC 61131-2 Yes

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

80 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Power supply modules
3.12 Power supply module PS 405 4A (6ES7405-0DA01-0AA0)

3.12 Power supply module PS 405 4A (6ES7405-0DA01-0AA0)

Function
The PS 405 4A power supply module is designed for connection to a DC line voltage of 19.2
to 72 VDC and supplies 5 VDC/4 A and 24 VDC/0.5 A on the secondary side.

Operator controls and indicators on the PS 405 4A

36$
; 

  0RXQWLQJVFUHZ
'$$$

,17)

%$) /('V,17)%$)
%$77)
%$77)
'&9 9'&9'&
'&9

)05 )05EXWWRQ )DLOXUH0HVVDJH5HVHW


6WDQGE\VZLWFK GRHVQRWFXWRIIPDLQV

8QGHUFRYHU

%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW

%$77,1',&
%$77
6ZLWFK%$77,1',&
2)) %$772))

SLQSRZHUFRQQHFWRU

0RXQWLQJVFUHZ

Figure 3-8 Operator controls and indicators on the PS 405 4A

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 81
Power supply modules
3.12 Power supply module PS 405 4A (6ES7405-0DA01-0AA0)

Specifications of the PS 405 4A

Dimensions, weight, and cable cross-sections

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25x290x217
Weight 0.76 kg
Cable cross-section 3 x 1.5 mm2 (litz wire with wire end ferrule, use
component conductor or flexible sheath cable)
Cable diameter 3 to 9 mm
Input parameters
Input voltage
 Nominal value 24 VDC / 48 V / 60 V
 Permissible range Static: 19.2 to 72 VDC
Dynamic: 18.5 to 75.5 VDC
Nominal input current 2/1/0.8 A
Overvoltage resistance In accordance with DIN VDE 0160, curve B2
Output parameters
Output voltages
 Nominal values 5.1 / 24 VDC
Output currents
Nominal values 5 VDC: 4 A
24 VDC: 0.5 A
Electrical parameters
Protection class in accordance with IEC 60536 I, with protective conductor
Overvoltage category II
Pollution degree 2
Nominal voltage Ue Test voltage
0 < Ue ≤ 50 V 700 VDC (secondary <-> PE)
150 V < Ue ≤ 300 V 2200 VDC (primary <-> secondary/PE)
Buffering of power failures >20 ms at a repeat rate of 1 s, complies with the
NAMUR recommendation NE 21
Power consumption (24 VDC) 48 W
Power loss 16 W
Backup current Max. 100 µA at power off
Backup battery (option) 1 x Lithium AA,
3.6 V/2.3 Ah
Protective separation to IEC 61131-2 Yes

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

82 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Power supply modules
3.13 Power supply module PS 405 4A (6ES7405-0DA02-0AA0)

3.13 Power supply module PS 405 4A (6ES7405-0DA02-0AA0)

Function
The PS 405 4A power supply module is designed for connection to a DC line voltage of 19.2
to 72 VDC and supplies 5 VDC/4 A and 24 VDC/0.5 A on the secondary side.

Operator controls and indicators on the PS 405 4A

36$
; 

  0RXQWLQJVFUHZ
'$$$

,17)

%$) /('V,17)%$)
%$77)
%$77)
'&9 9'&9'&
'&9

)05 )05EXWWRQ )DLOXUH0HVVDJH5HVHW


6WDQGE\VZLWFK GRHVQRWFXWRIIPDLQV

8QGHUFRYHU

%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW

%$77,1',&
%$77
6ZLWFK%$77,1',&
2)) %$772))

SLQSRZHUFRQQHFWRU

0RXQWLQJVFUHZ

Figure 3-9 Operator controls and indicators on the PS 405 4A

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 83
Power supply modules
3.13 Power supply module PS 405 4A (6ES7405-0DA02-0AA0)

Specifications of the PS 405 4A

Dimensions, weight, and cable cross-sections

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25x290x217
Weight 0.76 kg
Cable cross-section 3 x 1.5 mm2 (litz wire with wire end ferrule, use
component conductor or flexible sheath cable)
Cable diameter 3 to 9 mm
Input parameters
Input voltage
 Nominal value 24 VDC / 48 V / 60 V
 Permissible range Static: 19.2 to 72 VDC
Dynamic: 18.5 to 75.5 VDC
Nominal input current 2/1/0.8 A
Inrush current surge Peak value 18 A
A half-value width 20 ms
Output parameters
Output voltages
 Nominal values 5.1 / 24 VDC
Output currents
Nominal values 5 VDC: 4 A
24 VDC: 0.5 A
Electrical parameters
Protection class in accordance with IEC 60536 I, with protective conductor
Overvoltage category II
Pollution degree 2
Nominal voltage Ue Test voltage
0 < Ue ≤ 50 V 700 VDC (secondary <-> PE)
150 V < Ue ≤ 300 V 2300 VDC (primary <-> secondary/PE)
Buffering of power failures >20 ms at a repeat rate of 1 s, complies with the
NAMUR recommendation NE 21
Power consumption (24 VDC) 48 W
Power loss 16 W
Backup current Max. 100 µA at power off
Backup battery (option) 1 x Lithium AA,
3.6 V/2.3 Ah
Protective separation to IEC 61131-2 Yes

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

84 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Power supply modules
3.14 Power supply modules PS 405 10A (6ES7405-0KA01-0AA0) and PS 405 10A R (405-0KR00-0AA0)

3.14 Power supply modules PS 405 10A (6ES7405-0KA01-0AA0) and

PS 405 10A R (405-0KR00-0AA0)

Function
The power supply modules PS 405 10A (standard) and PS 405 10A R (redundancy-capable)
are designed for connection to a DC line voltage of 19.2 to 72 VDC and supply 5 VDC/10 A
and 24 VDC/1 A on the secondary side.

Operator Controls and Indicators on the PS 405 10A and the PS 405 10A R
36$
;  

 
.$$$
0RXQWLQJVFUHZV
,17)

%$)
/('V,17)%$)
%$77)
%$77) %$77)%$77)9
'&9
'&9'&
'&9

)05 )05EXWWRQ )DLOXUH0HVVDJH5HVHW

6WDQGE\VZLWFK GRHVQRWFXWRIIPDLQV

8QGHUFRYHU
%$77 %$77
 

%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW

 
%$77,1',&
%$77
2))
%$77 6ZLWFK%$77,1',&
%$772))%$77

SLQSRZHUFRQQHFWRU

0RXQWLQJVFUHZV

Figure 3-10 Operator Controls and Indicators on the PS 405 10A and the PS 405 10A R

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 85
Power supply modules
3.14 Power supply modules PS 405 10A (6ES7405-0KA01-0AA0) and PS 405 10A R (405-0KR00-0AA0)

Specifications of the PS 405 10A and the PS 405 10A R

Dimensions, weight, and cable cross-sections

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 50x290x217
Weight 1. 4 kg
Cable cross-section 3 x 1.5 mm2 (litz wire with wire end ferrule, use
component conductor or flexible sheath cable)
Cable diameter 3 to 9 mm
Input parameters
Input voltage
 Nominal value 24 VDC / 48 V / 60 V
 Permissible range Static: 19.2 to 72 VDC
Dynamic: 18.5 to 75.5 VDC
Nominal input current 4.3 A / 2.1 A / 1.7 A
Starting current inrush Peak value 18 A
A half-value width 20 ms
Output parameters
Output voltages
 Nominal values 5.1 / 24 VDC
Output currents
 Nominal values 5 VDC: 10 A
24 VDC: 1.0 A
Electrical parameters
Protection class in accordance with IEC 60536 I, with protective conductor
Overvoltage category II
Pollution degree 2
Nominal voltage Ue Test voltage
0 < Ue ≤ 50 V 700 VDC (secondary <-> PE)
150 < Ue ≤ 300 V 2300 VDC (primary <-> secondary/PE)
Buffering of power failures >20 ms at a repeat rate of 1 s, complies with the
NAMUR recommendation NE 21
Power consumption 104 W
Power loss 29 W
Backup current Max. 100 µA at power off
Backup batteries (optional) 2 x Lithium AA,
3.6 V/2.3 Ah
Protective separation to IEC 61131-2 Yes

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

86 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Power supply modules
3.15 Power supply modules PS 405 10A (6ES7405-0KA02-0AA0) and PS 405 10A R (405-0KR02-0AA0)

3.15 Power supply modules PS 405 10A (6ES7405-0KA02-0AA0) and

PS 405 10A R (405-0KR02-0AA0)

Function
The power supply modules PS 405 10A (standard) and PS 405 10A R (redundancy-capable)
are designed for connection to a DC line voltage of 19.2 to 72 VDC and supply 5 VDC/10 A
and 24 VDC/1 A on the secondary side.

Operator Controls and Indicators on the PS 405 10A and the PS 405 10A R
36$

;   0RXQWLQJVFUHZ
 
.$$$

,17)
/('V,17)%$)
%$)
%$77)
%$77)
%$77)%$77)9
'&9'&
'&9
'&9

)05EXWWRQ )DLOXUH0HVVDJH5HVHW
)05

6WDQGE\VZLWFK GRHVQRWFXWRIIPDLQV

8QGHUFRYHU
%$77 %$77
 

%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW

 
%$77,1',& 6ZLWFK%$77,1',&
%$77
2))
%$77 %$772))%$77

SLQSRZHUFRQQHFWRU

0RXQWLQJVFUHZ

Figure 3-11 Operator Controls and Indicators on the PS 405 10A and the PS 405 10A R

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 87
Power supply modules
3.15 Power supply modules PS 405 10A (6ES7405-0KA02-0AA0) and PS 405 10A R (405-0KR02-0AA0)

Specifications of the PS 405 10A and the PS 405 10A R

Dimensions, weight, and cable cross-sections

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 50x290x217
Weight 1.2 kg
Cable cross-section 3 x 1.5 mm2 (litz wire with wire end ferrule, use
component conductor or flexible sheath cable)
Cable diameter 3 to 9 mm
Input parameters
Input voltage
 Nominal value 24 VDC / 48 V / 60 V
 Permissible range Static: 19.2 to 72 VDC
Dynamic: 18.5 to 75.5 VDC
Nominal input current 4,0 A / 2,0 A / 1,6 A
Starting current inrush Peak value 18 A
A half-value width 20 ms
Output parameters
Output voltages
 Nominal values 5.1 / 24 VDC
Output currents
 Nominal values 5 VDC: 10 A
24 VDC: 1.0 A
Electrical parameters
Protection class in accordance with IEC 60536 I, with protective conductor
Overvoltage category II
Pollution degree 2
Nominal voltage Ue Test voltage
0 < Ue ≤ 50 V 700 VDC (secondary <-> PE)
150 < Ue ≤ 300 V 2300 VDC (primary <-> secondary/PE)
Buffering of power failures >20 ms at a repeat rate of 1 s, complies with the
NAMUR recommendation NE 21
Power consumption 95 W
Power loss 20 W
Backup current Max. 100 µA at power off
Backup batteries (optional) 2 x Lithium AA,
3.6 V/2.3 Ah
Protective separation to IEC 61131-2 Yes

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

88 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Power supply modules
3.16 Power supply module PS 405 20A (6ES7405-0RA01-0AA0)

3.16 Power supply module PS 405 20A (6ES7405-0RA01-0AA0)

Function
The PS 405 20A power supply module is designed for connection to a DC line voltage
of 19.2 to 72 VDC and supplies 5 VDC/20 A and 24 VDC/1 A on the secondary side.

Operator controls and indicators on the PS 405 20A

36$
 ; 
 
  0RXQWLQJVFUHZV
5$$$

,17)

%$)
/('V,17)%$)
%$77)
%$77) %$77)%$77)9
'&9
'&9'&
'&9

)05
)05EXWWRQ )DLOXUH0HVVDJH5HVHW

6WDQGE\VZLWFK GRHVQRWFXWRIIPDLQV

%$77 %$77
8QGHUFRYHU
 

%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW

 
%$77,1',&
%$77
6ZLWFK%$77,1',&
2))
%$77 %$772))%$77

SLQSRZHUFRQQHFWRU

0RXQWLQJVFUHZV

Figure 3-12 Operator controls and indicators on the PS 405 20A

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 89
Power supply modules
3.16 Power supply module PS 405 20A (6ES7405-0RA01-0AA0)

Specifications of the PS 405 20A

Dimensions, weight, and cable cross-sections

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 75x290x217
Weight 2.2 kg
Cable cross-section 3 x 1.5 mm2 (litz wire with wire end ferrule, use
component conductor or flexible sheath cable)
Cable diameter 3 to 9 mm
Input parameters
Input voltage
 Nominal value 24 VDC / 48 V / 60 V
 Permissible range Static: 19.2 to 72 VDC
Dynamic: 18.5 to 75.5 VDC
Nominal input current 7.3 A / 3.45 A / 2.75 A
Starting current inrush Peak value 56 A half-value width 1.5 ms
Output parameters
Output voltages
 Nominal values 5.1 / 24 VDC
Output currents
 Nominal values 5 VDC: 20 A
24 VDC: 1.0 A
Electrical parameters
Protection class in accordance with IEC 60536 I, with protective conductor
Overvoltage category II
Pollution degree 2
Nominal voltage Ue Test voltage
0 < Ue ≤ 50 V 700 VDC (secondary <-> PE)
150 V < Ue ≤ 300 V 2300 VDC (primary <-> secondary/PE)
Buffering of power failures >20 ms at a repeat rate of 1 s, complies with the
NAMUR recommendation NE 21
Power consumption 175 W
Power loss 51 W
Backup current Max. 100 µA at power off
Backup batteries (optional) 2 x Lithium AA,
3.6 V/2.3 Ah
Protective separation to IEC 61131-2 Yes

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

90 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Power supply modules
3.17 Power supply module PS 405 20A (6ES7405-0RA02-0AA0)

3.17 Power supply module PS 405 20A (6ES7405-0RA02-0AA0)

Function
The PS 405 20A power supply module is designed for connection to a DC line voltage
of 19.2 to 72 VDC and supplies 5 VDC/20 A and 24 VDC/1 A on the secondary side.

Operator controls and indicators on the PS 405 20A

36$
 ; 
 
 0RXQWLQJVFUHZ
5$$$

,17)

%$)
/('V,17)%$)
%$77)
%$77) %$77)%$77)9
'&9
'&9'&
'&9

)05
)05EXWWRQ )DLOXUH0HVVDJH5HVHW

6WDQGE\VZLWFK GRHVQRWFXWRIIPDLQV

%$77 %$77
8QGHUFRYHU
 

%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW

 
%$77,1',&
%$77
6ZLWFK%$77,1',&
2))
%$77 %$772))%$77

SLQSRZHUFRQQHFWRU

0RXQWLQJVFUHZ

Figure 3-13 Operator controls and indicators on the PS 405 20A

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 91
Power supply modules
3.17 Power supply module PS 405 20A (6ES7405-0RA02-0AA0)

Specifications of the PS 405 20A

Dimensions, weight, and cable cross-sections

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 50x290x217
Weight 1.3 kg
Cable cross-section 3 x 1.5 mm2 (litz wire with wire end ferrule, use
component conductor or flexible sheath cable)
Cable diameter 3 to 9 mm
Input parameters
Input voltage
 Nominal value 24 VDC / 48 V / 60 V
 Permissible range Static: 19.2 to 72 VDC
Dynamic: 18.5 to 75.5 VDC
Nominal input current 7.0/3.2/2.5 A
Starting current inrush Peak value 56 A half-value width 1.5 ms
Output parameters
Output voltages
 Nominal values 5.1 / 24 VDC
Output currents
 Nominal values 5 VDC: 20 A
24 VDC: 1.0 A
Electrical parameters
Protection class in accordance with IEC 60536 I, with protective conductor
Overvoltage category II
Pollution degree 2
Nominal voltage Ue Test voltage
0 < Ue ≤ 50 V 700 VDC (secondary <-> PE)
150 V < Ue ≤ 300 V 2300 VDC (primary <-> secondary/PE)
Buffering of power failures >20 ms at a repeat rate of 1 s, complies with the
NAMUR recommendation NE 21
Power consumption 168 W
Power loss 44 W
Backup current Max. 100 µA at power off
Backup batteries (optional) 2 x Lithium AA,
3.6 V/2.3 Ah
Protective separation to IEC 61131-2 Yes

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

92 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
Digital modules 4
4.1 Module overview

Characteristics of digital modules

The tables below summarize the essential characteristics of the digital modules. This
overview supports you in selecting a module to suit your requirements.

Table 4- 1 Digital input modules: overview of features

Features SM 421; SM 421; SM 421; SM 421; SM 421; SM 421; SM 421;

DI 32xDC DI 16xDC DI 16xAC DI 16xUC DI 16xUC DI 16xUC DI 32xUC
24 V 24 V 120 V 24/60 V 120/230 V 120/230 V 120 V
(-1BL0x-) (-7BH0x-) (-5EH00-) (-7DH00-) (-1FH00-) (-1FH20-) (-1EL00-)
Number of 32 DI; 16 DI; isolated 16 DI; isolated 16 DI; isolated 16 DI; 16 DI; 32 DI;
inputs isolated in in groups of in groups of in groups of isolated in isolated in isolated in
groups of 8 1 1 groups of groups of groups of
32 4 4 8
Nominal 24 VDC 24 VDC 120 VAC 24 to 60 VUC 120 120/230 VUC 120 VAC/DC
input voltage VAC/230
VDC
Suitable Switches; 2-wire proximity switches (BEROs)
for...
Configurable No Yes No Yes No No No
diagnostics
Diagnostic No Yes No Yes No No No
interrupt
Hardware No Yes No Yes No No No
interrupt at
edge
transition:
Adjustable No Yes No Yes No No No
input delays
Substitution - Yes - - - - -
value output
Special High Quick and Channel- Interrupt For high, For high, High
features packaging with interrupt specific capability variable variable packaging
density capability isolation with low, voltages voltages density
variable Input
voltages characteristic
curve in
accordance
with
IEC 61131-2

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 93
Digital modules
4.1 Module overview

Table 4- 2 Digital output modules: overview of features

Features SM 422; SM 422; SM 422; SM 422; SM 422; SM 422; SM 422;

DO 16xDC DO 16xDC DO 32xDC DO 32xDC DO 8xAC DO 16xAC DO 16xAC
24 V / 2 A 20-125 V/ 1.5 24 V / 0.5 A 24 V / 0.5 A 120/230 V/ 5 120/230 20-120 V/ 2
A A V/ 2 A A
(-1BH1x) (-5EH10) (-1BL00) (-7BL00) (-1FF00) (-1FH00) (-5EH00)

Number of 16 DO; 16 DO; 32 DO; 32 DO; 8 DO; isolated 16 DO; 16 DO;

outputs isolated in isolated and isolated in isolated in in groups of 1 isolated in isolated in
groups of 8 reverse groups of groups of groups of groups of
polarity 32 8 4 1
protection in
groups of 8
Output 2A 1.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 5A 2A 2A
current
Nominal load 24 VDC 20 to 125 24 VDC 24 VDC 120/230 VAC 120/230 20 to 120
voltage VDC VAC VAC
Configurable No Yes No Yes No No Yes
diagnostics
Diagnostic No Yes No Yes No No Yes
interrupt
Substitution No Yes No Yes No No Yes
value output
Special For high For variable High Particularly For high - For variable
features currents voltages packaging quick and with currents with currents with
density interrupt channel- channel-
capability specific specific
isolation isolation

Table 4- 3 Relay output module: overview of features

Features SM 422; DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A

(-1HH00)
Number of outputs 16 outputs, isolated in groups of 8
Load voltage 125 VDC
230 VAC
Special features -

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

94 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.2 Steps in selecting and commissioning the digital module

4.2 Steps in selecting and commissioning the digital module

Introduction
The following table contains the tasks that you have to perform one after the other to
commission digital modules successfully.
The sequence of steps is a suggestion, but you can perform individual steps either earlier or
later (for example, assign parameters to the module) or install, commission etc. other
modules in between times.

Overview of steps in selecting and commissioning the digital module

Step Procedure
1 Select the module. Section 4.1 (Page 93) and special sections for
modules beginning with Section 4.7
(Page 106)
2 Mount the module in the rack. "Installing" section in the Automation System
S7-400, Hardware and Installation manual
3 Assigning module parameters Section 4.3 (Page 96) and special sections for
modules beginning with Section 4.7
4 Commissioning the configuration "Commissioning" section in the Automation
System S7-400, Hardware and Installation
manual
5 Analyzing the configuration if Section 4.4 (Page 99)
commissioning is not successful

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 95
Digital modules
4.3 Assigning parameters to digital modules

4.3 Assigning parameters to digital modules

4.3.1 Parameters

Introduction
Digital modules may have different features. You can configure the features of some
modules.

Tools for parameter assignment

You assign parameters to digital modules in STEP 7.
After you have defined all parameters, download these from your programming device to the
CPU. On a transition from STOP ＞ RUN mode, the CPU then transfers the parameters to
the individual digital modules.

Static and dynamic parameters

The parameters are divided into static and dynamic parameters.
Static parameters are passed to digital modules after a STOP ＞ RUN transition of the CPU,
as described above.
You may also edit dynamic parameters in the active user program of an S7 PLC using SFCs.
However, the parameters set in STEP 7 will be applied again after a RUN > STOP, STOP >
RUN transition of the CPU. You will find a description of the parameter assignment of
modules in the user program in the Appendix.

Configuration in RUN (CiR)

CiR (Configuration in RUN) is a method you can use to modify your system or edit the
parameters of individual modules. These changes are made while your system is in
operation, that is, your CPU will stay in RUN over a maximum of 2.5 seconds while these
changes are applied.
For detailed information on this topic, refer to the "Configuration in RUN by means of CiR"
manual. This manual is found, for example, as a file in PDF format on the STEP 7 CD
supplied.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

96 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.3 Assigning parameters to digital modules

4.3.2 Parameters of digital input modules

Overview
The configurable digital input modules use a subset of the parameters and ranges of values
listed in the table below, depending on functionality. For information on subsets "supported"
by specific digital modules, refer to the chapter dealing with the relevant module. Do not
forget that some digital modules have different input delays after parameter assignment.
The defaults apply if you have not set any parameters in STEP 7.

Table 4- 4 Parameters of digital input modules

Parameters Value range Default2 Parameter Scope

type
Enable
 Diagnostic interrupt1 Yes/no No Dynamic Module
 Hardware interrupt1 Yes/no No
 Destination CPU for 1 to 4 - Static Module
interrupt
Diagnostics
 Wire break Yes/no No Static Channel
 No load voltage L+/sensor Yes/no No
supply
Hardware interrupt trigger
 Positive edge Yes/no No Dynamic Channel
 Negative edge Yes/no No
Input delay 0.1 ms (DC) 3 (DC) Static Channel
0.5 ms (DC)
3 ms (DC)
20 ms (DC/AC)
Reaction to error Set substitution SV Dynamic Module
value (SSV)
Keep last value
(KLV)
Set substitution value "1" Yes/no No Dynamic Channel 3
1If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to "No" because the interrupt lines
are not available in ER-1/ER-2.
2 Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the digital modules with the default settings
and without support from HWCONFIG.
3 Channels not selected for substitute value "1" are assigned substitute value "0".

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 97
Digital modules
4.3 Assigning parameters to digital modules

4.3.3 Parameters of digital output modules

Overview
The configurable digital output modules use a subset of the parameters and ranges of values
listed in the table below, depending on the functionality. For information on subsets
"supported" by specific digital modules, refer to the section dealing with the relevant module
beginning with section 4.7.
The defaults apply if you have not set any parameters in STEP 7.

Table 4- 5 Parameters of digital output modules

Parameters Value range Default2 Parameter type Scope

Enable
 Diagnostic interrupt1 Yes/no No Dynamic Module
 Destination CPU for 1 to 4 - Static Module
interrupt
Reaction to CPU STOP Substitute a SV Dynamic Module
value (SV)
Keep last value
(KLV)
Diagnostics
 Wire break Yes/no No Static Channel
 Load voltage L+ Yes/no No
missing
 Short-circuit to M Yes/no No
 Short-circuit to L+ Yes/no No
 Fuse blown Yes/no No
Set substitution value "1" Yes/no No Dynamic Channel 3
1If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to "No" because the interrupt lines
are not available in ER-1/ER-2.
2 Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the digital modules with the default settings
and without support from HWCONFIG.
3 Channels not selected for substitute value "1" are assigned substitute value "0".

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

98 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.4 Diagnostics for digital modules

4.4 Diagnostics for digital modules

4.4.1 General information about diagnostic messages

Programmable and non-programmable diagnostic messages

Using the diagnostics function, we make a distinction between programmable and non-
programmable diagnostic messages.
You only obtain programmable diagnostic messages if you have enabled the diagnostics
using the relevant parameters. You perform parameter assignment in the "Diagnostics" tab
in STEP 7, see section 6.7.
Digital modules always return non-programmable diagnostic messages, irrespective of
diagnostics being enabled.

Reactions to diagnostic messages in STEP 7

Actions initiated by diagnostic messages:
● The diagnostic message is entered in the diagnostics of the digital module, forwarded to
the CPU and can be read out by the user program.
● The fault LED on the digital module lights up.
● If you have set "Enable diagnostic interrupt" in STEP 7, a diagnostic interrupt is triggered
and OB 82 is called, see section 5.5.

Reading diagnostic messages

You can read detailed diagnostic messages using SFCs in the user program (refer to the
appendix "Diagnostic data of signal modules").
You can view the cause of the error in STEP 7 in the module diagnostics (refer to the online
help for STEP 7).

Diagnostics using the INTF and EXTF LEDs

Some digital modules indicate faults by means of their two fault LEDs INTF (internal fault)
and EXTF (external fault). The LEDs go out when all the internal and external faults have
been eliminated.
Refer to the specifications of the modules beginning with section 5.7 to find out which digital
modules have these fault LEDs.

See also
General information about parameter assignment (Page 216)
Interrupts of the digital modules (Page 103)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 99
Digital modules
4.4 Diagnostics for digital modules

4.4.2 Diagnostic messages of the digital modules

Overview
The table below gives an overview of the diagnostic messages for the digital modules with
diagnostics capability.
You can find out which diagnostic message each module is capable of in the Appendix
entitled "Diagnostic data of the signal modules".

Table 4- 6 Diagnostic messages of the digital modules

Diagnostic message LED Scope of diagnostics Programmable

Module error INTF/EXTF Module No
Internal error INTF Module No
External error EXTF Module No
Channel error INTF/EXTF Module No
External auxiliary voltage missing EXTF Module No
Front connector missing EXTF Module No
No module parameters INTF Module No
Incorrect parameters INTF Module No
Channel information available INTF/EXTF Module No
STOP mode - Module No
Internal voltage failure INTF Module No
EPROM error INTF Module No
Hardware interrupt lost INTF Module No
Parameter assignment error INTF Channel No
Short-circuit to M EXTF Channel Yes
Short-circuit to L+ EXTF Channel Yes
Wire break EXTF Channel Yes
Fuse blown INTF Channel Yes
Sensor supply missing EXTF Channel/channel Yes
group
Load voltage L+ missing EXTF Channel/channel Yes
group

Note
Prerequisite for detecting errors indicated by programmable diagnostic messages is an
appropriate configuration of the digital module in STEP 7.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

100 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.4 Diagnostics for digital modules

4.4.3 Causes of errors and remedies for digital modules

Overview

Table 4- 7 Diagnostic messages of the digital modules, causes of errors and remedies

Diagnostic message Possible cause of error Remedy

Module error Any, the module has detected an -
error.
Internal error Module has detected an error -
within the automation system.
External error Module has detected an error -
outside of the automation system.
Channel error Indicates that only certain channels -
are faulty.
External auxiliary Voltage required to operate the Supply missing voltage
voltage missing module is missing (load voltage,
sensor supply).
Front connector Jumper between connections 1 Install jumper
missing and 2 in the front connector is
missing.
No module Module requires information Message queued after power-on until
parameters whether it should operate with parameter transmission by the CPU has
default system parameters or with been completed; configure the module,
your parameters. as required.
Incorrect parameters One parameter, or the combination Reassign parameters to the module
of parameters, is not plausible.
Channel information Channel error; module can provide -
available additional channel information.
STOP mode No parameters have been If after rebooting the CPU all the input
assigned to the module and the values are in the intermediate memory,
first module cycle has not been this message is reset.
completed.
Internal voltage failure Module is defective Replace the module
EPROM error Module is defective Replace the module
Hardware interrupt The module cannot send an Change the interrupt handling in the
lost interrupt, since the previous CPU (change priority for interrupt OB;
interrupt was not acknowledged; shorten interrupt program).
possible configuration error.
Parameter Incorrect parameters transferred to Reassign parameters to the module
assignment error the module (for example,
impossible input delay); the
corresponding channel is
deactivated.
Short-circuit to M Overload at output Eliminate overload
Short-circuit of output to M Check the wiring of the outputs.
Short-circuit to L+ Short-circuit of output to L+ Check the wiring of the outputs.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 101
Digital modules
4.4 Diagnostics for digital modules

Diagnostic message Possible cause of error Remedy

Wire break Lines interrupted Connect the cable
No external sensor supply Wire sensors with10 to 18 kΩ.
Channel not connected (open) Disable the "Diagnostics – Wire break"
parameter for the channel in STEP 7.
Wire the channel
Fuse blown One or more fuses on the module Remove the overload and replace the
has blown and caused this fault. fuse.
Sensor supply Overload at sensor supply Eliminate overload
missing Short-circuit of sensor supply to M Eliminate the short-circuit.
Load voltage L+ Power supply L+ to module Feed in supply voltage L+.
missing missing
Fuse in module is defective Replace the module

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

102 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.5 Interrupts of the digital modules

4.5 Interrupts of the digital modules

Introduction
This section describes the interrupt behavior of the digital modules. There are two types of
interrupt:
● Diagnostic interrupt
● Hardware interrupt
Note that not all digital modules have interrupt capability or they are only capable of a subset
of the interrupts described here. For information on the digital modules that support
interrupts, refer to their specifications.
For detailed information on the OBs and SFCs mentioned below, refer to the STEP 7 Online
Help.

Enabling interrupts
The interrupts are not preset - in other words, they are inhibited without appropriate
parameter assignment. Interrupts are enabled in STEP 7.

Special feature: The module is inserted in ER-1/ER-2

Note
If you use the digital module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set the parameters for enabling all the
interrupts to "No" because the interrupt lines are not available in ER-1/ER-2.

Diagnostic interrupt
When diagnostic interrupts are enabled, incoming error events (initial occurrence) and
outgoing error events (error is cleared) are reported by means of an interrupt.
The CPU interrupts user program execution, and executes diagnostic interrupt OB82.
In the user program, you can call SFC 51 or SFC 59 in OB 82 to obtain more detailed
diagnostic information from the module.
The diagnostic information is consistent until such time as OB 82 is exited. When OB 82 is
exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged on the module.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 103
Digital modules
4.5 Interrupts of the digital modules

Hardware interrupt
A digital input module can trigger a hardware interrupt for each channel at a rising or falling
edge, or both, of a signal status change.
You perform parameter assignment for each channel separately. The parameters can be
changed at any time (in RUN mode in the user program.)
Pending hardware interrupts trigger hardware interrupt processing in the CPU (OB 40 to
OB 47). The CPU interrupts the execution of the user program or the priority classes with low
priority.
In the user program of the hardware interrupt OB (OB 40 to OB 47) you can specify how the
programmable controller is to respond to an edge change. The module acknowledges the
hardware interrupt when the program exits the hardware interrupt OB.
For each channel the digital input module can buffer an interrupt that has not been triggered.
If no run levels of a higher priority class are pending processing, the CPU processes the
buffered interrupts (of all modules) in the order of their occurrence.

Hardware interrupt lost

A "Hardware interrupt lost" diagnostics interrupt is generated, if a successive interrupt occurs
at the same channel before the CPU has processed the previously buffered interrupt.
The CPU does not register any further interrupts at this channel unless it has completed
processing of the stacked interrupts of the same channel.

Interrupt-triggering channels
The interrupt-triggering channels are stored in the local data of the hardware interrupt OBs
(in the start information of the corresponding OB). The start information is two words long
(bits 0 to 31). The bit number is the channel number. Bits 16 to 31 are not assigned.

See also
General information about parameter assignment (Page 216)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

104 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.6 Input characteristic curve for digital inputs

4.6 Input characteristic curve for digital inputs

IEC 61131, type 1 and type 2

The IEC 61131 standard requires the following for the input current:
● In the case of type 2, an input current of ≥ 2 mA already at + 5 V
● In the case of type 1, an input current of ≥ 0.5 mA already at + 5 V

EN 60947-5-2, 2-wire BEROs

The standard for BEROs (EN 60947-5-2) specifies that there can be a current of ≤ 1.5 mA
for BEROs in the "0" signal state.
The input current of the module in the "0" signal state is decisive for the operation of 2-wire
BEROs. This must be in accordance with BERO requirements.

Input characteristic curve for digital inputs

As long as the current flowing into the module remains ≤ 1.5 mA, the module recognizes this
as a "0" signal.

Typ. switching threshold(9.5 V)

I E (mA) Resistance characteristic curve

7
I min to IEC 61131; type 2
6

BERO
standard
I < 1,5 mA

2 I min to IEC 61131; type 1

1,5
0,5

0 5 11 13 15 24 30 L+ (V)
- 30 V

“0” “1”

L+

1
2-wire BERO
0 --> “0” Signal
I < 1,5 mA

PLC input resistance

Figure 4-1 Input characteristic curve for digital inputs

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 105
Digital modules
4.7 Digital input module SM 421; DI 32 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-1BL01-0AA0)

4.7 Digital input module SM 421; DI 32 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-1BL01-0AA0)

Features
The digital input module SM 421; DI 32 x DC 24 V has the following features:
● 32 inputs, isolated in a group of 32
● Nominal input voltage 24 VDC
● Suitable for switches and 2/3/4-wire proximity switches (BEROs, IEC 61131; type 1)
The status LEDs indicate the process status

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

106 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.7 Digital input module SM 421; DI 32 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-1BL01-0AA0)

Wiring and block diagram of the SM 421; DI 32 x DC 24 V

Process Module

1
2
L+ 3
4 0
5 1
6 2
7 3
8 4
9 5
10 6
11 7 M
12
13
14
15 0
16 1
17 2
18 3
19 4
20 5

Data register and bus control

21 6
22 7
23
24
25
26
27 0
28 1
29 2
30 3
31 4
32 5
33 6
34 7
35
36
37
38
39 0
40 1
41 2
42 3
43 4
44 5
45 6
46 7
47
M 48 M

Figure 4-2 Wiring and block diagram of the SM 421; DI 32 x DC 24 V

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 107
Digital modules
4.7 Digital input module SM 421; DI 32 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-1BL01-0AA0)

Specifications of the SM 421; DI 32 x DC 24 V

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210
Weight Approx. 500 g
Module-specific data
Number of inputs 32
Cable length
 Unshielded Max. 600 m
 Shielded Max. 1000 m
Voltages, currents, electrical potentials
Nominal electronics supply voltage L + Not required
Number of simultaneously controlled inputs 32
Electrical isolation
 Between channels and the backplane bus Yes
 Between channels No
Permissible potential difference
 Between different circuits 75 VDC / 60 VAC
Isolation test voltage
 Channels against backplane bus and load voltage 500 VDC
L+
Current consumption
 From the backplane bus (5 V) Max. 20 mA
Power loss of the module Typ. 6 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Status display Green LED per channel
Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions None
Injection of substitution values No

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

108 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.7 Digital input module SM 421; DI 32 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-1BL01-0AA0)

Sensor selection data

Input voltage
 Nominal value 24 VDC
 For "1" signal 13 to 30 V
 For "0" signal -30 to 5 V
Input current
 With "1" signal 7 mA
Input delay
 At "0" to "1" transitions 1.2 to 4.8 ms
 With "1" to "0" 1.2 to 4.8 ms
Input characteristics In accordance with IEC 61131-2; Type 1
Connection of 2-wire BEROs Supported
 Permissible quiescent current Max. 1.5 mA

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 109
Digital modules
4.8 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-7BH01-0AB0)

4.8 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-7BH01-

0AB0)

4.8.1 Features

Overview
The digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V has the following features:
● 16 inputs, isolated in 2 groups of 8
● Extremely fast signal processing: Input filter starting at 50 µs
● Nominal input voltage 24 VDC
● Suitable for switches and 2/3/4-wire proximity switches (BEROs, IEC 61131; type 2)
● 2 short-circuit-proof sensor supplies for each group of 8 channels
● External redundant sensor supply is supported
● "Sensor supply (Vs) O.K." status display
● Group error display for internal faults (INTF) and external faults (EXTF)
● Programmable diagnostics
● Programmable diagnostic interrupt
● Programmable hardware interrupts
● Programmable input delays
● Programmable substitute values in the input range
The status LEDs indicate the process status

Note
The spare parts of this module are compatible with SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V; (6ES7421-
7BH00-0AB0).
To be able to use the new function "input delay 50 µs", you require STEP 7 as of V 5.2.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

110 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.8 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-7BH01-0AB0)

Wiring and block diagram of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V

INTF Front connector monitoring

1 Monitoring of external auxiliary supply 1L+
2 EXTF
1L+ Monitoring of internal voltage
3 1L+ 1L+
4 0
5
6 1
7
8 2
9
10 3
11
24 V 12
13 1Vs 1M
14 1L+
Short circuit
4

Backplane bus interface

15 protection
16
17 5 Monitoring of sensor supply 1Vs
18
19 6
20
21 7
22
1M 1M
23 1M
24 1M Monitoring of external auxiliary supply 2L+
2L+ 25 2L+ Monitoring of internal voltage
26 2L+ 2L+
27 0
28
29 1
30
31 2
32
33 3
34
24 V 35 2M
36
37 2Vs Short circuit 2L+
protection
38
39 4
Monitoring of sensor supply 2Vs
40
41 5
42
43 6
44
45 7
46
2M 47 2M
48 2M 2M
M
L+
24 V

Figure 4-3 Wiring and block diagram of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 111
Digital modules
4.8 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-7BH01-0AB0)

Wiring diagram of the redundant sensor supply

The figure below shows how an additional redundant voltage source can be used to supply
sensors via Vs (for example, using another module.)

L+
1 L+
Short-circuit-
proof driver Vs
2 L+
Digital input M
module ±
to the sensors

Figure 4-4 Wiring diagram for the redundant supply of sensors of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V

Specifications of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210
Weight Approx. 600 g
Module-specific data
Number of inputs 16
Cable length
 Unshielded, input delay
0.1 ms Maximum 20 m
0.5 ms maximum 50 m
3ms maximum 600 m
 Shielded, input delay
0.1 ms Maximum 30 m
0.5 ms maximum 70 m
3ms maximum 1000 m
Voltages, currents, electrical potentials
Nominal supply voltage of the electronics and sensor L+ 24 VDC
 Reverse polarity protection Yes
Number of simultaneously controlled inputs 16
Electrical isolation
 Between channels and the backplane bus Yes
 Between channels and electronics power supply No
 Between channels Yes
In groups of 8
Permissible potential difference
 Between different circuits 75 VDC, 60 VAC
Isolation test voltage
 Channels against backplane bus and load voltage 500 VDC
L+
 Channel groups between themselves 500 VDC

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

112 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.8 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-7BH01-0AB0)

Current consumption
 From the backplane bus (5 V) Max. 130 mA
 From power supply L+ Max. 120 mA
Power loss of the module Typ. 5 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Status display Green LED per channel
Interrupts
 Hardware interrupt Programmable
 Diagnostic interrupt Programmable
Diagnostic functions
 Monitoring of the power supply voltage of the Yes
electronics
 Monitoring of the load voltage Green LED per group
 Group error display
for internal disruption Red LED (INTF)
for external disruption Red LED (EXTF)
 Channel error display None
 Reading diagnostics information Yes
Monitoring of
 Wire break I < 1 mA
Injection of substitution values Yes
Sensor supply outputs
Number of outputs 2
Output voltage
 On load Min. L + (-2.5 V)
Output current
 Nominal value 120 mA
 Permissible range 0 to 150 mA
Additional (redundant) supply Supported
Short-circuit protection Yes, electronic
Sensor selection data
Input voltage
 Nominal value 24 VDC
 For "1" signal 11 to 30 V
 For "0" signal -30 to 5 V
Input current
 With "1" signal 6 to 12 mA
 With "0" signal < 6 mA
Input characteristics In accordance with IEC 61131; type 2
Connection of 2-wire BEROs Supported
 Permissible quiescent current Max. 3 mA

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 113
Digital modules
4.8 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-7BH01-0AB0)

Time, Frequency
Internal preparation time 1 for
 Status identifier only
Input delay of the channel group 0.05 ms/0.05 ms Maximum 50 µs
Input delay of the channel group 0.05 ms/0.1 ms
or 0.1 ms/0.1 ms maximum 70 µs
Input delay of the channel group ≥ 0.5 ms
maximum 180 µs
 Status identifier and hardware interrupt enable
Input delay of the channel group 0.05 ms/0.05 ms 2) Maximum 60 µs
Input delay of the channel group 0.05 ms/0.1 ms
or 0.1 ms/0.1 ms maximum 80 µs
Input delay of the channel group ≥ 0.5 ms
maximum 190 µs
Internal preparation time for diagnostics/diagnostic Max. 5 ms
interrupt
Input delay
 Programmable Yes
 Nominal value 0.05 / 0.1 /0.5 / 3 ms
 Input frequency < 2 kHz
(with a time delay of 0.1 ms)
Values go into cycle and response times.
Sensor Circuit
Resistance circuit of the sensor for wire break 10 kΩ to 18 kΩ
monitoring
1The filter times are added to the overall runtime of the selected input delay.
2Substitute functionality; diagnostics and diagnostic interrupt are not to be selected.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

114 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.8 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-7BH01-0AB0)

4.8.2 Assigning parameters to the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V

Parameter assignment
You will find a description of the general configuration of digital modules in section 5.3.

Parameters of SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V
The table below shows an overview of configurable parameters and their default settings for
SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V.

Table 4- 8 Parameters of SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V

Parameters Value range Default2 Parameter Scope

type
Enable
 Diagnostic interrupt1 Yes/no No Dynamic Module
 Hardware interrupt1 Yes/no No
 Destination CPU for interrupt 1 to 4 - Static Module
Diagnostics
 Wire break Yes/no No Static Channel
 No load voltage L+/sensor supply Yes/no No Channel group

Hardware interrupt trigger

 Positive edge Yes/no - Dynamic Channel
 Negative edge Yes/no
Input delay 0.05 ms 3 ms Static Channel group
0.1 ms
0.5 ms
3 ms
Reaction to error Set substitution SV Dynamic Module
value (SSV)
Hold last value
(HLV)
Set substitution value "1" Yes/no No Dynamic Channel
1If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to "No" because the interrupt lines are not available in
ER-1/ER-2.
2 Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the digital modules with the default settings.

Allocating the sensor supplies to channel groups

The two sensor supplies of the module are used to supply two channel groups: Inputs 0 to 7
and inputs 8 to 15. You also configure diagnostics for the sensor supply at those two channel
groups.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 115
Digital modules
4.8 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-7BH01-0AB0)

Ensuring a wire break check is carried out

To ensure that a wire break check is carried out, you require an external sensor circuit using
a resistor of 10 to 18 kΩ. The resistor should be connected parallel to the contact and should
be arranged as closely as possible to the sensor.
This additional resistor is not required in the following cases:
● If 2-wire BEROs are used
● If you do no configure the "Wire break" diagnostics

Setting the input delay for channel groups

You can only set the input delay for each group of channels. In other words, the setting for
channel 0 applies to inputs 0 to 7 and the setting for channel 8 applies to inputs 8 to 15.

Note
The parameters that are entered for the remaining channels (1 to 7 and 9 to 15) must be
equal to the value 0 or 8, otherwise those channels will be reported as being incorrectly
configured.
Any hardware interrupts that have occurred in the meantime will be reported after
acknowledgement.

Optimum signal propagation delays

You can achieve the fastest signal propagation delay with the following settings:
● Both channel groups are configured with an input delay of 50 µs
● All the diagnoses (load voltage error, wire break) are deactivated
● Diagnostic interrupt is not enabled

See also
Parameters (Page 96)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

116 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.8 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-7BH01-0AB0)

4.8.3 Behavior of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V

Effect of operating mode and supply voltage on the input values

The input values of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 DC depend on the operating mode of the CPU
and on the supply voltage of the module.

Table 4- 9 Relationships of the analog input values on the CPU's operating state and on the L+
supply voltage

CPU operating state Power supply L+ at digital module Input value of digital module
POWER ON RUN L+ present Process value
L+ missing 0 signal*
STOP L+ present Process value
L+ missing 0 signal*
POWER OFF - L+ present -
L+ missing -
* Depends on the parameter assignment

Reaction to failure of the supply voltage

Failure of the supply voltage of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 DC is always indicated by the EXTF
LED on the module. This information is also available on the module (entry in diagnostic
data.)
Diagnostics interrupt triggering is based on parameter settings.

Short-circuit at the sensor supply Vs

The relevant Vs LED goes dark if a short-circuit is detected at the sensor supply Vs,
irrespective of parameter settings.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 117
Digital modules
4.8 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-7BH01-0AB0)

Effect of errors and parameter assignment on the input values

The input values of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 DC are affected by certain errors and the
parameter assignment of the module. The following table lists the effects on the input values.
You can find more diagnostic messages in the Appendix "Diagnostic Data of the Signal
Modules".

Table 4- 10 Relationships between the input values of errors and the configuration

Diagnostic message "Diagnostics" "Reaction to Error" Input value of digital module

parameter parameter
No module Cannot be Not relevant 0 signal (all channels)
parameters disabled
Front connector Substitute a value Configured substitute value
missing (SV)

KLV Last read, valid value

Incorrect parameters Cannot be Not relevant 0 signal (module/all incorrectly
(module/channel) disabled configured channels)
Internal voltage failure Cannot be Substitute a value Configured substitute value
disabled (SV)

KLV Last read, valid value

Hardware interrupt Cannot be Not relevant Current process value
lost disabled
Wire break (for each Disabled - 0 signal
channel) Activated Substitute a value Configured substitute value
(SV)

KLV Last read, valid value

Sensor supply Disabled - 0 signal
missing (also Activated Substitute a value Configured substitute value
activated via "No (SV)
Load Voltage L+")

KLV Last read, valid value

No load voltage L+ Disabled - 0 signal, if the contact is connected via
(for each channel the sensor supply; process value for
group) the external sensor supply
Activated Substitute a value Configured substitute value
(SV)

KLV Last read, valid value

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

118 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.8 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-7BH01-0AB0)

Behavior when the input delay equals 0.1 ms or 0.05 ms and an error occurs
If you have set the following parameters:
● Input delay: 0.1 ms or 0.05 ms
● Reaction to error: "Keep Last Value" (KLV) or "Substitute Value" (SV)
● Set substitution value "1"
In the event of a fault on a channel that has a 1 signal, the following could occur:
● A 0 signal may be briefly output
● If configured, a hardware interrupt may be generated.
This occurs before the last valid value or substitute value "1" is output.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 119
Digital modules
4.9 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x AC 120 V (6ES7421-5EH00-0AA0)

4.9 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x AC 120 V (6ES7421-5EH00-

0AA0)

Features
The SM 421; DI 16 x AC 120 V has the following features:
● 16 inputs, isolated
● Nominal input voltage 120 VAC
● Suitable for switches and 2-wire proximity switches (BEROs, IEC 61131; type 2)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

120 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.9 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x AC 120 V (6ES7421-5EH00-0AA0)

Wiring diagram of the SM 421; DI 16 x AC 120 V

Process Module
1
2
Byte 0 3
4 0 Adaptation
5 1N
6 1 Adaptation
7 2N
8 2 Adaptation
9 3N
10 3 Adaptation
11 4N
12
13
14
15 4 Adaptation
16 5N
17 5 Adaptation
18 6N
19 6 Adaptation

Data register and bus control

20 7N
21 7 Adaptation
22 8N
23
24
25
Byte 1 26
27 0 Adaptation
28 9N
29 1 Adaptation
30 10N
31 2 Adaptation
32 11N
33 3 Adaptation
34 12N
35
36
37
38
39 4 Adaptation
40 13N
41 5 Adaptation
42 14N
43 6 Adaptation
44 15N
45 7 Adaptation
46 16N
47
48

Figure 4-5 Wiring diagram of the SM 421; DI 16 x AC 120

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 121
Digital modules
4.9 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x AC 120 V (6ES7421-5EH00-0AA0)

Specifications of SM 421; DI 16 x AC 120 V

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210
Weight Approx. 650 g
Module-specific data
Number of inputs 16
Cable length
 Unshielded 600 m
 Shielded 1000 m
Voltages, currents, electrical potentials
Number of simultaneously controlled inputs 16
Electrical isolation
 Between channels and the backplane bus Yes
 Between channels Yes
In groups of 1
Permissible potential difference
 Between Minternal and the inputs 120 VAC
 Between inputs of different groups 250 VAC
Isolation test voltage 1500 VAC
Current consumption
 From the backplane bus (5 V) Max. 100 mA
Power loss of the module Typ. 3.0 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Status display Green LED per channel
Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions None
Sensor selection data
Input voltage
 Nominal value 120 V
 For "1" signal 72 to 132 VAC
 For "0" signal 0 to 20 V
 Frequency band 47 to 63 Hz
Input current
 With "1" signal 6 to 20 mA
 With "0" signal 0 to 4 mA

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

122 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.9 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x AC 120 V (6ES7421-5EH00-0AA0)

Input delay
 At "0" to "1" transitions 2 to 15 ms
 With "1" to "0" 5 to 25 ms
Input characteristics In accordance with IEC 61131; type 2
Connection of 2-wire BEROs Supported
 Permissible quiescent current Max. 4 mA

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 123
Digital modules
4.10 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V (6ES7421-7DH00-0AB0)

4.10 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V (6ES7421-7DH00-

0AB0)

4.10.1 Features

Overview
The SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V is characterized by the following features:
● 16 inputs, individually isolated
● Nominal input voltage 24 to 60 VUC
● Suitable for switches and 2-wire proximity switches (BEROs)
● Suitable as active high and active low input
● Group error display for internal faults (INTF) and external faults (EXTF)
● Programmable diagnostics
● Programmable diagnostic interrupt
● Programmable hardware interrupts
● Programmable input delays
The status LEDs indicate the process status

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

124 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.10 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V (6ES7421-7DH00-0AB0)

Wiring and Block Diagram of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V

Process Module
1 INTF
Front connector jumper
2 EXTF
3
L 4 Input
0 Adaptation
N 5 Diagnostics
1N
L 6 Input
1 Adaptation Diagnostics
N 7
L 2N Input
8 2
N Adaptation Diagnostics
9 3N
L 10 Input
3 Adaptation Diagnostics
N 11 4N
12
13
14
L 15 Input
4 Adaptation
N 16 Diagnostics
L 5N
17 Input
5 Adaptation
N 18 Diagnostics
L 6N Input
19 6
N Adaptation Diagnostics
20 7N
L 21 Input
7

Data register and bus control

N Adaptation Diagnostics
22 8N
23
24
25
26
L 27 Input
0 Adaptation
N Diagnostics
28 9N
L 29 Input
1 Adaptation
N 30 Diagnostics
L 10 N Input
31 2
N Adaptation Diagnostics
32 11 N
L 33 Input
3 Adaptation
N 34 Diagnostics
12 N
35
36
37
38
L 39 Input
4 Adaptation
N Diagnostics
40 13 N
L 41 Input
5 Adaptation
N 42 Diagnostics
L 14 N Input
43 6
N Adaptation Diagnostics
44 15 N
L 45 Input
7
N Adaptation Diagnostics
46 16 N
47
48

Figure 4-6 Wiring and Block Diagram of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 125
Digital modules
4.10 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V (6ES7421-7DH00-0AB0)

Specifications of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210
Weight Approx. 600 g
Module-specific data
Number of inputs 16
Cable length
 Unshielded input delay
0.5 ms Maximum 100 m
3 ms maximum 50 m
10 / 20 ms maximum 600 m
 Shielded cable length 1000 m
Voltages, currents, electrical potentials
Number of simultaneously controlled inputs 16
Electrical isolation
 Between channels and the backplane bus Yes
 Between channels Yes
In groups of 1
Permissible potential difference
 Between different circuits 75 VDC, 60 VAC
Isolation test voltage
 Channels against backplane bus and load voltage 1500 VAC
L+
 Channels among one another 1500 VAC
Current consumption
 From the backplane bus (5 V) Max. 150 mA
Power loss of the module Typ. 8 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Status display Green LED per channel
Interrupts
 Hardware interrupt Programmable
 Diagnostic interrupt Programmable
Diagnostic functions Programmable
 Group error display
for internal disruption Red LED (INTF)
for external disruption Red LED (EXTF)
 Channel error display None
 Reading diagnostics information Supported
Monitoring of
 Wire break I > 0.7 mA
Injection of substitution values No

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

126 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.10 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V (6ES7421-7DH00-0AB0)

Sensor selection data

Input voltage
 Nominal value 24 to 60 VUC
 For "1" signal 15 to 72 VDC
-15 to -72 VDC
15 to 60 VAC
 For "0" signal -6 to +6 VDC
0 to 5 VAC
Frequency band 47 DC/AC to 63 Hz
Input current
 With "1" signal Typ. 4 mA to 10 mA
Input characteristics Similar to IEC 61131-2 1)
Connection of 2-wire BEROs Supported
 Permissible quiescent current Max. 0.5 mA to 2 mA2)
Time, Frequency
Internal preparation time for
 Only hardware interrupt enable Max. 450 µs
 Enable hardware and diagnostics interrupt Max. 2 ms
Input delay
 Programmable Yes
 Nominal value 0.5 / 3 / 10 / 20 ms
Values go into cycle and response times.
Sensor Circuit
Resistance circuit of the sensor for wire break monitoring
 Nominal voltage 24 V (15 to 35 V) 18 kΩ
 Nominal voltage 48 V (30 to 60 V) 39 kΩ
 Nominal voltage 60 V (50 to 72 V) 56 kΩ
1 IEC 61131-2 does not specify any data for UC modules. The values have been adapted as much as

possible to IEC 61131-2.

2 Minimum closed-circuit current is required for wire break monitoring.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 127
Digital modules
4.10 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V (6ES7421-7DH00-0AB0)

4.10.2 Assigning parameters to the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V

Parameter assignment
You will find a description of the general configuration of digital modules in section 5.3.

Parameters of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V

The following table contains an overview of the parameters you can set and their default
settings for the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V.

Table 4- 11 Parameters of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V

Parameters Value range Default2 Parameter type Scope

Enable
 Diagnostic interrupt1 Yes/no No Dynamic Module
 Hardware interrupt1 Yes/no No
 Destination CPU for interrupt 1 to 4 - Static Module
Diagnostics
 Wire break Yes/no No Static Channel
Hardware interrupt trigger
 Positive edge yes/no - Dynamic Channel
 Negative edge yes/no

Input delay3 0.5 ms (DC) 3 ms (DC) Static Channel group

3 ms (DC)
20 ms (DC/AC)
1If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to "No" because the interrupt lines are not available in
ER-1/ER-2.
2 Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the digital modules with the default settings.
3 If
you assign 0.5 ms , then you should not configure diagnostics because the internal processing time for diagnostic
functions can be > 0.5 ms.

Ensuring a wire break check is carried out

To ensure that a wire break check is carried out, you require an external sensor circuit using
a resistor of 18 to 56 kΩ. The resistor should be connected parallel to the contact and should
be arranged as closely as possible to the sensor.
This additional resistor is not required in the following cases:
● If 2-wire BEROs are used
● If you do no configure the "Wire Break" diagnostics

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

128 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.10 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V (6ES7421-7DH00-0AB0)

Setting the input delay for channel groups

You can only set the input delay for each group of channels. In other words, the setting for
channel 0 applies to inputs 0 to 7 and the setting for channel 8 applies to inputs 8 to 15.

Note
The parameters that are entered for the remaining channels (1 to 7 and 9 to 15) must be
equal to the value 0 or 8, otherwise those channels will be reported as being incorrectly
configured.
Any hardware interrupts that have occurred in the meantime will be reported after
acknowledgement.

Optimum signal propagation delays

You can achieve the fastest signal propagation delay with the following settings:
● Both channel groups are configured with an input delay of 0.5 ms
● The diagnostics parameter is disabled
● The diagnostic interrupt parameter is disabled

Circuit as for active high or active low input

DI_x
Channel x of the
SM 421 DI 16xUC 24/60 V
DI_xN

U_s

Active high Source input

L+ L+
"1" "0"
U_s U_s

"0"
0V 0V

U_s
"1"
"1"
- L+ - L+

Input threshold

Figure 4-7 Circuit as for active high or active low input

See also
Parameters (Page 96)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 129
Digital modules
4.11 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V (6ES7 421-1FH00-0AA0)

4.11 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V (6ES7 421-

1FH00-0AA0)

Features
The SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 is characterized by the following features:
● 16 inputs, isolated
● Nominal input voltage 120/230 VUC
● Suitable for switches and 2-wire proximity switches

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

130 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.11 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V (6ES7 421-1FH00-0AA0)

Wiring and block diagram of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V

Process 1 Module
2
3
4 0
5
6 1
7
8 2

Data register and bus control

9
10 3
11
12
13 1N
14
15 4
16
17 5
18
19 6
20
21 7
22
23
24 2N
25
26
27 0
28
29 1
30
31 2
32
33 3
34
35
36 3N
37
38
39 4
40
41 5
42
43 6
44
45 7
46
47
48 4N

Figure 4-8 Wiring and block diagram of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 131
Digital modules
4.11 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V (6ES7 421-1FH00-0AA0)

Specifications of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210
Weight Approx. 650 g
Module-specific data
Number of inputs 16
Cable length
 Unshielded 600 m
 Shielded 1000 m
Voltages, currents, electrical potentials
Number of simultaneously controlled inputs 16 at 120 V
8 at 240 V
16 with fan subassembly
Electrical isolation
 Between channels and the backplane bus Yes
 Between channels Yes
In groups of 4
Permissible potential difference
 between Minternal and inputs 230 VAC
 Between inputs of different groups 500 VAC
Insulation resistance 4000 VAC
Current consumption
 From the backplane bus (5 V) Max. 100 mA
Power loss of the module Typ. 3.5 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Status display Green LED per channel
Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions None
Sensor selection data
Input voltage
 Nominal value 120/230 VUC
 For "1" signal 79 to 264 V AC
80 to 264 V DC
 For "0" signal 0 to 48 V UC
 Frequency band 47 to 63 Hz
Input current
 With "1" signal 2 to 5 mA
 With "0" signal 0 to 1 mA

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

132 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.11 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V (6ES7 421-1FH00-0AA0)

Input delay
 At "0" to "1" transitions 5 to 25 ms
 With "1" to "0" 5 to 25 ms
Input characteristics In accordance with IEC 61131-2; Type 1
Connection of 2-wire BEROs Supported
 Permissible quiescent current Max. 1 mA

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 133
Digital modules
4.12 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V (6ES7421-1FH20-0AA0)

4.12 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V (6ES7421-1FH20-

0AA0)

Features
The SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V is characterized by the following features:
● 16 inputs, isolated in groups of 4
● Nominal input voltage 120/230 VUC
● Input characteristic curve in accordance with IEC 61131-2; type 2
● Suitable for switches and 2-wire proximity switches (BEROs)
The status LEDs indicate the process status

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

134 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.12 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V (6ES7421-1FH20-0AA0)

Wiring and block diagram of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V

Process 1 Module
2
3
4 0
5
6 1
7
8 2

Data register and bus control

9
10 3
11
12
13 1N
14
15 4
16
17 5
18
19 6
20
21 7
22
23
24 2N
25
26
27 0
28
29 1
30
31 2
32
33 3
34
35
36 3N
37
38
39 4
40
41 5
42
43 6
44
45 7
46
47
48 4N

Figure 4-9 Wiring and block diagram of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 135
Digital modules
4.12 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V (6ES7421-1FH20-0AA0)

Specifications of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210
Weight Approx. 650 g
Module-specific data
Number of inputs 16
Cable length
 Unshielded 600 m
 Shielded 1000 m
Voltages, currents, electrical potentials
Nominal electronics supply voltage L + None
Number of simultaneously controlled inputs 16
Electrical isolation
 Between channels and the backplane bus Yes
 Between channels Yes
In groups of 4
Permissible potential difference
 between Minternal and inputs 250 VAC
 Between the inputs of the different groups 500 VAC
Insulation resistance 4000 VAC
Current consumption
 From the backplane bus (5 V) Max. 80 mA
Power loss of the module Typ. 12 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Status display Green LED per channel
Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions None
Injection of substitution values No
Sensor selection data
Input voltage
 Nominal value 120/230 VUC
 For "1" signal 74 to 264 V AC
80 to 264 V DC
-80 to -264 V DC
 For "0" signal 0 to 40 V AC
-40 to +40 V DC
Frequency band 47 to 63 Hz

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

136 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.12 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V (6ES7421-1FH20-0AA0)

Input current
 At signal "1" (120 V) Typ. 10 mA AC
Typ. 1.8 mA DC
 At signal "1" (230 V) Typ. 14 mA AC
Typ. 2 mA DC
 With "0" signal 0 to 6 mA AC
0 to 2 mA DC
Input delay
 At "0" to "1" transitions Maximum AC 20 ms
maximum DC 15 ms
 With "1" to "0" Maximum AC 30 ms
maximum DC 25 ms
Input characteristics In accordance with IEC 61131-2; Type 2
Connection of 2-wire BEROs Supported
 Permissible quiescent current Max. 5 mA AC

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 137
Digital modules
4.13 Digital input module SM 421; DI 32xUC 120 V (6ES7421-1EL00-0AA0)

4.13 Digital input module SM 421; DI 32xUC 120 V (6ES7421-1EL00-0AA0)

Features
The SM 421; DI 32 x UC 120 V is characterized by the following features:
● 32 inputs, isolated
● Nominal input voltage 120 VUC
● Suitable for switches and 2-wire proximity switches

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

138 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.13 Digital input module SM 421; DI 32xUC 120 V (6ES7421-1EL00-0AA0)

Wiring and block diagram of the SM 421; DI 32 x UC 120 V

Process 1 Module
2
3
4 0
5 1
6 2
7 3
8 4
9 5
10 6
11 7
12
13 1N

Data register and bus control

14
15 0
16 1
17 2
18 3
19 4
20 5
21 6
22 7
23
24 2N
25
26
27 0
28 1
29 2
30 3
31 4
32 5
33 6
34 7
35
36 3N
37
38
39 0
40 1
41 2
42 3
43 4
44 5
45 6
46 7
47
48 4N

Figure 4-10 Wiring and block diagram of the SM 421; DI 32 x UC 120 V

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 139
Digital modules
4.13 Digital input module SM 421; DI 32xUC 120 V (6ES7421-1EL00-0AA0)

Specifications of the SM 421; DI 32 x UC 120 V

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210
Weight Approx. 600 g
Module-specific data
Number of inputs 32
Cable length
 Unshielded 600 m
 Shielded 1000 m
Voltages, currents, electrical potentials
 Reverse polarity protection Yes
Number of simultaneously controlled inputs 32
Electrical isolation
 Between channels and the backplane bus Yes
 Between channels Yes
In groups of 8
Permissible potential difference
 between Minternal and inputs 120 VAC
 Between inputs of different groups 250 VAC
Isolation test voltage 1500 VAC
Current consumption
 From the backplane bus (5 V) Max. 200 mA
Power loss of the module Typ. 6.5 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Status display Green LED per channel
Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions None
Sensor selection data
Input voltage
 Nominal value 120 VUC
 For "1" signal 79 to 132 VAC
80 to 132 VDC
 For "0" signal 0 to 20 V
 Frequency band 47 to 63 Hz
Input current
 With "1" signal 2 to 5 mA
 With "0" signal 0 to 1 mA
Input delay
 At "0" to "1" transitions 5 to 25 ms
 With "1" to "0" 5 to 25 ms

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

140 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.13 Digital input module SM 421; DI 32xUC 120 V (6ES7421-1EL00-0AA0)

Input characteristics In accordance with IEC 61131; type 1

Connection of 2-wire BEROs Supported
 Permissible quiescent current Max. 1 mA

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 141
Digital modules
4.14 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A; (6ES7422-1BH11-0AA0)

4.14 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A; (6ES7422-

1BH11-0AA0)

Features
The digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A has the following features:
● 16 outputs, isolated in two groups of 8
● Output current 2 A
● Nominal load voltage 24 VDC
The status LEDs also indicate the system status even when the front connector is not
inserted.

A note about commissioning

The following technical feature applies to the digital output module SM 422;DO 16 x
DC 24 V/2 A with the order number 6ES7422-1BH11-0AA0 but not to the digital output
module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A with the order number 6ES7422-1BH10-0AA0:
To commission the module, it is not necessary to apply load voltage (1L+ and 3L+, for
example,) to each group of 8 outputs. The module is fully operative even if only one group is
supplied with L+.

Note
It is no longer possible to switch off all the outputs by disconnecting a single L+ supply as
might have been the case with the previous module (6ES7422-1BH10-0AA0).

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

142 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.14 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A; (6ES7422-1BH11-0AA0)

Wiring and Block Diagram of the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A

Process Module
1
2
3 1L+
4 0
5
1. Supply group 6 1
7
8 2

Data register and bus control

9
2. Supply group
3
11
12
13 2L+
14 2L+
15 4
16
3. Supply group 17 5
18
19 6
4. Supply group 20
21 7
22
23 1M
24
25 3L+
26 3L+
27 0
28
5. Supply group 29 1
30
31 2
32
6. Supply group 33 3
34
35
36
37 4L+
38 4L+
39 4
40
7. Supply group 5 LED control
41
42
43 6
8. Supply group 44
45 7
46
47 2M
48 2M

Figure 4-11 Wiring and Block Diagram of the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 143
Digital modules
4.14 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A; (6ES7422-1BH11-0AA0)

Specifications of the SM 422, DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210
Weight Approx. 600 g
Module-specific data
Number of outputs 16
Cable length
 Unshielded 600 m
 Shielded 1000 m
Voltages, currents, electrical potentials
Nominal electronics supply voltage L + 24 VDC
Nominal load voltage L+ 24 VDC
Aggregate current of the outputs (two outputs per supply group 1)
 Up to 40° C Max. 3 A
 Up to 60° C Max. 2 A
Electrical isolation
 Between channels and the backplane bus Yes
 Between channels Yes
In groups of 8
Permissible potential difference
 Between different circuits 75 VDC / 60 VAC
Isolation test voltage
 Channels against backplane bus and load voltage 500 VDC
L+
 Between outputs of different groups 500 VDC
Current consumption
 From the backplane bus (5 V) Max. 160 mA
 Power supply and load voltage L+ Max. 30 mA
(no load)
Power loss of the module Typ. 5 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Status display Green LED per channel
Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions None
Actuator selection data
Output voltage
 With "1" signal Min. L + (-0,5 V)
Output current
 For signal "1"
Rated value 2A
Permissible range 5 mA up to 2.4 A
 With "0" signal (residual current) Max. 0,5 mA

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

144 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.14 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A; (6ES7422-1BH11-0AA0)

Output delay (resistive load)

 At "0" to "1" transitions Max. 1 ms
 With "1" to "0" Max. 1 ms
Load resistance range 24 to 4 kΩ
Lamp load Max. 10 W
Wiring two outputs in parallel
 For redundant load control Supported (only outputs of the same group)
 For performance increase Not supported
Triggering a digital input Supported
Switch rate
 With resistive load 100 Hz
 For inductive load in accordance with IEC 947-51, 0.2 Hz at 1 A
DC 13 0.1 Hz at 2 A
 With lamp load Max. 10 Hz
Internal limiting of the inductive shutdown voltage to Max. -30 V
Short-circuit protection of the output Electronically cyclic2
 Threshold 2.8 to 6A
1A supply group always consists of two adjacent channels starting with channel 0. Channels 0
and 1, 2 and 3 and so on up to 14 and 15 therefore form one supply group.
2 Following a short-circuit, reclosing under a full load is not guaranteed. To prevent this, you can do
one of the following:
 Change the signal at the output
 Interrupt the load voltage of the module
 Briefly disconnect the load from the output

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 145
Digital modules
4.15 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A (6ES7422-5EH10-0AB0)

4.15 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A (6ES7422-

5EH10-0AB0)

4.15.1 Features

Overview
The SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A has the following features:
● 16 outputs, each channel is fused; reverse polarity protection and isolated in groups of 8
● Output current 1,5 A
● Nominal load voltage 20 to 125 VDC
● Group error display for internal faults (INTF) and external faults (EXTF)
● Programmable diagnostics
● Programmable diagnostic interrupt
● Programmable substitution value output

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

146 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.15 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A (6ES7422-5EH10-0AB0)

Wiring diagram of the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A

Process Module
1
2
Byte 0 3
4 0
5
6 1
7
8 2
9

Data register and bus control

10 3
11
12
-+ 13 L1+
14 L1+
15 4
16
17 5
18
19 6
20
21 7
22
23 M1
24
25
Byte 1 26
27 0
28
29 1
30
31 2
32
33 3
34
35
36
-+ 37 L2+
38 L2+
39 4
40
41 5
LED control

42
43 6
44
45 7
46
47 M2
48 M2

Figure 4-12 Wiring diagram of the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 147
Digital modules
4.15 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A (6ES7422-5EH10-0AB0)

Specifications of the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210
Weight Approx. 800 g
Module-specific data
Number of outputs 16
Cable length
 Unshielded Max. 600 m
 Shielded Max. 1000 m
Voltages, currents, electrical potentials
Nominal load voltage L1 20 to 138 V DC
 Reverse polarity protection Yes, with fuse
Total current of the outputs 1)
With fan
subassembly
 Up to 40° C Max. 16 A 21 A
 Up to 60° C Max. 8 A 14 A
Electrical isolation
 Between channels and the backplane bus Yes
 Between channels Yes
In groups of 8
Permissible potential difference
 Between outputs of different groups 250 VAC
Isolation test voltage 1500 VAC
Current consumption
 From the backplane bus (5 V) Max. 700 mA
 From load voltage L+ (no load) Max. 2 mA
Power loss of the module Typ. 10 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Status display Green LED per channel
Interrupts
 Diagnostic interrupt Programmable
Diagnostic functions
 Group error display Configurable
for internal disruption Red LED (INTF)
for external disruption Red LED (EXTF)
 Diagnostic information dump Yes
Injection of substitution values Yes, programmable
Actuator selection data
Output voltage
 With "1" signal Min. L+ (-1.0 V)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

148 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.15 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A (6ES7422-5EH10-0AB0)

Output current
 With signal "1"
Rated value 1.5 A
Permissible range 10 mA to 1.5 A
Permissible peak current Maximum 3 A (for 10 ms)
 With "0" signal (residual current) Max. 0,5 mA
Output delay (resistive load)
 At "0" to "1" transitions Max. 2 ms
 With "1" to "0" Max. 13 ms
Wiring two outputs in parallel
 For redundant load control Supported (only outputs of the same group)
 For performance increase Supported (only outputs of the same group)
Triggering a digital input Supported
Switching frequency
 With resistive load Max. 10 Hz
 With inductive load in accordance with IEC 947-5- Max. 0.5 Hz
1, DC 13
Short-circuit protection of the output Electronically protected2)
 Threshold Typ. 04 to 5 A
Replacement fuses Fuse, 8 A/250 V, quick blow
1 Toachieve maximum performance capability, distribute the high-current load between the two
groups.
2 To reset a deactivated output, first set the output signal to 0 and then to 1.
If output signal 1 is written to a deactivated output and the short-circuit remains, additional interrupts
are generated (provided the diagnostic interrupt parameter was set).

Note
If the power supply is switched on by means of a mechanical contact, a voltage pulse may
occur at the outputs. The transient pulse lasts a maximum of 0.5 ms.

Changing fuses

WARNING
This can result in injury.
If you change a fuse without removing the front connector of the module, you could be
injured by an electric shock.
Consequently, always remove the front connector before you change the fuse.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 149
Digital modules
4.15 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A (6ES7422-5EH10-0AB0)

4.15.2 Assigning parameters to the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A

Parameter assignment
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to digital
modules in the respective sections.

Parameters of the SM 421; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A

You will find an overview of the parameters you can set and their default settings for the
SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A in the following table.

Table 4- 12 Parameters of the SM 421; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A

Parameters Value range Default Parameter type Scope

setting2
Enable
 Diagnostic interrupt1 Yes/no No Dynamic Module
 Destination CPU for interrupt 1 to 4 - Static Module
Reaction to CPU STOP Substitute a value (SV) SV Dynamic Module
Keep last value (KLV)
Diagnostics
 Load voltage L+ missing Yes/no No Static Channel group
 Short-circuit to M Yes/no No Static Channel
Set substitution value "1" Yes/no No Dynamic Channel
1If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to "No" because the interrupt lines are not available in
ER-1/ER-2.
2 Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the digital modules with the default settings.

Assigning the "No load voltage L+" diagnostics to channel groups

You can only set the "No load voltage L+" diagnostics separately for each channel group. In
other words, the setting for channel 0 applies to inputs 0 to 7, and the setting for channel 8
applies to inputs 8 to 15.

See also
Parameters (Page 96)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

150 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.16 Digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A (6ES7422-1BL00-0AA0)

4.16 Digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A (6ES7422-

1BL00-0AA0)

Features
The digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A has the following features:
● 32 outputs, isolated in a group of 32
● Power is supplied to 8 channels in groups
● A supply group always consists of eight adjacent channels starting with channel 0.
Channels 0 to 7, 8 to 15, 16 to 23 and 24 to 31 therefore form one supply group
● Each of these supply groups can be switched off separately by isolating L+, however you
have to take note of the common ground connection
● Output current 0.5 A
● Nominal load voltage 24 VDC
The status LEDs also indicate the system status even when the front connector is not
inserted.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 151
Digital modules
4.16 Digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A (6ES7422-1BL00-0AA0)

Wiring and block diagram of the SM 422, DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

Process Module

1L+ 1
2
3 1L+
4 0
5 1
6 2
7 3

Data register and bus control

8 4
9 5
6
11 7
12
2L+ 13 2L+
14 2L+
15 0
16 1
17 2
18 3
19 4
20 5
21 6
22 7
23
24
3L+ 25 3L+
26 3L+
27 0
28 1
29 2
30 3
31 4
32 5
33 6
34 7
35
36
4L+ 37 4L+
38 4L+
LED control

39 0
40 1
41 2
42 3
43 4
44 5
45 6
46 7
47
48 M

L+ M

Figure 4-13 Wiring and Block Diagram of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

152 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.16 Digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A (6ES7422-1BL00-0AA0)

Specifications of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210
Weight Approx. 600 g
Module-specific data
Number of outputs 32
Cable length
 Unshielded 600 m
 Shielded 1000 m
Voltages, currents, electrical potentials
Nominal electronics supply voltage L + 24 VDC
Nominal load voltage L+ 24 VDC
Aggregate current of the outputs (eight outputs per supply group1)
Up to 40° C Max. 4 A
Up to 60° C Max. 2 A
Electrical isolation
 Between channels and the backplane bus Yes
 Between channels No
Permissible potential difference
 Between different circuits 75 VDC / 60 VAC
Isolation test voltage
 Channels against backplane bus and load voltage 500 VDC
L+
 Load voltage L+ against backplane bus 500 VDC
Current consumption
 From the backplane bus (5 V) Max. 200 mA
 Power supply and load voltage L+ (no load) Max. 30 mA
Power loss of the module Typ. 4 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Status display Green LED per channel
Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions None
Actuator selection data
Output voltage
 With "1" signal Min. L + (-0.3 V)
Output current
 For signal "1"
Rated value 500 mA
Permissible range 5 mA up to 600 mA
 With "0" signal (residual current) Max. 0.3 mA

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 153
Digital modules
4.16 Digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A (6ES7422-1BL00-0AA0)

Output delay (resistive load)

 At "0" to "1" transitions Max. 1 ms
 With "1" to "0" Max. 1 ms
Load resistance range 48 to 4 kΩ
Lamp load Max. 5 W
Wiring two outputs in parallel
 For redundant load control Supported (only outputs of the same group)
 For performance increase Supported (only outputs of the same group)
Triggering a digital input Supported
Switching frequency
 With resistive load Max. 100 Hz
 Inductive loads in accordance with IEC 947-5-1, Max. 2 Hz at 0.3 A
DC 13 Max. 0.5 Hz at 0.5 A
 With lamp load Max. 10 Hz
Internal limiting of the inductive shutdown voltage to Typ. 27 V
Short-circuit protection of the output Electronically cyclic
 Threshold Typ. 0.7 A to 1.5 A
1A supply group always consists of eight adjacent channels starting with channel 0. Channels 0
to 7, 8 to 15, 16 to 23 and 24 to 32 therefore form one supply group.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

154 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.17 Digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A (6ES7422-7BL00-0AB0)

4.17 Digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A (6ES7422-

7BL00-0AB0)

4.17.1 Features

Overview
The digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A has the following features:
● 32 outputs, fused and isolated in groups of 8
● Output current 0.5 A
● Nominal load voltage 24 VDC
● Group error display for internal faults (INTF) and external faults (EXTF)
● Programmable diagnostics
● Programmable diagnostic interrupt
● Programmable substitution value output
The status LEDs also indicate the system status even when the front connector is not
inserted.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 155
Digital modules
4.17 Digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A (6ES7422-7BL00-0AB0)

Wiring and Block Diagram of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

Process Module

INTF 1L+ monitoring

1
1L+ 2 EXTF Int. voltage monitoring
3 1L+ Activation
Activation
4 0
5 1
6 2
7 3 Channel status
8 4 Diagnostics display
9 5
10 6
7 Output status
11
1M 12 1M 1M
13 2L+
2L+
14 2L+ 2L+
15 0
16 1
17 2
18 3
19 4
20 5

%DFNSODQHEXVLQWHUIDFH
21 6
22 7
23 2M 2M
24 2M
3L+ 25 3L+
26 3L+ 3L+
27 0
28 1
29 2
30 3
31 4
32 5
33 6
34 7
35 3M 3M
36 3M
37 4L+
4L+
38 4L+ 4L+
39 0
40 1
41 2
42 3
43 4
44 5
45 6
46 7
47 4M
48 4M 4M
L+
24 V

Figure 4-14 Wiring and Block Diagram of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

156 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.17 Digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A (6ES7422-7BL00-0AB0)

Specifications of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210
Weight Approx. 600 g
Module-specific data
Number of outputs 32
Cable length
 Unshielded 600 m
 Shielded 1000 m
Voltages, currents, electrical potentials
Nominal electronics supply voltage L + 24 VDC
Nominal load voltage L+ 24 VDC
Cumulative current of outputs (per group)
 Up to 40° C Max. 4 A
 Up to 60° C Max. 2 A
Electrical isolation
 Between channels and the backplane bus Yes
 Between channels Yes
In groups of 8
Permissible potential difference
 Between different circuits 75 VDC, 60 VAC
Isolation test voltage
 Channels against backplane bus and load voltage L + 500 VDC
 Between outputs of different groups 500 VDC
Current consumption
 From the backplane bus (5 V) Max. 200 mA
 Power supply and load voltage L+ (no load) Max. 120 mA
Power loss of the module Typ. 8 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Status display Green LED per channel
Interrupts
 Diagnostic interrupt Programmable
 Hardware interrupt Programmable
Diagnostic functions
 Monitoring of the load voltage Yes
 Group error display
For internal fault Red LED (INTF)
For external fault Red LED (EXTF)
 Diagnostic information dump Yes

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 157
Digital modules
4.17 Digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A (6ES7422-7BL00-0AB0)

Monitoring of
 Short-circuit > 1 A (typ.)
 Wire break < 0.15 mA
Injection of substitution values Yes
Actuator selection data
Output voltage
 With "1" signal Min. L + (-0.8 V)
Output current
 For signal "1"
Rated value 0.5 A
Permissible range 5 mA up to 600 mA
 With "0" signal (residual current) Max. 0,5 mA
Load resistance range 48 to 4 kΩ
Wiring two outputs in parallel
 For redundant load control Supported (only outputs of the same
group)
 For performance increase Supported (only outputs of the same
group)
Triggering a digital input Supported
Switching frequency
 With resistive load Max. 100 Hz
 With inductive load in accordance with IEC 947-5-1, Max. 2 Hz
DC 13
 With lamp load Max. 2 Hz
Internal limiting of the inductive shutdown voltage to Typ. L + (- 45 V)
Short-circuit protection of the output Electronically cyclic
 Threshold Typ. 0.75 A to 1.5 A
Time, Frequency
Internal preparation time between backplane bus and input of the output driver1)
Up to hardware release 03
 Independent of enable diagnostics/diagnostic interrupt/ Max. 100 µs
substitute value
Up to hardware release 04
 Without enable diagnostics/diagnostic interrupt/ Max. 60 µs
substitute value
 With enable diagnostics/diagnostic interrupt/ substitute Max. 100 µs
value
1 The switching time of the output driver is added to the overall runtime on the module (< 100 µs for
resistive load)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

158 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.17 Digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A (6ES7422-7BL00-0AB0)

4.17.2 Assigning parameters to the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

Parameter assignment
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to digital
modules in the respective sections.

Parameters of SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

You will find an overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings for the
SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A in the table below.

Table 4- 13 Parameters of SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

Parameters Value range Default2 Parameter type Scope

Enable
 Diagnostic interrupt1 Yes/no No Dynamic Module
 Destination CPU for interrupt 1 to 4 - Static Module
Reaction to CPU STOP Set substitution SV Dynamic Module
value (SSV)
Keep last value
(KLV)
Diagnostics
 Wire break Yes/no No Static Channel
 No load voltage L+/sensor supply Yes/no No Channel group
 Short-circuit to M Yes/no No Channel
 Short-circuit to L+ Yes/no No Channel
Set substitution value "1" Yes/no No Dynamic Channel
1If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to "No" because the interrupt lines are not available in
ER-1/ER-2.
2 Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the digital modules with the default settings.

See also
Parameters (Page 96)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 159
Digital modules
4.17 Digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A (6ES7422-7BL00-0AB0)

4.17.3 Behavior of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

Influence of the operating state and supply voltage on output values

The output values of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A depend on the operating mode of
the CPU and on the supply voltage of the module.

Table 4- 14 Relationships of the analog output values on the CPU's operating state and on the L+
supply voltage

CPU operating mode Power supply L+ at digital module Output value of digital module
POWER ON RUN L+ present CPU value
L+ missing 0 signal
STOP L+ present Substitution value/last value
(default = 0 signal)
L+ missing 0 signal
POWER OFF - L+ present 0 signal
L+ missing 0 signal

Reaction to failure of the supply voltage

The failure of the supply voltage of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A is always indicated
by the EXTF LED on the module. This information is also available on the module (entry in
diagnostic data.)
Diagnostics interrupt triggering is based on parameter settings.

See also
Assigning parameters to the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A (Page 159)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

160 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.18 Digital output module SM 422; DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A (6ES7422-1FF00-0AA0)

4.18 Digital output module SM 422; DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A (6ES7422-

1FF00-0AA0)

Features
The SM 422; DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A has the following features:
● 8 outputs, isolated in groups of 1
● Output current 5 A
● Nominal load voltage 120/230 VAC
The status LEDs also indicate the system status even when the front connector is not
inserted.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 161
Digital modules
4.18 Digital output module SM 422; DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A (6ES7422-1FF00-0AA0)

Wiring and block diagram of the SM 422; DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A

Process 1 Module
INFT
2 EXTF
3 t
4 0
5 1L
6 F100
7 1N
8
9
10 1
11 2L
12 F200
13 2N
14
15 2

Data register and bus control

16 3L
17 F300
18 3N
19
20
21 3
22 4L
23 F400
24 4N
25
26
27 4
28 5L
29 F500
30 5N
31
32
33 5
34 6L
35 F600
36 6N
37
38
39 6
40 7L
41 F700
42 7N
LED control

43
44
45 7
46 8L
47 F800
48 8N

Figure 4-15 Wiring and block diagram of the SM 422; DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

162 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.18 Digital output module SM 422; DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A (6ES7422-1FF00-0AA0)

Specifications of the SM 422; DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210
Weight Approx. 800 g
Module-specific data
Number of outputs 8
Cable length
 Unshielded 600 m
 Shielded 1000 m
Voltages, currents, electrical potentials
Nominal load voltage L1 79 to 264 VAC
Permitted frequency range 47 to 63 Hz
Total current of the outputs
With fan subassembly
 Up to 40° C Max. 16 A 24 A
 Up to 60° C 24 A 20 A
Electrical isolation
 Between channels and the backplane bus Yes
 Between channels Yes
In groups of 1
Permissible potential difference
 Between outputs of different groups 500 VAC
Insulation resistance 4000 VAC
Current consumption
 From the backplane bus (5 V) Max. 250 mA
 From load voltage L+ (no load) Max. 1,5 mA
Power loss of the module Typ. 16 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Status display Green LED per channel
Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions Parameters cannot be assigned
 Group error display
for internal disruption Red LED (INTF) blown fuse
for external disruption Red LED (EXTF) load voltage missing
Actuator selection data
Output voltage
 With "1" signal At maximum current min. L1
(-1,5 Vrms)
At minimum current min. L1
(-10.7 Vrms)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 163
Digital modules
4.18 Digital output module SM 422; DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A (6ES7422-1FF00-0AA0)

Output current
 With signal "1"
Rated value 5A
Permissible range 10 mA to 5 A
Permissible peak current (per group) Maximum 50 A per cycle
 With "0" signal (residual current) Max. 3,5 mA
Output delay (resistive load)
 At "0" to "1" transitions Maximum 1 AC scan cycle
 With "1" to "0" Maximum 1 AC scan cycle
Minimum load current 10 mA
Zero transition Max. 55 V
Size of the motor starter Max. size 5 to NEMA
Lamp load Max. 100 W
Wiring two outputs in parallel
 For redundant load control Possible (only outputs connected to
the same load)
Triggering a digital input Supported
Switching frequency
 With resistive load Max. 10 Hz
 With inductive load in accordance with IEC 947-5- Max. 0.5 Hz
1, DC 13
 With lamp load 1 Hz
Short-circuit protection of the output Fuse, 8 A, 250 V (per output)
 Fuse-tripping current Min. 100 A
 Response time Max. 100 ms
Replacement fuses Fuse, 8 A, quick-acting
 Wickmann 194-1800-0
 Schurter SP001.1013
 Littelfuse 217.008

Changing fuses

WARNING
This can result in injury.
If you change a fuse without removing the front connector of the module, you could be
injured by an electric shock.
Consequently, always remove the front connector before you change the fuse.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

164 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.19 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A (6ES7422-1FF00-0AA0)

4.19 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A (6ES7422-

1FF00-0AA0)

Features
The SM 422; DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A has the following features:
● 16 outputs, isolated in groups of 4
● Output current 2 A
● Nominal load voltage 120/230 VAC
The status LEDs also indicate the system status even when the front connector is not
inserted.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 165
Digital modules
4.19 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A (6ES7422-1FF00-0AA0)

Wiring and block diagram of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A

Process Module

16 digital outputs (4 chassis grounds) 1 INTF

2 EXTF
Byte 0 3
4 0
5
6 1
7
8 2

Data register and bus control

9
10 3
11 1L
12 F1
13 1N
14
15 4
16
17 5
18
19 6
20
21 7
22 2L
23 F2
24 2N
25
Byte 1 26
27 0
28
29 1
30
31 2
32
33 3
34 3L
35 F3
36 3N
37
LED control

38
39 4
40
41 5
42
43 6
44
45 7
46 4L
47 F4
48 4N

Figure 4-16 Wiring and block diagram of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

166 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.19 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A (6ES7422-1FF00-0AA0)

Specifications of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210
Weight Approx. 800 g
Module-specific data
Number of outputs 16
Cable length
 Unshielded 600 m
 Shielded 1000 m
Voltages, currents, electrical potentials
Nominal load voltage L1 79 to 264 VAC
Permitted frequency range 47 to 63 Hz
Cumulative current of outputs (per group)
With fan subassembly
 Up to 40° C Max. 4 A 6A
 Up to 60° C Max. 2 A 5A
Electrical isolation
 Between channels and the backplane bus Yes
 Between channels Yes
In groups of 4
Permissible potential difference
 Between outputs of different groups 500 VAC
Insulation resistance 4000 VAC
Current consumption
 From the backplane bus (5 V) Max. 400 mA
 From load voltage L+ (no load) 1.5 mA
Power loss of the module Typ. 16 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Status display Green LED per channel
Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions Parameters cannot be assigned
 Group error display
for internal disruption Red LED (INTF) blown fuse
for external disruption Red LED (EXTF) load voltage missing
Actuator selection data
Output voltage
 With "1" signal At maximum current min. L1
(-1.3 Vrms)
At minimum current min. L1
(-18.1 Vrms)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 167
Digital modules
4.19 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A (6ES7422-1FF00-0AA0)

Output current
 With signal "1"
Rated value 2A
Permissible range 10 mA to 2 A
Permissible peak current (per group) Maximum 50 A per cycle
 With "0" signal (residual current) Max. 2.6 mA
Output delay (resistive load)
 At "0" to "1" transitions Max. 1 ms
 With "1" to "0" Maximum 1 AC scan cycle
Minimum load current 10 mA
Zero transition Non-zero cross outputs
Size of the motor starter Max. size 5 to NEMA
Lamp load Max. 50 W
Wiring two outputs in parallel
 For redundant load control Possible (only outputs connected to the
same load)
Triggering a digital input Supported
Switching frequency
 With resistive load Max. 10 Hz
 With inductive load in accordance with IEC 947-5- Max. 0.5 Hz
1, AC 15
 With lamp load 1 Hz
Short-circuit protection of the output Fuse, 8 A, 250 V (per group)
 Fuse-tripping current Min. 100 A
 Response time Max. 100 ms
Replacement fuses Fuse, 8 A, quick-acting
 Wickmann 194-1800-0
 Schurter SP001.1013
 Littelfuse 217.008

Changing fuses

WARNING
This can result in injury.
If you change a fuse without removing the front connector of the module, you could be
injured by an electric shock.
Consequently, always remove the front connector before you change the fuse.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

168 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.20 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A (6ES7422-5EH00-0AB0)

4.20 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A (6ES7422-

5EH00-0AB0)

4.20.1 Features

Overview
The SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A has the following features:
● 16 outputs, isolated in groups of 1
● Output current 2 A
● Nominal load voltage 20 VAC to 120 VAC
● Group error display for internal faults (INTF) and external faults (EXTF)
● Programmable diagnostics
● Programmable diagnostic interrupt
● Programmable substitution value output

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 169
Digital modules
4.20 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A (6ES7422-5EH00-0AB0)

Wiring diagram of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A

Process 1 Module
INTF
2 EXTF
Byte 0 3 t
4 0
5 1L1
6 1
7 2L1
8 2
9 3L1
10 3
11 4L1
12
13

Data register and bus control

14
15 4
16 5L1
17 5
18 6L1
19 6
20 7L1
21 7
22 8L1
23
24
25
Byte 1 26
27 0
28 9L1
29 1
30 10L1
31 2
32 11L1
33 3
34 12L1
35
36
37
38
39 4
40 13L1
41 5
42 14L1
LED control

43 6
44 15L1
45 7
46 16L1
47
48

Figure 4-17 Wiring diagram of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

170 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.20 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A (6ES7422-5EH00-0AB0)

Specifications of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210
Weight Approx. 800 g
Module-specific data
Number of outputs 16
Cable length
 Unshielded Max. 600 m
 Shielded Max. 1000 m
Voltages, currents, electrical potentials
Nominal load voltage L+ 20 to 132 VAC
 Permitted frequency range 47 to 63 Hz
Total current of the outputs
With fan
subassembly
 Up to 40° C Max. 16 A 24 A
 Up to 60° C Max. 7 A 16 A
Electrical isolation
 Between channels and the backplane bus Yes
 Between channels Yes
In groups of 1
Permissible potential difference
 Between M-internal and the outputs 120 VAC
 Between outputs of different groups 250 VAC
Isolation test voltage 1500 VDC
Current consumption
 From the backplane bus (5 V) Max. 600 mA
 From load voltage L+ (no load) Max. 0 mA
Power loss of the module Typ. 20 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Status display Green LED per channel
Interrupts
 Diagnostic interrupt Programmable
Diagnostic functions Programmable
 Group error display
for internal disruption Red LED (INTF)
for external disruption Red LED (EXTF)
 Diagnostic information dump Supported
Injection of substitution values Yes, programmable

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 171
Digital modules
4.20 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A (6ES7422-5EH00-0AB0)

Actuator selection data

Output voltage
 With "1" signal L1 (-1.5 Vrms)
Output current
 With "1" signal 2A
100 mA
Nominal value
to 2 A
Permissible range Maximum 20 A / 2 cycle
Permissible inrush current (per group)
 With "0" signal (residual current) Max. 2.5 mA at 30 V
Max. 4.5 mA at 132 V
Output delay (resistive load)
 At "0" to "1" transitions 1 ms
 With "1" to "0" 1 AC cycle
Zero transition Non-zero cross outputs
Size of the motor starter Max. size 5 to NEMA
Lamp load Max. 50 W
Wiring two outputs in parallel
 For redundant load control Supported (only outputs of the same group)
 For performance increase Not supported
Triggering a digital input Supported
Switching frequency
 With resistive load Max. 10 Hz
 With inductive load in accordance with IEC 947-5- Max. 0.5 Hz
1, 13 DC
 With lamp load Max. 1 Hz
Short-circuit protection of the output Fuse 8A/125 V 2AG (per output)
 Fuse-tripping current Min. 40 A
 Response time Typ. 33 ms
Replacement fuses 8 A fuse, fast-blowing
 Littelfuse 225.008

Changing fuses

WARNING
This can result in injury.
If you change a fuse without removing the front connector of the module, you could be
injured by an electric shock.
Consequently, always remove the front connector before you change the fuse.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

172 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.20 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A (6ES7422-5EH00-0AB0)

4.20.2 Assigning parameters to the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A

Parameter assignment
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to digital
modules in the respective sections.

Parameters of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A

You will find an overview of the parameters you can set and their default settings for the
SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A in the following table.

Table 4- 15 Parameters of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A

Parameters Value range Default2 Parameter type Scope

Enable
 Diagnostic interrupt1 Yes/no No Dynamic Module
 Destination CPU for interrupt 1 to 4 - Static Module
Reaction to CPU STOP Substitute a value SV Dynamic Module
(SV)
Keep last value
(KLV)
Diagnostics
 Fuse blown Yes/no No Static Channel
Set substitution value "1" Yes/no No Dynamic Channel
1If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to "No" because the interrupt lines are not available in
ER-1/ER-2.
2 Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the digital modules with the default settings.

See also
Parameters (Page 96)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 173
Digital modules
4.21 Relay output module SM 422; DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A (6ES7422-1HH00-0AA0)

4.21 Relay output module SM 422; DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A

(6ES7422-1HH00-0AA0)

Features
The SM 422; DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A has the following features:
● 16 outputs, isolated in 8 groups of 2
● Output current 5 A
● Nominal load voltage 230 VAC / 125 VDC
The status LEDs also indicate the system status even when the front connector is not
inserted.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

174 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.21 Relay output module SM 422; DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A (6ES7422-1HH00-0AA0)

Wiring and block diagram of the SM 422; DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A

Process Module
1
2
3
4 0
5 1
6 1L
7
8

Data register and bus control

9 2
10 3
11 2L
12
13
14
15 4
16 5
17 3L
18
19
20 6
21 7
22 4L
23
24
25
26
27 0
28 1
29 5L
30
31
32 2
33 3
34 6L
35
36
37
LED control

38
39 4
40 5
41 7L
42
43
44 6
45 7
46 8L
47
48

Figure 4-18 Wiring and block diagram of the SM 422; DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 175
Digital modules
4.21 Relay output module SM 422; DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A (6ES7422-1HH00-0AA0)

Specifications of the SM 422; DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210
Weight Approx. 700 g
Module-specific data
Number of outputs 16
Cable length
 Unshielded Max. 600 m
 Shielded Max. 1000 m
Voltages, currents, electrical potentials
Cumulative current of outputs (per group)
With fan subassembly
 Up to 40° C Max. 10 A 10 A
 Up to 60° C Max. 5 A 10 A
Electrical isolation
 Between channels and the backplane bus Yes
 Between channels Yes
In groups of 2
Permitted potential differences
 Between outputs of different groups 500 VAC
Insulation resistance 4000 VAC
Current consumption
 From the backplane bus (5 V) Max. 1 A
Power loss of the module Typ. 4.5 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Status display Green LED per channel
Interrupt None
Diagnostic functions None
Relay Features
Relay response times
 Power up Max. 10 ms
Typ. 5.5 ms
 Off Max. 5 ms
Typ. 3 ms
Debouncing time Typ. 0.5 ms
Actuator selection data
Thermal current, continuous Max. 5 A
Minimum load current 10 mA
External fuse for relay outputs Fuse, 6 A, quick-acting

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

176 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Digital modules
4.21 Relay output module SM 422; DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A (6ES7422-1HH00-0AA0)

Switching capacity and service life of contacts

 With resistive load
Voltage Current Number of
switching
cycles (typ.)
30 VDC 5.0 A 0.18 million
60 VDC 1.2 A 0.1 million
125 VDC 0.2 A 0.1 million
230 VAC 5.0 A 0.18 million
 For inductive load in accordance with IEC 947-5-1, 13 DC/15 AC
Voltage Current Number of
switching
cycles (typ.)
30 VDC 5.0 A 0.1 million
(τ=7 ms max.)
230 VAC 5.0 A 0.1 million
(pf=0.4)
Size of the motor starter Max. size 5 to NEMA
Lamp load Max. 60 W
Contact protection (internal) None
Wiring two outputs in parallel
 For redundant actuation of a load Supported (only outputs of the same group)
 For performance increase Not supported
Triggering a digital input Supported
Switching frequency
 Mechanical Max. 20 Hz
 With resistive load Max. 10 Hz
 With inductive load in accordance with IEC 947-5- Max. 1 Hz
1, 13 DC/15 AC
 With lamp load Max. 1 Hz

Note
Use a suppressor circuit in environments with high humidity and where sparks might occur at
the relay contacts. This will increase the life of the relay contacts.
To do this, connect an RC element or a varistor parallel to the relay contacts or to the load.
The dimensions depend on the size of the load.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 177
Digital modules
4.21 Relay output module SM 422; DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A (6ES7422-1HH00-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

178 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
Analog modules 5
5.1 General information

Structure
This section contains the following topics:
1. Overview of the analog modules available
2. General information concerning all analog modules (such as parameter assignment and
diagnostics)
3. Information that refers to specific modules (for example, features, wiring diagram and
block diagrams, specifications and special characteristics of the module):
a) for analog input modules
b) for analog output modules

STEP 7 blocks for analog functions

You can use blocks FC 105 and FC 106 to read and output analog values in STEP 7. You
will find the FCs in the standard library of STEP 7 in the subdirectory called "S5-S7
Converting Blocks" (for a description refer to the STEP 7 Online Help for the FCs).

Further information
The appendix describes the structure of the parameter records (data records 0 and 1) and
diagnostic information (data records 0 and 1) in the system data. You must be familiar with
this configuration if you want to modify the parameters of the modules in the STEP 7 user
program.
The structure of diagnostic information (data records 0 and 1) is described in the system
data section of the appendix. You must be familiar with this configuration if you want to
evaluate the diagnostic data of the modules in the STEP 7 user program.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 179
Analog modules
5.2 Module overview

5.2 Module overview

Features of the analog modules

The tables below summarize the essential properties of the analog modules. This overview
supports you in selecting a module to suit your requirements.

Table 5- 1 Analog input modules: overview of features

Features SM 431; SM 431; SM 431; SM 431; SM 431; SM 431; SM 431;

AI 8 x 13 bit AI 8 x 14 bit AI 8 x 14 bit AI 16 x 13 AI 16 x 16 AI 8 x AI 8 x 16 bit
(-1KF00-) (-1KF10-) (-1KF20-) bit bit RTD 16 bit (-7KF00-)
(-0HH0-) (-7QH00-) (-7KF10-)
Number of inputs 8 AI for U/I 8 AI for U/I 8 AI for U/I 16 inputs 16 AI for U/I/ 8 inputs 8 inputs
measure- measure- measure- temperature
ment ment ment measure-
4 AI for 4 AI for 4 AI for ment
resistance resistance/ resistance 8 AI for
measure- temperature measure- resistance
ment measure- ment measure-
ment ment
Resolution 13 bits 14 bits 14 bits 13 bits 16 bits 16 bits 16 bits
Measuring method Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Resistance Voltage
Current Current Current Current Current Current
Resistance Resistance Resistance Resistance Tempera-
Tempera- Tempera- ture
ture ture
Measuring principle Integrating Integrating Instantane- Integrating Integrating Integrating Integrating
ous value
encoding
Programmable No No No No Yes Yes Yes
diagnostics
Diagnostic interrupt No No No No Adjustable Yes Yes
Limit value No No No No Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable
monitoring
Hardware interrupt No No No No Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable
when limit exceeded
Hardware interrupt at No No No No Adjustable No No
end of scan cycle
Voltage relationships Analog section isolated from CPU Electrical Analog section isolated from CPU
isolation

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

180 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.2 Module overview

Features SM 431; SM 431; SM 431; SM 431; SM 431; SM 431; SM 431;

AI 8 x 13 bit AI 8 x 14 bit AI 8 x 14 bit AI 16 x 13 AI 16 x 16 AI 8 x AI 8 x 16 bit
(-1KF00-) (-1KF10-) (-1KF20-) bit bit RTD 16 bit (-7KF00-)
(-0HH0-) (-7QH00-) (-7KF10-)
Max. permissible Between the Between the Between the Between the Between the Between Between the
common mode channels or channels or channels or channels or channels or channel and channels or
voltage the between the the the between the central between the
reference channel and reference reference channel and ground channel and
potentials of central potentials of potentials of central point: central
the ground the the ground 120 VAC ground
connected point: connected connected point: point:
sensors and 120 VAC sensors and Sensors and 120 VAC 120 VAC
MANA: MANA: central
30 VAC 8 VAC ground
point:
2 VDC/AC
External voltage No 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC No No
supply required (only with (only with (only with (only with
current, 2- current, 2- current, 2- current, 2-
DMU) 1 DMU) 1 DMU) 1 DMU) 1
Special features - Suitable for Rapid A/D - Suitable for Resistance Internal
temperature change, temperature thermome- measuring
measure- suitable for measure- ter shunt
ment highly ment configurable Field wiring
Tempera- dynamic Tempera- Lineariza- with internal
ture sensor processes ture sensor tion of the reference
type Smoothing type sensor temperature
configurable of the configurable characteris- (included in
Lineariza- measured Lineariza- tic curve basic
tion of the values tion of the Smoothing product
sensor sensor of the package)
characteris- characteris- measured Smoothing
tic curve tic curves values of the
Smoothing Smoothing measured
of the of the values
measured measured
values values
1 2 DMU 2-wire transducer

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 181
Analog modules
5.2 Module overview

Table 5- 2 Analog output modules: overview of features

Features Module
SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit
(-1HF00-)
Number of outputs 8 outputs
Resolution 13 bits
Output type Each separate channel:
 Voltage
 Current
Programmable diagnostics No
Diagnostic interrupt No
Substitution value output No
Voltage relationships Analog section isolated from:
 the CPU
 Load voltage
Max. permissible common mode voltage Between the channels and the channels against
MANA 3 VDC
Special features -

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

182 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.3 Steps for commissioning analog modules

5.3 Steps for commissioning analog modules

Introduction
The following table contains the tasks that you have to perform one after the other to
commission analog modules successfully.
The sequence of steps is a suggestion, but you can perform individual steps either earlier or
later (for example, assign parameters to the module) or install, commission etc. other
modules in between times.

Steps

Table 5- 3 Steps from the selection of analog modules to commissioning

Step Procedure
1 Select the module.
2 For certain analog input modules: Set the measuring type and range using the measuring
range module.
3 Mount the module in the rack.
4 Assign parameters to module.
5 Connect the measuring sensors or loads to the module.
6 Commission the configuration.
7 Analyze the configuration if commissioning failed.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 183
Analog modules
5.4 Representation of analog values

5.4 Representation of analog values

5.4.1 General information

Introduction
This chapter describes the analog values for all measuring or output ranges supported by
the analog modules.

Analog to digital conversion

Analog input modules convert the analog process signal into digital form.
Analog output modules convert digital output values to analog signals.

Representation of analog values at a resolution of 16 bits

The digitized analog value applies to input and output values of the same nominal range.
Analog values are output as real numbers in two's complement. The resulting assignment:

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit values 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

Bit 15 can be interpreted as a sign

The sign of the analog value is always set at bit 15:
● "0" → +
● "1" → -

Resolution less than 16 bits

On analog modules with a resolution of less than 16 bits, the analog value is stored left-
justified. The unused least significant bit positions are padded with "0".

Example
The example below demonstrates the "0" padding of unused bit positions for low resolution
values.

Table 5- 4 Example: Bit pattern of a 16-bit and 13-bit analog value

Resolution Analog value

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
16-bit analog value 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1
13-bit analog value 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

184 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.4 Representation of analog values

5.4.2 Representation of analog values of analog input channels

Introduction
The tables in this section contain the measured value representations for the various
measuring ranges of the analog input modules. The values in the tables apply to all modules
with the corresponding measuring ranges.

Notes for readers of the tables

The tables "Bipolar input ranges", "Unipolar input ranges", "Life-zero input ranges" contain
the binary representation of the measured values.
The binary representation of the measured values is always the same, so the analog
representation tables only compare the measuring ranges and the units.

Measured value resolution

The resolution of the analog values may differ, based on the analog module and module
parameters. At resolutions < 16 bits, all bits identified by "x" are set to "0".

Note
This resolution does not apply to temperature values. The converted temperature values are
the result of a conversion in the analog module (see tables for analog representation of
resistance thermometer and for thermometer elements).

Table 5- 5 Supported analog value resolutions

Resolution in bits Unitdecimal Unithexadecimal Analog value Analog value

High byte Low byte
9 128 80H 00000000 1xxxxxxx
10 64 40H 00000000 01xxxxxx
11 32 20H 00000000 001xxxxx
12 16 10H 00000000 0001xxxx
13 8 8H 00000000 00001xxx
14 4 4H 00000000 000001xx
15 2 2H 00000000 0000001x
16 1 1H 00000000 00000001

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 185
Analog modules
5.4 Representation of analog values

5.4.3 Binary representation of input ranges

Input ranges
The input ranges shown in tables "Bipolar input ranges", "Unipolar input ranges", "Life-zero
input ranges" are defined in complementary 2-by-2 representation:

Table 5- 6 Bipolar input ranges

Units Measured Data word Range

value
in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 >118,515 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117,589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overshoot range
27649 >100,004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100,000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0,003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0,000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal range
-1 - 0,003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
- 27648 - 100,000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
- 27649 ≤- 100,004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Undershoot range
- 32512 - 117,593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
- 32768 ≤- 117,596 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

Table 5- 7 Unipolar input ranges

Units Measured Data word Range

value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 ≧118,515 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117,589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overshoot range
27649 ≧100,004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100,000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0,003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Nominal range
0 0,000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-1 - 0,003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Undershoot range
- 4864 - 17,593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 ≤- 17,596 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

186 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.4 Representation of analog values

Table 5- 8 Life-zero input ranges

Units Measured Data word Range

value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32511 117,589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overshoot range
27649 ≧100,004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100,000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal range
1 0,003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0,000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-1 - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Undershoot range
0,003617
- 4864 - 17,593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
In the event of a wire break, the module reports 7FFFH

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 187
Analog modules
5.4 Representation of analog values

5.4.4 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges

Table 5- 9 Representation of analog values in the ±1 V to ±10 V voltage measuring ranges

System Voltage measuring range

Dec. Hex. ± 10 V ±5V ± 2.5 V ±1V
118,515 % 32767 7FFF 11.851 V 5.926 V 2.963 V 1.185 V Overflow
117,593 % 32512 7F00
117,589 % 32511 7EFF 11.759 V 5.879 V 2.940 V 1.176 V Overshoot range
27649 6C01
100,000 % 27648 6C00 10 V 5V 2.5 V 1V
75,000 % 20736 5100 7.5 V 3.75 V 1.875 V 0.75 V
0,003617 % 1 1 361.7 µV 180.8 µV 90.4 µV 36.17 µV
0% 0 0 0V 0V 0V 0V Nominal range
-1 FFFF
- 75,00 % - 20736 AF00 - 7.5 V - 3.75 V - 1.875 V - 0.75 V
- 100,000 % - 27648 9400 - 10 V -5V - 2.5 V -1V
- 27649 93FF Undershoot range
- 117,593 % - 32512 8100 - 11.759 V - 5.879 V - 2.940 V - 1.176 V
- 117,596 % - 32513 80FF Underflow
- 118,519 % - 32768 8000 - 11.851 V - 5.926 V - 2.963 V - 1.185 V

Table 5- 10 Representation of analog values in the ±25 to ±500 mV voltage measuring ranges

System Voltage measuring range

Dec. Hex. ± 500 mV ± 250 mV ± 80 mV ± 50 mV ± 25 mV
118,515 % 32767 7FFF 592.6 mV 296.3 mV 94.8 mV 59.3 mV 29.6 mV Overflow
117,593 % 32512 7F00
117,589 % 32511 7EFF 587.9 mV 294.0 mV 94.1 mV 58.8 mV 29.4 mV Overshoot
27649 6C01 range

100,000 % 27648 6C00 500 mV 250 mV 80 mV 50 mV 25 mV

75 % 20736 5100 375 mV 187.54 mV 60 mV 37.5 mV 18.75 mV
0,003617% 1 1 18.08 µV 9.04 µV 2.89 µV 1.81 µV 904.2 nV
0% 0 0 0 mV 0 mV 0 mV 0 mV 0 mV
-1 FFFF Nominal range
- 75,00 % - 20736 AF00 - 375 mV -187.54 mV - 60 mV - 37.5 mV - 18.75 mV
- 100,000% - 27648 9400 - 500 mV - 250 mV - 80 mV - 50 mV - 25 mV
- 27649 93FF Undershoot
- 117,593% - 32512 8100 - 587.9 mV - 294.0 mV - 94.1 mV - 58.8 mV - 29.4 mV range
- 117,596% - 32513 80FF Underflow
- 118,519% - 32768 8000 - 592.6mV - 296.3 mV - 94.8mV - 59.3 mV - 29.6 mV

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

188 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.4 Representation of analog values

Table 5- 11 Representation of analog values in the voltage measuring ranges 1 to 5 V and 0 to 10 V

System Voltage measuring range

Dec. Hex. 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V
118,515 % 32767 7FFF 5.741 V 11.852 V Overflow
117,593 % 32512 7F00
117,589 % 32511 7EFF 5.704 V 11.759 V Overshoot range
27649 6C01
100,000 % 27648 6C00 5V 10 V
75 % 20736 5100 3.75 V 7.5 V Nominal range
0,003617 % 1 1 1 V + 144.7 µV 0 V + 361.7 µV
0% 0 0 1V 0V
-1 FFFF Undershoot range
- 17,593 % - 4864 ED00 0.296 V Negative values are not
supported Wire break
≤-17,596 % 32767 7FFF

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 189
Analog modules
5.4 Representation of analog values

5.4.5 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges

Table 5- 12 Representation of analog values in the ±3.2 mA to ±20 mA current measuring ranges

System Current measuring range

Dec. Hex. ± 20 mA ± 10 mA ± 5 mA ± 3.2 mA
118,515 % 32767 7FFF 23.70 mA 11.85 mA 5.93 mA 3.79 mA Overflow
117,593 % 32512 7F00
117,589 % 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA 11.76 mA 5.88 mA 3.76 mA Overshoot
27649 6C01 range
100,000 % 27648 6C00 20 mA 10 mA 5 mA 3.2 mA
75 % 20736 5100 15 mA 7.5 mA 3.75 mA 2.4 mA
0,003617 % 1 1 723.4 nA 361.7 nA 180.8 nA 115.7 nA Nominal range
0% 0 0 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA
-1 FFFF
- 75 % - 20736 AF00 - 15 mA - 7.5 mA - 3.75 mA - 2.4 mA
- 100,000 % - 27648 9400 - 20 mA - 10 mA - 5 mA - 3.2 mA
- 27649 93FF Undershoot
- 117,593 % - 32512 8100 - 23.52 mA - 11.76 mA - 5.88 mA - 3.76 mA range
- 117,596 % - 32513 80FF Underflow
- 118,519 % - 32768 8000 - 23.70 mA - 11.85 mA - 5.93 mA - 3.79 mA

Table 5- 13 Representation of analog values in current measuring ranges 0 to 20 mA

System Current measuring range

Dec. Hex. 0 to 20 mA
118,515 % 32767 7FFF 23.70 mA Overflow
117,593 % 32512 7F00
117,589 % 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA Overshoot range
27649 6C01
100,000 % 27648 6C00 20 mA
75 % 20736 5100 15 mA Nominal range
0,003617 % 1 1 723.4 nA
0% 0 0 0 mA
-1 FFFF Undershoot range
- 17,593 % - 4864 ED00 - 3.52 mA
- 4865 ECFF Underflow
≤ - 17,596 % - 32768 8000

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

190 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.4 Representation of analog values

Table 5- 14 Representation of analog values in current measuring ranges 4 to 20 mA

System Current measuring range

Dec. Hex. 4 to 20 mA
118,515 % 32767 7FFF 22.96 mA Overflow
117,593 % 32512 7F00
117,589 % 32511 7EFF 22.81 mA Overshoot range
27649 6C01
100,000 % 27648 6C00 20 mA
75 % 20736 5100 16 mA Nominal range
0,003617 % 1 1 4 mA + 578.7 nA
0% 0 0 4 mA
-1 FFFF Undershoot range
- 17,593 % - 4864 ED00 1.185 mA
Wire break
≤ - 17,596 % 32767 7FFF

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 191
Analog modules
5.4 Representation of analog values

5.4.6 Representation of analog values for resistance-type sensors

Table 5- 15 Analog value representation for resistance-type sensors from 48 Ω to 6 kΩ

System Resistive transducer range

Dec. Hex. 48 Ω 150 Ω 300 Ω 600 Ω 6 kΩ
118,515 % 32767 7FFF 56.89 Ω 177.77 Ω 355.54 Ω 711.09 Ω 7.11 kΩ Overflow
117,593 % 32512 7F00
117,589 % 32511 7EFF 56.44 Ω 176.38 Ω 352.77 Ω 705.53 Ω 7.06 kΩ Overshoot
27649 6C01 range
100,000 % 27648 6C00 48 Ω 150 Ω 300 Ω 600 Ω 6 kΩ Nominal range
75 % 20736 5100 36 Ω 112.5 Ω 225 Ω 450 Ω 4.5 kΩ
0,003617 % 1 1 1.74 mΩ 5.43 mΩ 10.85 mΩ 21.70 mΩ 217.0 mΩ
0% 0 0 0Ω 0Ω 0Ω 0Ω 0Ω
(negative values are physically impossible) Undershoot
range

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

192 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.4 Representation of analog values

5.4.7 Representation of analog values for resistance thermometer

Representation of the analog values of Pt x00 standard resistance thermometers

Table 5- 16 Representation of analog values for Pt 100/200/500/1000 resistance thermometers

Pt x00 Unitdeci Unit Pt x00 Unit Unit Pt x00 Unit Unit Range
Standard in mal hexa- Standard in decimal hexa- Standard in decimal hexa-
°C decimal °F decimal K decimal
(1 digit (1 digit (1 digit
= 0.1° C) = 0.1 ° F) = 0.1 K)
> 1000,0 32767 7FFFH > 1832,0 32767 7FFFH > 1273,2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1000,0 10000 2710H 1832,0 18320 4790H 1273,2 12732 31BCH Overshoot
: : : : : : : : : range
850,1 8501 2135H 1562,1 15621 3D05H 1123,3 11233 2BE1H
850,0 8500 2134H 1562,0 15620 3D04H 1123,2 11232 2BE0H Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-200,0 -2000 F830H -328,0 -3280 F330H 73,2 732 2DCH
-200,1 -2001 F82FH -328,1 -3281 F32FH 73,1 731 2DBH Undershoot
: : : : : : : : : range
-243,0 -2430 F682H -405,4 -4054 F02AH 30,2 302 12EH
< -243,0 -32768 8000H < -405,4 -32768 8000H < 30,2 32768 8000H Underflow

Representation of analog values for Pt x00 climatic resistance thermometers

Table 5- 17 Representation of analog values for Pt 100/200/500/1000 resistance thermometers

Pt x00 Unit Unit Pt x00 Unit Unit Range

Climatic in decimal hexa- Climatic in decimal hexa-
°C (1 digit decimal °F (1 digit decimal
= 0.01° C) = 0.01 °F)
> 155,00 32767 7FFFH > 311,00 32767 7FFFH Overflow
155,00 15500 3C8CH 311,00 31100 797CH Overshoot range
: : : : : :
130,01 13001 32C9H 266,01 26601 67E9H
130,00 13000 32C8H 266,00 26600 67E8H Nominal range
: : : : : :
-120,00 -12000 D120H -184,00 -18400 B820H
-120,01 -12001 D11FH -184,01 -18401 B81FH Undershoot range
: : : : : :
-145,00 -14500 C75CH -229,00 -22900 A68CH
< - 145,00 -32768 8000H < -229,00 -32768 8000H Underflow

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 193
Analog modules
5.4 Representation of analog values

Representation of analog values for Ni x00 standard resistance thermometers

Table 5- 18 Analog value representation for resistance thermometers Ni100, 120, 200, 500, 1000

Ni x00 Unit Unit Ni x00 Unit Unit Ni x00 Unit Unit Range
Standard in decimal hexa- Standard in decimal hexa- standard in decimal hexa-
°C (1 digit decimal °F (1 digit decimal K (1 digit decimal
= 0.1° C) = 0.1 °F) = 0.1 K)
> 295,0 32767 7FFFH > 563,0 32767 7FFFH > 568,2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
295,0 2950 B86H 563,0 5630 15FEH 568,2 5682 1632H Overshoot
: : : : : : : : : range
250,1 2501 9C5H 482,1 4821 12D5H 523,3 5233 1471H
250,0 2500 9C4H 482,0 4820 12D4H 523,2 5232 1470H Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-60,0 -600 FDA8H -76,0 -760 FD08H 213,2 2132 854H
-60,1 -601 FDA7H -76,1 -761 FD07H 213,1 2131 853H Undershoot
: : : : : : : : : range

-105,0 -1050 FBE6H -157,0 -1570 F9DEH 168,2 1682 692H

< -105,0 -32768 8000H < -157,0 -32768 8000H < 168,2 32768 8000H Underflow

Representation of analog values for Ni x00 climatic resistance thermometers

Table 5- 19 Analog value representation for resistance thermometers Ni 100, 120, 200, 500, 1000

Ni x00 Unit Unit Ni x00 Unit Unit Range

Climatic in decimal hexa- Climatic in decimal hexa-
°C (1 digit decimal °F (1 digit decimal
= 0.01° C) = 0.01 °F)
> 295,00 32767 7FFFH > 325,11 32767 7FFFH Overflow
295,00 29500 733CH 327,66 32766 7FFEH Overshoot range
: : : : : :
250,01 25001 61A9H 280,01 28001 6D61H
250,00 25000 61A8H 280,00 28000 6D60H Nominal range
: : : : : :
-60,00 -6000 E890H -76,00 -7600 E250H
-60,01 -6001 E88FH -76,01 -7601 E24FH Undershoot range
: : : : : :
-105,00 -10500 D6FCH -157,00 -15700 C2ACH
< -105,00 -32768 8000H < -157,00 -32768 8000H Underflow

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

194 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.4 Representation of analog values

Representation of analog values for Cu 10 standard resistance thermometers

Table 5- 20 Representation of analog values for Cu 10 standard resistance thermometers

Cu 10 Unit Unit Cu 10 Unit Unit Cu 10 Unit Unit Range

Standard in decimal hexa- Standard in decimal hexadec Standard in decimal hexa-
°C (1 digit decimal °F (1 digit imal K (1 digit decimal
= 0.01° C) = 0.01° F) = 0.01 K)
> 312,0 32767 7FFFH > 593,6 32767 7FFFH > 585,2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
312,0 3120 C30H 593,6 5936 1730H 585,2 5852 16DCH Overshoot
: : : : : : : : : range
260,1 2601 A29H 500,1 5001 12D5H 533,3 5333 14D5H
260,0 2600 A28H 500,0 5000 1389H 533,2 5332 14D4H Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-200,0 -2000 F830H -328,0 -3280 F330H 73,2 732 2DCH
-200,1 -2001 F82FH -328,1 -3281 F32FH 73,1 731 2DBH Undershoot
: : : : : : : : : range
-240,0 -2400 F6A0H -400,0 -4000 F060H 33,2 332 14CH
< -240,0 -32768 8000H < -400,0 -32768 8000H < 33,2 32768 8000H Underflow

Representation of analog values for Cu 10 climatic resistance thermometers

Table 5- 21 Representation of analog values for Cu 10 climatic resistance thermometers

Cu 10 Unit Unit Cu 10 Climatic in Unit decimal Unit hexadecimal Range

Climatic in decimal hexadecimal °F (1 digit = 0.01°
°C (1 digit F)
= 0.01° C)
> 180,00 32767 7FFFH >325,11 32767 7FFFH Overflow
180,00 18000 4650H 327,66 32766 7FFEH Overshoot range
: : : : : :
150,01 15001 3A99H 280,01 28001 6D61H
150,00 15000 3A98H 280,00 28000 6D60H Nominal range
: : : : : :
-50,00 -5000 EC78H -58,00 -5800 E958H
-50,01 -5001 EC77H -58,01 -5801 E957H Undershoot range
: : : : : :
-60,00 -6000 E890H -76,00 -7600 E250H
< -60,00 -32768 8000H < -76,00 -32768 8000H Underflow

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 195
Analog modules
5.4 Representation of analog values

5.4.8 Representation of analog values for thermocouples

Representation of analog values for thermocouples type B

Table 5- 22 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type B

Type B in Unit Unit Type B in Unit Unit Type B in K Unit Unit Range
°C decimal decimal °F decimal hexa- decimal hexa-
decimal decimal
> 2070,0 32767 7FFFH >3276,6 3276,6 7FFFH > 2343,2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
2070,0 20700 50DCH 3276,6 32766 7FFEH 2343,2 23432 5B88H Overshoot
: : : : : : : : : range
1821,0 18210 4722H 2786,6 27866 6CDAH 2094,2 20942 51CEH
1820,0 18200 4718H 2786,5 27865 6CD9H 2093,2 20932 51C4H Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
0,0 0 0000H -32,0 -320 FEC0H 273,2 2732 0AACH
Undershoot
: : : : : : : : : range
-120,0 -1200 FB50H -184,0 -1840 F8D0H 153,2 1532 05FCH
< -120,0 -32768 8000H < -184,0 -32768 8000H < 153,2 32768 8000H Underflow

Representation of analog values for thermocouples type E

Table 5- 23 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type E

Type E in Unit Unit Type E in Unit Unit Type E in K Unit Unit Range
°C decimal hexa- °F decimal hexa- decimal hexa-
decimal decimal decimal
> 1200,0 32767 7FFFH > 2192,0 32767 7FFFH > 1473,2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1200,0 12000 2EE0H 2192,0 21920 55A0H 1473,2 14732 398CH Overshoot
: : : : : : : : : range
1000,1 10001 2711H 1833,8 18338 47A2H 1274,2 12742 31C6H
1000,0 10000 2710H 1832,0 18320 4790H 1273,2 12732 31BCH Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-270,0 -2700 F574H -454,0 -4540 EE44H 0 0 0000H
< -270,0 < -2700 < F574H < -454,0 < -4540 <EE44H <0 <0 <0000H Underflow
Faulty wiring (polarity reversal, or open inputs, for example), or sensor error in the negative range (wrong
type of thermocouple, for example) will cause the analog input module to signal underflow, starting at ...
... F0C4H, and to output 8000H. ... FB70H, and to output 8000H. ... E5D4H, and to output 8000H.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

196 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.4 Representation of analog values

Representation of analog values for thermocouples type J

Table 5- 24 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type J

Type J in °C Unit Unit Type J in °F Unit Unit Type J in K Unit Unit Range
decimal hexa- decimal hexa- decimal hexa-
decimal decimal decimal
> 1450,0 32767 7FFFH > 2642,0 32767 7FFFH > 1723,2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1450,0 14500 38A4H 2642,0 26420 6734H 1723,2 17232 4350H Overshoot
: : : : : : : : : range
1201,0 12010 2EEAH 2193,8 21938 55B2H 1474,2 14742 3996H
1200,0 12000 2EE0H 2192,0 21920 55A0H 1473,2 14732 398CH Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-210,0 -2100 F7CCH -346,0 -3460 F27CH 63,2 632 0278H
< -210,0 < -2100 <F7CCH < -346,0 < -3460 <F27CH < 63,2 < 632 < 0278H Underflow
Faulty wiring (polarity reversal, or open inputs, for example), or sensor error in the negative range (wrong
type of thermocouple, for example) will cause the analog input module to signal underflow, starting at ...
... F31CH, and to output 8000H. ... EA0CH, and to output 8000H. ... FDC8H, and to output 8000H.

Representation of analog values for thermocouples type K

Table 5- 25 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type K

Type K in Unit Unit Type K in Unit Unit Type K in K Unit Unit Range
°C decimal hexa- °F decimal hexa- decimal hexa-
decimal decimal decimal
> 1622,0 32767 7FFFH > 2951,6 32767 7FFFH > 1895,2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1622,0 16220 3F5CH 2951,6 29516 734CH 1895,2 18952 4A08H Overshoot
: : : : : : : : : range
1373,0 13730 35A2H 2503,4 25034 61CAH 1646,2 16462 404EH
1372,0 13720 3598H 2501,6 25016 61B8H 1645,2 16452 4044H Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-270,0 -2700 F574H -454,0 -4540 EE44H 0 0 0000H
< -270,0 < -2700 < F574H < -454,0 < -4540 <EE44H <0 <0 < 0000H Underflow
Faulty wiring (polarity reversal, or open inputs, for example), or sensor error in the negative range (wrong
type of thermocouple, for example) will cause the analog input module to signal underflow, starting at ...
... F0C4H, and to output 8000H. ... E5D4H, and to output 8000H. ... FB70H, and to output 8000H.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 197
Analog modules
5.4 Representation of analog values

Representation of analog values for thermocouples type L

Table 5- 26 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type L

Type L in Unit Unit Type L in °F Unit Unit Type L in K Unit Unit Range
°C decimal hexa- decimal hexa- decimal hexa-
decimal decimal decimal
> 1150,0 32767 7FFFH > 2102,0 32767 7FFFH > 1423,2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1150,0 11500 2CECH 2102,0 21020 521CH 1423,2 14232 3798H Overshoot
: : : : : : : : : range
901,0 9010 2332H 1653,8 16538 409AH 1174,2 11742 2DDEH
900,0 9000 2328H 1652,0 16520 4088H 1173,2 11732 2DD4H Nominal
: : : : : : : : : range
-200,0 -2000 F830H -328,0 -3280 F330H 73,2 732 02DCH
< -200,0 < -2000 < F830H < -328,0 < -3280 < F330H < 73,2 < 732 <02DCH Underflow
Faulty wiring (polarity reversal, or open inputs, for example), or sensor error in the negative range (wrong
type of thermocouple, for example) will cause the analog input module to signal underflow, starting at ...
... F380H, and to output 8000H. ... EAC0H, and to output 8000H. ... FE2CH, and to output 8000H.

Representation of analog values for thermocouples type N

Table 5- 27 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type N

Type N in Unit Unit Type N in Unit Unit Type N in K Unit Unit Range
°C decimal hexa- °F decimal hexa- decimal hexa-
decimal decimal decimal
> 1550,0 32767 7FFFH > 2822,0 32767 7FFFH > 1823,2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1550,0 15500 3C8CH 2822,0 28220 6E3CH 1823,2 18232 4738H Overshoot
: : : : : : : : : range
1300,1 13001 32C9H 2373,8 23738 5CBAH 1574,2 15742 3D7EH
1300,0 13000 32C8H 2372,0 23720 5CA8H 1573,2 15732 3D74H Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-270,0 -2700 F574H -454,0 -4540 EE44H 0 0 0000H
< -270,0 < -2700 < F574H < -454,0 < -4540 <EE44H <0 <0 < 0000H Underflow
Faulty wiring (polarity reversal, or open inputs, for example), or sensor error in the negative range (wrong
type of thermocouple, for example) will cause the analog input module to signal underflow, starting at ...
... F0C4H, and to output 8000H. ... E5D4H, and to output 8000H. ... FB70H, and to output 8000H.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

198 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.4 Representation of analog values

Representation of analog values for thermocouple types R, S

Table 5- 28 Representation of analog values for thermocouple types R, S

Type R, S Unit Unit Type R, S Unit Unit Types R, S Unit Unit Range
in °C decimal hexa- in °F decimal hexa- in K decimal hexa-
decimal decimal decimal
> 2019,0 32767 7FFFH > 3276,6 32767 7FFFH > 2292,2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
2019,0 20190 4EDEH 3276,6 32766 7FFEH 2292,2 22922 598AH Overshoot
: : : : : : : : : range
1770,0 17770 4524H 3218,0 32180 7DB4H 2043,2 20432 4FD0H
1769,0 17690 451AH 3216,2 32162 7DA2H 2042,2 20422 4FC6H Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-50,0 -500 FE0CH -58,0 -580 FDBCH 223,2 2232 08B8H
-51,0 -510 FE02H -59,8 -598 FDAAH 222,2 2222 08AEH Undershoot
: : : : : : : : : range
-170,0 -1700 F95CH -274,0 -2740 F54CH 103,2 1032 0408H
< -170,0 -32768 8000H < -274,0 -32768 8000H < 103-2 < 1032 8000H Underflow

Representation of analog values for thermocouples type T

Table 5- 29 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type T

Type T in Unit Unit Type T in °F Unit Unit Type T in K Unit Unit Range
°C decimal hexa- decimal hexa- decimal hexa-
decimal decimal decimal
> 540,0 32767 7FFFH > 1004,0 32767 7FFFH > 813,2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
540,0 5400 1518H 1004,0 10040 2738H 813,2 8132 1FC4H Overshoot
: : : range
401,0 4010 0FAAH
400,0 4000 0FA0H 752,0 7520 1D60H 673,2 6732 1AACH Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-270,0 -2700 F574H -454,0 -4540 EE44H 3,2 32 0020H
< -270,0 < -2700 < F574H < -454,0 < -4540 <EE44H < 3,2 < 32 < 0020H Underflow
Faulty wiring (polarity reversal, or open inputs, for example), or sensor error in the negative range (wrong
type of thermocouple, for example) will cause the analog input module to signal underflow, starting at ...
... F0C4H, and to output 8000H. ... E5D4H, and to output 8000H. ... FB70H, and to output 8000H.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 199
Analog modules
5.4 Representation of analog values

Representation of analog values for thermocouples type U

Table 5- 30 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type U

Type U in Unit Unit Type U in Unit Unit Type U in K Unit Unit Range
°C decimal hexa- °F decimal hexa- decimal hexa-
decimal decimal decimal
> 850,0 32767 7FFFH > 1562,0 32767 7FFFH > 1123,2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
850,0 8500 2134H 1562,0 15620 2738,0H 1123,2 11232 2BE0H Overshoot
: : : : : : : : : range
601,0 6010 177AH 1113,8 11138 2B82H 874,2 8742 2226H
600,0 6000 1770H 1112,0 11120 2B70H 873,2 8732 221CH Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-200,0 -2000 F830H -328,0 -3280 F330H 73,2 732 02DCH
< -200,0 < -2000 < F830H < -328,0 < -3280 < F330H < 73,2 < 732 <02DCH Underflow
Faulty wiring (polarity reversal, or open inputs, for example), or sensor error in the negative range (wrong
type of thermocouple, for example) will cause the analog input module to signal underflow, starting at ...
... F380H, and to output 8000H. ... EAC0H, and to output 8000H. ... FE2CH, and to output 8000H.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

200 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.4 Representation of analog values

5.4.9 Representation of analog values for analog output channels

Introduction
The tables in this section contain the analog value representation for output channels of the
analog output modules. The values in the tables apply to all modules with the corresponding
output ranges.

Notes for readers of the tables

The tables "Bipolar output ranges", "Unipolar output ranges", "Life-zero output ranges"
contain the binary representation of the measured values.
Since the binary representation of the output values is always the same, starting with the
table at "Representation of Analog Values in the Voltage Output Range ± 10 V" these tables
only contain the output ranges and the units.

Binary representation of output ranges

The input ranges shown in tables "Bipolar output ranges", "Unipolar output ranges", "Life-
zero output ranges" are defined in complementary 2-by-2 representation:

Table 5- 31 Bipolar output ranges

Units Output Data word Range

value in
%
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
≧3251 0 % 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x Overflow
2
32511 117,589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overshoot
27649 ≧100,004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 range
27648 100,000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal
1 0,003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 range
0 0,000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-1 - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0,003617
- -100,000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
27648
- ≤100,004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
27649 Undershoot
- -117,593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 range
32512
≤ 3251 0 % 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x x x x x Underflow
3

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 201
Analog modules
5.4 Representation of analog values

Table 5- 32 Unipolar output ranges

Units Output Data word Range

value in
%
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
≧3251 0 % 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x Overflow
2
32511 117,589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overshoot
27649 ≧100,004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 range

27648 100,000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal

1 0,003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 range
0 0,000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
- 1 0,000 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Limited to
- 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 the low limit
32512 of the
nominal
range, 0 V
or 0 mA
≤ 3251 0 % 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x x x x x Underflow
3

Table 5- 33 Life-zero input ranges

Units Output Data word Range

value in
%
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
≧3251 0 % 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x Overflow
2
32511 117,589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overshoot
27649 ≧100,004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 range

27648 100,000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal

1 0,003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 range

0 0,000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-1 - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Undershoot
0,003617 range
- 6912 -25,000 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
- 6913 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Limited to
overshoot
range lower
limit 0 V
-25,000 and 0 mA
-
32512 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
≤- - 25 % 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x x x x x Underflow
32513

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

202 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.4 Representation of analog values

Representation of analog values in the voltage output ranges

Table 5- 34 Representation of analog values in the ±10 V output range

System Voltage output range

Dec. Hex. ±10 V
118,5149 % 32767 7FFF 0.00 V Overflow, off power
32512 7F00
117,589 % 32511 7EFF 11.76 V Overshoot range
27649 6C01
100 % 27648 6C00 10 V
75 % 20736 5100 7.5 V Nominal range
0,003617 % 1 1 361.7 µV
0% 0 0 0V
-1 FFFF - 361.7 µV
- 75 % - 20736 AF00 - 7.5 V
- 100 % - 27648 9400 - 10 V
- 27649 93FF Undershoot range
- 117,593 % - 32512 8100 - 11.76 V
- 32513 80FF Underflow, idle state
- 118,519 % - 32768 8000 0.00 V

Table 5- 35 Representation of analog values in the 0 V to 10 V and 1 V to 5 V output ranges

System Voltage output range

Dec. Hex. 0 to 10 V 1 to 5 V
118,5149 % 32767 7FFF 0.00 V 0.00 V Overflow, off power
32512 7F00
117,589 % 32511 7EFF 11.76 V 5.70 V Overshoot range
27649 6C01
100 % 27648 6C00 10 V 5V
75 % 20736 5100 7.5 V 3.75 V Nominal range
0,003617 % 1 1 361.7 µV 1V+144.7µV
0% 0 0 0V 1V
-1 FFFF Undershoot range
- 25 % - 6912 E500 0V
- 6913 E4FF Not possible. The output value is
- 117,593 % - 32512 8100 limited to 0 V.
- 32513 80FF Underflow, idle state
- 118,519 % - 32768 8000 0.00 V 0.00 V

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 203
Analog modules
5.4 Representation of analog values

Representation of analog values in the current output ranges

Table 5- 36 Representation of analog values in the ±20 mA output range

System Current output range

Dec. Hex. ± 20 mA
118,5149 % 32767 7FFF 0.00 mA Overflow, off power
32512 7F00
117,589 % 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA Overshoot range
27649 6C01
100 % 27648 6C00 20 mA
75 % 20736 5100 15 mA Nominal range
0,003617 % 1 1 723.4 mA
0% 0 0 0 mA
-1 FFFF - 723.4 mA
- 75 % - 20736 AF00 - 15 mA
- 100 % - 27648 9400 - 20 mA
- 27649 93FF Undershoot range
- 117,593 % - 32512 8100 - 23.52 mA
- 32513 80FF Underflow, idle state
- 118,519 % - 32768 8000 0.00 mA

Table 5- 37 Representation of analog values in the 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA output ranges

System Current output range

Dec. Hex. 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA
118,5149 % 32767 7FFF 0.00 mA 0.00 mA Overflow, off power
32512 7F00
117,589 % 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA 22.81 mA Overshoot range
27649 6C01
100 % 27648 6C00 20 mA 20 mA Nominal range
75 % 20736 5100 15 mA 15 mA
0,003617 % 1 1 723.4 mA 4mA+578.7 nA
0% 0 0 0 mA 4 mA
-1 FFFF Undershoot range
- 25 % - 6912 E500 0 mA
- 6913 E4FF Not possible. Output value
- 117,593 % - 32512 8100 limited to 0 mA.
- 32513 80FF Underflow, idle state
- 118,519 % - 32768 8000 0.00 mA 0.00 mA

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

204 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.5 Setting the measuring method and ranges of analog input channels

5.5 Setting the measuring method and ranges of analog input channels

Two procedures
There are two procedures for setting the measuring method and ranges of analog input
channels of analog modules:
● With a measuring range module and STEP 7
● By hardwiring the analog input channel, and programming in STEP 7
The method to use for the various analog modules is module-specific, and described in detail
in the relevant module sections.
The procedure for setting the measuring method and measuring range of the module in
STEP 7 is described in the respective sections.
This section describes how to set the measuring method and range using measuring range
modules.

Setting the measuring method and range using measuring range modules
Analog modules are supplied with measuring range modules as required.
Reposition the measuring range modules to suit the measuring method and range.

NOTICE
Make sure that the measuring range modules are on the side of the analog input module.
Before you install the analog input module, check the measuring method and range of the
measuring range modules, and adapt these as required.

Optional settings of the measuring range modules

Optional settings of the measuring range modules are: "A", "B", "C" and "D".
For detailed information on specific measuring method and range settings, refer to the
relevant module section.
The settings for the various measuring methods and ranges are also shown on the printed
label of the analog module.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 205
Analog modules
5.5 Setting the measuring method and ranges of analog input channels

Replugging measuring range modules

To reconnect a measuring range module:

Graphic Description
Use a screwdriver to lever the
measuring range module out of the
analog input module.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

206 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.5 Setting the measuring method and ranges of analog input channels

Graphic Description
Insert the measuring range module
into the required slot (1) of the analog
input module.
The measuring range selected is the
one that points to the marker point on
module (2).
Continue with the insertion of all other
measuring range modules.

Then mount the module.

CAUTION
Danger of damage to equipment.
Faulty measuring range module settings may lead to the destruction of the module.
Always make sure the measuring range module is in the correct position before you
connect any sensors to the module.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 207
Analog modules
5.6 Behavior of the analog modules

5.6 Behavior of the analog modules

5.6.1 Introduction

Overview
This section describes:
● How the analog input and output values depend on the operating states of the CPU and
the supply voltage of the analog module
● The reaction of analog modules, based on the actual analog value within the relevant
value range
● The effect of errors on analog modules with diagnostics capability
● The effect of the operational limit of the analog module on the analog input and output
value, as illustrated by an example

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

208 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.6 Behavior of the analog modules

5.6.2 Effect of supply voltage and operating mode

Overview
The IO values of analog modules are determined by the CPU operating state and the
module's supply voltage.

Table 5- 38 Dependencies of the analog IO values on the CPU's operating State and on the L+ supply voltage

CPU operating state Supply voltage L+ at the Output value of the Input value of the
analog module analog output module analog input module*
POWER RUN L+ present CPU values Measured value
ON Until the first conversion... 7FFFH, until the first conversion
 after power-up has been after POWER ON is completed,
completed, a signal of 0 mA or when the module has been
or 0 V is output. programmed.
 after programming is
successfully completed, it
outputs the previous value.
L+ missing 0 mA / 0 V
POWER STOP L+ present Substitution value / last value Measured value
ON (default: 0 mA / 0 V) 7FFFH, until the first conversion
L+ missing 0 mA / 0 V after POWER ON is completed,
or when the module has been
programmed.
POWER - L+ present 0 mA / 0 V -
OFF L+ missing 0 mA / 0 V -
* L+ only required with 2-wire sensors

Behavior on failure of the supply voltage

Failure of the load power supply L+ of the diagnostics-capable analog module is indicated in
the case of configured 2-wire sensors by the EXTF LED on the module. This information is
also available on the module (in the diagnostic buffer data.)
Diagnostics interrupt triggering is based on parameter settings.

See also
General information about parameter assignment (Page 216)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 209
Analog modules
5.6 Behavior of the analog modules

5.6.3 Effect of the value range for analog values

Effect of errors on analog modules with diagnostics capability

Errors may lead to an entry in the diagnostics buffer and trigger a diagnostic interrupt at
analog modules with diagnostics function and corresponding parameter settings. You will
find the errors that might be involved in the section "Diagnostics of the analog modules".

Effect of value range on the analog input module

The reaction of analog modules is determined by the actual input values within the value
range.

Table 5- 39 Reaction of analog input modules as a function of the actual analog value within the value range

Measured value within Input value LED (EXTF) Diagnostics Interrupt

Nominal range Measured value - - -
Overshoot/undershoot range Measured value - - -
Overflow 7FFFH lit1 Entry is made1 Diagnostic interrupt1
Underflow 8000H lit1 Entry is made1 Diagnostic interrupt1
Outside of the programmed limit Measured value - - Hardware interrupt1
1 Only for modules with diagnostics function and depending on parameter settings

Effect of value range on the analog output module

The reaction of analog modules is determined by the actual output values within the value
range.

Table 5- 40 Behavior of the analog output modules as a function of the position of the analog value within the value range

Output value within Output value LED (EXTF) Diagnostics Interrupt

Nominal range CPU value - - -
Overshoot/undershoot range CPU value - - -
Overflow 0 signal - - -
Underflow 0 signal - - -

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

210 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.6 Behavior of the analog modules

5.6.4 Effect of operational limit and basic error limit

Operational limit
The operational limit represents the measuring error, or output error, of an analog module
across the entire permissible temperature range of the module, based on the module's
nominal range.

Basic error limit

The basic error limit represents the operational limit at 25° C, based on the module's nominal
range.

Note
The percentage details of operational and basic error limits in the specifications of the
modules always refer to the highest possible input and output value in the nominal range of
the module. In the ± 10 V measurement range this would be the 10 V.

Example of determination of the output error of a module

An analog output module SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit is being used for voltage output. An output
range of "±10 V" is set. The module is operating at an ambient temperature of 30° C, i.e. the
operational limit applies. The specifications of the module state:
● Operational limit for voltage output: ±0,5 %
Hence, an output error of ±0.05 V (±0.5 % of 10 V) across the nominal range of the module
must be expected.
This means that with an actual voltage of, say, 1 V, a value in the range from 0.95 V to 1.05
V is output by the module. The relative error is ±5 % in this case.
For the example, the figure below shows how the relative error decreases as the output
value approaches the end of the 10V range.

±0,05 V ±0,05 V ±0,05 V

= ±5 %)
(^ = ±0,625 %)
(^ = ±0,5 %*)
(^

1
-1 V 0V 1V 8V 10 V

* Operational limit
(1) Output value
Figure 5-1 Example of the relative error of an analog output module

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 211
Analog modules
5.7 Conversion, cycle, settling and response time of analog modules

5.7 Conversion, cycle, settling and response time of analog modules

Conversion time of analog input channels

The conversion time is the total of the basic conversion time plus additional processing times
of the module for:
● Resistance measurement
● Wire break monitoring
The basic conversion time depends directly on the conversion method of the analog input
channel (integrating method, actual value conversion.)
The integration time of integrating conversions has a direct influence on conversion times.
The integration time depends on the interference frequency suppression you set in STEP 7.
For information on basic conversion times and additional processing times of the various
analog modules, refer to the specifications of the relevant module.

Cycle time of analog input channels

The analog/digital conversion and the transfer of the digitized measured values to memory or
to the backplane bus take place sequentially. In other words, the analog input channels are
converted one after the other. The scan time - in other words, the time elapsing until an
analog input value is again converted - is the sum of the conversion times of all activated
analog input channels of the analog input module.
The figure below provides an overview of the cycle time elements for an n-channel analog
module.

Conversion time, channel 1

Conversion time, channel 2

Cycle time

Conversion time, channel 3

Figure 5-2 Scan time of an analog input or output module

Basic execution time of the analog input channels

The basic execution time corresponds to the cycle time for all the enabled channels.

Setting of the smoothing of analog values

You can set the smoothing of the analog values in STEP 7 for some analog input modules.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

212 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.7 Conversion, cycle, settling and response time of analog modules

Use of smoothing
Smoothing of analog values ensures a stable analog signal for further processing.
It makes sense to smooth the analog values with slow variations of measured values, for
example, with temperature measurements.

Smoothing principle
The measured values are smoothed by digital filtering. Smoothing is accomplished by the
module calculating mean values, derived from a defined number of converted (digitized)
analog values.
The user assigns parameters to smoothing with a maximum of four levels (none, weak,
medium, strong). The grade determines the number of analog signals used for averaging.
A higher smoothing provides a more reliable analog value, and prolongs the time it takes to
apply a smoothed analog signal following a step response (see the example below.)

Example
The figure below shows the number of cycles a module requires to apply an almost 100%
analog value after a step response, based on the smoothing function settings. The figure
applies to all signal changes at the analog input.

Signal variation in Step response for any analog input signal

percent
100

63

50

0 50 100 150 200

Smoothing Low: Module cycles
average:
high:

Figure 5-3 Example of the effect of smoothing on step responses

Further information on smoothing

For information showing whether a specific module supports smoothing functions, and
special features to observe, refer to the section dealing with the analog input module.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 213
Analog modules
5.7 Conversion, cycle, settling and response time of analog modules

Conversion time of the analog output channels

The conversion time of the analog output channels includes the transfer of digitized output
values from internal memory, and their digital-to-analog conversion.

Cycle time of analog output channels

The analog output channels are converted sequentially - that is the analog output channels
are converted one after the other.
The cycle time - that is the time expiring until an analog output value is converted again, is
equivalent to the accumulated conversion times of all activated analog output channels.
Refer to the figure "Cycle Time of an Analog Input/Output Channel".

Basic execution time of the analog output channels

The basic execution time corresponds to the cycle time for all the enabled channels.

Note
You should disable any analog channels that are not being used to reduce the scan time in
STEP 7.

Overview of the settling time and response time of the analog output modules
tA

tE
tZ

t1 t2 t3

tA = Response time
tS = Setting time
t3 = Specified output value reached
t2 = Output value transferred and converted
tC = Cycle time, corresponds to n x conversion time (n = activated channels)
t1 = New output value is present
Figure 5-4 Settling and response times of the analog output channels

Settling time
The settling time (t2 to t3) - that is the time from the application of the converted value until
the specified value is obtained at the analog output - depends on the load. We therefore
distinguish between resistive, capacitive and inductive load.
For information on settling times as a function of load at the various analog output modules,
refer to the specifications of the relevant module.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

214 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.7 Conversion, cycle, settling and response time of analog modules

Response time
The response time (t1 to t3) - that is the time from the application of the digital output values
in internal memory until the specified value is obtained at the analog output - is, in the most
unfavorable case, the sum of the cycle time and the settling time.
The worst case scenario is given, when the analog channel has been converted immediately
before a new output value is transferred, and is not converted again until all other channels
have been converted (cycle time.)

See also
Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit (Page 254)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 215
Analog modules
5.8 Assigning parameters to analog modules

5.8 Assigning parameters to analog modules

5.8.1 General information about parameter assignment

Introduction
The characteristics of analog modules may differ. The characteristics of the modules can be
defined by assigning parameters.

Tools for parameter assignment

You program analog modules in STEP 7.
After you have defined all parameters, download these from your programming device to the
CPU. The CPU transfers the parameters to the relevant analog modules at the STOP > RUN
transition.

Static and dynamic parameters

The parameters are divided into static and dynamic parameters.
Set the static parameters in STOP mode of the CPU, as described above.
You may also edit dynamic parameters in the active user program of an S7 PLC using SFCs.
However, the parameters set in STEP 7 will be applied again after a RUN > STOP, STOP >
RUN transition of the CPU. You will find a description of the parameter assignment of
modules in the user program in the Appendix.

Configuration in RUN (CiR)

CiR (Configuration in RUN) is a method you can use to modify your system or edit the
parameters of individual modules. These changes are made while your system is in
operation, that is, your CPU will stay in RUN over a maximum of 2.5 seconds while these
changes are applied.
For detailed information on this topic, refer to the "Configuration in RUN by means of CiR"
manual. This manual is found, for example, as a file in PDF format on the STEP 7 CD
supplied.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

216 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.8 Assigning parameters to analog modules

5.8.2 Parameters of analog input modules

Overview
Analog input modules use a subset of the parameters and value range listed in the table
below, based on their functionality. For information on subsets "supported" by specific
analog modules, refer to the section dealing with the relevant module.
The defaults apply if you have not set any parameters in STEP 7.

Table 5- 41 Parameters of analog input modules

Parameters Value range Default2 Parameter Scope

type
Enable
 Diagnostic interrupt1 Yes/no No Dynamic Module
 Hardware interrupt1 Yes/no No
 Destination CPU for 1 to 4 - Static Module
interrupt
Hardware interrupt trigger
 End of scan cycle Yes/no No Static Channel
reached at input
May be restricted by the measuring range
 High limit 32511 to - 32512 - Dynamic Channel
 Low limit -32512 to 32511
Diagnostics
 Wire break Yes/no No
 Reference channel error Yes/no No
 Underflow Yes/no No
 Overflow Yes/no No
 Short-circuit to M Yes/no No Static Channel
Measurement
 Measuring method Disabled U
U Voltage
4DMU Current (4-wire sensor)
2DMU Current (2-wire sensor)
R-4L Resistance (4-conductor
connection) Static Channel
R-3L Resistance (3-conductor
connection)
RTD-4L Thermal resistance (linear, 4-
conductor connection)
RTD-3L Thermal resistance (linear, 3-
conductor connection)
TC-L Thermocouple (linear)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 217
Analog modules
5.8 Assigning parameters to analog modules

Parameters Value range Default2 Parameter Scope

type
 Measuring range For information on configurable measuring ± 10 V
ranges of the input channels, refer to the
relevant module description.
 Reference temperature - 273.15 to 327.67° C 0° C Dynamic Module
 Temperature unit Degrees Celsius; degrees Fahrenheit; Kelvin Degrees Static Module
Celsius
 Temperature coefficient Platinum (Pt) 0,00385 Static Channel
for temperature 0.00385 Ω/Ω/° C
measurement with 0.003916 Ω/Ω/° C
thermal resistance (RTD) 0.003902 Ω/Ω/° C
0.003920 Ω/Ω/° C
Nickel (Ni)
0.00618 Ω/Ω/° C
0.00672 Ω/Ω/° C
 Interference frequency 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 10 Hz; none 50 or 60 Hz
suppression
 Smoothing None None
Weak
Medium
Strong
 Reference junction None None
internal
RTD on channel 0
dynamic reference temperature value
1If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to "No" because the interrupt lines are not available in
ER-1/ER-2.
2 Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the analog modules with the default settings.

See also
Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (Page 267)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

218 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.8 Assigning parameters to analog modules

5.8.3 Parameters of analog output modules

Overview
Analog output modules use a subset of the parameters and value range listed in the table
below, based on their functionality. For information on subsets "supported" by specific
analog modules, refer to the section dealing with the relevant module.
The default settings apply if you have not set any parameters in STEP 7.

Table 5- 42 Parameters of analog output modules

Parameters Value range Default Parameter Scope

setting1 type
Output
 Output type Deactivated U Static Channel
voltage
current
 Output range For information on configurable measuring ± 10 V
ranges of output channels, refer to the relevant
module description.
1 Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the analog modules with the default settings.

See also
Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (Page 267)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 219
Analog modules
5.9 Connecting sensors to analog inputs

5.9 Connecting sensors to analog inputs

Introduction
The analog input modules support various sensors, such as voltage/current sensors, and
resistors, depending on the set measuring method.
This section contains general information that is generally applicable to all the connection
options for sensors described in the sections that follow.

Cables for analog signals

Always use shielded twisted-pair cables to wire analog signals. This reduces interference.
Connect both ends of the analog cable shield to ground.
If there are potential differences between the cable ends, an equipotential bonding current,
which can flow over the shield, can cause interference of the analog signals. To avoid this
situation, you should ground the shield only at one end of the cable.

Non-isolated analog input modules

In the case of the non-isolated analog input modules there is an electrical connection
between the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and chassis ground.
You use non-isolated analog modules if there are few or no potential differences between
the measuring sensors and chassis ground.

Isolated analog input modules

With the isolated analog input modules there is no electrical connection between the
reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and chassis ground.
You use isolated analog input modules if a potential difference UISO can occur between the
reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and chassis ground. By means of an
equipotential bonding conductor between the MANA terminal and chassis ground, make sure
that UISO does not exceed the permitted value.

Limited potential difference UCM

Only a limited potential difference UCM (common mode voltage) may occur amongst the M-
measuring lines of the input channels and between the leads and the reference point of the
measuring circuit MANA. In order to prevent the permissible value from being exceeded, you
must take different actions, described below, depending on the potential connection of the
sensors.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

220 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.9 Connecting sensors to analog inputs

Connecting electrically isolated sensors

The isolated sensors are not connected with the local ground potential (chassis ground).
They can be floating.
With isolated sensors, potential differences might arise between the different sensors. These
potential differences can arise as a result of interference or the local distribution of the
sensors.
To ensure that the permissible value for UCM is not exceeded during use in heavily EMC-
affected environments, connect M- to MANA in modules with an MANA connection.

M+
M-
1 M+
M-

3 MANA

UISO

2
(1) Electrically isolated sensors
(2) Chassis ground
(3) Connection required for modules with MANA
M +: Measuring line (positive)
M -: Measuring line (negative)
MANA: Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
UISO: Potential difference between MANA and chassis ground
Figure 5-5 Connecting isolated sensors to an electrically isolated AI

NOTICE
Do not connect M- to MANA when connecting 2-wire transducers for current measurement
and when connecting resistance-type sensors. This also applies to inputs which are
programmed accordingly, but remain unused.

Non-isolated sensors
The isolated sensors are not connected with the local ground potential (chassis ground).
When using non-isolated sensors, you must connect MANA to chassis ground.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 221
Analog modules
5.9 Connecting sensors to analog inputs

Connecting non-isolated sensors

Depending on local conditions or interference, potential differences UCM (static or dynamic)
can occur between the locally distributed measuring points. If the permitted value for UCM is
exceeded, there must be equipotential bonding conductors between the measuring points.

M+
M-
M+
1
M-

UCM

MANA

3 UISO

2
(1) Non-isolated sensors
(2) Chassis ground
(3) Equipotential bonding conductor
M +: Measuring line (positive)
M -: Measuring line (negative)
MANA: Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
UISO: Potential difference between MANA and chassis ground
Figure 5-6 Connecting non-isolated sensors to an isolated AI

NOTICE
Do not use non-isolated 2-wire transducers and non-isolated resistance-type sensors!

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

222 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.10 Connecting voltage sensors

5.10 Connecting voltage sensors

Connecting voltage sensors

Note
The cables required to connect the analog input module and the sensors are not drawn in
the figures shown below.
In other words, you must continue to read and follow the instructions in the section
"Connecting sensors to analog inputs", which contains general information on connecting
sensors.

+ M+
U M-
- M+
+
M-
U
-

MANA*

M +: Measuring line (positive)

M -: Measuring line (negative)
MANA: Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
(1) Connection required for modules with Mana
Figure 5-7 Connecting voltage sensors to an AI

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 223
Analog modules
5.11 Connecting current sensors

5.11 Connecting current sensors

Sensor supply voltage

Note
The cables required to connect the analog input module and the sensors are not drawn in
the figures shown below.
In other words, you must continue to read and follow the instructions in the section
"Connecting sensors to analog inputs", which contains general information on connecting
sensors.

The 2-wire sensor is wired to a short-circuit-proof supply voltage at the terminals of the
analog input module. This 2-wire transducer then converts the measured variable into a
current.
Because the 2-wire transducer is supplied by the module, you must not ground the M-
cables.
4-wire transducers require a separate supply voltage UH (auxiliary supply).

Connecting 2-wire transducers

2 3
+24 V
1
L+
+ M+
P - M-
M+
P +
- M-

MANA
M M

M +: Measuring line (positive)

M -: Measuring line (negative)
L +: Power supply connection 24 VDC
MANA: Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
(1) Sensor, for example, pressure gauge
(2) + (3) 2-wire transducer
(4) Connection required for modules with Mana
Figure 5-8 Connecting 2-wire transducers to an isolated AI

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

224 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.11 Connecting current sensors

SM 431; 8 x 13 Bit: Connecting 2-wire transducers

Because the supply voltage for the 2-wire transducers is not fed by the SM 431; 8 x 13 Bit,
you must supply the sensors separately with 24 V.

2 3 +24 V
1
MV+
+ MI+
P - MI+
M-
+
P MV+
-
MI+
MI+
M-

M MANA

MI+: Measuring current (positive)

MV+: Measuring voltage (positive)
M +: Measuring line (positive)
MANA: Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
M -: Measuring line (negative)
(1) Sensor, for example, pressure gauge
(2)+(3) 2-wire transducer
Figure 5-9 Connecting 2-wire transducers to an SM 431; 8 x 13 Bit

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 225
Analog modules
5.11 Connecting current sensors

Connecting 4-wire transducers

2
1

M+
P +
- M-
M+
P + M-
-

UH

MANA
3

M +: Measuring line (positive)

M -: Measuring line (negative)
MANA: Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
UH: Auxiliary voltage
(1) Sensor, for example, pressure gauge
(2) 4-wire transducer
(3) Connection required for modules with Mana
Figure 5-10 Connecting 4-wire transducers to an AI

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

226 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.11 Connecting current sensors

SM 431; 8 x 13 Bit: Connecting 4-wire transducers

To ensure that the permissible value for UCM is not exceeded, you must connect the M-
cables to MANA.

2
1
MV+
MI+
P + MI+
- M-
MV+
P +
- MI+
MI+
M-

UH

MI+: Measuring current (positive)

MV+: Measuring voltage (positive)
M +: Measuring line (positive)
M -: Measuring line (negative)
UH: Auxiliary voltage
(1) Sensor, for example, pressure gauge
(2) 4-wire transducer
Figure 5-11 Connecting 4-wire transducers to an SM 431; 8 x 13 Bit

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 227
Analog modules
5.12 Connecting resistance thermometers and resistors

5.12 Connecting resistance thermometers and resistors

Connecting resistance thermometers and resistors

Note
The cables required to connect the analog input module and the sensors are not drawn in
the figures shown below.
In other words, you must continue to read and follow the instructions in the section
"Connecting sensors to analog inputs", which contains general information on connecting
sensors.

Resistance thermometers/resistors are wired in 2-, 3- or 4-wire technique.

With 4-conductor and 3-conductor connections, the module supplies a constant current via
terminals IC + and IC - so that the potential drop occurring on the measuring cables is
compensated. It is imperative to wire the constant current cables directly to the resistance
thermometer/resistor.
Compensated measurements with 3- or 4-wire elements return a more precise result
compared to 2-wire measurements.

4-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer

The voltage generated at the resistance thermometer is measured via the M+ and M-
terminals. When you connect, watch out for the polarity of the connected cable (connect IC +
and M+ as well as IC- and M- to the resistance thermometer).
Make sure that the connected cables IC + and M+ andSO and SE+ and cables IC - and M-
and AGND and SE- are connected directly on the resistance thermometer.

M+ SE+
M- SE-
IC+ SO
IC- AGND
IC

IC+ Constant current line (positive)

IC- Constant current line (negative)
M+ Measuring line (positive)
M- Measuring line (negative)
Figure 5-12 4-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer to an AI

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

228 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.12 Connecting resistance thermometers and resistors

3-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer

With a 3-conductor connection to modules with 4 terminals per resistance thermometer, you
must set up a jumper between M- and IC- and SE- and AGND (see Figure).
The module compensates in this circuit for the effect of the line resistance between the
module and the resistance thermometer/resistor.
Make sure that the connected cables IC + and M+ and SO and SE+ are directly connected to
the resistance thermometer.
To get an accurate measurement, make sure that the connected cables M+, IC + and IC- and
SE+, SO and AGND are the same length and have the same cross-section.

M+ SE+
M- SE-
IC+ SO
IC- AGND
IC

IC+ Constant current line (positive)

IC- Constant current line (negative)
M+ Measuring line (positive)
M- Measuring line (negative)
Figure 5-13 3-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer to an electrically isolated analog
input

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 229
Analog modules
5.12 Connecting resistance thermometers and resistors

2-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer

For 2-conductor connections, bridge the M+ and IC+, and the M- and IC- terminals of the
module.
Note: Cable resistance is also measured.

M+
M-
IC+
IC-

IC+ Constant current line (positive)

IC- Constant current line (negative)
M+ Measuring line (positive)
M- Measuring line (negative)
Figure 5-14 2-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer to an electrically isolated analog
input

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

230 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.13 Connecting thermocouples

5.13 Connecting thermocouples

Thermocouple design
Thermocouples consist of a pair of thermal probes, and all necessary installation and
connecting parts. The thermocouple consists of two wires of dissimilar metals or metal alloys
soldered or welded together at the ends.
There are different types of thermocouple, depending on the composition of the material
used, for example, K, J, N thermocouples. The measuring principle of all thermocouples is
the same, irrespective of their type.

1 2
3

°C

(1) Measuring junction

(2) Thermocouple with positive or negative limbs
(3) Connecting point
(4) Compensating leads
(5) Reference junction
(6) Leads
(7) Measurement input
Figure 5-15 Thermocouple design

Operating principle of thermocouples

If the measuring point is subjected to a temperature different from that of the free ends of the
thermocouple (point of connection), a voltage, the thermo e.m.f., occurs at the free ends.
The magnitude of the thermo-e.m.f. generated depends on the difference between the
temperature at the measuring junction and the temperature at the free ends, as well as on
the material combination used for the thermocouple.
Since a thermocouple always measures a temperature difference, the free ends must be
kept at a known temperature at a reference junction in order to determine the temperature of
the measuring junction.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 231
Analog modules
5.13 Connecting thermocouples

The thermocouples can be extended from their point of connection to the reference junction
by means of compensating wires. These compensating wires are made of the same
materials as the thermocouple wires. The supply lines are made of copper.

Note
Make sure that the polarity is correct, otherwise significant measuring errors will occur.

Compensation of the reference junction temperature

There are several options for you to choose from for acquiring the reference junction
temperature in order to obtain an absolute temperature value from the difference in
temperature between the reference junction and measuring point.
You can use internal or external compensation, depending on where you want the reference
junction to be.
The last column of the following table lists the feature you must set for the "Reference
Junction" parameter in STEP 7. The reference temperature value is a separate parameter in
STEP 7.
Options for compensation of the reference junction temperature

Option Explanations Reference junction

No compensation When you want to acquire only the difference in None
temperature between the measuring point and the
reference junction
Internal compensation If you employ internal compensation, the internal Internal
temperature of the module is used for comparison
purposes.
External compensation with a You have already acquired and compensated the None
compensating box in leads of an reference junction temperature using a compensating box,
individual thermocouple which you have looped into an individual thermocouple.
Further processing at the module is not required.
External compensation with a resistance You can acquire the reference temperature by means of a RTD on Channel 0
thermometer to obtain the reference resistance thermometer (pt 100) and have it calculated by
junction temperature (recommended the module for any thermocouple.
method)
External compensation with a resistance Use a resistance thermometer on a module that measures RTD on Channel 0
thermometer when thermocouples with the reference junction temperature. Read in the climatic
the same reference junction are divided temperature value to the CPU and transfer the value to the
amongst several modules other modules using SFC55.
Constant reference junction temperature If the reference junction temperature is constant and Reference
(thermometer, ice bath) known, you can specify this value in parameter temperature value
assignment in STEP 7.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

232 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.13 Connecting thermocouples

Principle of operation of internal compensation

Internal compensation allows you to form the reference point at the terminals of the analog
input module. In this case, route the compensating lines directly to the analog module. The
internal temperature sensor measures the module's temperature and returns a
compensation voltage.
Note: internal compensation is not as accurate as external compensation.

Principle of operation of external compensation with compensating box

If you employ external compensation, the temperature of the reference junction of the
thermocouples is taken into account via a compensating box, for example.
The compensating box contains a bridge circuit calibrated for a definite reference junction
temperature. The reference junction is formed by the connecting ends of the thermocouple's
compensating lines.
The resistance of the temperature-sensitive bridge changes as a function of the difference
between the actual reference temperature and calibrating temperature. This difference
induces a positive or negative compensating voltage, which is added to the thermal voltage.

Note
The figures below do not show the connecting lines required to connect the electrical
potentials of the analog input module and transducers. In other words, you must continue to
read and follow the instructions provided by the generally applicable information on
connecting sensors.

Connection of thermocouples without compensation or using the reference temperature value

Wire the thermocouples either directly to the inputs of the module, or indirectly via
compensating lines. Each channel can use a thermocouple type supported by the analog
module independently of the other channels.

M+
M-
M+
M-

M +: Measuring line (positive)

M -: Measuring line (negative)
(1) Compensating leads (same material as thermocouple)
Figure 5-16 Connection of thermocouples without compensation or using the reference temperature
value to an isolated AI

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 233
Analog modules
5.13 Connecting thermocouples

Connecting the compensating box

The compensating box is looped in through the leads of each thermocouple. The
compensating box must be supplied on an isolated basis. The power supply module must
provide adequate noise filtering, for example, by means of grounded cable shielding.
Each channel can use a thermocouple type supported by the analog module independently
of the other channels. Each channel requires its own compensating box.

Note
Use compensating boxes with a reference junction temperature of 0° C for analog input
modules.

Recommended compensating box

We recommend you to use a reference junction (with integrated power supply unit) from
Siemens as a compensating box. You will find the necessary ordering data in the table
below.
Ordering information for the reference junction

Recommended compensating box Order number

Reference junction with integrated power supply unit, for rail M72166-V V V V V
mounting
Auxiliary power B1 230 VAC B1
B2 110 VAC
B3 24 VAC B2

B4 24 VDC B3
Connection to 1 Fe-CuNi Type L
thermocouple 2 Fe/Cu Ni Type J
B4

1
3 Ni Cr/Ni Type K
2
4 Pt 10% Rh/Pt Type S
3
5 Pt 13% Rh/Pt Type R 4
6 Cu-CuNi Type U 5
7 Cu/Cu Ni Type T 6
Reference 00 0° C 7
temperature
00

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

234 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.13 Connecting thermocouples

Connecting to the reference junction (Order No. M72166-xxx00)

+ -
-
-
1 + M+
+ M-
M+
M-

M +: Measuring line (positive)

M -: Measuring line (negative)
(1) Auxiliary power
(2) Compensating leads (same material as thermocouple)
(3) Output (Cu wires)
Figure 5-17 Connection of a thermocouple with reference junction (Order No. M72166-xxx00) to an
Isolated AI

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 235
Analog modules
5.13 Connecting thermocouples

Connecting thermocouples using resistance thermometers

Connect the resistance thermometer to channel 0 of the module. Make sure that you
configure the "RTD on Channel 0" reference junction in STEP 7 for each channel that has a
thermocouple connected to it.
If all thermocouples connected to the module's inputs share a common reference junction,
compensate the circuit as follows:

M+
M-
I C+
1
I C-
M+
M-
M+
M-

4 3
M +: Measuring line (positive)
M -: Measuring line (negative)
IC+: Constant current line (negative)
IC+: Constant current line (negative)
(1) Compensating leads (same material as thermocouple)
(2) RTD on Channel 0
(3) Incoming line (Cu)
(4) Reference junction
Figure 5-18 Connection of thermocouples of the same type with external compensation by means of
a resistance thermometer, connected to channel 0

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

236 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.14 Connecting loads/actuators to analog outputs

5.14 Connecting loads/actuators to analog outputs

Introduction
The analog output modules can be used to supply power to loads and actuators.
This section contains general information that is generally applicable to all the connection
options for loads and actuators described in the sections that follow.

Cables for analog signals

Always use shielded twisted-pair cables to wire analog signals. Form two twisted pairs of the
QV and S+, and M and S- signals. This reduces interference. Connect both ends of the
analog cable shield to ground.
If there are potential differences between the cable ends, an equipotential bonding current,
which can flow over the shield, can cause interference of the analog signals. To avoid this
situation, you should ground the shield only at one end of the cable.

Isolated analog output modules

With the isolated analog output modules there is no electrical connection between the
reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and chassis ground.
You must use isolated analog output modules if a potential difference UISO can occur
between the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and chassis ground. By means of
an equipotential bonding conductor between the MANA terminal and chassis ground, make
sure that UISO does not exceed the permitted value.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 237
Analog modules
5.15 Connecting loads/actuators to voltage outputs

5.15 Connecting loads/actuators to voltage outputs

Connecting loads to a voltage output

Connecting loads to a voltage output is possible both in a 4-conductor and a 2-conductor
connection.

Note
The cables required to connect the analog output module are not drawn in the figures shown
below.
In other words, you must continue to read and follow the instructions in the section
"Connecting loads/actuators to analog outputs", which contains general information on
connecting sensors.

4-conductor connection of loads to a voltage output

You can use the 4-wire technique to achieve a high accuracy at the load by wiring the S- and
S+ sensor lines directly to the load. This results in direct measurement and correction of the
voltage at the load.
Faults or a voltage drop can result in a potential difference between the sensor lead S- and
the reference circuit of the analog circuit MANA. This potential difference (UCM) must not
exceed the permissible value. A negative influence on the accuracy of the analog signal is
otherwise inevitable.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

238 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.15 Connecting loads/actuators to voltage outputs

L+ +24 V

QV
S+ RL
S-
MANA

UISO
M
0V

1
L +: Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage
QV: Analog output voltage
S +: Sensing line (positive)
S -: Sensing line (negative)
MANA: Reference potential of the analog circuit
M: Ground
UISO: Potential difference between MANA and chassis ground
(1) Chassis ground
Figure 5-19 4-conductor connection of loads to a voltage output of an electrically isolated analog
output module

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 239
Analog modules
5.15 Connecting loads/actuators to voltage outputs

2-conductor connection of loads to a voltage output

In the case of a 2-conductor connection, connect QV with S+ and MANA with S on the front
connector. However, this will not provide the accuracy of a 4-conductor connection.
Wire the loads to the QV terminals and to the reference point of measuring circuit MANA.

L+ +24 V

QV
S+ RL
S-
MANA

UISO
M
0V

1
L +: Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage
QV: Analog output voltage
S +: Sensing line (positive)
S -: Sensing line (negative)
MANA: Reference potential of the analog circuit
M: Ground
UISO: Potential difference between MANA and chassis ground
(1) Chassis ground
Figure 5-20 2-conductor connection of loads to a voltage output of an electrically isolated analog
output module

See also
Connecting loads/actuators to analog outputs (Page 237)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

240 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.16 Connecting loads/actuators to current outputs

5.16 Connecting loads/actuators to current outputs

Connecting loads to current outputs

Always connect loads to QI and to the reference point of analog circuit MANA of a current
output.

Note
The cables required to connect the analog output module are not drawn in the figure shown
below.
In other words, you must continue to read and follow the instructions in the section
"Connecting loads/actuators to analog outputs", which contains general information on
connecting sensors.

+24 V
L+

QI

RL
MANA

UISO
M
0V

1
L +: Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage
Q I: Analog output current
MANA: Reference potential of the analog circuit
M: Ground
UISO: Potential difference between MANA and chassis ground
(1) Chassis ground
Figure 5-21 Connecting loads to a current output of an isolated AO

See also
Connecting loads/actuators to analog outputs (Page 237)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 241
Analog modules
5.17 Diagnostics functions of analog modules

5.17 Diagnostics functions of analog modules

Programmable and non-programmable diagnostic messages

We distinguish between programmable and non-programmable diagnostic messages.
You only obtain programmable diagnostic messages if you have enabled the diagnostics
using the relevant parameters. You perform parameter assignment in the "Diagnostics" tab
in STEP 7.
The analog module always provides non-programmable diagnostic messages, irrespective of
the enable state of diagnostics functions.

Reactions to diagnostic messages in STEP 7

Actions initiated by diagnostic messages:
● The diagnostic message is entered in the diagnostics of the analog module, forwarded to
the CPU and can be read out by the user program.
● The error LED on the analog module is lit.
● If you have set "Enable Diagnostic Interrupt" in STEP 7, a diagnostic interrupt is triggered
and OB 82 is called.

Reading diagnostic messages

You can read detailed diagnostic messages using SFCs in the user program (refer to the
appendix "Diagnostic data of signal modules").
You can view the cause of the error in STEP 7 in the module diagnostics (refer to the online
help for STEP 7).

Diagnostic message in the measured value of analog input modules

All analog input modules return the measured value 7FFFH as a reaction to errors,
irrespective of parameter settings. This measured value indicates either overflow, error, or a
disabled channel.

Diagnostics using the INTF and EXTF LEDs

Some analog input modules indicate faults by means of their two fault LEDs INTF (internal
fault) and EXTF (external fault). The LEDs go out when all the internal and external faults
have been eliminated.
Refer to the specifications of the modules to find out which analog input modules have these
fault LEDs.

Diagnostic messages of the analog input modules

The table below gives an overview of the diagnostic messages for the analog input modules
with diagnostics capability.
You can find out which diagnostic messages are possible with which modules in the
Appendix entitled "Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules".

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

242 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.17 Diagnostics functions of analog modules

Table 5- 43 Diagnostic messages of the analog input modules

Diagnostic message LED Scope of diagnostics Programmable

Module error INTF/EXTF Module No
Internal error INTF Module No
External error EXTF Module No
Channel error INTF/EXTF Module No
External auxiliary voltage missing EXTF Module No
Front connector missing EXTF Module No
No module parameters INTF Module No
Incorrect parameters INTF Module No
Channel information available INTF/EXTF Module No
Measuring range module incorrect/missing INTF Module No
Thermocouple connection error EXTF Module No
STOP mode - Module No
EPROM error INTF Module No
RAM error INTF Module No
ADC/DAC error INTF Module No
Hardware interrupt lost INTF Module No
Configuration / programming error INTF Channel No
Short-circuit to M EXTF Channel Yes
Wire break EXTF Channel Yes
Reference channel error EXTF Channel Yes
Underflow EXTF Channel Yes
Overflow EXTF Channel Yes
User connection not wired EXTF Channel No
Open conductor in + direction EXTF Channel No
Open conductor in - direction EXTF Channel No
Run time calibration error EXTF Channel No
Underrange or overrange EXTF Channel No
Open conductor in the current source EXTF Channel No
User calibration does not correspond to the EXTF Channel No
parameter assignment

Note
A prerequisite for detecting the errors indicated by programmable diagnostic messages is
that you must have assigned parameters to the analog module accordingly in STEP 7.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 243
Analog modules
5.17 Diagnostics functions of analog modules

Causes of errors and remedies for analog input modules

Table 5- 44 Diagnostic messages of the analog input modules, causes of errors and remedies

Diagnostic message Possible cause of error Remedy

Module error Any, the module has detected an error. -
Internal error Module has detected an error within the -
automation system.
External error Module has detected an error outside of -
the automation system.
Channel error Indicates that only certain channels are -
faulty
External auxiliary voltage Load voltage to supply the 2-wire Connect supply L+
missing transducer is missing on terminals L+ and
M.
Front connector missing Jumper between connections 1 and 2 in Install jumper
the front connector is missing.
No module parameters Module requires information whether it Message present after power on, until the CPU
should operate with default system has completed the transfer of parameters;
parameters or with your parameters. configure the module as required.
Incorrect parameters A parameter or combination of parameters Reassign parameters to the module
is incorrect; impermissible measurement
range, for example.
Channel information Channel error; module can provide -
available additional channel information.
Measuring range module One or more measuring range modules is Insert the measuring range modules on the
incorrect/missing missing or incorrectly inserted module according to the parameter assignment
of the type of measurement and the
measurement range
STOP mode No parameters have been assigned to the If a reboot of the CPU all the digitized analog
module and the first module cycle has not values are in the intermediate memory, this
been completed. message is reset
EPROM error Module is defective Replace the module
RAM error
ADC/DAC error
Hardware interrupt lost The module cannot send an interrupt, Change the interrupt handling in the CPU
since the previous interrupt was not (change priority for interrupt OB; shorten
acknowledged; possible configuration interrupt program).
error.
Configuration / Illegal parameters transferred to module Check the measuring range module
programming error Reassign parameters to the module
Short-circuit to M A short-circuit to the M potential has Eliminate the short-circuit.
occurred on the sensor supply of 2-wire
transducers.
Wire break Resistance of transducer circuit too high Use a different type of transducer, or modify the
wiring, for example, using a larger conductor
cross-section.
Open circuit between module and sensor Connect the cable
Channel not connected (open) Disable channel ("Measuring type" parameter)
Wire the channel

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

244 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.17 Diagnostics functions of analog modules

Diagnostic message Possible cause of error Remedy

Reference channel error The reference junction connected at Check the connections
channel 0 is faulty due to a wire break, for
example.
The reference temperature value Reassign the parameters for the reference
transferred is not within the value range. temperature
Underflow Input value below undershoot range; Set another measuring range
possible cause of error: wrong measuring
range selected
With the measuring ranges 4 to 20 mA Check the connections
and 1 to 5 V, if necessary by polarity
reversal of sensor connection
Overflow Input value exceeds overshoot range Set another measuring range
Run time calibration error A wiring fault has occurred on a channel Eliminate the wiring fault (fault remains until the
during the calibration cycle next calibration; in other words, a maximum 6
minutes or until there is a STOP-RUN transition
of the CPU).

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 245
Analog modules
5.18 Interrupts of analog modules

5.18 Interrupts of analog modules

Introduction
This section describes the interrupt reaction of analog modules. There are two types of
interrupt:
● Diagnostic interrupt
● Hardware interrupt
Note: certain analog modules do not support interrupts, or can only partially "handle" the
interrupts described below. For information on modules supporting interrupt functions, refer
to their specifications.
For detailed information on the OBs and SFCs mentioned below, refer to the STEP 7 Online
Help.

Enabling interrupts
The interrupts are not preset - in other words, they are inhibited without appropriate
parameter assignment. Interrupts are enabled in STEP 7.

Special feature: The module is inserted in ER-1/ER-2

Note
If you use the analog module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set the parameters for the input of all
the interrupts to "No" because the interrupt lines are not available in ER-1/ER-2.

Diagnostic interrupt
When diagnostic interrupts are enabled, incoming error events (initial occurrence) and
outgoing error events (error is cleared) are reported by means of an interrupt.
The CPU interrupts user program execution, and executes diagnostic interrupt OB82.
In the user program, you can call SFC 51 or SFC 59 in OB 82 to obtain more detailed
diagnostic information from the module.
The diagnostic information is consistent until such time as OB 82 is exited. When OB 82 is
exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged on the module.

Hardware interrupt with trigger "high and low limit exceeded"

Define a working range by setting a high and low limit. If the process signal (for example, the
temperature) leaves this working range, the module triggers a hardware interrupt, provided
the interrupt is enabled.
As a result, the CPU interrupts execution of the user program and executes hardware
interrupt OB 40.
In the user program of OB 40, you can set how the programmable controller is required to
react to a limit value being surpassed or not being reached.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

246 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.18 Interrupts of analog modules

When OB 40 is exited, the hardware interrupt is acknowledged on the module.

Note
Note: the system does not generate a hardware interrupt if your limit setting exceeds the
overshoot or undershoot range.

Structure of the start information tag OB40_POINT_ADDR of OB 40

The limit values exceeded by the different channels are entered in the start information of
OB 40 in the tag OB40_POINT_ADDR. The figure below shows the assignment of bits in
DWORD 8 of local data.

LB 8 LB 9 LB 11

.1 .0
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 17 16 1 0 Bit-Nr.
1 1 1 1 LD 8

1 2 3 4
(1) Value exceeds high limit in channel 1
(2) Value exceeds high limit in channel 0
(3) Value exceeds low limit in channel 1
(4) Value exceeds low limit in channel 0
(5) Bit No.
Figure 5-22 Start Information of OB 40: Which event has violated limits and triggered a hardware
interrupt

Hardware interrupt triggered by "Reached end of scan cycle"

A hardware interrupt programmed to be triggered at the end of scan cycles allows you to
synchronize a process with the scan cycle of the analog input module.
A scan cycle includes the conversion of the measured values of all active channels of the
analog input module. The module processes the channels in succession. When all measured
values are successfully converted, the module reports the existence of new measurement
data at its channels to the CPU by means of an interrupt.
You can always use this interrupt to load the actual, converted analog values.

See also
Features (Page 248)
General information about parameter assignment (Page 216)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 247
Analog modules
5.19 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-1KF00-0AB0)

5.19 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-1KF00-0AB0)

5.19.1 Features

Overview
The analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit has the following features:
● 8 inputs for voltage/current measurement
● 4 inputs for resistance measurement
● Various measuring ranges, adjustable in parallel
● Resolution 13 bits
● Analog section isolated from CPU
● The maximum permissible common mode voltage between the channels and between
the reference potential of the connected sensors and MANA is 30 VAC

Block diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit

MV0+
MI0+
MI0+
Suppressor circuit, current jumpering

M0-
D
CH0
Bus S7-400
Bus control

CH1 CH1

CH7 CH7

Front connectors
F_CON monitoring
+5V
+5V
M ANA Bus S7-400
0V 0V
Bus S7-400
-5V

Figure 5-23 Block diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

248 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.19 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-1KF00-0AB0)

WARNING
The module can be damaged.
The shunt of an input channel can be destroyed if you inadvertently connect a voltage
sensor to the M- /MI+ terminals of a channel.
Make sure that the front connector wiring corresponds to the following wiring diagram.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 249
Analog modules
5.19 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-1KF00-0AB0)

Wiring diagram SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit

Voltage Current measurement Resistance

measurement measurement
1
2
3
4
5
6 MV0+ MV0+ M0+
7 MI0+
V CH0 Word 0 CH0
8 MI0+
9 M0- M0- M0-
10 CH0 Word 0
11 MV1+ MV1+ IC0+
12 MI1+
CH1 Word 2 CH1
13 MI1+
14 A M1- M1- IC0-
15
16 MV2+ MV2+ M1+
17 MI2+
CH2 Word 4 CH2
18 MI2+
19 M2- M2- M1-
20 CH2 Word 4
21 MV3 + MV3 + IC1+
22 MI3 +
CH3 Word 6 CH3
23 MI3 +
24 M3- M3- IC1-
25 MANA
26 M ANA
27
28 MV4+ MV4+ M2+
29 MI4+
V CH4 Word 8 CH4
30 MI4+
31 M4- M4- M2-
32 CH4 Word 8
33 MV5+ MV5+ IC2+
34 MI5+
CH5 Word 10 CH5
35 MI5+
A
36 M5- M5- IC2-
37
38 MV6+ MV6+ M3 +
39 MI6+
CH6 Word 12 CH6
40 MI6+
41 M6- M6- M3-
42
CH6 Word 12
43 MV7+ MV7+ IC3 +
44 MI7+
45 CH7 Word 14 MI7+ CH7
46 M7- M7- IC3-
47
48

Figure 5-24 Wiring diagram SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

250 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.19 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-1KF00-0AB0)

Specifications of the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210
Weight Approx. 500 g
Module-specific data
Number of inputs 8
 With resistance-type sensor 4
Cable length
 Shielded Max. 200 m
Voltages, currents, electrical potentials
Nominal load voltage L+ Not required
Constant measured current for resistance-type Typ. 1.67 mA
sensor
Electrical isolation
 Between channels and the backplane bus Yes
 Between channels No
Permissible potential difference
 Between inputs and MANA (UCM) 30 VAC
 Between input (UCM) 30 VAC
 Between MANA and M-internal (UISO) 75 VDC / 60 VAC
Isolation test voltage
 Between bus and analog section 2120 VDC
 Between bus and chassis ground 500 VDC
 Between analog section and chassis ground 2120 VDC
Current consumption
 From the backplane bus (5 V) Max. 350 mA
Power loss of the module Typ. 1.8 W
Formation of analog values
Measuring principle Integrating
Integration/conversion time/resolution (per channel) (Does not go into the response time)
 Programmable Yes
 Noise suppression f1 in Hz 60 / 50
 Integration time in ms 16,7 / 20
 Basic conversion time in ms 23 / 25
 Resolution (including overshoot range) 13/13 bit
Measured value smoothing Not supported
Basic execution time of the module, in ms (all 184 / 200
channels enabled)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 251
Analog modules
5.19 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-1KF00-0AB0)

Noise suppression, error limits

Noise suppression at F = n (f1 ± 1%)
(f1 = interference frequency) n = 1, 2, ...
 Common-mode interference (UCM <30 V) > 100 dB
 Series-mode interference (peak value of > 40 dB
disturbance < nominal input range)
Crosstalk between inputs > 50 dB
Operational limit (across temperature range, relative to input range)
 Voltage input
– ±1V ± 1,0 %
– ± 10 V ± 0,6 %
– 1 to 5 V ± 0,7 %
 Current input
– ± 20 mA ± 1,0 %
– 4 to 20 mA ± 1,0 %
 Resistance measurement 0 to 500 Ω; ± 1,25 %
4-conductor measurement (in the range of 600Ω)
Basic error limit (operational error limit at 25° C, relative to input range)
 Voltage input
– ±1V ± 0,7 %
– ± 10 V ± 0,4 %
– 1 to 5 V ± 0,5 %
 Current input
– ± 20 mA ± 0,7 %
– 4 to 20 mA ± 0,7 %
 Resistance measurement 0 to 500 Ω; 4-conductor ± 0,8 %
measurement (in the range of 600Ω)
Temperature error with reference to the input range
 In the resistance measurement range ± 0.02 % K
 In all the other measurement ranges ± 0.007 % K
Linearity error (with reference to the input range) ± 0.05 % K
Repetition accuracy (in transient state at 25° C, ± 0,1 %
relative to input range)
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions None
Injection of substitution values No

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

252 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.19 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-1KF00-0AB0)

Sensor selection data

Input range (nominal values) / input impedance
 Voltage ± 1 V / 200 kΩ
± 10 V / 200 kΩ
1 to 5 V / 200 k Ω
 Current ± 20 mA / 80 Ω
4 to 20 mA / 80 Ω
 Resistance 0 to 600 Ω; of use up to 500 Ω
Permissible current at current input (destruction limit) 40 mA continuous
Connection for signal sensors
 For voltage measurement Supported
 For current measurement
– As 2-wire transducer Supported; with external transducer supply
Supported
– As 4-wire transducer
 For resistance measurement
– With 2-conductor connection Supported: cable resistances are also
– With 3-conductor connection measured
– With 4-conductor connection Supported

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 253
Analog modules
5.19 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-1KF00-0AB0)

5.19.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit

Setting the operating mode

You set the mode of operation of the SM 431; AI 8 x13 Bit in STEP 7.

Parameters
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog
modules in the respective sections.
The table below provides an overview of configurable parameters, including defaults.

Table 5- 45 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit

Parameters Value range Default1 Parameter Scope

type
Measurement
 Measuring Disabled U
method
U Voltage Static Channel
4DMU Current (4-wire sensor)
2DMU Current (2-wire sensor)
R-4L Resistance (4-conductor
connection)
 Measuring Refer to respective section for the ± 10 V
range measuring ranges of the input channels that
you can set.
 Interference 60 Hz; 50 Hz 50 Hz
frequency
suppression
1 Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the analog modules with the default settings.

See also
General information about parameter assignment (Page 216)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

254 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.19 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-1KF00-0AB0)

5.19.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit

Measuring methods
You can set the measuring method at the input channels:
● Voltage measurement
● Current measurement
● Resistance measurement
You perform the setting with the "measuring method" parameter in STEP 7.

Circuit for resistance measurement

The following conditions apply when measuring the resistance with the SM 431; AI 8 x 13
Bit:

Table 5- 46 Channels for resistance measurement of the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit

Measuring type parameter Permissible Condition

for channel n
Resistance 0, 2, 4 or 6 You must disable the "Measuring type" parameter for channels n+1
(4-conductor connection) (1, 3, 5, 7).
Reason: The connections of channel n+1 are used to supply the
resistance that is connected to channel n.

Unused channels
Unused channels can be left open. You can improve the noise immunity of the module in a
measuring environment with serious interference by short-circuiting the channels and
connecting to MANA. For unused channels, set the "measuring method" parameter to
"deactivated". This reduces the module's cycle time.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 255
Analog modules
5.19 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-1KF00-0AB0)

Measuring ranges
Set the measuring ranges at the "measuring range" parameter in STEP 7.

Table 5- 47 Measuring ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit

Selected measuring method Measuring range Description

V: Voltage ±1 V The digitized analog values are listed in the section
1 V to 5 V "Representation of analog values for output channels" in
±10 V the voltage measuring range.
2DMU: Current 4 to 20 mA The digitized analog values are listed in the section
(2-wire transducer) "Representation of analog values for output channels in the
current measuring range".
4DMU: Current 4 to 20 mA The digitized analog values are listed in the section
(4-wire transducer) ± 20 mA "Representation of analog values for output channels in the
current measuring range".
R-4L: Resistance 600 Ω The digitized analog values are listed in the section
(4-conductor connection) "Representation of analog values for output channels in the
resistance-type sensor range".

Default
The "voltage" measuring method and "± 10 V" measuring range are set by default at the
module. You can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without
configuring the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit in STEP 7.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

256 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.20 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

5.20 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

5.20.1 Features

Overview
The analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit has the following features:
● 8 inputs for voltage/current measurement
● 4 inputs for resistance and temperature measurement
● Various measuring ranges, adjustable in parallel
● Resolution 14 bits
● Particularly suitable for measuring temperatures
● Parameters can be assigned to temperature sensor types
● Linearization of the sensor characteristic curves
● Supply voltage: 24 VDC required only for the connection of 2-wire transducers
● Analog section isolated from CPU
● The maximum permissible common mode voltage between the channels and between
the channel and central ground is 120 VAC

Note
"Wire break" diagnostics
You can configure the diagnostics "wire break" for the measuring method "voltage" for
this module but it is not evaluated by the module in this measurement type.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 257
Analog modules
5.20 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

Block diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit

CH0 Measuring
range
CH1 module 0

Bus S7-400

Bus control
A
MULTIPLEXER
OPTO RELAY

CH6 Measuring
range
CH7 module 3

+ 5V ENABLE
+ 15V 24 V Bus S7-400
L+
M 0V 0V Bus S7-400
- 15V

Figure 5-25 Block diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

258 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.20 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

Wiring diagram SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit

Thermocouples Resistance measurement

Voltage measurement- Resistance thermometer
Current measurement
1
2
3
L+ L+
4
5
6 M0+ CH0 Word 0 M0+
7 M0- M0-
8
9 CH0 Word 0
10
11 M1+ CH1 Word 2 IC0+
V
12 M1- IC0-
13
14
15
16 M2+ CH2 Word 4 M1+
17 M2- M1-
18
19 CH2 Word 4
20
21 M3 + CH3 Word 6 IC1+
22 M3- IC1-
23
24
25
26
27
28 M4+ CH4 Word 8 M2+
V
29 M4- M2-
30
31 CH4 Word 8
32
33 M5+ CH5 Word 10 IC2+
V
34 M5- IC2-
35
36
37
38 M6+ Word 12 M3 +
Tr CH6
39 M6- M3-
40
41 CH6 Word 12
42
43 M7+ CH7 IC3 +
Tr Word 14
44 M7- IC3-
45
46
47
M M M
48

Figure 5-26 Wiring diagram SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 259
Analog modules
5.20 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

Specifications of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210
Weight Approx. 500 g
Module-specific data
Number of inputs 8
 With resistance-type sensor 4
Cable length
 Shielded Max. 200 m
 In the 80 mV input range and with thermocouples Max. 50 m
Voltages, currents, electrical potentials
Nominal load voltage L+ 24 VDC (only required for the supply of 2-
wire transducers)
 Reverse polarity protection Yes
Transducer power supply
 Supply current Max. 50 mA
 Short-circuit-proof Yes
Constant measured current for resistance-type sensor Typ. 1.67 mA
Electrical isolation
 Between channels and the backplane bus Yes
 Between channels No
 Between channels and load voltage L+ Yes
Permissible potential difference
 Between inputs and MANA (UCM) 120 VAC
 Between input (UCM) 120 VAC
 Between MANA and M-internal (UISO) 75 VDC / 60 VAC
Isolation test voltage
 Between bus and L+/M 2120 VDC
 Between bus and analog section 2120 VDC
 Between bus and chassis ground 500 VDC
 Between analog section and L+/M 707 VDC
 Between analog section and chassis ground 2120 VDC
 Between L+/M and chassis ground 2120 VDC
Current consumption
 From the backplane bus (5 V) Max. 600 mA
 From load voltage L+ Max. 200 mA (with 8 connected, fully
controlled 2-wire transducers)
Power loss of the module Typ. 3.5 W

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

260 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.20 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

Formation of analog values

Measuring principle Integrating
Integration/conversion time/resolution (per channel) (Does not go into the response time)
 Programmable Yes
 Noise suppression f1 in Hz 60 / 50
 Integration time in ms 16,7 / 20
 Basic conversion time in ms 20,1 / 23,5
 Additional conversion time for resistance 40,2 / 47
measurements in ms
 Additional conversion time for wire break 4,3 / 4,3
monitoring in ms
 Additional conversion time for measuring 5,5 / 5,5
resistance in ms
 Resolution (including overshoot range) 14/14 bit
 Smoothing activated 16/16 bit
Measured value smoothing Parameters can be assigned in 4 stages
Basic execution time of the module, in ms (all 161 / 188
channels enabled)
Noise suppression, error limits
Noise suppression at f = nx (f1 ± 1%)
(f1 = interference frequency) n = 1, 2, ...
 Common-mode interference (UCM < 120 Vpp) > 100 dB
 Series-mode interference (peak value of > 40 dB
disturbance < nominal input range)
Crosstalk between inputs > 70 dB
Operational limit (across temperature range, relative to input range)
 Voltage input
– ± 80 mV ± 0,38 %
– ± 250 mV ± 0,35 %
– ± 500 mV ± 0,35 %
– ±1V ± 0,35 %
– ± 2.5 V ± 0,35 %
– ±5V
± 0,35 %
– 1 to 5 V
± 0,35 %
– ± 10 V
± 0,35 %
 Current input
– 0 to 20 mA ± 0,35 %
– ± 20 mA ± 0,35 %
– 4 to 20 mA ± 0,35 %

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 261
Analog modules
5.20 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

 Resistance measurement
– 0 to 48 Ω; 4-conductor measurement ± 0,35 %
– 0 to 150 Ω; 4-conductor measurement ± 0,35 %
– 0 to 300 Ω; 4-conductor measurement ± 0,35 %
– 0 to 600 Ω; 4-conductor measurement ± 0,35 %
– 0 to 5000 Ω; 4-conductor measurement (in the ± 0,35 %
range of 6000 Ω)
± 0,5 %
– 0 to 300 Ω; 3-conductor measurement
– 0 to 600 Ω; 3-conductor measurement ± 0,5 %
– 0 to 5000 Ω; 3-conductor measurement (in the ± 0,5 %
range of 6000 Ω)
 Thermocouples
– TC type B ± 14.8 K
– TC type R ± 9.4 K
– TC type S ± 10.6 K
– TC type T ± 2.2 K
– TC type E ± 4.0 K
– TC type J
± 5.2 K
– TC type K
± 7.6 K
– TC type U
± 3.5 K
– TC type L
± 5.1 K
– TC type N
± 5.5 K
 Resistance thermocouples, 4-conductor standard
measuring range ± 4.6 K
– Pt 100
± 5.7 K
– Pt 200
± 4.6 K
– Pt 500
± 3.7 K
– Pt 1000
± 0.9 K
– Ni 100
± 0.9 K
– Ni 1000
Climatic measuring range
± 0.5 K
– Pt 100
± 0.5 K
– Pt 200
± 0.5 K
– Pt 500
– Pt 1000 ± 0.5 K
– Ni 100 ± 0.9 K
– Ni 1000 ± 0.9 K

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

262 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.20 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

 Resistance thermocouples, 3-conductor standard

measuring range ± 5.2 K
– Pt 100
± 8.2 K
– Pt 200
± 6.5 K
– Pt 500
± 5.2 K
– Pt 1000
± 1.3 K
– Ni 100
± 1.3 K
– Ni 1000
Climatic measuring range
± 0.7 K
– Pt 100
± 0.7 K
– Pt 200
± 0.7 K
– Pt 500
– Pt 1000 ± 0.7 K
– Ni 100 ± 1.3 K
– Ni 1000 ± 1.3 K

Basic error limit (operational error limit at 25° C, relative to input range)
 Voltage input
– ± 80 mV ± 0,17 %
– ± 250 mV ± 0,15 %
– ± 500 mV ± 0,15 %
– ±1V ± 0,15 %
– ± 2.5 V ± 0,15 %
– ±5V
± 0,15 %
– 1 to 5 V
± 0,15 %
– ± 10 V
± 0,15 %
 Current input
– 0 to 20 mA ± 0,15 %
– ± 20 mA ± 0,15 %
– 4 to 20 mA ± 0,15 %
 Resistance measurement
– 0 to 48 Ω; 4-conductor measurement ± 0,15 %
– 0 to 150 Ω; 4-conductor measurement ± 0,15 %
– 0 to 300 Ω; 4-conductor measurement ± 0,15 %
– 0 to 600 Ω; 4-conductor measurement ± 0,15 %
– 0 to 5000 Ω; 4-conductor measurement (in the ± 0,15 %
range of 6000 Ω)
± 0,3 %
– 0 to 300 Ω; 3-conductor measurement
– 0 to 600 Ω; 3-conductor measurement ± 0,3 %
– 0 to 5000 Ω; 3-conductor measurement (in the ± 0,3 %
range of 6000 Ω)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 263
Analog modules
5.20 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

 Thermocouples
– TC type B ± 8.2 K
– TC type R ± 5.2 K
– TC type S ± 5.9 K
– TC type T ± 1.2 K
– TC type E ± 1.8 K
– TC type J
± 2.3 K
– TC type K
± 3.4 K
– TC type U
± 1.8 K
– TC type L
± 2.3 K
– TC type N
± 2.9 K
 Resistance thermocouples, 4-conductor standard
measuring range ± 2.0 K
– Pt 100
± 2.5 K
– Pt 200
± 2.0 K
– Pt 500
± 1.6 K
– Pt 1000
± 0.4 K
– Ni 100
± 0.4 K
– Ni 1000
Climatic measuring range
± 0.2 K
– Pt 100
± 0.2 K
– Pt 200
± 0.2 K
– Pt 500
– Pt 1000 ± 0.2 K
– Ni 100 ± 0.4 K
– Ni 1000 ± 0.4 K

 Resistance thermocouples, 3-conductor standard

measuring range ± 3.1 K
– Pt 100
± 4.9 K
– Pt 200
± 3.9 K
– Pt 500
± 3.1 K
– Pt 1000
± 0.8 K
– Ni 100
± 0.8 K
– Ni 1000
Climatic measuring range
± 0.4 K
– Pt 100
± 0.4 K
– Pt 200
± 0.4 K
– Pt 500
– Pt 1000 ± 0.4 K
– Ni 100 ± 0.8 K
– Ni 1000 ± 0.8 K

Temperature error (relative to input range) ± 0.004 % K

Linearity error (relative to input range) ± 0.01 % K
Repetition accuracy (in transient state at 25° C, ± 0,1 %
relative to input range)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

264 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.20 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions None
Injection of substitution values No
Sensor selection data
Input range (nominal values) / input impedance
 Voltage ± 80 mV / 1 MΩ
± 250 mV / 1 MΩ
± 500 mV / 1 MΩ
± 1 V / 1 MΩ
± 2.5 V / 1 MΩ
± 5 V / 1 MΩ
1 to 5 V / 1 MΩ
± 10 V / 1 MΩ
 Current 0 to 20 mA / 50 Ω
± 20 mA / 50 Ω
4 to 20 mA / 50 Ω
 Resistance 0 to 48 Ω / 1 MΩ
0 to 150 Ω / 1 MΩ
0 to 300 Ω / 1 MΩ
0 to 600 Ω / 1 MΩ
0 to 6000 Ω / 1 MΩ
(of use up to 5000 Ω)
 Thermocouples TC type B / 1 MΩ
TC type R / 1 MΩ
TC type S / 1 MΩ
TC type T / 1 MΩ
TC type E / 1 MΩ
TC type J / 1 MΩ
TC type K / 1 MΩ
TC type U / 1 MΩ
TC type L / 1 MΩ
TC type N / 1 MΩ
 Resistance thermometer Pt 100 / 1 MΩ
Pt 200 / 1 MΩ
Pt 500 / 1 MΩ
Pt 1000 / 1 MΩ
Ni 100 / 1 MΩ
Ni 1000 / 1 MΩ
Permissible voltage at voltage input (destruction limit) Max. 18 V continuous
75 V for 1 ms (cycle factor 1 : 20)
Permissible current at current input (destruction limit) 40 mA continuous

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 265
Analog modules
5.20 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

Connection for signal sensors

 For voltage measurement Supported
 For current measurement
– As 2-wire transducer Supported
– As 4-wire transducer Supported
 For resistance measurement
– With 2-conductor connection Supported: cable resistances are also
measured
– With 3-conductor connection Supported
– With 4-conductor connection Supported
 Load of the 2-wire transducer Max. 750 Ω
Characteristic linearization Programmable
 For thermocouples Types B, R, S, T, E, J, K, U, L, N
 Of resistance thermometers Pt 100, Pt 200, Pt 500, Pt 1000,
Ni 100, Ni 1000
Temperature compensation Yes, programmable
 Internal temperature compensation No
 External temperature compensation with Supported
compensating box
 External temperature compensation with Pt 100 Supported
 Compensation for definable reference junction Supported
temperature
Technical unit of temperature measurements Degrees Celsius

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

266 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.20 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

5.20.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit

Setting the operating mode

You set the mode of operation of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit by means of measuring range
modules on the module and in STEP 7.

Measuring range modules

A measuring range module of the module matches two channels and one resistance channel
to each type of sensor. Reposition the measuring range modules to suit the measuring
method and range. The steps you have to perform to do this are described in detail in the
respective section.
For an overview of the settings of specific measuring methods and ranges, refer to the
corresponding table in the section "Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431;
AI 8 x 14 Bit". The necessary settings are also shown on the label attached to the module.

Parameters
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog
modules in the respective sections.
The table below provides an overview of configurable parameters, including defaults.

Table 5- 48 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit

Parameters Value range Default Parameter Scope

setting1 type
Diagnostics
 Wire break Yes/no No Static Channel
Measurement
 Measuring method Deacti- U Static Channel
vated Voltage
U
4DMU Current (4-wire
sensor)
2DMU Current (2-wire
sensor)
R-4L Resistance (4-
conductor
connection)
R-3L Resistance (3-
conductor
connection)
RTD-4L Thermal resistor
(linear, 4-
conductor
connection)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 267
Analog modules
5.20 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

Parameters Value range Default Parameter Scope

setting1 type
RTD-3L Thermal resistor
(linear, 3-
conductor
connection)
TC-L Thermocouple
(linear)
 Measuring range For information on ± 10 V
configurable measuring
ranges of input channels,
refer to the chapter
"Measuring methods and
measuring ranges of SM 431;
AI 8 x 14 Bit".
 Reference temperature - 273.15 to 327.67 oC 0,00 oC Dynamic Module
 Interference frequency 60 Hz; 50 Hz 50 Hz Static Channel
suppression
 Smoothing None None Static Channel
Weak
Medium
Strong
 Reference junction None None
RTD on Channel 0
Reference temperature value
dynamic
1 Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the analog modules with the default settings.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

268 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.20 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

Measured value smoothing

You will find information that is generally applicable to the smoothing of analog values in the
respective section.
The following figure shows for the module the number of module cycles, in the case of a step
response, after which the smoothed analog value is applied to almost 100%, depending on
the smoothing setting. The figure applies to every change of signal at an analog input.

Signal variation in Step response for any analog input signal

percent
100

63

50

0 50 100 150 200

Smoothing Low: Module cycles
average:
high:

Figure 5-27 Step response of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit

See also
General information about parameter assignment (Page 216)
Conversion, cycle, settling and response time of analog modules (Page 212)

5.20.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit

Measuring methods
You can set the measuring method at the input channels:
● Voltage measurement
● Current measurement
● Resistance measurement
● Temperature measurement
You specify the setting by means of the measuring range modules on the module and the
"Measuring type" parameter in STEP 7.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 269
Analog modules
5.20 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

Circuit variants for the channels

Two channels are set in each case with the measuring range module. There are therefore
restrictions as regards the measuring method for the adjacent channels 0/1, 2/3, 4/5 and 6/7,
as shown in the following table:

Table 5- 49 Selection of the measuring method for channel n and channel n+1 of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-
1KF10-0AB0)

Measuring method, Measuring method, channel n + 1

channel n
Deactiv Voltage Current 4 Current 2 R-4L R-3L RTD-4L RTD-3L TC-L
ated -DMU -DMU
Disabled x x x x x
Voltage x x x
Current 4-wire x x
transducer
Current 2-wire x x
transducer
4-wire x
resistor
3-wire x
resistor
Four-wire thermal x
resistor

3-wire thermal x
resistor
Thermocouples x x x

Example
If you select "current (2-wire transducer)" for channel 6, you can only disable the measuring
method or set "current (2-wire transducer)" for channel 7.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

270 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.20 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

Circuit for resistance measurement

The following conditions apply when measuring the resistance and temperature with the
SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit:

Table 5- 50 Channels for resistance and temperature measurement of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit

Measuring type parameter Permissible for Condition

channel n
Resistance 0, 2, 4 or 6 You must disable the "Measuring type" parameter for channels
(4-conductor connection) n+1 (1, 3, 5, 7).
Resistance 0, 2, 4 or 6 Reason: The connections of channel n+1 are used to supply the
(3-conductor connection) resistance that is connected to channel n.
Thermal resistance 0, 2, 4 or 6
(linear, 4-wire connection)
Thermal resistance 0, 2, 4 or 6
(linear, 3-wire connection)

Circuit for reference junction compensation for thermocouples

If you select "RTD on Channel 0" as a reference junction for reference junction
compensation for thermocouples, the following applies:

Table 5- 51 Thermocouple with reference junction compensation via RTD on channel 0

Measuring type parameter Permissible for Condition

channel n
RTD on Channel 0 2 to 7 You must connect and configure on channel 0 a resistance
thermometer with linearization, a 3 or 4-conductor connection in
climatic range. This means that channels 0 and 1 are assigned.
Reason: If channel 0 is to be used as the reference junction, a
resistance-type sensor must be connected there to record absolute
temperatures in the climatic range.

Unused channels
Unused channels can usually be left open. Set the measuring range modules to position "A".
In measuring environments with strong interference, you can improve the module's immunity
to interference by short-circuiting the channels.
For unused channels, set the "measuring method" parameter to "deactivated". This reduces
the module's cycle time.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 271
Analog modules
5.20 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

Measuring ranges
Set the measuring ranges using the measuring range modules, and at the "measuring
method" parameter in STEP 7.

Table 5- 52 Measuring ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

Selected measuring method Measuring range Measuring range module Description

(type of sensor) settings
V: Voltage ± 80 mV A The digitized analog values are
± 250 mV listed in the section
± 500 mV "Representation of analog values
±1V for analog input channels" in the
± 2.5 V voltage measuring range.
±5V
1 to 5 V
± 10 V
2DMU: Current 4 to 20 mA D To supply these transducers with
(2-wire transducer) current you must connect 24 V to
the L+ and M front connector
terminals.
The digitized analog values are
listed in the section
"Representation of analog values
for analog input channels" in the
current measuring range.
4DMU: Current 0 mA to 20 mA C The digitized analog values are
(4-wire transducer) 4 mA to 20 mA listed in the section
± 20 mA "Representation of analog values
for analog input channels" in the
current measuring range.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

272 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.20 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

Selected measuring method Measuring range Measuring range module Description

(type of sensor) settings
R-4L: Resistance 48 Ω A The digitized analog values are
(4-conductor connection) 150 Ω listed in the section
300 Ω "Representation of analog values
600 Ω for analog input channels" in the
6000 Ω resistance measuring range.
R-3L: Resistance 300 Ω
(3-conductor connection) 600 Ω
6000 Ω
TCL: Thermocouple (linear) Type B A The digitized analog values are
(temperature measurement) Type N listed in the section
Type E "Representation of analog values
Type R for analog input channels" in the
Type S temperature range.
Type J
Type L
Type T
Type K
Type U
RTD-4L: Thermal resistance Pt 100 Climatic A
(linear, 4-wire connection) Pt 200 Climatic
(temperature measurement) Pt 500 Climatic
RTD-3L: Thermal resistance Pt 1000 Climatic
(linear, 3-wire connection) Ni 100 Climatic
(temperature measurement) Ni 1000 Climatic
Pt 100 Standard
Pt 200 Standard
Pt 500 Standard
Pt 1000 Standard
Ni 100 Standard
Ni 1000 Standard

Defaults
The module has the following default settings in STEP 7:
● Channels 0 to 7: "Voltage" measuring method ; "± 10 V" measuring range
You can use these measuring methods and measuring ranges without configuring the
SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit in STEP 7.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 273
Analog modules
5.21 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0)

5.21 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0)

5.21.1 Features

Overview
The analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit has the following features:
● Rapid A/D changeover, therefore particularly suitable for highly dynamic processes
● 8 inputs for voltage/current measurement
● 4 inputs for resistance measurement
● Various measuring ranges, adjustable in parallel
● Resolution 14 bits
● Supply voltage: 24 VDC required only for the connection of 2-wire transducers
● Analog section isolated from CPU
● The maximum permissible common mode voltage between the channels and between
the reference potential of the connected sensors and MANA is 8 VAC

Block diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit

CH0 Measuring
range
CH1 module 0

Bus S7-400
Bus control

MANA A
MULTIPLEXER

Measuring
CH6 range
module 3
CH7

+ 5V ENABLE
L+
+ 15V +5V Bus S7-400
M
0V 0V Bus S7-400
MANA
- 15V

Figure 5-28 Block diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

274 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.21 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0)

Wiring diagram SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit

Voltage measurement Resistance measurement

Current measurement
1
2
3
L+ L+
4
5
6 M0+ CH0 Word 0 M0+
7 V M0- M0-
8
9 CH0 Word 0
10
11 M1+ CH1 Word 2 IC0+
V
12 M1- IC0-
13
14
15
16 M2+ CH2 Word 4 M1+
17 M2- M1-
18
19 CH2 Word 4
20
21 M3 + CH3 Word 6 IC1+
22 M3- IC1-
23
24
25
26 MANA
27
28 M4+ CH4 Word 8 M2+
A
29 M4- M2-
30
CH4 Word 8
31
32
33 M5+ CH5 Word 10 IC2+
A
34 M5- IC2-
35
36
37
38 M6+ M3 +
Tr CH6 Word 12
39 M6- M3-
40
41 CH6 Word 12
42
43 M7+ CH7 Word 14 IC3 +
Tr
44 M7- IC3-
45
46
47
M M
48

Figure 5-29 Wiring diagram SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 275
Analog modules
5.21 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0)

Specifications of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210
Weight Approx. 500 g
Module-specific data
Number of inputs 8
 With resistance-type sensor 4
Cable length
 Shielded Max. 200 m
Voltages, currents, electrical potentials
Nominal load voltage L+ 24 VDC (only required for the supply of 2-
wire transducers)
 Reverse polarity protection Yes
Transducer power supply
 Supply current Max. 50 mA
 Short-circuit-proof Yes
Constant measured current for resistance-type sensor Typ. 1.67 mA
Electrical isolation
 Between channels and the backplane bus Yes
 Between channels No
 Between the channels and load voltage L+ Yes
Permissible potential difference
 Between inputs and MANA (UCM) 8 VAC
 Between input (UCM) 8 VAC
 Between MANA and M-internal (UISO) 75 VDC / 60 VAC
Insulation tested
 Between bus and analog section 2120 VDC
 Between bus and chassis ground 500 VDC
 Between analog section and L+/M 707 VDC
 Between analog section and chassis ground 2120 VDC
 Between L+/M and chassis ground 2120 VDC
Current consumption
 From the backplane bus (5 V) Max. 1000 mA
 From load voltage L+ Max. 200 mA (with 8 connected, fully
controlled 2-wire transducers)
Power loss of the module Typ. 4.9 W

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

276 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.21 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0)

Formation of analog values

Measuring principle Actual value conversion
Integration/conversion time/resolution (per channel) (Does not go into the response time)
 Programmable Yes
 Noise suppression f1 in Hz None / 400 / 60 / 50
 Basic conversion time 52 µs
 Resolution (including overshoot range) 14 / 14 / 14
Measured value smoothing Can be configured "none - strong"
Time constant of the input filter 15 µs
Basic execution time of the module, in ms (all 0,420
channels enabled)
Noise suppression, error limits
Noise suppression for f = nx (f1 ±1%), (f1 = interference frequency) n = 1, 2, ...
Filter 400 / 60 / 50 Hz configured
 Common-mode interference (UCM < 11 Vpp) > 80 dB
 Series-mode interference (peak value of > 40 dB
disturbance < nominal input range)
Crosstalk between inputs > 70 dB
Operational limit (across temperature range, relative to input range)
 Voltage input
– ±1V ± 0,7 %
– ± 10 V ± 0,9 %
– 1 to 5 V ± 0,9 %
 Current input
– ± 20 mA ± 0,8 %
– 4 to 20 mA ± 0,8 %
 Resistance measurement
– 0 to 600 Ω; ± 1,0 %
Basic error limit (operational error limit at 25° C, relative to input range)
 Voltage input
– ±1V ± 0,6 %
– ± 10 V ± 0,75 %
– 1 to 5 V ± 0,75 %
 Current input
– ± 20 mA ± 0,7 %
– 4 to 20 mA ± 0,7 %
 Resistance measurement
– 0 to 600 Ω; ± 0,7 %
Temperature error (relative to input range) ± 0.03 % K
Linearity error (relative to input range) ± 0.05 % K
Repetition accuracy (in transient state at 25° C, ± 0,2 %
relative to input range)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 277
Analog modules
5.21 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0)

Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions None
Injection of substitution values No
Sensor selection data
Input range (nominal values) / input impedance
 Voltage ± 1 V / 10 MΩ
± 10 V / 10 MΩ
1 to 5 V / 10 MΩ
 Current ± 20 mA / 50 Ω
4 to 20 mA / 50 Ω
 Resistance 0 to 600 Ω / 10 MΩ
Permissible voltage at voltage input (destruction limit) Max. 18 V continuous;
75 V for 1 ms (cycle factor 1 : 20)
Permissible current at current input (destruction limit) 40 mA continuous
Connection for signal sensors
 For voltage measurement Supported
 For current measurement
– As 2-wire transducer Supported
– As 4-wire transducer Supported
 For resistance measurement
– With 2-conductor connection Supported: cable resistances are also
– With 3-conductor connection measured
– With 4-conductor connection Supported
 Load of the 2-wire transducer Max. 750 Ω

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

278 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.21 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0)

5.21.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit

Introduction
You set the mode of operation of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit by means of measuring range
modules on the module and in STEP 7.

Measuring range modules

A measuring range module of the module matches two channels and one resistance channel
to each type of sensor. Reposition the measuring range modules to suit the measuring
method and range. The steps you have to perform to do this are described in detail in the
respective section.
For an overview of the settings of specific measuring methods and ranges, refer to the
corresponding table in the section "Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431,
AI 8 x 14 Bit". The necessary settings are also shown on the label attached to the module.

Parameters
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog
modules in the respective sections.
The table below provides an overview of configurable parameters, including defaults.

Table 5- 53 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0)

Parameters Value range Default1 Parameter Scope

type
Measurement
 Measuring Disabled Static Channel
method U Voltage
4DMU Current (4-wire U
sensor)
2DMU Current (2-wire
sensor)
R-4L Resistance (4-
conductor
connection)
 Measuring range Refer to the respective section ± 10 V
for the measuring ranges of the
input channels that you can set.
 Noise 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; none 50 Hz
suppression
 Smoothing None None
Strong
1 Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the analog modules with the default settings.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 279
Analog modules
5.21 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0)

Measured value smoothing

You will find information that is generally applicable to the smoothing of analog values in the
respective section. You can only set strong smoothing for the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit.
The module cycle time is a constant, irrespective of how many channels are enabled. It
therefore has no effect on the filter settling time, which is defined by the parameter
assignment of interference frequency suppression and smoothing.

Filter settling time with strong smoothing

Table 5- 54 Interference frequency suppression and filter settling time with smoothing

Noise suppression Smoothing Filter settling time in ms

None Strong -
50 Hz Strong 100
60 Hz Strong 83,333
400 Hz Strong 12,5

Step response with strong smoothing

The following figure illustrates the contents of the table above. It shows the filter settling time
after which, in the case of a step response, the smoothed analog value is applied to
almost 100%, depending on the interference frequency suppression that has been set. The
figure applies to every change of signal at an analog input.

Signal variation Step response for any analog input signal

in percent
100

63

50

0 12,5 30 60 83,333 100 120 150

Noise suppression Filter settling time in ms
400 Hz:
60 Hz:
50 Hz:

Figure 5-30 Step response of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7 431-1KF20-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

280 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.21 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0)

See also
General information about parameter assignment (Page 216)
Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (Page 281)

5.21.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit

Measuring methods
You can set the measuring method at the input channels:
● Voltage measurement
● Current measurement
● Resistance measurement
● Temperature measurement
You specify the setting by means of the measuring range modules on the module and the
"Measuring type" parameter in STEP 7.

Circuit variants for the channels

Two channels are set in each case with the measuring range module. There are therefore
restrictions as regards the measuring method for the adjacent channels 0/1, 2/3, 4/5 and 6/7,
as shown in the following table:

Table 5- 55 Selection of the measuring method for channel n and channel n+1 of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-
1KF10-0AB0)

Measuring method, Measuring method, channel n + 1

channel n
Deactiv Voltage Current 4 Current 2 R-4L R-3L RTD-4L RTD-3L TC-L
ated -DMU -DMU
Disabled x x x x x
Voltage x x x
Current 4-wire x x
transducer
Current 2-wire x x
transducer
4-conductor resistor x
3-conductor resistor x
4-conductor thermal x
resistor
3-conductor thermal x
resistor
Thermocouples x x x

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 281
Analog modules
5.21 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0)

Example
If you select "current (2-wire transducer)" for channel 6, you can only disable the measuring
method or set "current (2-wire transducer)" for channel 7.

Circuit for resistance measurement

The following conditions apply when measuring the resistance and temperature with the
SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit:

Table 5- 56 Channels for resistance measurement of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

Measuring type parameter Permissible for Condition

channel n
Resistance 0, 2, 4 or 6 You must disable the "Measuring type" parameter for channels
(4-conductor connection) n+1 (1, 3, 5, 7).
Reason: The connections of channel n+1 are used to supply the
resistance that is connected to channel n.

Unused channels
Unused channels can be left open. Set the measuring range modules to position "B". You
can improve the noise immunity of the module in a measuring environment with serious
interference by interconnecting M- and MANA.

Measuring ranges
Set the measuring ranges using the measuring range modules, and at the "measuring
method" parameter in STEP 7.

Table 5- 57 Measuring ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

Selected measuring Measuring range Measuring range module Description

method (type of sensor) settings
V: Voltage ±1V A The digitized analog values are
1 to 5 V B listed in the section "Representation
± 10 V of analog values for analog input
channels" in the voltage measuring
range.
2DMU: Current 4 to 20 mA D To supply these transducers with
(2-wire transducer) current you must connect 24 V to
the L+ and M front connector
terminals.
The digitized analog values are
listed in the section "Representation
of analog values for analog input
channels" in the current measuring
range.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

282 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.21 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0)

Selected measuring Measuring range Measuring range module Description

method (type of sensor) settings
4DMU: Current 4 to 20 mA C The digitized analog values are
(4-wire transducer) ± 20 mA listed in the section "Representation
of analog values for analog input
channels" in the current measuring
range.
R-4L: Resistance 600 Ω A The digitized analog values are
(4-conductor connection) listed in the section "Representation
of analog values for analog input
channels" in the resistance
measuring range.

Defaults
The module has the following default settings in STEP 7:
● Channels 0 to 7: "Voltage" measuring method ; "± 10 V" measuring range
You can use these measuring methods and measuring ranges without configuring the
SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit in STEP 7.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 283
Analog modules
5.22 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-0HH00-0AB0)

5.22 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-0HH00-0AB0)

5.22.1 Features

Overview
The analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit has the following features:
● 16 inputs for voltage/current measurement
● Various measuring ranges, adjustable in parallel
● Resolution 13 bits
● Non-isolated between the analog section and bus
● The maximum permissible common mode voltage between the channels and the
reference potentials of the connected sensors and central ground point is 2 VDC/VAC

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

284 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.22 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-0HH00-0AB0)

Block diagram of the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit

Measuring range modules

Multiplexer
*

Controller and backplane bus interface

*

Tr

Tr

Tr

Tr

* Tr = Transducer = Transmitter

Tr
*Voltage/current sensot and M
must be connected to the chassis
Tr
ground of the rack

Tr

Tr

Figure 5-31 Block diagram of the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 285
Analog modules
5.22 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-0HH00-0AB0)

Wiring diagram SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit

Voltage measurement
Current measurement

1
2
3 L+
L+
4
5
6 M0+ CH0 Word 0
7 M0-
8 M1+ CH1 Word 2
9 M1-
10
11 M2+ CH2 Word 4
12 M2-
13 M3 + CH3 Word 6
14 M3-
15
16 M4+ CH4 Word 8
Tr
17 M4-
18 M5+ CH5 Word 10
Tr
19 M5-
20
21 Tr M6+ CH6 Word 12
22 M6-
23 Tr M7+ CH7 Word 14
24 M7-
25
26
27
28 M8+ CH8 Word 16
29 M8-
30 M9+ CH9 Word 18
31 M9-
32
33 M10+ CH10 Word 20
34 M10-
35 M11+ CH11 Word 22
36 M11-
37
38 M12+ CH12 Word 24
Tr
39 M12-
40 M13+ CH13 Word 26
Tr
41 M13-
42
43 M14+ CH14 Word 28
Tr
44 M14-
45 Tr M15+ CH15 Word 30
46 M15-
47 M
M
48

Figure 5-32 Wiring diagram SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

286 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.22 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-0HH00-0AB0)

Specifications of the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210
Weight Approx. 500 g
Module-specific data
Number of inputs 16
Shielded Max. 200 m
Voltages, currents, electrical potentials
Nominal load voltage L+ 24 VDC (only required for the supply of 2-
wire transducers)
 Reverse polarity protection Yes
 Transducer power supply
 Supply current Max. 50 mA
 Short-circuit-proof Yes
 Constant measured current for resistance-type Typ. 1.67 mA
sensor
Electrical isolation
 Between channels and the backplane bus No
 Between channels No
 Between channels and load voltage L+ No
Permissible potential difference
 Between inputs and MANA (UCM) 2 VDC/2 VACpp
 Between input (UCM) 2 VDC/2 VACpp
Insulation tested
 Between bus and chassis ground 500 VDC
 Current consumption
 From the backplane bus (5 V) Max. 100 mA
 From load voltage L+ (with 16 connected, fully Max. 400 mA
controlled 2-wire transducers)
Power loss of the module Typ. 2 W

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 287
Analog modules
5.22 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-0HH00-0AB0)

Formation of analog values

Measuring principle Integrating
Integration/conversion time/resolution (per channel) (Does not go into the response time)
 Programmable Yes
 Noise suppression f1 in Hz 60 / 50
 Integration time in ms 50 / 60
 Basic conversion time in ms 55 / 65
 Resolution (including overshoot range) 13 bits
Measured value smoothing Not supported
Basic execution time of the module, in ms (all 880 / 1040
channels enabled)
Noise suppression, error limits
Noise suppression for f = nx (f1 ±1%), (f1 = interference frequency) n = 1, 2, ...
 Common-mode interference (UCM <2 V) > 86 dB
 Series-mode interference (peak value of > 60 dB
disturbance < nominal input range)
Crosstalk between inputs > 50 dB
Operational limit (across temperature range, relative to input range)
 Voltage input
– ±1V ± 0,65 %
– ± 10 V ± 0,65 %
– 1 to 5 V ±1%
 Current input
– ± 20 mA ± 0,65 %
– 4 to 20 mA ± 0,65 %
Basic error limit (operational error limit at 25° C, relative to input range)
 Voltage input
– ±1V ± 0,25 %
– ± 10 V ± 0,25 %
– 1 to 5 V ± 0,5 %
 Current input
– ± 20 mA ± 0,25 %
– 4 to 20 mA ± 0,25 %
Temperature error (relative to input range) ± 0,01 %
Linearity error (relative to input range) ± 0,05 %
Repetition accuracy (in transient state at 25° C, ± 0,01 %
relative to input range)
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions None
Injection of substitution values No

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

288 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.22 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-0HH00-0AB0)

Sensor selection data

Input range (nominal values) / input impedance
 Voltage ± 1 V / 10 MΩ
± 10 V / 100 MΩ
1 to 5 V / 100 MΩ
 Current ± 20 mA / 50 Ω
4 to 20 mA / 50 Ω
Permissible voltage at voltage input (destruction limit) 20 V continuous;
75 V for 1 ms (cycle factor 1 : 20)
Permissible current at current input (destruction limit) 40 mA
Connection for signal sensors
 For voltage measurement Supported
 For current measurement
– As 2-wire transducer Supported
– As 4-wire transducer Supported
 Load of the 2-wire transducer Max. 750 Ω

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 289
Analog modules
5.22 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-0HH00-0AB0)

5.22.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit

Introduction
You set the mode of operation of the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit by means of measuring range
modules on the module and in STEP 7.

Measuring range modules

A measuring range module of the module matches two consecutive channels to each type of
sensor. Reposition the measuring range modules to suit the measuring method and range.
The steps you have to perform to do this are described in detail in the respective section.
For an overview of the settings of specific measuring methods and ranges, refer to the
corresponding table in the section "Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431;
AI 16 x 13 Bit". The necessary settings are also shown on the label attached to the module.

Parameters
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog
modules in the respective sections.
The table below provides an overview of configurable parameters, including defaults.

Table 5- 58 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit

Parameters Value range Default1 Parameter Scope

type
Measurement
 Measuring Disabled U Static Channel
method
U Voltage
4DMU Current (4-wire
sensor)
2DMU Current (2-wire
sensor)
 Measuring range For information on configurable ±10 V
measuring ranges of input
channels, refer to the chapter
"Measuring methods and
measuring ranges of SM 431;
AI 16 x 13 Bit".
 Noise 60 Hz; 50 Hz 50 Hz
suppression
1 Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the analog modules with the default settings.

See also
General information about parameter assignment (Page 216)
Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (Page 306)
General information about diagnostic messages (Page 99)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

290 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.22 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-0HH00-0AB0)

5.22.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit

Measuring methods
You can set the measuring method at the input channels:
● Voltage measurement
● Current measurement
You specify the setting by means of the measuring range modules on the module and the
"Measuring type" parameter in STEP 7.

Circuit variants for the channels

Two channels are set in each case with the measuring range module. There are therefore
restrictions as regards the measuring method for the adjacent
channels 0/1, 2/3, 4/5, 6/7, 8/9, 10/11, 12/13 and 14/15, as shown in the following table:

Table 5- 59 Selection of the measuring method for channel n and channel n+1 of the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit

Measuring method, Measuring method, channel n + 1

channel n Disabled Voltage Voltage 1 to 5 Voltage Current 4- Current 2-
±1 V V ±10 V DMU DMU
Disabled x x x x x x
Voltage ±1 V x x
Voltage 1 to 5 V x x x
Voltage ±10 V x x x
Current 4-wire transducer x x
Current 2-wire transducer x x

Example
If you select "current (2-wire transducer)" for channel 6, you can only disable the measuring
method or set "current (2-wire transducer)" for channel 7.

Unused channels
Unused channels can be left open. Set the measuring range modules to position "B". You
can improve the noise immunity of the module in a measuring environment with serious
interference by interconnecting M- and MANA.
For unused channels, set the "measuring method" parameter to "deactivated". This reduces
the module's cycle time.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 291
Analog modules
5.22 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-0HH00-0AB0)

Measuring ranges
You set the measuring ranges by means of the measuring range modules on the module
and the "Measuring type" parameter in STEP 7.

Table 5- 60 Measuring ranges of the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit

Selected measuring Measuring range Measuring range module Description

method (type of sensor) settings
V: Voltage ±1 V A The digitized analog values are listed in
1 to 5 V B the section "Representation of analog
± 10 V values for analog input channels" in the
voltage measuring range.
2DMU: Current (2-wire 4 to 20 mA D To supply these transducers with
sensor) current you must connect 24 V to the L+
and M front connector terminals.
The digitized analog values are listed in
the section "Representation of analog
values for analog input channels" in the
current measuring range.
4DMU: Current (4-wire 4 to 20 mA C The digitized analog values are listed in
sensor) ± 20 mA the section "Representation of analog
values for analog input channels" in the
current measuring range.

Default
The module has the following default settings in STEP 7:
● Measuring method "voltage"
● Measuring range "± 10 V".
You can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without configuring
the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit in STEP 7.

See also
Representation of analog values of analog input channels (Page 185)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

292 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

5.23.1 Features

Overview
The analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit has the following features:
● 16 inputs for voltage/current and temperature measurement with thermocouple (TC)
● 8 inputs for resistance and temperature measurement with thermocouple (TC)
● Various measuring ranges, adjustable in parallel
● Resolution 16 bits
● Programmable diagnostics
● Programmable diagnostic interrupt
● Programmable interrupt when limit is exceeded
● Programmable end-of-cycle interrupt
● Analog section isolated from CPU
● The maximum permissible common mode voltage between the channels and between
the channel and central ground is 120 VAC

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 293
Analog modules
5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

Block diagram of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit

CH0 Meas. range I

module 0 const
CH1
D

Bus S7-400

Bus control
Signal
jumper-
ing PGA

A
Multiplexer
Opto relay

CH14 Meas. range

CH15 module 7

+ 15 V
L+ + 5V +5V
Diagnostics Bus S7-400
in 0V
M 0V
L+ loop -15 V

Figure 5-33 Block diagram of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

294 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

Wiring diagram SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit

Thermocouples Resistance measurement

Voltage measurement Resistance thermometer
INTF Current measurement
1
EXTF 2
3
L+ L+
4
5
6 M0+ CH0 Word 0 M0+
7 M0- M0- CH0 Word 0
8 M1+ CH1 Word 2 IC0+
9 M1- IC0-
10
11 M2+ CH2 Word 4 M1+
V
12 M2- M1- CH2 Word 4
13 M3 + CH3 Word 6 IC1+
V
14 M3- IC1-
15
16 M4+ CH4 Word 8 M2+
17 M4- M2- CH4 Word 8
18 M5+ CH5 Word 10 IC2+
19 M5- IC2-
20
21 M6+ CH6 Word 12 M3 +
22 M6- M3- CH6 Word 12
23 M7+ CH7 IC3 +
Word 14
24 M7- IC3-
25
26
27
28 M8+ CH8 Word 16 M4+
A
29 M8- M4- CH8 Word 16
30 A M9+ CH9 Word 18 IC4+
31 M9- IC4-
32
33 M10+ CH10 Word 20 M5+
A
34 M10- M5- CH10 Word 20
35 M11+ CH11 Word 22 IC5+
A
36 M11- IC5-
37
38 M12+ CH12 Word 24 M6+
Tr
39 M12- M6- CH12 Word 24
40 M13+ CH13 Word 26 IC6+
Tr
41 M13- IC6-
42
43 M14+ CH14 M7+
Tr Word 28
44 M14- M7- CH14 Word 28
45 M15+ CH15 IC7+
Tr Word 30
46 M15- IC7-
47
M M
48

Figure 5-34 Wiring diagram SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 295
Analog modules
5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

Specifications of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210
Weight Approx. 500 g
Module-specific data
Number of inputs 16
 With resistance-type sensor 8
Cable length
Shielded in the input ranges ≦ 80 mV and with Max. 200 m Max. 50 m
thermocouples
Voltages, currents, electrical potentials
Nominal load voltage L+ 24 VDC (only required for the supply of 2-
wire transducers)
 Reverse polarity protection Yes
Transducer power supply
 Supply current Max. 50 mA
 Short-circuit-proof Yes
Constant measured current for resistance-type sensor Typ. 1.67 mA
Electrical isolation
 Between channels and the backplane bus Yes
 Between channels No
 Between channels and load voltage L+ Yes
Permissible potential difference
 Between inputs and MANA (UCM) 120 VAC
 Between input (UCM) 120 VAC
 Between MANA and M-internal (UISO) 75 VDC / 60 VAC
Isolation test voltage
 Between bus and L+/M 2120 VDC
 Between bus and analog section 2120 VDC
 Between bus and chassis ground 500 VDC
 Between analog section and L+/M 707 VDC
 Between analog section and chassis ground 2120 VDC
 Between L+/M and chassis ground 2120 VDC
Current consumption
 From the backplane bus (5 V) Max. 700 mA
 From load voltage L+ (with 16 connected, fully Max. 400 mA
controlled 2-wire transducers)
Power loss of the module Typ. 4.5 W

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

296 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

Formation of analog values

Measuring principle Integrating
Integration/conversion time/resolution (per channel) (Does not go into the response time)
 Programmable Yes
 Noise suppression f1 in Hz 400 / 60 / 50
 Integration time in ms 2,5 / 16,7 / 20
 Basic conversion time in ms 6 / 20,1 / 23,5
 Additional conversion time for resistance 12 / 40,2 / 47
measurements with 3-conductor connection in ms
 Additional conversion time for wire break 4,3 / 4,3 / 4,3
monitoring in ms
 Additional conversion time for measuring 5,5 / 5,5 / 5,5
resistance in ms
 Resolution (including overshoot range) 16/16/16 bit
Measured value smoothing Parameters can be assigned in 4 stages
Basic execution time of the module, in ms (all 96 / 322 / 376
channels enabled)
Noise suppression, error limits
Noise suppression for f = nx (f1 ±1%), (f1 = interference frequency) n = 1, 2, ...
 Common-mode interference (UCM < 120 Vpp) > 100 dB
 Series-mode interference (peak value of > 40 dB
disturbance < nominal input range)
Crosstalk between inputs > 70 dB
Operational limit (across temperature range, relative to input range)
 Voltage input
– ± 25 mV ± 0,35 %
– ± 50 mV ± 0,32 %
– ± 80 mV ± 0,31 %
– ± 250 mV ± 0,3 %
– ± 500 mV ± 0,3 %
– ±1V
± 0,3 %
– ± 2.5 V
± 0,3 %
– ±5V
± 0,3 %
– 1 to 5 V
± 0,3 %
– ± 10 V
± 0,3 %
 Current input
– 0 to 20 mA ± 0,3 %
– ± 5 mA ± 0,3 %
– ± 10 mA ± 0,3 %
– ± 20 mA ± 0,3 %
– 4 to 20 mA ± 0,3 %

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 297
Analog modules
5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

 Resistance measurement
– 0 to 48 Ω; 4-conductor measurement ± 0,3 %
– 0 to 150 Ω; 4-conductor measurement ± 0,3 %
– 0 to 300 Ω; 4-conductor measurement ± 0,3 %
– 0 to 600 Ω; 4-conductor measurement ± 0,3 %
– 0 to 5000 Ω; 4-conductor measurement (in the ± 0,3 %
range of 6000 Ω)
± 0,4 %
– 0 to 300 Ω; 3-conductor measurement
– 0 to 600 Ω; 3-conductor measurement ± 0,4 %
– 0 to 5000 Ω; 3-conductor measurement (in the ± 0,4 %
range of 6000 Ω)
 Thermocouples
– TC type B ± 11.5 K
– TC type R ± 7.3 K
– TC type S ± 8.3 K
– TC type T ± 1.7 K
– TC type E ± 3.2 K
– TC type J
± 4.3 K
– TC type K
± 6.2 K
– TC type U
± 2.8 K
– TC type L
± 4.2 K
– TC type N
± 4.4 K
 Resistance thermocouples, 4-conductor standard
measuring range ± 3.1 K
– Pt 100
± 4.9 K
– Pt 200
± 3.9 K
– Pt 500
± 3.1 K
– Pt 1000
± 0.8 K
– Ni 100
± 0.8 K
– Ni 1000
Climatic measuring range
± 0.4 K
– Pt 100
± 0.4 K
– Pt 200
± 0.4 K
– Pt 500
– Pt 1000 ± 0.4 K
– Ni 100 ± 0.8 K
– Ni 1000 ± 0.8 K

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

298 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

 Resistance thermocouples, 3-conductor standard

measuring range ± 4.2 K
– Pt 100
± 6.5 K
– Pt 200
± 5.2 K
– Pt 500
± 4.2 K
– Pt 1000
± 1.0 K
– Ni 100
± 1.0 K
– Ni 1000
Climatic measuring range
± 0.5 K
– Pt 100
± 0.5 K
– Pt 200
± 0.5 K
– Pt 500
– Pt 1000 ± 0.5 K
– Ni 100 ± 1.0 K
– Ni 1000 ± 1.0 K

Basic error limit (operational error limit at 25° C, relative to input range)
 Voltage input
– ± 25 mV ± 0,23 %
– ± 50 mV ± 0,19 %
– ± 80 mV ± 0,17 %
– ± 250 mV ± 0,15 %
– ± 500 mV ± 0,15 %
– ±1V
± 0,15 %
– ± 2.5 V
± 0,15 %
– ±5V
± 0,15 %
– 1 to 5 V
± 0,15 %
– ± 10 V
± 0,15 %
 Current input
– 0 to 20 mA ± 0,15 %
– ± 5 mA ± 0,15 %
– ± 10 mA ± 0,15 %
– ± 20 mA ± 0,15 %
– 4 to 20 mA ± 0,15 %
 Resistance measurement
– 0 to 48 Ω; 4-conductor measurement ± 0,15 %
– 0 to 150 Ω; 4-conductor measurement ± 0,15 %
– 0 to 300 Ω; 4-conductor measurement ± 0,15 %
– 0 to 600 Ω; 4-conductor measurement ± 0,15 %
– 0 to 5000 Ω; 4-conductor measurement (in the ± 0,15 %
range of 6000 Ω)
± 0,3 %
– 0 to 300 Ω; 3-conductor measurement
– 0 to 600 Ω; 3-conductor measurement ± 0,3 %
– 0 to 5000 Ω; 3-conductor measurement (in the ± 0,3 %
range of 6000 Ω)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 299
Analog modules
5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

 Thermocouples
– TC type B ± 7.6 K
– TC type R ± 4.8 K
– TC type S ± 5.4 K
– TC type T ± 1.1 K
– TC type E ± 1.8 K
– TC type J
± 2.3 K
– TC type K
± 3.4 K
– TC type U
± 1.7 K
– TC type L
± 2.3 K
– TC type N
± 2.6 K
 Resistance thermocouples, 4-conductor standard
measuring range ± 1.6 K
– Pt 100
± 2.5 K
– Pt 200
± 2.0 K
– Pt 500
± 1.6 K
– Pt 1000
± 0.4 K
– Ni 100
± 0.4 K
– Ni 1000
Climatic measuring range
± 0.2 K
– Pt 100
± 0.2 K
– Pt 200
± 0.2 K
– Pt 500
– Pt 1000 ± 0.2 K
– Ni 100 ± 0.4 K
– Ni 1000 ± 0.4 K

 Resistance thermocouples, 3-conductor standard

measuring range ± 3.1 K
– Pt 100
± 4.9 K
– Pt 200
± 3.9 K
– Pt 500
± 3.1 K
– Pt 1000
± 0.8 K
– Ni 100
± 0.8 K
– Ni 1000´
Climatic measuring range
± 0.4 K
– Pt 100
± 0.4 K
– Pt 200
± 0.4 K
– Pt 500
– Pt 1000 ± 0.4 K
– Ni 100 ± 0.8 K
– Ni 1000 ± 0.8 K

Temperature error (relative to input range) ± 0.004 % K

Linearity error (relative to input range) ± 0.01 % K
Repetition accuracy (in transient state at 25° C, ± 0,1 %
relative to input range)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

300 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Interrupts
 Hardware interrupt Programmable
 Hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded Programmable
 Diagnostic interrupt Programmable
Diagnostic functions
 Group error display
– For internal fault Red LED (INTF)
– For external fault Red LED (EXTF)
 Reading diagnostics information Yes
Injection of substitution values No
Sensor selection data
Input range (nominal values) / input impedance
 Voltage ± 25 mV / 1 MΩ
± 50 mV / 1 MΩ
± 80 mV / 1 MΩ
± 250 mV / 1 MΩ
± 500 mV / 1 MΩ
± 1 V / 1 MΩ
± 2.5 V / 1 MΩ
± 5 V / 1 MΩ
1 to 5 V / 1 MΩ
± 10 V / 1 MΩ
 Current 0 to 20 mA / 50 Ω
± 5 mA / 50 Ω
± 10 mA / 50 Ω
± 20 mA / 50 Ω
4 to 20 mA / 50 Ω
 Resistance 0 to 48 Ω / 1 MΩ
0 to 150 Ω / 1 MΩ
0 to 300 Ω / 1 MΩ
0 to 600 Ω / 1 MΩ
0 to 6000 Ω / 1 MΩ(of use up to 5000 Ω)
 Thermocouples TC type B / 1 MΩ
TC type R / 1 MΩ
TC type S / 1 MΩ
TC type T / 1 MΩ
TC type E / 1 MΩ
TC type J / 1 MΩ
TC type K / 1 MΩ
TC type U / 1 MΩ
TC type L / 1 MΩ
TC type N / 1 MΩ

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 301
Analog modules
5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

 Resistance thermometer Pt 100 / 1 MΩ

Pt 200 / 1 MΩ
Pt 500 / 1 MΩ
Pt 1000 / 1 MΩ
Ni 100 / 1 MΩ
Ni 1000 / 1 MΩ
Permissible voltage at voltage input (destruction limit) Max. 18 V continuous;
75 V for 1 ms (cycle factor 1 : 20)
Permissible current at current input (destruction limit) 40 mA
Connection for signal sensors
 For voltage measurement Supported
 For current measurement
– As 2-wire transducer Supported
– As 4-wire transducer Supported
 For resistance measurement
– With 2-conductor connection Supported;
– Cable resistances are also measured
– With 3-conductor connection Supported
– With 4-conductor connection Supported
 Load of the 2-wire transducer Max. 750 Ω
Characteristic linearization Programmable
 For thermocouples Types B, R, S, T, E, J, K, U, L, N
 Of resistance thermometers Pt 100, Pt 200, Pt 500, Pt 1000, Ni 100,
Ni 1000
Temperature compensation Yes, programmable
 Internal temperature compensation No
 External temperature compensation with Supported
compensating box
 External temperature compensation with Pt 100 Supported
 Compensation for definable reference junction Supported
temperature
Technical unit of temperature measurements Degrees Celsius

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

302 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

5.23.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit

Setting the operating mode

You set the mode of operation of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit by means of measuring range
modules on the module and in STEP 7.

Measuring range modules

A measuring range module of the module matches two channels and one resistance channel
to each type of sensor. Reposition the measuring range modules to suit the measuring
method and range. The steps you have to perform to do this are described in detail in the
respective section.
For an overview of the settings of specific measuring methods and ranges, refer to the
corresponding table in the section "Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431;
AI 16 x 16 Bit". The necessary settings are also shown on the label attached to the module.

Parameters
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog
modules in the respective sections.
The table below provides an overview of configurable parameters, including defaults.

Table 5- 61 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit

Parameters Value range Default2 Parameter Scope

type
Enable
 Diagnostic interrupt1 Yes/no No Dynamic Module
 Hardware interrupt1 Yes/no No
 Destination CPU for interrupt 1 to 4 - Static Module
Hardware interrupt trigger
 End of scan cycle reached at Yes/no No Static Channel
input
 High limit 32511 to - 32512 - Dynamic Channel
 Low limit -32512 to 32511
Diagnostics
 Wire break Yes/no No Static Channel
 Reference channel error Yes/no No
 Underflow Yes/no No
 Overflow Yes/no No
 Short-circuit to M Yes/no No

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 303
Analog modules
5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

Parameters Value range Default2 Parameter Scope

type
Measurement
 Measuring method Disabled U Static Channel
U Voltage
4DMU Current
(4-wire transducer)
2DMU Current
(2-wire transducer)
R-4L Resistance
(4-conductor
connection)
R-3L Resistance
(3-conductor
connection)
RTD-4L Thermal resistance
(linear, 4-wire
connection)
RTD-3L Thermal resistance
(linear,
3-conductor connection)
TC-L Thermocouple (linear)
 Measuring range For information on configurable ±10 V
measuring ranges of input channels,
refer to the section "Measuring
methods and measuring ranges of
SM 431; Ai 16x16 Bit".
 Reference temperature - 273.15 to 327.67 oC 0,00 oC Dynamic Module
 Noise suppression 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz 50 Hz
 Smoothing None None
Weak
Medium
Strong
 Reference junction None None
RTD on Channel 0
Reference temperature value
1If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to "No" because the interrupt lines are not available in
ER-1/ER-2.
2 Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the analog modules with the default settings.

A point to note about channels for hardware interrupts with the end of scan cycle trigger
You can configure hardware interrupts for the end of scan cycle for one of the 16 channels
because the module can only trigger these interrupts on one channel.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

304 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

Measured value smoothing

You will find information that is generally applicable to the smoothing of analog values in the
respective section.
The following figure shows for the module the number of module cycles, in the case of a step
response, after which the smoothed analog value is applied to almost 100%, depending on
the smoothing setting. The figure applies to every change of signal at an analog input.

Signal variation in Step response for any analog input signal

percent
100

63

50

0 20 40 60 80 100
Smoothing Low: Module cycles
average:
high:

Figure 5-35 Step response of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

Displaying parameter assignment errors

The SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit has diagnostics capability. Below you will find an overview of the
displays that are possible for modules with parameter assignment errors.

Table 5- 62 Diagnostic information of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit

Incorrect parameter Possible display Explanation

assignment
Of the module  Module error You will find explanations of the
 Internal error diagnostics information in the
 Incorrect parameters respective tables.

Affecting certain channels  Module error

 Internal error
 Channel error
 Incorrect parameters
 Channel information available
 Channel error vector
 Channel parameter
assignment error

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 305
Analog modules
5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

See also
Parameters of analog input modules (Page 217)
General information about diagnostic messages (Page 99)

5.23.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit

Measuring methods
You can set the measuring method at the input channels:
● Voltage measurement
● Current measurement
● Resistance measurement
● Temperature measurement
You specify the setting by means of the measuring range modules on the module and the
"Measuring type" parameter in STEP 7.

Circuit variants for the channels

Two channels are set in each case with the measuring range module. There are therefore
restrictions as regards to the measuring method for the adjacent
channels 0/1, 2/3, 4/5, 6/7, 8/9, 10/11, 12/13 and 14/15, as shown in the following table:

Table 5- 63 Selection of the measuring method for channel n and channel n+1 of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit

Measuring method, channel Measuring method channel n+1

n Deacti- Voltage Current Current R-4L R-3L RTD-4L RTD-3L TC-L
vated 4-DMU 2-DMU
Disabled x x x x x
Voltage x x x
Current 4-wire transducer x x
Current 2-wire transducer x x
4-conductor resistor x
3-conductor resistor x
Four-wire thermal resistor x

3-wire thermal x
resistor
Thermocouples x x x

Example
If you select "current (2-wire transducer)" for channel 6, you can only disable the measuring
method or set "current (2-wire transducer)" for channel 7.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

306 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

Circuit for resistance and temperature measurement

The following conditions apply when measuring the resistance and temperature with the
SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit:

Table 5- 64 Channels for resistance and temperature measurement of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit

Measuring type parameter Permissible for Condition

channel n
Resistance 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 You must disable the "Measuring type" parameter for channels
(4-conductor connection) or 14 n+1 (1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15).
Resistance 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 Reason: The connections of channel n+1 are used to supply
(3-conductor connection) or 14 the resistance that is connected to channel n.
Thermal resistance 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12
(linear, 4-wire connection) or 14
Thermal resistance 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12
(linear, 3-wire connection) or 14
Thermocouple (linear) 0 to 15 You can select the reference junction. It is only advisable to
specify a reference junction with thermocouples.

Circuit for reference junction compensation for thermocouples

If you select "RTD on Channel 0" as a reference junction for reference junction
compensation for thermocouples, the following applies:

Table 5- 65 Reference junction compensation via RTD on channel 0 of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit

Reference junction parameters Permissible for Condition

channel n
RTD on Channel 0 2 to 15 You must connect and configure on channel 0 a resistance
thermometer with linearization, a 3- or 4-conductor
connection in climatic range. This means that channels 0
and 1 are assigned.
Reason: If channel 0 is to be used as the reference junction,
a resistance-type sensor must be connected there to record
absolute temperatures in the climatic range.

Unused channels
Unused channels can be left open. Set the measuring range modules to position "A". You
can improve the noise immunity of the module in a measuring environment with serious
interference by short-circuiting the channels.
For unused channels, set the "measuring method" parameter to "deactivated". This reduces
the module's cycle time.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 307
Analog modules
5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

Measuring ranges
You set the measuring ranges by means of the measuring range modules on the module
and the "Measuring type" parameter in STEP 7.

Table 5- 66 Measuring ranges of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit

Selected measuring method Measuring range Measuring range module Description

(type of sensor) settings
V: Voltage ± 25 mV A The digitized analog values
± 50 mV are listed in the section
± 80 mV "Representation of analog
± 250 mV values for analog input
± 500 mV channels" in the voltage
±1V measuring range.
± 2.5 V
±5V
1 to 5 V
± 10 V
2DMU: Current (2-wire 4 to 20 mA D To supply these transducers
sensor) with current you must
connect 24 V to the L+ and
M front connector terminals.
The digitized analog values
are listed in the section
"Representation of analog
values for analog input
channels" in the current
measuring range.
4DMU: Current (4-wire ± 5 mA C The digitized analog values
sensor) ± 10 mA are listed in the section
0 to 20 mA "Representation of analog
4 to 20 mA values for analog input
± 20 mA channels" in the current
measuring range.
R-3L: Resistance 300 Ω A The digitized analog values
(3-conductor connection) 600 Ω are listed in the section
6000 Ω "Representation of analog
(maximum 5000 Ω) values for analog input
R-4L: Resistance 48 Ω channels" in the resistance
150 Ω measuring range.
(4-conductor connection)
300 Ω
600 Ω
6000 Ω
(maximum 5000 Ω)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

308 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

Selected measuring method Measuring range Measuring range module Description

(type of sensor) settings
TC-L: Thermocouple (linear) Type B A The digitized analog values
(Temperature measurement) Type N are listed in the section
Type E "Representation of analog
Type R values for analog input
Type S channels" in the temperature
Type J range.
Type L
Type T
Type K
Type U
RTD-3L: Thermal resistance Pt 100 Climatic A The digitized analog values
(linear, 3-conductor Pt 200 Climatic are listed in the section
connection) (temperature Pt 500 Climatic "Representation of analog
measurement) Pt 1000 Climatic values for analog input
Ni 100 Climatic channels" in the temperature
RTD-4L: Thermal resistance Ni 1000 Climatic range.
(linear, 4-conductor Pt 100 Standard
connection) (temperature Pt 200 Standard
measurement) Pt 500 Standard
Pt 1000 Standard
Ni 100 Standard
Ni 1000 Standard

Default
The "voltage" measuring method and "± 10 V" measuring range are set by default in
STEP 7. You can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without
configuring the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit in STEP 7.

Wire break monitoring

The wire break check is intended primarily for temperature measurements (TC, RTD) or
resistance measurements. Always configure the wire break check in these cases as this
ensures that in the event of a wire break the measured value provided by the module
accepts the data for overrun 7FFFH.

Special characteristics of the wire break check for the voltage measurement methods
In some transducers, incorrect measured values may occur due to the fact that the wire
break check is enabled. If so, disable the wire break check.
Reason: Some transducers try to correct the test current and in doing so corrupt the setpoint
value they provide.

Points to note about the wire break check when current sensors are connected
A wire break check of current sensors is not possible for the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit except in
life-zero areas. You can therefore only configure the wire break check for the "Current (4-
wire transducer)" measuring method and the "4 to 20 mA" measuring range.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 309
Analog modules
5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

Checking for reference channel errors when connecting thermocouples

If you have connected a thermocouple, you can then enable the "Reference channel error"
diagnostics if you have configured an "RTD on Channel 0" or "Reference Temperature
Value" reference junction.

Points to note about checking for "Underflow" with some measuring methods and measuring ranges
There is now underflow in life-zero areas. A value that is too low or is negative is interpreted
as a wire break. You can therefore not configure the underflow check for the SM 431;
AI 16 x 16 Bit for the following measuring methods and ranges:

Table 5- 67 Points to note when checking for "Underflow"

Measuring method Measuring range

Voltage 1 to 5 V
Current (4-wire sensor) 4 to 20 mA
Current (2-wire sensor) 4 to 20 mA

Points to note about the "Short-circuit to M" diagnostics

You can only configure the check for "Short-circuit to M" for the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit for
the "Current (2-wire transducer)" measuring method.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

310 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.24 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF10-0AB0)

5.24 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF10-

0AB0)

5.24.1 Features

Overview
The analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit has the following features:
● 8 differential inputs for the resistance thermometer
● Parameters can be assigned to the resistance thermometer
● Linearization of the resistance thermometer characteristic curves
● Resolution 16 bits
● Update rate of 25 ms for 8 channels
● Programmable diagnostics
● Programmable diagnostic interrupt
● Programmable interrupt when limit is exceeded
● Analog section isolated from CPU
● The maximum permissible common mode voltage between the channel and the central
ground point is 120 VAC

Calibration software
The calibration software is only available on the Internet. You can find the current version
under article ID 12443337.
After installing the software, you can define user-specific calibration values for each channel
and each module input range. You will find further information under ID 12436891 at the
Customer Support FAQ site.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 311
Analog modules
5.24 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF10-0AB0)

Block diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit

SO+0
SE+0
SE-0
AGND CH0

CH1

Electrical
isolation

CH2

Backplane
A/Dconverter bus Bus S7-400
CH3 interface

Internal
CH4
power supply

CH5

CH6

SO+7
SE+7
SE-7
AGND CH7

Figure 5-36 Block diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit

Note
An external protective network is required in the signal lines in accordance with IEC 61000-
4-5 (12 V lightning protection device, model CT919-506, switched in parallel with all inputs
according to the manufacturer's recommendations)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

312 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.24 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF10-0AB0)

Wiring diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit

INTF 1
EXTF 2
3
4
5
6 SE+0
7 SE-0 Word 0
CH0
8 SO0
9 AGND
10
11 SE+1
12 SE-1
CH1 Word 1
13 SO1
14 AGND
15
16 SE+2
17 SE-2
CH2 Word 2
18 SO2
19 AGND
20
21 SE+3
22 SE-3 Word 3
CH3
23 SO3
24 AGND
25
26
27
28 SE+4
29 SE-4
CH4 Word 4
30 SO4
31 AGND
32
33 SE+5
34 SE-5
CH5 Word 5
35 SO5
36 AGND
37
38 SE+6
39 SE-6
CH6 Word 6
40 SO6
41 AGND
42
43 SE+7
44 SE-7
CH7 Word 7
45 SO7
46 AGND
47
48

Figure 5-37 Wiring diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 313
Analog modules
5.24 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF10-0AB0)

Specifications of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210
Weight Approx. 650 g
Module-specific data
Number of inputs 8
Length of cable
 Shielded Max. 200 m
Voltages, currents and potentials
Constant current for resistive transducers Typ. 1 mA
Electrical isolation
 Between channels and the backplane bus Yes
Permissible potential difference
Between MANA and Minternal (Viso) 120 VAC
Isolation test voltage 1500 VDC
Current consumption
 From the backplane bus (5 V) Max. 650 mA
Power loss of the module Typ. 3.3 W
Formation of analog values
Measuring principle Integrating
Integration/conversion time/resolution (per channel)
 Programmable Yes
 Basic conversion time 8 ms/23 ms/25 ms
(all channels enabled)
Additional conversion time for measuring resistance, in ms
 Wire break monitoring 110 ms/4 s
 3-wire compensation 110 ms/390 s
 Internal self-calibration
No noise suppression 50 ms/110 s
50/60 Hz
 Resolution, including sign 210 ms/390 s
16 bits
 Noise suppression at interference frequency f1 in None/50/60
Hz
Measured value smoothing Parameters can be assigned to 4 levels
Basic response time of module (all channels enabled) 8 ms/23 ms/25 ms
Noise suppression, error limits
Noise suppression for f = n (f1 ± 1%), (f1 = interference frequency) n = 1, 2, ...
 Common-mode noise (Ucm <120 V) > 100 dB
 Series mode interference (peak value of > 50 dB
disturbance < nominal input range)
Crosstalk between inputs > 70 dB

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

314 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.24 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF10-0AB0)

Operational limit (across temperature range, relative to input range)

 RTD input RTD-4L RTD-3L
– Pt 100 ±1.8° C ± 3.4° C
– Pt 200 ±0.8° C ± 1.7° C
– Pt 500 ±0.4° C ± 0.7° C
– Pt 1000 ±0.3° C ± 0.4° C
– Ni 100 ±1.5° C ± 2.1° C
– Ni 1000
± 0.2° C ± 0.3° C
Basic error limit (operational error limit at 25° C, relative to input range)
 RTD input RTD-4L RTD-3L
– Pt 100 ± 0.5° C ± 1.0° C
– Pt 200 ± 0.3° C ± 0.5° C
– Pt 500 ±0.3° C ± 0.4° C
– Pt 1000 ± 0.2° C ± 0.2° C
– Ni 100 ± 0.3° C ± 0.6° C
– Ni 1000
± 0.2° C ± 0.2° C
Linearity error (relative to input range)
Additional error
 RTD input RTD-4L RTD-3L
– Pt 100 ± 0.2° C ± 0.3° C
– Pt 200 ± 0.2° C ± 0.2° C
– Pt 500 ± 0.1° C ± 0.1° C
– Pt 1000 ± 0.1° C ± 0.1° C
– Ni 100 ± 0.1° C ± 0.2° C
– Ni 1000
± 0.1° C ± 0.1° C
Repetition accuracy (in transient state at 25° C, relative
to input range) Additional error
 RTD input RTD-4L RTD-3L
– Pt 100 ± 0.2° C ± 0.3° C
– Pt 200 ± 0.2° C ± 0.2° C
– Pt 500 ± 0.1° C ± 0.1° C
– Pt 1000 ± 0.1° C ± 0.1° C
– Ni 100 ± 0.1° C ± 0.2° C
– Ni 1000
± 0.1° C ± 0.1° C
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Interrupts
 Hardware interrupt Programmable
 Hardware interrupt when limit value is exceeded Programmable
 Diagnostic interrupt Programmable
Diagnostic functions Programmable
 Group error display
– For internal fault Red LED (INTF)
– For external fault Red LED (EXTF)
– Diagnostic information dump Supported

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 315
Analog modules
5.24 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF10-0AB0)

Sensor selection data

Input range (nominal values) / input impedance
 Resistance thermometer Pt 100/> 10M
Pt 200/> 10M
Pt 500/> 10M
Pt 1000/> 10M
Ni 100/> 10M
Ni 1000/> 10M
Maximum input voltage for voltage input 35 V continuous;
(destruction limit) 75 V for max. 1 s
(duty factor 1:20)
Connection of the sensor
 For resistance measurement with 2-conductor Supported
connection
 With 4-conductor connection Supported
Characteristic linearization Programmable
For RTD resistance temperature detection Pt100...1000,
0.00385 Alpha to
DIN IEC 751
Ni 100...1000,
0.00618 Alpha to
DIN 43760
1 Measuring range
 PT100, PT200 -200° C to +850° C
 PT 500 -200° C to +800° C
 PT 1000 -200° C to +240° C
 Ni 100 -60° C to +250° C
 Ni 1000 -60° C to +130° C
User data in engineering format Degrees Celsius
Degrees Fahrenheit
1 7KF10 does not support all measuring ranges specified for S7.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

316 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.24 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF10-0AB0)

5.24.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit

Setting the operating mode

You set the operating mode of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit in STEP 7.

Parameters
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog
modules in the respective sections.
The table below provides an overview of configurable parameters, including defaults.

Table 5- 68 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit

Parameters Value range Default2 Parameter Scope

type
Enable
 Diagnostic interrupt1 Yes/no No Dynamic Module
 Hardware interrupt1 Yes/no No
 Destination CPU for interrupt 1 to 4 - Static Module
Trigger for hardware interrupt3) - Dynamic Channel
 High limit 32767 to - 32768
 Low limit - 32768 to 32767
Diagnostics
 Wire break Yes/no No Static Channel
 Underflow Yes/no No
 Overflow Yes/no No
Measurement
 Measuring method Disabled RTD-3L
RTD-4L Thermal resistance
(linear, 4-conductor
connection)
RTD-3L Thermal resistance
(linear, 3-conductor
connection)
 Measuring range Refer to the respective section for the Pt 100
measuring ranges of the input channels Standard
that you can set.
 Temperature unit Degrees Celsius; degrees Fahrenheit Degrees Static Module
Celsius

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 317
Analog modules
5.24 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF10-0AB0)

Parameters Value range Default2 Parameter Scope

type
 Temperature coefficient for For platinum (Pt) 0,00385 Static Channel
temperature measurement 0.00385 Ω/Ω/ °C
with thermal resistance (RTD)
0.003916 Ω/Ω/ °C
0.003902 Ω/Ω/ °C
0.003920 Ω/Ω/ °C
For nickel (Ni)
0.00618 Ω/Ω/ °C
0.00672 Ω/Ω/ °C
 Noise suppression 60 Hz; 50 Hz; none 60 Hz
Smoothing None None Static Channel
Weak
Medium
Strong
1If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to "No" because the interrupt lines are not available in
ER-1/ER-2.
2 Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the analog modules with the default settings.
3 The limit values must be within the temperature range of the connected sensor.

Measured value smoothing

You will find information that is generally applicable to the smoothing of analog values in the
respective section.
The following figure shows for the module the number of module cycles, in the case of a step
response, after which the smoothed analog value is applied to almost 100%, depending on
the smoothing setting. The figure applies to every change of signal at an analog input.

Signal variation in Step response for any analog input signal

percent
100

63

50

0 20 40 60 80 100

Smoothing Low: Module cycles

average:
high:

Figure 5-38 Step response of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

318 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.24 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF10-0AB0)

Displaying parameter assignment errors

The SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit is capable of diagnostics. Below you will find an overview
of the displays that are possible for modules with parameter assignment errors.

Table 5- 69 Diagnostic information of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit

Incorrect parameter Possible display Explanation

assignment
Of the module  Module error You will find explanations of
 Internal error the diagnostics information in
 Incorrect parameters the respective tables.
 No module parameters
Affecting certain channels  Module error
 Internal error
 Channel error
 Incorrect parameters
 Channel information available
 Channel error vector
 Channel parameter assignment error
 User calibration does not correspond
to the parameter assignment

See also
Parameters of analog input modules (Page 217)
Conversion, cycle, settling and response time of analog modules (Page 212)
General information about diagnostic messages (Page 99)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 319
Analog modules
5.24 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF10-0AB0)

5.24.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit

Measuring methods
You can set the temperature measurement as the measuring method for the input channels.

Unused channels
For unused channels, set the "measuring method" parameter to "deactivated". This reduces
the module's cycle time.

Measuring ranges
Set the measuring ranges by means of the "Measuring range" parameter in STEP 7.

Table 5- 70 Measuring ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit

Selected measuring method Measuring range Description

RTD-3L: Thermal resistance Pt 100 Standard The digitized analog values are listed in the
(linear, 3-conductor Pt 200 Standard section "Analog Values of the Analog Input
connection) Pt 500 Standard Channels" in the temperature range.
(temperature measurement) Pt 1000 Standard
RTD-4L: Thermal resistance Ni 100 Standard
(linear, 4-conductor Ni 1000 Standard
connection)
(temperature measurement)

Default
The default settings of the module in STEP 7 are "Thermal resistor (linear, 3-conductor
connection)" for the measuring method and "Pt 100 Standard" for the measuring range. You
can use this measuring method with this measuring range without configuring the SM 431;
AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit with STEP 7.

See also
Representation of analog values of analog input channels (Page 185)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

320 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.25 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF00-0AB0)

5.25 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF00-0AB0)

5.25.1 Features

Overview
The analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit has the following features:
● 8 isolated differential inputs for voltage/current/temperature measurement
● 26 measuring range settings
● Linearization of the thermocouple characteristic curves
● Resolution 16 bits
● Programmable diagnostics
● Programmable diagnostic interrupt
● Programmable interrupt when limit is exceeded
● Analog section isolated from CPU
● The maximum permissible common mode voltage between the channels and between
the channel and the central ground point is 120 VAC
● Field connection (6ES7431-7K00-6AA0) with internal reference temperature (included
with the product)

Calibration software
The calibration software is only available on the Internet. You can find the current version
under article ID 12443337.
After installing the software, you can define user-specific calibration values for each channel
and each module input range. You will find further information under ID 12436891 at the
Customer Support FAQ site.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 321
Analog modules
5.25 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF00-0AB0)

Block diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit

M0+ A/Dconverter
M0+
R0
Internal
M0- supply
CH0

CH1

CH2

CH3
Backplane
Bus S7-400
bus interface

CH4

CH5

CH6

CH7

Figure 5-39 Block diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit

Note
An external protective network is required in the signal lines in accordance with IEC 61000-
4-5 (12 V lightning protection device, model CT919-506, switched in parallel with all inputs
according to the manufacturer's recommendations).

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

322 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.25 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF00-0AB0)

Wiring diagram SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit

Optional connector Connector with Thermocouples

(screw-type) temperature reference Voltage measurement
Current measurement
INTF 1
EXTF 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 M0+ M0+
0 M0+ M0+
10 CH0 Word 0
11 R0 R0
12 M0- M0-
13
14 M1+ M1+
1 M1+ M1+
15
R1 R1 CH1 Word 1
16
17 M1- M1-
18
19 M2+ M2+
2 M2+ M2+
20
A R2 V R2 CH2 Word 2
21
22 M2- M2-
23
24 M3 + M3 +
3
25 M3 + M3 + CH3 Word 3
V R3 V R3
26
27 M3- M3-
28
29 M4+ M4+
4 30 M4+ M4+
V R4 A R4 CH4 Word 4
31
32 M4- M4-
33
34 M5+ M5+
5 M5+ M5+
35
A R5 A R5 CH5 Word 5
36
37 M5- M5-
38
39 M6+ M6+
6 M6+ M6+
40
Tr Tr CH6 Word 6
41 R6 R6
42 M6- M6-
43
44 M7+ M7+
7 M7+ M7+
45 CH7
Tr Tr Word 7
46 R7 R7
47 M7- M7-
48

6ES7492-1AL00-0AA0 6ES7431-7KF00-6AA0

Figure 5-40 Wiring diagram SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 323
Analog modules
5.25 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF00-0AB0)

Specifications of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210
Weight Approx. 650 g
Module-specific data
Number of inputs 8
Length of cable
 Shielded 200 m
Voltages, currents and potentials
Electrical isolation
 Between channels and the backplane bus Yes
 Between channels Yes
In groups of 1
Permissible potential difference
 Between inputs (UCM) 120 VAC
 Between MANA and Minternal (Viso) 120 VAC
Isolation test voltage 1500 VDC
Current consumption Max. 1200 mA
 From the backplane bus (5 V)
Power loss of the module Typ. 4.6 W
Formation of analog values
Measuring principle Integrating
Integration/conversion time/resolution (per channel)
 Programmable Yes
 Integration time in ms 2,5 16,7 20 100
 Basic conversion time in ms 10 16,7 20 100
 Resolution, including sign 16 bits
 Noise suppression 400 60 50 10
 For interference frequency f1 in Hz
 Measured value smoothing Parameters can be assigned to 4 levels
 Basic response time of the module (all channels 40 67 80 400
enabled)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

324 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.25 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF00-0AB0)

Noise suppression, error limits

Noise suppression for f = nx(f1 ± 1%), (f1 = interference frequency) n = 1, 2, ...
 Common-mode noise (Ucm < 120 V)
Current, thermocouple and voltage range < 2.5 V > 120 dB
Voltage range ≥2.5 V > 95 dB
Crosstalk between inputs (Ucm < 120 V)
Current, thermocouple and voltage range ≥2.5 V > 120 dB
Voltage range ≥2.5 V > 95 dB
 Series mode interference (peak value of > 80 dB
disturbance < nominal input range)
Operational limit (across temperature range, relative to input range)
 Voltage input ± 0,30 %
 Current input ± 0,50 %
 Temperature error (with reference to the input range)2
Across the temperature range of:
Type U ± 3.6° C
-100° to 600° C
Type L ± 2.9° C
0° to 900° C
Type T ± 2.1° C
-100° to 400° C
Type J ± 5.0° C
-100° to 1200° C
Type E ± 4.6° C
-100° to 1000° C
Type K ± 3.8° C
0° to 1372° C
Type N ± 5.7° C
0° to 1300° C
Type S ± 5.3° C
200° to 1769° C
Type R ± 6.7° C
200° to 1769° C
Type B ± 7.3° C
400° to 1820° C

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 325
Analog modules
5.25 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF00-0AB0)

Noise suppression, error limits

Basic error limit (operational error limit at 25° C, relative to input range)
 Input voltage ± 0,10 %
 Input current ± 0,17 %
 Temperature error (reference to the input range)2 across temperature range of :
Type U ± 1.2° C
-100° to 600° C
Type L ± 1.0° C
0° to 900° C
Type T ± 0.7° C
-100° to 400° C
Type J ± 1.7° C
-100° to 1200° C
Type E ± 1.5° C
-100° to 1000° C
Type K ± 1.3° C
0° to 1372° C
Type N ± 1.9° C
0° to 1300° C
Type S ± 1.8° C
200° to 1769° C
Type R ± 2.2° C
200° to 1769° C
Type B ± 2.2° C
400° to 1820° C
Linearity error (relative to input range) Additional error
± 0.05 %
Repetition accuracy (in transient state at 25° C, Additional error
relative to input range) ± 0.05 %
Connection for compensating the cold junction 6ES7431-7KF00-
6AA0
Operational limit
 Error internal temperature compensation Additional error
± 2.0° C
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Interrupts
 Hardware interrupt Programmable
 Hardware interrupt when limit value is exceeded Programmable
 Diagnostic interrupt Programmable
Diagnostic functions Programmable
 Group error display Programmable
For internal fault Red LED (INTF)
For external fault Red LED (EXTF)
Diagnostic information dump Supported
Monitoring of
 Wire break

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

326 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.25 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF00-0AB0)

Sensor selection data

Input range (nominal values) / input impedance
 Voltage ± 25 mV > 2 MΩ
± 50 mV > 2 MΩ
± 80 mV > 2 MΩ
± 100 mV > 2 MΩ
± 250 mV > 2 MΩ
± 500 mV > 2 MΩ
± 1 V > 2 MΩ
± 2.5 V > 2 MΩ
± 5 V > 2 MΩ
+ 1 to 5 V > 2 MΩ
± 10 V > 2 MΩ
 Current ± 20 mA 50 Ω
+ 4 to 20 mA 50 Ω
± 10 mA 50 Ω
± 5 mA 50 Ω
± 3.2 mA 50 Ω
 Thermocouple Types B, N, > 2 MΩ
E, R, S, J, L,
T, K, U
Maximum input voltage for 35 V continuous;
voltage input (destruction limit) 75 V for max. 1 s
(duty factor 1:20)
Maximum input current for current input (destruction 32 mA
limit)
Connection of the sensor
 For measuring voltage Supported
 For current measurement as 4-wire transducer Supported
Characteristic linearization
 For thermocouples Types B, N, E, R, S, J, L, T, K, U
Temperature compensation Yes, programmable
 Internal temperature compensation Supported
Unit for temperature measurement Degrees Celsius / Degrees Fahrenheit
1The 6ES7431-7KFOO-0AB0 does not support the high and low ranges defined in S7 for
thermocouples. When the module reaches the operational limit defined for S7, the system outputs a
corresponding underflow (32768) or overflow (327767) signal.
2 Thermocouples can be operated above the specified temperatures.
The specified accuracy improves in the lower range and at higher temperature.
The accuracy of the thermocouple module can be calculated for other temperature ranges based on
the accuracy limit values of the input voltage and the emf/°C of the thermocouple.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 327
Analog modules
5.25 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF00-0AB0)

5.25.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit

Setting the operating mode

You set the operating mode of the SM 431; AI 8 x16 Bit in STEP 7.

Parameters
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog
modules in the respective sections.
The table below provides an overview of configurable parameters, including defaults.

Table 5- 71 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit

Parameters Value range Default2 Parameter Scope

type
Enable
 Diagnostic interrupt1 Yes/no No Dynamic Module
 Hardware interrupt1 Yes/no No Dynamic
 Destination CPU for interrupt 1 to 4 - Static
Trigger for hardware interrupt3)
 High limit 32767 to - 32768 - Dynamic Channel
 Low limit - 32768 to 32767 -
Diagnostics
 Wire break Yes/no No Static Channel
 Reference channel error Yes/no No
 Underflow Yes/no No
 Overflow Yes/no No
Measurement
 Measuring method Disabled TC-L Static Channel
U Voltage
4DMU Current
(4-wire
transducer)
TC-L Thermocouple
(linear)
 Measuring range For information on configurable Type J
measuring ranges of input
channels, refer to the section
"Measuring methods and
measuring ranges of SM 431,
AI 8 x 16 Bit".
 Reference temperature - 273.15 to 327.67 oC 100 oC Dynamic Module
-327.68 to 327.67 oC

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

328 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.25 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF00-0AB0)

Parameters Value range Default2 Parameter Scope

type
 Temperature unit4 Degrees Celsius; degrees Degrees Celsius Static Module
Fahrenheit
 Noise suppression 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 10 Hz 60 Hz
 Smoothing None, weak, medium, strong None
 Reference junction (reference None Internal Static Module
to the cold junction) Internal
Reference temperature value
dynamic
1If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to "No" because the interrupt lines are not available in
ER-1/ER-2.
2 Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the analog modules with the default settings.
3 The limit values must be within the temperature range of the connected sensor.
4 Valid for the format of the output temperature and the dynamic reference temperature

Measured value smoothing

For generally valid information on analog value smoothing, refer to the section "Conversion
and cycle and response times of analog modules".
The cycle time of the module is a constant in the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit that is not dependent
on the number of channels that are enabled. It therefore has no effect on the step response,
which is defined by the parameter assignment of interference frequency suppression and
smoothing.

Step response

Table 5- 72 How response times depend on the configured interference frequency suppression and smoothing of the
SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit

Interference frequency Response time in ms with configured smoothing:

suppression in Hz
None Weak Medium Strong
10 100 200 1600 3200
50 20 40 320 640
60 16,7 33,3 267 533
400 10 20 160 320
The following figures illustrate the contents of table above. They show the response time
required for a step response before the smoothed analog value is almost applied to 100%.
The figures apply to every change of signal at an analog input.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 329
Analog modules
5.25 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF00-0AB0)

Step response at an interference frequency suppression of 10 Hz

Signal variation in Step response for any analog input signal

percent
100

Smoothing
None:
Low:
average:
high:

0
800 1600 2400 3200
100 Response time in ms
200

Figure 5-41 Step response at 10 Hz interference frequency suppression of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit

Step response at an interference frequency suppression of 50 Hz

Signal variation in Step response for any analog input signal

percent

100

Smoothing
None:
Low:
average:
high:

0 40 80 160 240 320 400 480 560 640

20 Response time in ms

Figure 5-42 Step response at 50 Hz interference frequency suppression of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

330 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.25 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF00-0AB0)

Step response at an interference frequency suppression of 60 Hz

Signal variation in Step response for any analog input signal

percent

100

Smoothing
None:
Low:
average:
high:

0 80 160 240 320 400 480 560 640

16,7 267 533
33,3 Response time in ms

Figure 5-43 Step response at 60 Hz interference frequency suppression of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit

Step response at an interference frequency suppression of 400 Hz

Signal variation in Step response for any analog input signal

percent

100

Smoothing
None:
Low:
average:
high:

0 80 160 240 320 400 480 560 640

10
Response time in ms
20

Figure 5-44 Step response at 400 Hz interference frequency suppression of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 331
Analog modules
5.25 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF00-0AB0)

Displaying parameter assignment errors

The SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit has diagnostics capability. Below you will find an overview of the
displays that are possible for modules with parameter assignment errors.

Table 5- 73 Diagnostic information of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit

Incorrect parameter Possible display Explanation

assignment
Of the module  Module error You will find explanations of
 Internal error the diagnostics information in
 Incorrect parameters the respective tables.
 No module parameters
Affecting certain channels  Module error
 Internal error
 Channel error
 Incorrect parameters
 Channel information available
 Channel error vector
 Channel parameter assignment error
 User calibration does not correspond
to the parameter assignment

See also
General information about parameter assignment (Page 216)
Conversion, cycle, settling and response time of analog modules (Page 212)
General information about diagnostic messages (Page 99)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

332 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.25 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF00-0AB0)

5.25.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit

Measuring methods
You can set the measuring method at the input channels:
● Voltage measurement
● Current measurement
● Temperature measurement
You perform the setting with the "measuring method" parameter in STEP 7.

Unused channels
For unused channels, set the "measuring method" parameter to "deactivated". This reduces
the module's cycle time.

Measuring ranges
Set the measuring ranges by means of the "Measuring range" parameter in STEP 7.

Table 5- 74 Measuring ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit

Selected measuring method Measuring range Description

V: Voltage ±25 mV The digitized analog values are listed in the
±50 mV section "Representation of analog values for
±80 mV analog input channels" in the voltage measuring
±100 mV range.
±250 mV
±500 mV
±1 V
±2.5 V
±5 V
±10 V
from 1 to 5 V
4DMU: Current (4-wire sensor) ±3.2 mA The digitized analog values are listed in the
±5 mA section "Representation of analog values for
±10 mA analog input channels" in the current measuring
±20 mA range.
from 0 to 20 mA
from 4 to 20 mA
TC-L: Thermocouple (linear) Type B The digitized analog values are listed in the
(Temperature measurement) Type N section "Representation of analog values for
Type E analog input channels" in the temperature
Type R range.
Type S
Type J
Type L
Type T
Type K
Type U

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 333
Analog modules
5.25 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF00-0AB0)

Default
The default settings of the module in STEP 7 are "Thermocouple (linear)" for the measuring
method and "Type J" for the measuring range. You can use this combination of measuring
method and measuring range without configuring the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit in STEP 7.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

334 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.26 Analog output module SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7432-1HF00-0AB0)

5.26 Analog output module SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7432-1HF00-0AB0)

5.26.1 Features

Overview
The SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit has the following features:
● 8 outputs
● The output channels can be programmed as
– Voltage output
– Current output
● Resolution 13 bits
● Analog section Isolated to CPU and load voltage
● Maximum permissible common mode voltage between the channels or of the channels
against MANA is 3 VDC

Block diagram of the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit

CH0
A

CH1

Bus S7-400
Bus control

CH2

CH3

CH4

D CH5

CH6

CH7

24 V

L+/M
Analog supply

Figure 5-45 Block diagram of the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 335
Analog modules
5.26 Analog output module SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7432-1HF00-0AB0)

Wiring diagram of the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit

Voltage output Current output

1
2
3
L+ L+ L+
4
5
6 QV0 CH0 Word 0 QI0 CH0 Word 0
7 S0+
8 S0-
9
10
11 QV1 CH1 Word 2 QI1 CH1 Word 2
12 S1 +
13 S1-
14
15
16 QV2 CH2 Word 4 QI2 CH2 Word 4
17 S2+
18 S2-
19
20
21 QV3 CH3 Word 6 QI3 CH3 Word 6
22 S3 +
23 S3-
24
25 MANA M ANA M ANA
26
27
28 QV4 CH4 Word 8 QI4 CH4 Word 8
29 S4+
30 S4-
31
32
33 QV5 CH5 Word 10 QI5 CH5 Word 10
34 S5+
35 S5-
36
37
38 QV6 CH6 Word 12 QI6 CH6 Word 12
39 S6+
40 S6-
41
42
43 QV7 CH7 Word 14 QI7 CH7 Word 14
44 S7+
45 S7-
46
47
M
48 M M

Figure 5-46 Wiring diagram of the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

336 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.26 Analog output module SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7432-1HF00-0AB0)

Specifications of the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210
Weight Approx. 650 g
Module-specific data
Number of outputs 8
Cable length
 Shielded Max. 200 m
Voltages, currents, electrical potentials
Supply voltage of the electronics L + 24 VDC
Nominal load voltage L+ 24 VDC
 Reverse polarity protection Yes
Electrical isolation
 Between channels and the backplane bus Yes
 Between channels No
 Between channels and load voltage L+ Yes
Permissible potential difference
 Between the outputs (UCM) 3 VDC
 Between S- and MANA (UCM) 3 VDC
 Between MANA and M-internal (UISO) 75 VDC / 60 VAC
Insulation tested
 Between bus and L+/M 2120 VDC
 Between bus and analog section 2120 VDC
 Between bus and chassis ground 500 VDC
 Between analog section and L+/M 707 VDC
 Between analog section and chassis ground 2120 VDC
 Between L+/M and chassis ground 2120 VDC
Current consumption
 From the backplane bus (5 V) Max. 150 mA
 Power supply and load voltage L+ (with nominal Max. 400 mA
load)
 Power supply and load voltage L+ (no load) Max. 200 mA
Power loss of the module Typ. 9 W

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 337
Analog modules
5.26 Analog output module SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7432-1HF00-0AB0)

Formation of analog values

Resolution (including overshoot range) 13 bits
Conversion time (per channel)
 In the ranges 1 to 5 V and 4 to 20 mA 420 µs
 In all ranges 300 µs
Basic execution time of the module (all channels enabled)
 In the ranges 1 to 5 V and 4 to 20 mA 3.36 ms
 In all the other ranges 2.4 ms
Settling time
 With resistive load 0.1 ms
 With capacitive load 3.5 ms
 With inductive load 0.5 ms
Noise suppression, error limits
Noise suppression at f = n (f1 ± 1 %), (f1 = interference frequency) n= 1.2...
 Common-mode interference (UCM < AC 3 Vpp/50 > 60 dB
Hz)
Crosstalk between outputs > 40 dB
Operational limit (across temperature range, relative to input range)
 Voltage output
– ± 10 V ± 0,5 %
– 0 to 10 V ± 0,5 %
– 1 to 5 V ± 0,5 %
 Current output
– ± 20 mA ±1%
– 4 to 20 mV ±1%
Basic error limit (operational error limit at 25° C, relative to output range)
 Voltage output
– ± 10 V ± 0,5 %
– 0 to 10 V ± 0,5 %
– 1 to 5 V ± 0,5 %
 Current output
– ± 20 mA ± 0,5 %
– 0 to 20 mA ± 0,5 %
Temperature error (relative to output range) ± 0.02 % K
Linearity error (relative to output range) ± 0,05 %
Repetition accuracy (in transient state at 25° C, ± 0,05 %
relative to input range)
Output ripple; range 0 Hz to 50 kHz (relative to output ± 0,05 %
range)
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions None
Injection of substitution values No

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

338 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.26 Analog output module SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7432-1HF00-0AB0)

Actuator selection data

Output ranges (nominal values)
 Voltage ± 10 V0 to 10 V1 to 5 V
 Current ± 20 mA
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
Load impedance (in the nominal range of the output)
 For voltage outputs Min. 1 kΩ
– Capacitive load Max. 1 µF
 For current outputs Max. 500 Ω
– Inductive load 600 Ω with reduced UCM to < 1 V
Max. 1 mH
Voltage output
 Short-circuit protection Yes
 Short-circuit current Max. 30 mA
Current output
 No-load voltage Max. 19 V
Destruction limit against external voltages/currents
 Voltage at outputs to MANA Max. 20 V continuous
75 V for 1 ms (cycle factor 1:20)
 Current Max. 40 mA continuous
Wiring the actuators
 For voltage output
– 2-conductor connection Supported, without compensation of the line
– 4-conductor connection (measuring line) resistances
Supported
 For current output
– 2-conductor connection Supported

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 339
Analog modules
5.26 Analog output module SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7432-1HF00-0AB0)

5.26.2 Commissioning the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit

Parameters
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog
modules in the respective sections.
For an overview of configurable parameters and defaults, refer to the "Parameters of analog
output modules" table.

Assigning parameters to channels

The parameters can be set separately at each output channel of SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit. You
can thus assign individual parameters to each output channel.

See also
General information about parameter assignment (Page 216)

5.26.3 Output ranges of the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit

Configuration of analog output circuits

You can configure the outputs for operation as voltage or current outputs, or disable these.
You configure the output circuits at the "output type" parameter in STEP 7.

Unused channels
To make sure that unused output channels of SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit are de-energized, set
the "Output type" parameter to "deactivated" and leave the terminal open.

Output ranges
You program the output ranges for voltage and current outputs in STEP 7.

Table 5- 75 Output ranges of the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit

Selected type of output Output range Description

Voltage 1 V to 5 V The digitized analog values are listed in
0 V to 10 V the section "Representation of analog
± 10 V values for analog output channels" in
Current 0 to 20 mA the voltage or current output range.
4 to 20 mA
± 20 mA

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

340 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Analog modules
5.26 Analog output module SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7432-1HF00-0AB0)

Default
The output type "Voltage" and output range "± 10 V" are set by default at the module. You
can always use this combination of output type and range without having to program the
SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit in STEP 7.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 341
Analog modules
5.26 Analog output module SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7432-1HF00-0AB0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

342 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
Interface modules 6
6.1 Common features of the interface modules

Function
Interface modules (a send IM and a receive IM) are required if one or more expansion racks
(ER) are to be connected to a central rack (CR). This configuration is described in the
Installation manual.

Configuration
Interface modules must always be used together. The send modules (send IMs) are inserted
in the CR, whilst the corresponding receive modules (receive IMs) are plugged into the
series-connected ER.

Table 6- 1 Interface modules of the S7-400

Partner Areas of application

IM 460-0 Send IM for local link without PS transfer; with communication bus
IM 461-0 Receive IM for local link without PS transfer; with communication bus
IM 460-1 Send IM for local link with PS transfer; without communication bus
IM 461-1 Receive IM for local link with PS transfer; without communication bus
IM 460-3 Send IM for remote link up to 102.25 m; with communication bus
IM 461-3 Receive IM for remote link up to 102.25 m; with communication bus
IM 460-4 Send IM for remote link up to 605 m; without communication bus
IM 461-4 Receive IM for remote link up to 605 m; without communication bus

Overview of the connections

Note the rules for connections in the section after next.

Table 6- 2 Overview of the connections

Local connection Remote connection

Send IM 460-0 460-1 460-3 460-4
Receive IM 461-0 461-1 461-3 461-4
Max. number of connectable EMs per line 4 1 4 4
Max. distance 5m 1.5 m 102.25 m 605 m
V transfer No Yes No No
Max. current transfer per interface - 5A - -
Communication bus transmission Yes No Yes No

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 343
Interface modules
6.1 Common features of the interface modules

Connection possibilities for central racks and expansion racks

IM 460-4
IM 460-3
IM 460-1
Central rack CR IM 460-0

Expansion without 5 V local transfer

Expansion rack ER 1 Expansion rack ER 4

IM 461-0 IM 461-0

Chain length max. 5 m

Expansion without 5 V local transfer

Expansion rack ER 1

IM 461-1

Chain length max. 1,5 m

Remote expansion

Expansion rack ER 1 Expansion rack ER 4

IM 461-3 IM 461-3

Chain length max. 102,25 m

Expansion rack ER 1 Expansion rack ER 4

IM 461-4 IM 461-4

Chain length max. 605 m

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

344 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Interface modules
6.1 Common features of the interface modules

Rules for connection

When you connect a central rack to expansion racks, you must observe the following rules:
● You can connect up to 21 ERs of the S7-400 to one CR.
● The ERs are assigned numbers to identify them. The rack number must be set on the
coding switch of the receive IM. Any rack number between 1 and 21 may be assigned.
Numbers must not be duplicated.
● You may insert up to six send IMs in one CR. However, only two send IMs with 5 V
transfer are allowed in one CR.
● Each line connected to the interface of a send IM can comprise up to four ERs (without 5
V transfer) or one ER (with 5 V transfer).
● The exchange of data via the communication bus is limited to 7 racks, meaning the CR
and ER numbers 1 to 6.
● The maximum (total) cable lengths specified for the type of connection must not be
exceeded.

Table 6- 3 Cable for different connections

Connection type Maximum (total) line

length
Local connection with 5 V transfer via IM 460-1 and IM 461-1 1.5 m
Local connection without 5 V transfer via IM 460-0 and IM 461-0 5m
Remote connection via IM 460-3 and IM 461-3 102.25 m
Remote connection via IM 460-4 and IM 461-4 605 m

Terminator
The bus must be terminated in the last EU of a line. To do this, plug in the appropriate
terminator in the lower front connector of the receive IM in the last EU of the line. Unused
front connectors in a send IM do not have to be terminated. The IM 461-1 does not require a
terminator.

Table 6- 4 Terminators for the Receive IMs

Receive IM Terminator
IM 461-0 6ES7461-0AA00-7AA0
IM 461-3 6ES7461-3AA00-7AA0
IM 461-4 6ES7461-4AA00-7AA0

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 345
Interface modules
6.1 Common features of the interface modules

The following figure shows you a typical configuration with send IMs, receive IMs and
terminators.

2
3

5
(1) Receive IM
(2) Terminator
(3) Receive IM
(4) Send IM
(5) CR
Figure 6-1 Example: Configuration with send IMs, receive IMs and terminators

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

346 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Interface modules
6.1 Common features of the interface modules

Cables
Precut cables are available in different fixed lengths for connecting the individual interface
modules. (See Appendix "Accessories and spare parts").

Table 6- 5 Cables for interface modules

Interface modules Cables

IM 460-0 and IM 461-0 6ES7468-1... (P bus and communication bus are transferred)
IM 460-3 and IM 461-3
IM 460-1 and IM 461-1 6ES7468-3... (P bus is transferred; mounting rack is supplied with
current via the IM)
IM 460-4 and IM 461-4 6ES7468-1...

Installation and removal of the modules during operation

Please read the following warning on the insertion and removal of the interface modules and
associated cables.

CAUTION
Data may be lost or corrupted.
Removing or inserting the interface modules and/or their associated cables under voltage
can result in the loss or corruption of data.
Switch off the power supply modules to the CR and ERs you are working on before you
carry out any changes.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 347
Interface modules
6.2 Interface modules IM 460-0 (6ES7 460-0AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-0 (6ES7 461-0AA01-0AA0)

6.2 Interface modules IM 460-0 (6ES7 460-0AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-0

(6ES7 461-0AA01-0AA0)

Function
The interface module pair IM 460-0 (send IM) and IM 461-0 (receive IM) are used for a local
link.

Position of the operator controls and indicators of the IM 460-0 and IM 461-0
IM 460-0 IM 461-0
X IM 460-0 IM 461-0 X

460-XXXXX-XXXX 461-XXXXX-XXXX

/('V
EXTF INTF
EXTF INTF EXTF
C1 EXTF
C2

',3VZLWFK

8QGHUFRYHU

&RQQHFWRU;

3RUW& IN

X1 X1

&RQQHFWRU;

3RUW& OUT
'RQRWSOXJWHUPLQDWLQJUHVLVWRUFRQQHFWRU

X2 X2

Figure 6-2 Position of the operator controls and indicators of the IM 460-0 and IM 461-0

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

348 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Interface modules
6.2 Interface modules IM 460-0 (6ES7 460-0AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-0 (6ES7 461-0AA01-0AA0)

Operator controls and indicators on the send IM

Table 6- 6 Operator controls and indicators on the send IM

LEDs Meaning
EXTF LED (red) Lights up in the event of an external fault. Line 1 or line 2 is faulty (terminator
missing or broken cable)
C1 LED (green) Line 1 (via front connector x1, connection 1) is correct.
C1 LED (flashing An EU in the line is not ready for operation because
green)  The power supply module is not switched on or
 A module has not yet completed the initialization process
C2 LED (green) Line 2 (via front connector x2, connection 2) is correct.
C2 LED (flashing An EU in the line is not ready for operation because
green)  The power supply module is not switched on or
 A module has not yet completed the initialization process
Front Connector (output) for line 1 and line 2
connectors x1 X1 = upper front connector; x2 = lower front connector
and x2

Operator controls and indicators of the receive IM

Table 6- 7 Operator controls and indicators of the receive IM

LEDs Meaning
INTF LED (red) Lights up if a rack number > 21 or = 0 was set.
Lights up if you have changed the rack number under voltage.
EXTF LED (red) Lights up in the event of an external fault (line fault, for example, if the terminator
is not inserted or if a module has not yet completed the initialization process).
DIP switch DIP switch to set the number of the mounting rack.
Front connector x1 Upper connector (input) for the cable from the previous interface module.
Front connector x2 Lower connector (output) for the cable to the next interface module or for the
terminator.

Parameter assignment for the mounting rack number

Using the DIP switch on the front panel of the module, you must set the number of the
mounting rack in which the receive IM is installed. The permitted range is 1 to 21.

Setting/changing the number

Proceed as follows:
1. Set the switch of the power supply module in the EU in which you want to make the
change to the position (Output voltage 0 V).
2. Enter the number using the DIP switch.
3. Switch the power supply module on again.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 349
Interface modules
6.2 Interface modules IM 460-0 (6ES7 460-0AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-0 (6ES7 461-0AA01-0AA0)

Specifications of the IM 460-0 and IM 461-0

Maximum line length (total) 5m

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 280
Weight
 IM 460-0 600 g
 IM 461-0 610 g
Current consumption from the
S7-400 bus 5 VDC
 IM 460-0 Typ. 130 mA
Max. 140 mA
 IM 461-0 Typ. 260 mA
Max. 290 mA
Power loss
 IM 460-0 Typ. 650 mW
Max. 700 mW
 IM 461-0 Typ. 1300 mW
Max. 1450 mW
Terminator 6ES7461-0AA00-7AA0
Use only with IM 461-0 and IM 461-3.
Backup current None

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

350 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Interface modules
6.3 Interface modules IM 460-1 (6ES7460-1BA01-0AB0) and IM 461-1 (6ES7461-1BA01-0AA0)

6.3 Interface modules IM 460-1 (6ES7460-1BA01-0AB0) and IM 461-1

(6ES7461-1BA01-0AA0)

Function
The interface module pair IM 460-1 (send IM) and IM 461-1 (receive IM) are used for a local
link (up to a maximum 1.5 m in total). A 5 V supply voltage is also transferred with these
interface modules. Please particularly remember the following points:
● The current requirements of the module plugged into the ER must not exceed 5 V/5 A.
● You can only connect one ER per line.
● The modules in this mounting rack are not supplied with 24 V and are not backed up.
● The communication bus is not transferred with the interface module pair IM 460-1 and
IM 461-1.
● You must not use a power supply module in the ER.

Note
If you connect an ER via a local link with 5 V transmission, ungrounded operation is
prescribed for the ER (see Installation Manual).

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 351
Interface modules
6.3 Interface modules IM 460-1 (6ES7460-1BA01-0AB0) and IM 461-1 (6ES7461-1BA01-0AA0)

Position of the operator controls and indicators of the IM 460-1 and IM 461-1
IM 460-1 IM 461-1
X IM 460-1 X

460-XXXXX-XXXX 461-XXXXX-XXXX

LEDs
EXTF INTF
EXTF INTF EXTF
C1 EXTF
C2

DC 5 V
DC 5 V

',3VZLWFK

8QGHUFRYHU

&RQQHFWRU;

3RUW& IN

X1
X1

&RQQHFWRU;

3RUW&
'RQRWSOXJWHUPLQDWLQJUHVLVWRUFRQQHFWRU

X2

Figure 6-3 Position of the operator controls and indicators of the IM 460-1 and IM 461-1

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

352 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Interface modules
6.3 Interface modules IM 460-1 (6ES7460-1BA01-0AB0) and IM 461-1 (6ES7461-1BA01-0AA0)

Operator controls and indicators on the send IM

Table 6- 8 Operator controls and indicators on the send IM

LEDs Meaning
EXTF LED (red) Lights up in the event of an external fault. Line 1 or line 2 is faulty (terminator
missing or broken cable)
C1 LED (green) Line 1 (via front connector x1, connection 1) is correct.
C1 LED (flashing A module has not yet completed the initialization process.
green)
C2 LED (green) Line 2 (via front connector x2, connection 2) is correct.
C2 LED (flashing A module has not yet completed the initialization process.
green)
Front Connector (output) for line 1 and line 2
connectors x1 X1 = upper front connector; x2 = lower front connector
and x2

Operator controls and indicators of the receive IM

Table 6- 9 Operator controls and indicators of the receive IM

LEDs Meaning
INTF LED (red) Lights up if a rack number > 21 or = 0 was set.
Lights up if you have changed the rack number under voltage.
EXTF LED (red) Lights up in the event of an external fault (line fault, for example, if the terminator
is not inserted or if a module has not yet completed the initialization process but
not when the CC is switched off)
5 VDC (green) Power supply in the ER is correct.
DIP switch DIP switch to set the number of the mounting rack.
Front Upper connector (input) for the cable from the previous interface module.
connector x1

CAUTION
Modules can be damaged.
If you want to connect an ER via the IM 461-1 interface module and use a power supply
module in this ER, you might damage the modules.
Do not use a power supply module in an ER that you want to connect to the CR via the
IM 461-1 interface module.

Parameter assignment for the mounting rack number

Using the DIP switch on the front panel of the module, you must set the number of the
mounting rack in which the receive IM is installed. The permitted range is 1 to 21.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 353
Interface modules
6.3 Interface modules IM 460-1 (6ES7460-1BA01-0AB0) and IM 461-1 (6ES7461-1BA01-0AA0)

Setting/changing the number

Proceed as follows:
1. Set the power supply module in the CR to the position (Output voltage 0 V).
2. Enter the number using the DIP switch.
3. Switch the power supply module on again.

Specifications of the IM 460-1 and IM 461-1

Maximum line length (total) 1.5 m

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 280
Weight
 IM 460-1 600 g
 IM 461-1 610 g
Current consumption from the S7-400
bus 5 VDC
 IM 460-1 Typ. 50 mA, max. 85 mA
 IM 461-1 Typ. 100 mA, max. 120 mA
Power loss
 IM 460-1 Typ. 250 mW, max. 425 mW
 IM 461-1 Typ. 500 mW, max. 600 mW
Power supply for ER V/5 A per line
Backup current None

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

354 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Interface modules
6.4 Interface modules IM 460-3 (6ES7460-3AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-3 (6ES7461-3AA01-0AA0)

6.4 Interface modules IM 460-3 (6ES7460-3AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-3

(6ES7461-3AA01-0AA0)

Function
The interface module pair IM 460-3 (send IM) and IM 461-3 (receive IM) are used for a
remote link of up to a maximum 102.25 m (exactly: 100 m plus inputs/outputs of 0.75 m in
the line).

Position of operator control and display elements

IM 460-3 IM 461-3
X IM 460-3 IM 461-3 X

460-XXXXX-XXXX 461-XXXXX-XXXX

LEDs
INTF
EXTF
EXTF INTF EXTF

C1 EXTF
C2

DIP switch

Under cover

Connector X1:

Interface C1 IN

X1
X1

Connector X2:
Interface C2 OUT

X2 X2

Figure 6-4 Position of the operator controls and indicators of the IM 460-3 and IM 461-3

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 355
Interface modules
6.4 Interface modules IM 460-3 (6ES7460-3AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-3 (6ES7461-3AA01-0AA0)

Operator controls and indicators on the send IM

Table 6- 10 Operator controls and indicators on the send IM

LEDs Meaning
EXTF LED (red) Lights up in the event of an external fault. Line 1 or line 2 is faulty (terminator
missing or broken cable)
C1 LED (green) Line 1 (via front connector x1, connection 1) is correct.
C1 LED (flashing An EU in the line is not ready for operation because
green)  The power supply module is not switched on or
 A module has not yet completed the initialization process
C2 LED (green) Line 2 (via front connector x2, connection 2) is correct.
C2 LED (flashing An EU in the line is not ready for operation because
green)  The power supply module is not switched on or
 A module has not yet completed the initialization process

Operator controls and indicators of the receive IM

Table 6- 11 Operator controls and indicators of the receive IM

LEDs Meaning
INTF LED (red) Lights up if a rack number > 21 or = 0 was set.
Lights up if you have changed the rack number under voltage.
EXTF LED (red) Lights up in the event of an external fault (line fault, for example, if the
terminator is not inserted or if a module has not yet completed the
initialization process, or if the CC is switched off)
DIP switch DIP switch to set the number of the mounting rack.
Front connector x1 Upper connector (input) for the cable from the previous interface module.
Front connector x2 Lower connector (output) for the cable to the next interface module or for the
terminator.

Parameter assignment
Using the DIP switch on the front panel of the module, you must set the number of the
mounting rack in which the receive IM is installed. The permitted range is 1 to 21.
If required, you can change the distance setting for the line on the programming device using
STEP 7.
The default setting for the distance is 100 m.
Ensure that the distance corresponds as closely as possible to the current length (the sum of
all the cables per line) as this will accelerate data transmission.

Note
The distance set must always be longer than the actual length of cable per line.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

356 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Interface modules
6.4 Interface modules IM 460-3 (6ES7460-3AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-3 (6ES7461-3AA01-0AA0)

Setting/changing the number

Proceed as follows:
1. Set the switch of the power supply module in the EU in which you want to make the
change to the position (Output voltage 0 V).
2. Enter the number using the DIP switch.
3. Switch the power supply module on again.

Specifications of the IM 460-3 and IM 461-3

Maximum line length (total) 102.25 m

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 280
Weight
 IM 460-3 630 g
 IM 461-3 620 g
Current consumption from the S7-400 bus 5 VDC
 IM 460-3 Typ. 1350 mA
Max. 1550 mA
 IM 461-3 Typ. 590 mA
Max. 620 mA
Power loss
 IM 460-3 Typ. 6750 mW
Max. 7750 mW
 IM 461-3 Typ. 2950 mW
Max. 3100 mW
Terminator 6ES7461-3AA00-7AA0
Use only with IM 461-0 and IM 461-3.
Backup current None

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 357
Interface modules
6.5 Interface modules IM 460-4; (6ES7460-4AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-4; (6ES7461-4AA01-0AA0)

6.5 Interface modules IM 460-4; (6ES7460-4AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-4;

(6ES7461-4AA01-0AA0)

Function
The interface module pair IM 460-4 (send IM) and IM 461-4 (receive IM) are used for a
remote link of up to a maximum 605 m (exactly: 600 m plus inputs/outputs of 1.5 m in the
line).

Position of the operator controls and indicators of the IM 460-4 and IM 461-4
IM 460-4 IM 461-4
X IM 460-4 IM 461-4 X

460-XXXXX-XXXX 461-XXXXX-XXXX

LEDs
EXTF INTF
EXTF INTF EXTF
C1 EXTF
C2

DIP switch

Under cover

Connector X1:

Interface C1 IN

X1
X1

Connector X2:

Interface C2 OUT

X2 X2

Figure 6-5 Position of the operator controls and indicators of the IM 460-4 and IM 461-4

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

358 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Interface modules
6.5 Interface modules IM 460-4; (6ES7460-4AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-4; (6ES7461-4AA01-0AA0)

Operator controls and indicators on the send IM

Table 6- 12 Operator controls and indicators on the send IM

LEDs Meaning
EXTF LED (red) Lights up in the event of an external fault. Line 1 or line 2 is faulty (terminator
missing or broken cable)
C1 LED (green) Line 1 (via front connector x1, connection 1) is correct.
C1 LED (flashing An EU in the line is not ready for operation because
green)  The power supply module is not switched on or
 A module has not yet completed the initialization process
C2 LED (green) Line 2 (via front connector x2, connection 2) is correct.
C2 LED (flashing An EU in the line is not ready for operation because
green)  The power supply module is not switched on or
 A module has not yet completed the initialization process

Operator controls and indicators of the receive IM

Table 6- 13 Operator controls and indicators of the receive IM

LEDs Meaning
INTF LED (red) Lights up if a rack number > 21 or = 0 was set.
Lights up if you have changed the rack number under voltage.
EXTF LED (red) Lights up in the event of an external fault (line fault, for example, if the
terminator is not inserted or if a module has not yet completed the
initialization process, or if the CC is switched off)
DIP switch DIP switch to set the number of the mounting rack.
Front connector x1 Upper connector (input) for the cable from the previous interface module.
Front connector x2 Lower connector (output) for the cable to the next interface module or for the
terminator.

Parameter assignment
Using the DIP switch on the front panel of the module, you must set the number of the
mounting rack in which the receive IM is installed. The permitted range is 1 to 21.
If required, you can change the distance setting for the line on the programming device using
STEP 7.
The default setting for the distance is 600 m.
Ensure that the distance corresponds as closely as possible to the current length (the sum of
all the cables per line) as this will accelerate data transmission.

Note
The distance set must always be longer than the actual length of cable per line.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 359
Interface modules
6.5 Interface modules IM 460-4; (6ES7460-4AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-4; (6ES7461-4AA01-0AA0)

Setting/changing the number

Proceed as follows:
1. Set the switch of the power supply module in the EU in which you want to make the
change to the position (Output voltage 0 V).
2. Enter the number using the DIP switch.
3. Switch the power supply module on again.

Specifications of the IM 460-4 and IM 461-4

Maximum line length (total) 605 m

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 280
Weight
 IM 460-4 630 g
 IM 461-4 620 g
Current consumption from the S7-400 bus 5 VDC
 IM 460-4 Typ. 1350 mA
Max. 1550 mA
 IM 461-4 Typ. 590 mA
Max. 620 mA
Power loss
 IM 460-4 Typ. 6750 mW
Max. 7750 mW
 IM 461-4 Typ. 2950 mW
Max. 3100 mW
Terminator 6ES7461-4AA00-7AA0
Backup current None

Compatibility
You cannot use the IM 460-4 and IM 461-4 interface modules with CPUs that have the
following order numbers:
● 6ES7412-1XF00-0AB0
● 6ES7413-1XG00-0AB0
● 6ES7413-2XG00-0AB0
● 6ES7414-1XG00-0AB0
● 6ES7414-2XG00-0AB0
● 6ES7416-1XJ00-0AB0

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

360 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
S5 interface IM 463-2 7
7.1 Using SIMATIC S5 expansion units in an S7-400

Order number
6ES7463-2AA00-0AA0

Area of application
The IM 463-2 interface module is used for distributed connection of S5 expansion units to an
S7-400. You can use the IM 463-2 in the CR of the S7-400. You can use an IM 314 in the S5
expansion unit.
This allows you to connect the following S5 expansion units to an S7-400:
● EG 183U with IM 314 in slot 3
● EG 185U with IM 314 in slot 3
● EG 186U with IM 314 in slot 3
● ER 701-2 with IM 314 in slot 7
● ER 701-3 with IM 314 in slot 7
Accordingly, you can use all digital and analog I/O modules suitable for these EUs or ERs.

Basic requirement
If you connect an S5 expansion unit to a CR of the S7-400 via an IM 463-2, the SIMATIC S5
basic requirements concerning EMC, ambient conditions, etc., apply for the overall system.

Note
In environments contaminated by radiated noise, you must apply the type 721 cable shield
(see Installation manual).

Mounting and removing the FM 463-2

Please read the following warning on the mounting and removal of the IM 463-2 and
associated cables.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 361
S5 interface IM 463-2
7.1 Using SIMATIC S5 expansion units in an S7-400

CAUTION
Data may be lost or corrupted.
Removing or inserting the IM 463-2 and/or their associated cables under voltage can result
in the loss or corruption of data.
Switch off the power supply modules to the central rack you are working on before you
carry out any changes.

Expanding the distributed connection

You can also centrally expand the EUs connected in a distributed configuration via an
IM 463-2. The following table lists the S5 interface modules that you can use for this
purpose.

Table 7- 1 S5 interface modules

Module Order number

IM 300 6ES5 300-5CA11
6ES5 300-3AB11
6ES5 300-5LB11
IM 306 6ES5306-7LA11

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

362 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 S5 interface IM 463-2
7.2 Rules for connecting S5 expansion units

7.2 Rules for connecting S5 expansion units

Introduction
When you connect S5 expansion units to an S7-400 via the IM 463-2, there are rules to
observe with regard to cable length, maximum expansion, use of a terminating connector
and permissible potential differences.

Cable length
The maximum cable length per IM 463-2 from the CR of the S7-400 to the last S5 expansion
unit is 600 m. You set the actual cable length at the IM 463-2.

Maximum configuration
You can use up to four IM 463-2s in one S7-400 CR.
At each IM 463-2 interface (C1 and C2), you can connect up to four S5 expansion units in a
distributed configuration.
You can connect further EUs centrally to the EUs connected in the distributed configuration.

Addressing of the S5 modules

All S5 address areas are available (P, Q, IM3, IM4)

Note
Note that every S5 address can only be used once, even across different lines.

Terminator
You must terminate the IM 314 of the last EU in each line with the 6ES5760-1AA11
terminating connector.

Permissible potential differences

For the safe functioning of the distributed configuration, you must ensure that the potential
difference between two devices is not more than 7 V. Use an equipotential bonding
conductor.

See also
Operator controls and indicators (Page 364)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 363
S5 interface IM 463-2
7.3 Operator controls and indicators

7.3 Operator controls and indicators

Introduction
All controls and indicators on the IM 463-2 are arranged on the front plate. The following
figure shows the arrangement of the controls and indicators.

IM 463-2
X

463-2AA..-....

EXTF

LEDs EXTF, C1, C 2

OFF

Interface Selector Switch Interface selector switch

Cable Length Selector Selector Cable length selector switch

X1 connector
Interface C1

X2 connector
Interface C2

Figure 7-1 Layout of the controls and indicators of the IM 463-2

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

364 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 S5 interface IM 463-2
7.3 Operator controls and indicators

LEDs

Table 7- 2 LEDs of the IM 463-2

LED Meaning
EXTF LED (red) Lights up in the event of an external fault. Line 1 or line 2 has a fault
(power supply failed in the EU; terminating connector missing; wire break, or
interface selector switch wrongly set).
C1 LED (green) Line 1 (via front connector x1, connection 1) is correct.
C2 LED (green) Line 2 (via front connector x2, connection 2) is correct.
Front Connector (output) for line 1 and line 2
connectors x1 X1 = upper front connector; x2 = lower front connector
and x2

Interface selector switch

Table 7- 3 Switch position: Interface selector of the IM 463-2

Switch setting Meaning

C1 ON You use only interface C1.
C2 ON You use only interface C2.
C1, C2 ON You use both interfaces.
C1, C2 OFF You use neither of the two interfaces.
You do not want to operate an S5 EU at present.

Cable length selector switch

Table 7- 4 Switch position: Cable length selector of the IM 463-2

Switch setting Meaning

100 Cable length 1 to 100 m
250 Cable length 100 to 250 m
450 Cable length 250 to 450 m
600 Cable length 450 to 600 m

WARNING
Danger of data loss.
Changing the setting of the interface selector switch and the cable length selector switch in
RUN mode can result in loss of data.
Change the settings of these switches only in STOP mode of the CPU.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 365
S5 interface IM 463-2
7.4 Installing and connecting the IM 463-2

7.4 Installing and connecting the IM 463-2

Overview
To install an IM 463-2 in a CR of the S7-400, proceed in the same way as when installing
other S7-400 modules (see Installation manual).
To connect an IM 463-2, follow the steps outlined below:
1. Prepare the cable
2. Plug in the cable
3. Select the interface
4. Select the cable length

Prepare the cable

You can use the cable 721. However, you must change the connector housing on the
connection side of the IM 463-2.
Two connector housings are enclosed with every IM 463-2. You can prepare a cable for an
IM 463-2 using one of these connector housings and a 721 cable (see Catalog ST 54.1).
Proceed as follows:
1. Remove one connector housing on the 721 cable.
2. Open one of the connector housings enclosed with the IM 463-2.
3. Attach this connector housing to the 721 cable.
4. Close the connector housing.

Plug in the cable

To plug in the cable, follow the steps outlined below:
1. Open the cover of the IM 463-2.
2. Plug the new connector of the cable into one of the connectors of the IM 463-2.
Interface C1 corresponds to the upper connector;
Interface C2 corresponds to the lower connector.
3. Screw the connector of the cable onto the connector of the IM 463-2.
4. Close the cover.

Select the interface

You select the interface with the selector switch on the front plate. Set the interface(s) here
that you want to use. Make the settings on the IM 463-2 only when the CPU is in STOP
mode.

Select the cable length

You select the cable length with the selector switch on the front plate. Set the range
corresponding to the line length. Make the settings on the IM 463-2 only when the CPU is in
STOP mode.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

366 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 S5 interface IM 463-2
7.5 Setting the operating modes of the IM 314

7.5 Setting the operating modes of the IM 314

Introduction
To operate the IM 463-2, you must set on the IM 314 the S5 expansion unit used and the
address area of the S5 I/O modules.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 367
S5 interface IM 463-2
7.5 Setting the operating modes of the IM 314

Setting the S5 expansion unit

You set the S5 expansion unit in which you want to use the IM 314 using jumpers BR1, BR2,
and BR3 on the IM 314. The following figure shows where these jumpers are located on the
IM 314 and which setting corresponds to which expansion unit.

Table 7- 5 Settings of the IM 314 using expansion units

4321 4321
S1
off Used in EU 185U, EU 186U
on
BR 1 BR 2

X3 X1
4321
BR 3

X4 X2

4321 4321
S1 off Used in EU 183 U
on
BR 1 BR 2

X3 4321 X1
BR 3

X4 X2

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

368 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 S5 interface IM 463-2
7.5 Setting the operating modes of the IM 314

4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 S1 off Used in ER 701-2, ER 701-3

on
BR 1 BR 2

X3 X1
4321
BR 3

X4 X2

Setting the address area

The address area of the S5 I/O modules is set on the IM 314. This setting applies only for
the digital and analog I/O modules.
The address areas P, Q, IM3, and IM4 are available. Set the switch to the relevant position
to address the digital and analog I/O modules in these areas.

Table 7- 6 Settings address areas on the IM 314

I/O area address Switch position

O = OFF, 1 = ON The first two switches on the left are
P area: F000 - F0FF S1: 0000 * not relevant.
Q area: F100 - F1FF 0001
IM3 area: FC00 - FCFF 1100 OFF

IM4 area: FD00 - FDFF 1101 ON

* Factory state

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 369
S5 interface IM 463-2
7.6 Configuring S5 modules for operation in the S7-400

7.6 Configuring S5 modules for operation in the S7-400

Example
You program S5 modules in STEP 7. Refer to the description in the STEP 7 manual or the
online help to learn how this is done.
The following figure shows a possible connection of CRs and EUs via the IM 463-2 and
IM 314.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

370 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 S5 interface IM 463-2
7.6 Configuring S5 modules for operation in the S7-400

Further EU 184U,
EU 187U (central)

S5- S5- S5-

Expansion IM 312-3 Expansion IM 312-3 Expansion IM 312-5
rack rack rack

IM 314 IM 314 IM 314

S5- S5- S5-

Expansion IM 300-3 Expansion IM 300-3 Expansion IM 300-5
rack rack rack

Terminating connector 760-1AA11

All 721 connecting cables

S5- S5-
Expansion IM 312-3 Expansion IM 312-5
rack rack

Central
mounting rack IM 314 IM 314

S7-400 S5- S5-

IM 463-2 Expansion IM 300-3 Expansion IM 300-5
rack rack

Terminating connector 760-1AA11

All 721 connecting cables

} To further S5 expansion units (distributed)
(max. 4 per IM 463-2)
max. 600 m

Figure 7-2 Connection variant for CCs and EUs via the IM 463-2 and IM 314

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 371
S5 interface IM 463-2
7.7 Pin assignments of the 721 cable

7.7 Pin assignments of the 721 cable

Pin assignments of the 721 cable

Table 7- 7 Pin assignments of the 721 cable

34 50 17 1
1 17 50 34

Connector Bundle ID sheath Identification foil Core color Connector

50-pin Contact 50-pin Contact
20 white 20
21 brown 21
4 green 4
5 1 yellow 5
18 No. 16 Red gray 18
19 pink 19
2 blue 2
3 red 3
24 white 24
25 brown 25
8 green 8
9 2 yellow 9
22 No. 17 green gray 22
23 pink 23
6 blue 6
7 red 7
26 white 26
27 brown 27
10 green 10
11 3 yellow 11
42 No. 18 yellow gray 42
43 pink 43
44 blue 44
45 red 45
28 white 28
29 brown 29
12 green 12
13 4 yellow 13
46 No. 19 brown gray 46
47 pink 47
30 blue 30
31 red 31

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

372 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 S5 interface IM 463-2
7.7 Pin assignments of the 721 cable

34 white 34
35 brown 35
5
36 No. 20 black green 36
37 yellow 37
38 gray 38
39 pink 39
40 blue 40
41 red 41
48 white 48
49 brown 49
14 6 green 14
15 No. 21 blue yellow 15
32 gray 32
33 pink 33
- Shield -

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 373
S5 interface IM 463-2
7.8 Terminating connector for IM 314

7.8 Terminating connector for IM 314

Introduction
The IM 314 of the last expansion unit of each line is terminated with the 6ES5760-1AA11
terminating connector.

Table 7- 8 Assignment of the terminator 760-1AA11

Assignment of the terminator 760-1AA11

1 17

34 50

Plug connection 180-Ohm resistance or jumper Plug connection

28 8
29 9

26 6
27 7

46 4
47 5

44 2
45 3

42 24
43 25

38 1 22
39 23

34 1 20
35 21

36 1 18
37 19

40 1 12
41 13

48 2 10
49 11

15 30
16 31

14
50
1 100 Ω
2 200Ω

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

374 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 S5 interface IM 463-2
7.9 Specifications IM463-2 (6ES7463-2AA00-0AA0)

7.9 Specifications IM463-2 (6ES7463-2AA00-0AA0)

Specifications

Programming package
Associated programming package As of STEP 7 V 2.1
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25x290x280
Weight 360 g
Module-specific data
Number and type of interfaces 2 parallel, 2 symmetrical interfaces
Cable length: Max. 600 m
from IM 463-2 to the last IM 314 (per interface)
Transmission speed 2 Mbps to 100 Kbps
Parameter sets of the signal modules Differential signal in accordance with RS 485
Front connectors 2 connectors, 50-pin male
Voltages, currents, electrical potentials
Supply voltage from S7-400 bus +5 V
Current consumption Typ. 1.2 A
Max. 1.32 A
Power loss Typ. 6 W
Max. 6.6 W
Backup current No

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 375
S5 interface IM 463-2
7.9 Specifications IM463-2 (6ES7463-2AA00-0AA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

376 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO 8
8.1 PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO

8.1.1 Overview

Order numbers

IM 467 6ES7467-5GJ02-0AB0 (RS 485)

IM 467 FO 6ES7467-5FJ00-0AB0 (F0)

Application
PROFIBUS DP, standardized in accordance with IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1, enables
rapid communication in the field between programmable controllers, PCs and field devices.
Field devices are devices such as: ET 200 distributed I/O devices, drives, valve terminals,
switchgear and many others.
The IM 467/IM 467 FO interface module is meant to be used in an S7-400 programmable
controller. It permits the S7-400 to be connected to PROFIBUS DP.

Note
The PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467 and IM 467 FO is not a DP master in
accordance with DVP 1.

Design
● Designed for S7-400
● Can be operated without a fan
● A maximum of 4 IM 467/IM 467 FO can be used in the central rack. There are no slot
rules.
● The IM 467/IM 467 FO and the CP 443-5 Extended cannot be used together.
● The transmission rate of 9.6 Kbps to 12 Mbps can be set in steps using software
● Configuration and programming are possible via PROFIBUS DP. You should not,
however, change the PROFIBUS DP parameters.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 377
PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO
8.1 PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO

● IM 467 with 9-pin sub D socket for connection to PROFIBUS DP (6ES7467-5GJ02-0AB0)

● IM 467 FO with fiber-optic cable for connection to PROFIBUS DP (6ES7467-5FJ00-
0AB0)

Figure 8-1 Configuration of the IM 467/467 FO

(1) LED
(2) Mode selector
(3) PROFIBUS-DP interface
9-pin sub D

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

378 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO
8.1 PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO

Communication services
The IM 467/IM 467 FO offers two communication services:
● PROFIBUS DP
The IM 467/IM 467 FO is a PROFIBUS DP master in accordance with EN 50 170. It is
configured entirely with STEP 7. It behaves in basically the same way as the integrated
PROFIBUS DP interfaces on the CPU modules (see the specifications of the
IM 467/IM 467 FO for the differences).
DP communication does not require any function calls in the STEP 7 user program.
● S7 functions
The S7 functions guarantee optimal and easy communication in a SIMATIC S7/M7/C7
automation solution. The following S7 functions are enabled for the IM 467/IM 467 FO:
– Programming device functions via PROFIBUS DP
– Operator control and monitoring functions via PROFIBUS DP
Communication takes place without any additional configuration on the IM 467/IM 467
FO.
S7 functions can be used on their own or in parallel with the PROFIBUS DP protocol. If
they are used in parallel with DP communication, this affects the PROFIBUS DP bus
cycle time.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 379
PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO
8.1 PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO

8.1.2 Indicators and the mode selector

LED
The LED strip on the front panel of the IM 467/IM 467 FO has the following four indicators:

INTF
EXTF

RUN
STOP

Figure 8-2 LEDs of the IM 467/467 FO

IM operating mode
The LEDs indicate the operating mode of the IM in accordance with the following table:

Table 8- 1 Operating modes of the IM 467/467 FO

STOP LED RUN LED EXTF LED INTF LED CP Operating Mode
(yellow) (green) (red) (red)
On Flashing Off Off Startup
Off On Off Off RUN
Flashing On Off Off STOPPING
On Off Off Off STOP
On Off Off On STOP with internal error (IM not configured,
for example)
Flashing Off Off Off Waiting for FW update (takes 10 sec. after
power up)
Flashing Off On On Waiting for FW update (IM currently contains
an incomplete FW version).
Off On On Off RUN and PROFIBUS DP bus fault
Off On Flashing Off RUN; but there are faults on the DP line (the
DP slave is not taking part in data transfer, or
the module in the DP slave is faulty, for
example)
Flashing Flashing Flashing Flashing Module error / system error

Controlling the operating status

There are two ways to control the operating status of the IM 467/IM 467 FO:
● Mode selector
● By using the programming device/PC

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

380 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO
8.1 PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO

Mode selector
You can switch operating modes as follows using the mode selector:
● From STOP to RUN
All the configured communication services and S7 communication services are available
in RUN.
The IM operating mode can only be controlled from the programming device/PC when the
switch is in the RUN position.
● From RUN to STOP
The IM goes into STOP mode. Any existing S7 connections are cleared down, and the
DP slaves are no longer supplied.

Loadable firmware
The IM 467/IM 467 FO supports the updating of firmware (FW) by means of the FW loader.
The FW loader is a component of the NCM S7 configuration software for PROFIBUS DP.
Authorization is not required for this. After a FW update, the central rack must be switched
off and on again before normal operation can be resumed.

Note
You can find additional information on loading firmware in the NCM S7 for PROFIBUS-DP
manual and in the readme file of the NCM S7 for PROFIBUS-DP configuration software.
An optical bus terminal (OBT) is required to load FW in the IM 467 FO.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 381
PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO
8.2 Configuration

8.2 Configuration

Introduction
The IM 467/IM 467 FO is configured with STEP 7. The configuration data are retained even
in the event of a power failure; a memory module is not required. Using the S7 functions it is
possible to program and configure remotely all the IM 467/IM 467 FO connected to the
network and all the CPUs connected via the SIMATIC S7-400 backplane bus.
SIMATIC STEP 7, version 5.00 or higher is required.

Module replacement without a programming device

The configuration data are stored in the load memory of the CPU. The non-volatile storage of
configuration data in the CPU is ensured by battery backup or EPROM module cards.
The IM 467/IM 467 FO can be replaced without the need to explicitly reload the configuration
data.
It is only possible to remove and insert the IM 467/IM 467 FO in a de-energized state.

Multiprocessor operation
The connected DP slaves can only be assigned to and processed by one CPU.

Configuration and diagnostics cannot be carried out simultaneously

When configuration is in progress, the IM 467/IM 467 FO cannot be diagnosed at the same
time via MPI.

Note
The transmission rates 3 Mbit/s and 6 Mbit/s are not approved for IM467-FO.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

382 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO
8.3 Connection to PROFIBUS DP

8.3 Connection to PROFIBUS DP

8.3.1 Connection options

Overview
There are two ways of connecting to PROFIBUS DP:
● Electrical connection via a bus connector
● Optical connection using a fiber-optic cable

8.3.2 Bus connector

Wiring
Only with 6ES7467-5GJ02-0AB0.
The bus cable is connected to the IM 467 by means of this connector. (See the detailed
description in the section on networking in the S7-400, Hardware and Installation manual.)

3
2
(1) Switch for bus terminator resistor
(2) PROFIBUS_DP bus line
(3) Bus connector
Figure 8-3 Connecting the bus connector to the IM 467

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 383
PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO
8.3 Connection to PROFIBUS DP

Maximum cable lengths for PROFIBUS DP

Transmission speed 9,6 19,2 93,75 187,5 500 1500 3000 6000 12000
in Kbps
Max. length of a bus 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 400 200 100 100 100
segment in m
Max. number of bus 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
segments 1
Max. length in m 10.000 10.000 10.000 10.000 4.000 2.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
1 Bus segments are interconnected with RS 485 repeaters

Connector pin assignment

The electrical interface used to connect to PROFIBUS DP (9-pin sub D socket) is specified in
the following table.

INTF
EXTF

RUN
STOP

RUN
STOP

Pin no. Signal name Profibus designation Assigned to

RS 485
1 PE Protective earth Yes
2 - -
3 RxD/TxD-P Data transfer line B Yes
4 RTS (AG) Control A -
5 M5V2 Data reference potential Yes
6 P5V2 Supply plus Yes
7 BATT - -
8 RxDT/TxD-N Data transfer line A Yes
9 - - -

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

384 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO
8.3 Connection to PROFIBUS DP

8.3.3 Optical connection to PROFIBUS DP

Wiring
Only in the case of 6ES7467-5FJ00-0AB0.
The IM 467 F0 with an integrated fiber-optic cable interface is available for connecting to the
optical version of PROFIBUS DP.

CP43-5 X2
3E04
443-5FX00-0X
IEN
XTTFF

R
STU
N
O
P
RUN
STO
P

AU
I/TP

1
(1) PROFIBUS DP bus cable
Figure 8-4 Optical connection to PROFIBUS DP

8.3.4 Connecting a fiber-optic cable to the IM 467 FO

Required accessories
● Package with simplex connectors and polishing sets (6GK1901-0FB00-0AA0)
● Pack of plug-in adapters (6ES7195-1BE00-0XA0)

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 385
PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO
8.3 Connection to PROFIBUS DP

Installing connectors
1. Remove approximately 30 cm of the sheath of the fiber-optic duplex cable.
2. Install the fiber-optic duplex cable with the associated simplex connectors. You can find a
detailed description of simplex connectors in the SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Networks
manual.
TIP: Close the two simplex connectors together rather than separately to obtain a duplex
connector. In this manner you will achieve a better hold in the plug adapter.
IMPORTANT: The polished surface of the plastic fibers must be absolutely smooth and
even. Likewise, the plastic jacket must not protrude or be cut unevenly. Every irregularity
causes strong attenuation of the light signal over the fiber-optic cable!
3. Place the simplex connectors in the plug-in adapter for the IM 467 FO and the fiber-optic
cable in the cable guides provided. Insert the plug-in adapter until you hear the sides
clearly latch into position.
Make sure when you insert the plugs in the plug-in adapter that the transmitter is always
at the top and the receiver is underneath.
1

2
3

4
5
Figure 8-5 Installing the connector

(1) Plug-in adapter for the IM 467 FO

(2) Snap the two simplex connectors closed together such that you get a "duplex connector".
(3) Tip: Cut the lower cable approx. 10 mm shorter than the upper one to achieve better cable
routing in the cable duct of the IM 467 FO.
(4) Max. 30 mm bending radius
(5) Fiber-optic duplex cable

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

386 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO
8.3 Connection to PROFIBUS DP

Reusing fiber-optic cable

Note
If you insert previously used fiber-optic cable into the plug adapter, you must shorten both
fiber-optic cores by the amount of the curved lengths and reinstall the simplex connectors.
This will prevent any attenuation losses caused by repeatedly bent, heavily stressed portions
of the fiber-optic duplex core.

Inserting the fiber-optic cables into the IM 467 FO

Insert the fiber-optic cable with the mounted plug adapters into the IM 467 FO. Fold the
protruding plug grip upward.
Make sure that it is correctly positioned: The transmitter fiber-optic cable is plugged into the
receiver socket, and the receiver fiber-optic cable is inserted into the transmitter socket of
the fiber-optic interface of the IM 467 FO.
If the IM 467 FO is the last node in the fiber-optic network, you must close the unoccupied
fiber-optic cable interface with blanking plugs (the plugs are already in place when the
IM 467 FO is delivered).

CAUTION
Do not look directly into the opening of the optical sender diodes.
The emitted light beam could damage your eyes.

PROFIBUS DP
Transmitter
Grip
Receiver
R

Transmitter
T

Receiver
Receiver
R

Transmitter
T

Figure 8-6 Inserting the fiber-optic cables into the IM 467 FO

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 387
PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO
8.3 Connection to PROFIBUS DP

Bending radius for the fiber-optic cable

When placing the fiber-optic duplex core into the plug adapter and routing the cable, be sure
not to exceed the permissible bending radius of 30 mm. See also the installation guidelines
on fiber-optic cables in the SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Networks manual.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

388 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO
8.4 Specifications

8.4 Specifications

8.4.1 Specifications of the IM 467 (6ES7467-5GJ02-0AB0))

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210
Weight 700 g
PROFIBUS DP
 Standard PROFIBUS DP, EN 50 170
 Transmission rate 9.6 Kbps to 12 Mbps, configurable in
steps
 Transmission technology RS 485 via 9-pin sub D socket
Current consumption
Current consumption from the S7-400 bus (24 VDC) Total current consumption of the
The IM does not consume any current at 24 V, and it only components connected to the DP
makes this voltage available at the MPI/DP interface. interfaces, with a maximum of 150
mA
PROFIBUS DP
Operating conditions
Can be used in SIMATIC S7-400, max. 4 IM 467 in
the central rack
IM 467 cannot be used with the CP 443-5
Supply voltage 5 VDC via the backplane bus
Current consumption
 From 5 VDC 1.3 A
Addressing range Max. 4 KB for inputs and 4 KB for
outputs
DP master Yes
 DPV 1 No
 Enable/disable No
Number of connectable I/O devices (slaves) 96
Number of connections for S7 functions for the programming 32 + 1 diagnostic connection
device and operator control and monitoring
Data volume per slave Max. 244 bytes
Consistency Max. 128 bytes
Configuration software STEP 7
DP slave No

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 389
PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO
8.4 Specifications

Deviations from the DP interface integrated

in the CPU
 Different SSL IDs for system diagnostics
 Possibly extended SFC run times
 Additional return codes for SFC 14 and SFC 15

8.4.2 Specifications of the IM 467 FO (6ES7467-5FJ00-0AB0)

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210
Weight 700 g
PROFIBUS DP
 Standard PROFIBUS DP, EN 50 170
 Transmission rate 9.6 Kbps to 12 Mbps, configurable in
steps (3 Mbps and 6 Mbps not
possible)
 Transmission technology FOC;
Wave length l = 660 nm 2 x duplex
sockets
Current consumption
Current consumption from the S7-400 bus (24 VDC) Total current consumption of the
The IM does not consume any current at 24 V, and it only components connected to the DP
makes this voltage available at the MPI/DP interface. interfaces, with a maximum of 150
mA
PROFIBUS DP
Operating conditions
Can be used in SIMATIC S7-400, max. 4 IM 467 in
the central rack
IM 467 cannot be used with the CP 443-5
Supply voltage 5 VDC via the backplane bus
Current consumption 1.3 A
 From 5 VDC
Addressing range Max. 4 KB for inputs and 4 KB for
outputs
DP master Yes
 DPV 1 No
 Enable/disable No
Number of connectable I/O devices (slaves) 96
Number of connections for S7 functions for the programming 32 + 1 diagnostic connection
device and operator control and monitoring
Data volume per slave Max. 244 bytes

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

390 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO
8.4 Specifications

Consistency Max. 128 bytes

Configuration software STEP 7
DP slave No
Deviations from the DP interface integrated in the CPU
 Different SSL IDs for system diagnostics
 Possibly extended SFC run times
 Additional return codes for SFC 14 and SFC 15

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 391
PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO
8.4 Specifications

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

392 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
Cable duct and fan subassemblies 9
9.1 Features

Overview
The cable duct and the fan subassembly have the following characteristics
● The air inflow area is variable.
● Shield and cable clamping are possible.
In addition, the fan subassembly has the following characteristics:
● Fans and filter frames can be replaced from the front during operation.
● The fan function is controlled by means of speed monitoring.
● Operation with filter frames is optional.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 393
Cable duct and fan subassemblies
9.2 Fan monitoring in the fan subassemblies

9.2 Fan monitoring in the fan subassemblies

LEDs
The three red LEDs of the fan subassembly are assigned to the individual fans. From left to
right, these are:
F1 - for fan 1
F2 - for fan 2
F3 - for fan 3

Fans
The fans have a redundant design. The fan subassembly continues to function even if one
fan fails.

Fan monitoring
The function of the fans is controlled by means of speed monitoring. If the speed of a fan
drops below the limit speed of 1750 rpm, the LED assigned to it lights up. In addition, the
relay K1 drops out.
If the speed of a second fan drops below the limit speed, the LED assigned to it lights up; in
addition, the relay K2 drops out.
The following table is the function table for the fan monitoring.

Table 9- 1 Function of fan monitoring

Fan1 Fan2 Fan3 LED F1 LED F2 LED F3 Relay K1 Relay K2

- - - H H H - -
- - + H H D - -
- + - H D H - -
+ - - D H H - -
- + + H D D - +
+ - + D H D - +
+ + - D D H - +
+ + + D D D + +
-* -* -* D* D* D* -* -*
+ Fan in operation or relay picked up
- Fan failed or relay dropped out
D LED is dark
H LED lights up
* At power off

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

394 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Cable duct and fan subassemblies
9.2 Fan monitoring in the fan subassemblies

Example of a message concept

You can check the fault-free functioning of the fan subassembly using digital inputs.
You can cause the power supply to be cut off after the failure of at least two fans by using
the relay K2. For example, you can use an intermediate contactor to interrupt the mains.
The relay contacts are labeled as follows:
Relay K1: No. 1 to 3
Relay K2: No. 4 to 6
The following diagram explains the circuit in the fan subassembly when all fans are
functioning.

... to the digital input module

in the fan assembly

Evaluation
(digital input module) 1
L+ 2 ... to the monitor
Evaluation 3 K1
(digital input module)

4 ... to the monitor

5
K2
24 V 6

to the power supply module

to the mains

Status: All fans operating

Figure 9-1 Example of a message concept

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 395
Cable duct and fan subassemblies
9.3 Cable duct (6ES7408-0TA00-0AA0)

9.3 Cable duct (6ES7408-0TA00-0AA0)

Function
The cable duct is used when installing outside a cabinet for
● clamping cables and/or for
● shielding or for
● air inlet without fan support

Front view of the cable duct

Eye for
clamping cable

Shield clamp

(Side elevation
Scale 1:1)

Figure 9-2 Front view of the cable duct

Shielding clamps
If you do not require the shielding clamps supplied, do not install them in the cable duct.

Specifications

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 482.5 x 109.5 x 235

Weight Approx. 1200 g

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

396 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Cable duct and fan subassemblies
9.4 The 120/230 VAC fan subassembly (6ES7408-1TB00-0XA0)

9.4 The 120/230 VAC fan subassembly (6ES7408-1TB00-0XA0)

Operator controls and indicators on the 120/230 VAC fan subassembly

L1

Voltage N
AC 120/230V
Relay contact
connection 1, 2, 3
230
N
120
120V=250mAT
230V=160mAT

Relay contact
4, 5, 6

Quick-release lock LEDs F1, F2, F3

L1

AC 120/230V 

230
Voltage 
V
selector
120
switch 


Fuse
case


Figure 9-3 Controls and indicators of the fan subassembly 120/230 VAC (6ES7408-1TB00-0XA0)

Fuse
Included in this fan subassembly are standard cartridge fuse links, 5 x 20 mm, conforming to
DIN
● 250 mAT for 120 V
● 160 mAT for 230 V.
The fuse for the 230 V range is already installed on shipping from the factory.

Note
If you change the voltage range, you must also insert the fuse for this voltage range in the
fan subassembly. You will find a description of how to change the fuse in the Installation
manual.

Shielding clamps
If you do not require the shielding clamps supplied, do not install them in the fan
subassembly.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 397
Cable duct and fan subassemblies
9.4 The 120/230 VAC fan subassembly (6ES7408-1TB00-0XA0)

Installation
Follow to the general installation guidelines when mounting the 24 V DC fan subassembly,
see Installation manual.

Specifications

Dimensions, weights
Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 482.5 x 109.5 x 235
Weight Approx. 2000 g
Cable cross-section 0.5 to 2.5 mm² (litz with connector sleeve)
Electrical parameters
Lifespan of the fans at 40 °C Typ. 70 000 h
Max. contact load of relay contacts 1 to 6
 Switching voltage 24 VDC
 Permitted range Static: 20.4 to 28.8 VDC
Dynamic: 18.5 to 30.2 V
 Switching current 200 mA
Voltages, currents, electrical potentials
At nominal voltage of 230 VAC 120 VAC
Voltage range 170 VAC to 264 VAC 85 VAC to 132 VAC
Frequency 47 to 63 Hz 47 to 63 Hz
Power consumption
 With fan 17 W 18 W
 Without fan 5W 4W
Rated current 90 mA 175 mA
Starting current 0.6 A 1.15 A
Fuses Wickmann Series 195 250 V / 160 mA 250 V / 250 mA

WARNING
Contact with electrical current can lead to personal injury.
If you remove the left cover when installing or removing the fan subassembly, the terminals
on the transformer are accessible briefly.
Remove the voltage from the fan subassembly before you install or remove it. Disconnect
the supply cable before you remove the fan subassembly.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

398 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Cable duct and fan subassemblies
9.4 The 120/230 VAC fan subassembly (6ES7408-1TB00-0XA0)

CAUTION
Danger of damage to equipment.
If you mix up the power supply PCB and the monitoring PCB in the fan subassembly, the
fan subassembly may be damaged.
During maintenance of the unit, make sure you do not mix up the power supply PCB and
the monitoring PCB.

Monitoring function
In the case of a fault (defective fans) the fans are not switched off. Once you have replaced
the defective fan(s), the fault is acknowledged automatically as soon as the fans have
reached the required speed. Any faults that occur are not stored. When you switch on the
fan subassembly, the fans start running. After approximately 10 s the current status of the
fans is indicated via LEDs and relays.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 399
Cable duct and fan subassemblies
9.5 The 24 V DC fan subassembly (6ES7408-1TA01-0XA0)

9.5 The 24 V DC fan subassembly (6ES7408-1TA01-0XA0)

Operator controls and indicators on the 24 VDC fan subassembly

Relay contact
1, 2, 3
1 AT
Relay contact
4, 5, 6

Quick-release lock LEDs F1, F2, F3


1 AT 
Fuse
case 

Figure 9-4 Controls and indicators of the fan subassembly 24 VDC (6ES7408-1TA00-0XA0)

Features
The 24 VDC fan subassembly has the same construction and functional characteristics as
the 120/230 VAC fan subassembly.

Wiring
You connect the 24 VDC fan subassembly to the 24 VDC supply in the same manner as for
the 120/230 VAC fan subassembly. You should note the polarity of the spring connections
L+ and L-.

Signaling concept
The signaling concept of the 24 VDC fan subassembly is identical to the signaling concept of
the 120/230 VAC fan subassembly.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

400 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Cable duct and fan subassemblies
9.5 The 24 V DC fan subassembly (6ES7408-1TA01-0XA0)

Fuse
Included in this fan subassembly are standard cartridge fuse links, 5 x 20 mm, conforming to
DIN
● 1.0 AT for 24 V
The fuse is already installed on shipping from the factory.

Shielding clamps
If you do not require the shielding clamps supplied, do not install them in the fan
subassembly.

Installation
Follow to the general installation guidelines when mounting the 24 V DC fan subassembly,
see Installation manual.

Technical specifications

Dimensions, weights
Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 482.5x 109.5 x 235
Weight Approx. 1600 g
Cable cross-section 0.5 to 2.5 mm² (litz with connector sleeve)
Electrical parameters
Lifespan of the fans at 40 °C Typ. 70 000 h
Maximum contact load of relay contacts 1 to 6
 Switching voltage 24 VDC
 Permitted range Static 20.4 to 28.8 VDC
Dynamic: 18.5 to 30.2 VDC
 Switching current 200 mA
Voltages, currents, electrical potentials
Input voltage
 Nominal value 24 VDC
 Permissible range Static: 19.2 to 28 V
Rated current 450 mA
Starting current 0.9 A at 24 V
Fuses Wickmann Series 195 250 V / 1.0 AT
Power consumption
 With fan 12 W
 Without fan 1.4 W

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 401
Cable duct and fan subassemblies
9.5 The 24 V DC fan subassembly (6ES7408-1TA01-0XA0)

CAUTION
Danger of damage to equipment.
If you insert the monitoring PCB in the wrong position in the fan subassembly, the fan
subassembly may be damaged.
During maintenance of the unit, make sure you do not insert the replacement monitoring
PCB in the wrong position.

Monitoring function
In the case of a fault (defective fans) the fans are not switched off. Once you have replaced
the defective fan(s), the fault is acknowledged automatically as soon as the fans have
reached the required speed. Any faults that occur are not stored.
When you switch on the fan subassembly, the fans start running. After approximately 10 s
the current status of the fans is indicated via LEDs and relays.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

402 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
RS 485 repeater 10
10.1 Introduction

Overview
This section describes the RS 485 repeater in detail.
This includes:
● The purpose of the RS 485 repeater
● The maximum cable lengths between two RS 485 repeaters
● Functions of the various operating elements and terminals
● Information about grounded and ungrounded operation
● Specifications and the block diagram

Further information
You will find further information on the RS 485 repeater in the section "Configuring of an MPI
or PROFIBUS-DP Network" of the manual Hardware and Installation.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 403
RS 485 repeater
10.2 Applications and features (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0)

10.2 Applications and features (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0)

Application of the RS 485 repeater

The RS 485 repeater amplifies data signals on bus lines and couples bus segments. You
need an RS 485 repeater for the following situations:
● There are more than 32 nodes connected to the bus.
● Bus segments should be operated ungrounded on the bus.
● The maximum cable length of a segment is exceeded.

Table 10- 1 Maximum cable length of a segment

Baud rate Max. cable length of a segment (in m)

9.6 to 187.5 Kbps 1000
500 Kbps 400
1.5 Mbps 200
3 to 12 Mbps 100

Rules
The following applies if you configure the bus with RS 485 repeaters:
● No more than 9 RS 485 repeaters can be connected in series.
● The maximum cable length between two nodes with RS 485 repeater may not exceed the
values listed in the table below.

Table 10- 2 Maximum cable length between two RS 485 repeaters

Baud rate Max. cable length between 2 nodes (in m)

with the RS 485 repeater (6ES7 972-0AA01-0XA0)
9.6 to 187.5 Kbps 10000
500 Kbps 4000
1.5 Mbps 2000
3 to 12 Mbps 1000

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

404 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 RS 485 repeater
10.3 Design of the RS 485 repeater (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0)

10.3 Design of the RS 485 repeater (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0)

Design
The table below shows the design and functions of the RS 485 repeater.
Description and functions of the RS 485 repeater

DC 1
24 V L+ M PEM 5.2

12 2

A1B1 A1 B1
ON 4
5
PG DP1 6
OP 7
11 DP2 8
ON
SIEMENS
RS 485-REPEATER
A2 B2A2 B2
9

10

(1) Connection for the RS 485 repeater power supply (pin "M5.2" is the ground reference, if you
want to measure the voltage difference between terminals "A2" and "B2").
(2) Shielding clamp for the strain relief and grounding of the bus cable of bus segments 1 or 2
(3) Terminals for the bus cable of bus segment 1
(4) Terminating resistance for bus segment 1
(5) LED for bus segment 1
(6) OFF switch
(= isolate bus segments from each other, for example, for commissioning)
(7) LED for bus segment 2
(8) Terminating resistance for bus segment 2
(9) Terminals for the bus cable of bus segment 2
(10) Slide for mounting and removing the RS 485 repeater on the DIN rail
(11) Interface for PG/OP on bus segment 1
(12) LED 24 V supply voltage

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 405
RS 485 repeater
10.4 RS 485 repeater in ungrounded and grounded operation

10.4 RS 485 repeater in ungrounded and grounded operation

Grounded or ungrounded
The following applies to the RS 485 repeater:
● It is grounded, if all other nodes on the segment are also operated on ground potential
● It is ungrounded, if all other nodes in the segment are operated with an ungrounded
potential

Note
Bus segment 1 is grounded if you connect a programming device with a pure MPI
interface to the PG/OP socket of the RS 485 repeater. The segment is grounded,
because the MPI in the PG is grounded, and the PG/OP socket of the RS 485 repeater is
connected internally with bus segment 1. This does not apply when the programming
device has a combination MPI/DP interface.

Grounded operation of the RS 485 repeater

For grounded operation of the RS 485 repeater, you must jump terminals "M" and "PE" on
the top of the RS 485 repeater.

Ungrounded operation of the RS 485 repeater

For ungrounded operation of the RS 485 repeater, "M" and "PE" on the top of the RS 485
repeater must not be interconnected. In addition, the supply voltage to the RS 485 repeater
must be ungrounded.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

406 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 RS 485 repeater
10.4 RS 485 repeater in ungrounded and grounded operation

Connection scheme
In a repeater configuration with ungrounded reference potential (ungrounded operation), any
interference currents and static charges are discharged to the protective conductor by
means of an RC network integrated in the repeater (refer to the figure below).

DC L+ M PE M 5.2 PE
24 V
22 nF 10 MΩ

A1 B1 A1 B1

1
(1) Ground busbar
Figure 10-1 RC network with 10 M Ohm for configuration with ungrounded reference potential

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 407
RS 485 repeater
10.4 RS 485 repeater in ungrounded and grounded operation

Electrical isolation between bus segments

Bus segments 1 and 2 are electrically isolated. The PG/OP interface is connected internally
to the port for bus segment 1. The figure below shows the front panel of the RS 485
repeater.

DC
24 V L+ M PE M 5.2

A1 B1 A1 B1
ON

PG DP1
OFF

OP DP2
4
ON
SIEMENS
3 RS 485-REPEATER
2
A2 B2 A2 B2

(1) Terminals for bus segment 1

(2) Terminals for bus segment 2
(3) Isolation
(4) PG/OP interface
Figure 10-2 Electrical isolation between the bus segments

Amplification of bus signals

The amplification of the bus signals takes place between the port for bus segment 1 or the
PG/OP interface and the port for bus segment 2.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

408 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 RS 485 repeater
10.5 Specifications

10.5 Specifications

Specifications of the RS 485 repeater

Specifications
Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 45 x 128 x 67
Power supply
 Nominal voltage 24 VDC
Ripple 20.4 to 28.8 VDC
Current consumption at nominal voltage
 Without load on PG/OP socket 200 mA
 Load on PG/OP socket (5 V/90 mA) 230 mA
 Load on PG/OP socket (24 V/100 mA) 200 mA
Isolation Yes, 500 VAC
Connection of fiber-optic conductors Yes, via repeater adapters
Redundancy mode No
Transmission rate (automatically detected by the 9.6 Kbps, 19.2 Kbps, 45.45 Kbps, 93.75
repeater) Kbps, 187.5 Kbps, 500 Kbps, 1.5 Mbps, 3
Mbps, 6 Mbps, 12 Mbps
Degree of protection IP 20
Weight (including packaging) 350 g

Pin assignment of the sub-D connector (PG/OP socket)

View Pin No. Signal name Designation

1 - -
2 M24V Ground 24 V
5 3 RxD/TxD-P Data line B
9 4 RTS Request to send
4
8 5 M5V2 Data reference potential (from station)
3 6 P5V2 Supply plus (from station)
7
2 7 P24V 24 V
6
8 RxD/TxD-N Data line A
1
9 - -

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 409
RS 485 repeater
10.5 Specifications

Block diagram of the RS 485 repeater

● Bus segments 1 and 2 are electrically isolated.
● Bus segment 2 and the PG/OP socket are electrically isolated from each other.
● Signals are amplified
– Between bus segments 1 and 2
– Between PG/OP socket and bus segment 2

Segment 1 Segment 2
A1 A2
Logic
B1 B2
A1' + A2'
B1' B2'
OFF

OFF

ON ON

+ - + - -
PG/OP- 5V 1M 5V 1M
socket
24 V 24 V
L+ (24 V) L+ (24 V)
M M
A1
PE
B1
5V M 5.2
M5 V

Figure 10-3 Block diagram of the RS 485 repeater

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

410 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
Parameter sets of signal modules A
A.1 How to assign the parameters for signal modules in the user program

Parameter assignment in the user program

You have already assigned parameters to the modules in STEP 7.
In the user program, you can use an SFC:
● To assign new parameters to the module
● To transfer the parameters from the CPU to the addressed signal module

Parameters stored in data records

The signal module parameters are stored in data records 0 and 1.

Modifiable parameters
You can edit the parameters of data record 1, and then transfer these to the signal module
using SFC55. The CPU parameters are not changed by this action!
You cannot modify any parameters of data record 0 in the user program.

SFCs for parameter assignment

SFCs available for programming signal modules in the user program:

Table A- 1 SFCs for assigning parameters to signal modules

SFC No. Identifier Application

55 WR_PARM Transfer modifiable parameters (data record 1) to the addressed
signal module.
56 WR_DPARM Transfer parameters (data record 0 or 1) from the CPU to the
addressed signal module.
57 PARM_MOD Transfer all parameters (data record 0 and 1) from the CPU to
the addressed signal module.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 411
Parameter sets of signal modules
A.1 How to assign the parameters for signal modules in the user program

Description of the parameters

The next chapters describe all modifiable parameters of the various module classes. The
parameters of the signal modules are described:
● In the online help of STEP 7
● In this reference manual
The sections dealing with the various signal modules also show you the corresponding
configurable parameters.

Further references
An in-depth description of the principle of assigning parameters to signal modules in the user
program and a description of the SFCs that can be used for that purpose will be found in the
STEP 7 manuals.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

412 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Parameter sets of signal modules
A.2 Parameters of digital input modules

A.2 Parameters of digital input modules

Parameters
The table below lists the parameters you can set for digital input modules.
The comparison illustrates the parameters you can edit:
● In STEP 7
● Using SFC 55 "WR_PARM"
The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred with SFCs 56 and 57 to the module
(refer to the STEP 7 manuals).

Table A- 2 Parameters of digital input modules

Parameters Data record Parameter Parameter

number assignment with assignment with
SFC 55 STEP 7
Destination CPU for interrupt No Yes
Input delay 0 No Yes
Diagnostics No Yes
Hardware interrupt enable Yes Yes
Diagnostics interrupt enable 1 Yes Yes
Reaction to error* Yes Yes
Hardware interrupt at positive edge Yes Yes
Hardware interrupt at negative edge Yes Yes
Enable substitute value "1"* Yes Yes
* Only for 6ES7 421-7BH0x-0AB0

Note
If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1, you must
enable the diagnostics in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7.

Structure of data record 1

A data record consists of several bytes, the bits of which can be active or inactive:

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Figure A-1 For example, byte 1 with the bits 0 - 7

The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 (bytes 0, 1, 2 and 3) for the
parameters of digital input modules.
You enable a parameter by setting a logical "1" at the corresponding bit.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 413
Parameter sets of signal modules
A.2 Parameters of digital input modules

Table A- 3 Data record 1 for parameters of digital input modules

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 0 7 Hardware interrupt enable
6 Diagnostics interrupt enable

0 Reaction to error1
Byte 1 7 On rising edge at channel 7
Hardware 6 On rising edge at channel 6
interrupt 5 On rising edge at channel 5
4 On rising edge at channel 4
3 On rising edge at channel 3
2 On rising edge at channel 2
1 On rising edge at channel 1
0 On rising edge at channel 0
Byte 2 7 On rising edge at channel 15
Hardware 6 On rising edge at channel 14
interrupt 5 On rising edge at channel 13
4 On rising edge at channel 12
3 On rising edge at channel 11
2 On rising edge at channel 10
1 On rising edge at channel 9
0 On rising edge at channel 8
Byte 3 7 On falling edge at channel 7
Hardware 6 On falling edge at channel 6
interrupt 5 On falling edge at channel 5
4 On falling edge at channel 4
3 On falling edge at channel 3
2 On falling edge at channel 2
1 On falling edge at channel 1
0 On falling edge at channel 0
1 Only for 6ES7 421-7BH0x-0AB0
The following table shows the structure of data record 1 (bytes 4, 5, and 6) for the
parameters of digital input modules.
You enable a parameter by setting a logical "1" at the corresponding bit.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

414 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Parameter sets of signal modules
A.2 Parameters of digital input modules

Table A- 4 Data record 1 for parameters of digital input modules

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 4 7 On falling edge at channel 15
6 On falling edge at channel 14
5 On falling edge at channel 13
4 On falling edge at channel 12
3 On falling edge at channel 11
2 On falling edge at channel 10
1 On falling edge at channel 9
0 On falling edge at channel 8
Byte 5 7 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 7
Substitute value1 6 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 6
5 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 5
4 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 4
3 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 3
2 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 2
1 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 1
0 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 0
Byte 6 7 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 15
Substitute value1 6 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 14
5 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 13
4 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 12
3 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 11
2 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 10
1 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 9
0 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 8
1 Only for 6ES7 421-7BH0x-0AB0

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 415
Parameter sets of signal modules
A.3 Parameters of digital output modules

A.3 Parameters of digital output modules

Parameters
The table below contains all parameters you can set for digital output modules. The
comparison shows:
● Which parameters you can change with STEP 7 and
● Which parameters you can change using SFC 55 "WR_PARM".

The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred with SFCs 56 and 57 to the module
(refer to the STEP 7 manuals).

Table A- 5 Parameters of the digital output modules

Parameters Data record Parameter assignment Parameter assignment

no. with SFC 55 with STEP 7
Destination CPU for interrupt 0 No Yes
Diagnostics No Yes
Diagnostics interrupt enable Yes Yes
Reaction to CPU STOP 1 Yes Yes
Enable substitute value "1"* Yes Yes

Note
If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1, you must
enable the diagnostics in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7.

Structure of data record 1

The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 (bytes 0, 1 and 2) for the parameters
of digital output modules.
You enable a parameter by setting a logical "1" at the corresponding bit.

Table A- 6 Data record 1 for parameters of digital output modules

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 0 7
6 Diagnostics interrupt enable
5
4
3
2
1
0 Reaction to CPU STOP

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

416 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Parameter sets of signal modules
A.3 Parameters of digital output modules

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 1 7 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 7
Substitute 6 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 6
value
5 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 5
4 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 4
3 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 3
2 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 2
1 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 1
0 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 0
Byte 2 7 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 15
Substitute 6 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 14
value 5 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 13
4 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 12
3 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 11
2 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 10
1 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 9
0 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 8
The following table shows the structure of data record 1 (bytes 3, and 4) for the parameters
of digital output modules.
You enable a parameter by setting a logical "1" at the corresponding bit.

Table A- 7 Data record 1 for parameters of digital output modules

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 3* 7 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 23
Substitute 6 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 22
value 5 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 21
4 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 20
3 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 19
2 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 18
1 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 17
0 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 16
Byte 4* 7 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 31
Substitute 6 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 30
value 5 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 29
4 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 28
3 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 27
2 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 26
1 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 25
0 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 26
* Bytes 3 and 4 are not relevant for SM 421;DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5A

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 417
Parameter sets of signal modules
A.4 Parameters of analog input modules

A.4 Parameters of analog input modules

Parameters
The table below lists all parameters you can set for analog input modules.
The comparison illustrates the parameters you can edit:
● In STEP 7
● Using SFC 55 "WR_PARM"
The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred with SFCs 56 and 57 to the module
(refer to the STEP 7 manuals).

Table A- 8 Parameters of analog input modules

Parameters Data record Parameter assignment Parameter assignment

no. with SFC 55 with STEP 7
Destination CPU for interrupt No Yes
Measuring method No Yes
Measuring range No Yes
Diagnostics No Yes
Temperature unit 0 No Yes
Temperature coefficient No Yes
Noise suppression No Yes
Smoothing No Yes
Reference junction No Yes
End of cycle interrupt No Yes
Diagnostics interrupt enable 1 Yes Yes
Hardware interrupt enable Yes Yes
Reference temperature 1 Yes Yes
High limit 1 Yes Yes
Low limit 1 Yes Yes

Note
If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1, you must
enable the diagnostics in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

418 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Parameter sets of signal modules
A.4 Parameters of analog input modules

Structure of data record 1

The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of analog input
modules.
You enable a parameter by setting a logical "1" at the corresponding bit.

7 6 0
Byte 0

Diagnostics interrupt enable

Hardware interrupt enable

Byte 1 high byte Reference Temperature

Byte 2 low byte in 0,01 °C
Byte 3 high byte High limit
Byte 4 low byte Channel 0
Byte 5 high byte Low limit
Byte 6 low byte Channel 0
•
•
•
Byte 31 high byte High limit
Byte 32 low byte Channel 7
Byte 33 high byte Low limit
Byte 34 low byte Channel 7
•
•
•
Byte 63 high byte High limit
Byte 64 low byte Channel 15
Byte 65 high byte Low limit
Byte 66 low byte Channel 15

Figure A-2 Data record 1 for the parameters of analog input modules

Note
The representation of limits and the reference temperature corresponds to the analog value
representation. Observe range limits when setting the limit values.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 419
Parameter sets of signal modules
A.4 Parameters of analog input modules

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

420 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
Diagnostic data of signal modules B
B.1 Evaluating diagnostic data of signal modules in the user program

This section
This section describes the diagnostic data structure in system data. You must be familiar
with this configuration if you want to evaluate the diagnostic data of the signal module in the
STEP 7 user program.

Diagnostic data stored in data records

Module diagnostic data may have a length of max. 43 bytes, and are contained in data
records 0 and 1:
● Data record 0 contains 4 bytes of diagnostic data describing the current state of an
automation system.
● Data record 1 contains the 4 bytes of diagnostic data that are also contained in data
record 0 and as many as 39 bytes of module specific diagnostic data.

Further references
An in-depth description of the principle of evaluating the diagnostic data of signal modules in
the user program and a description of the SFCs that can be used for that purpose will be
found in the STEP 7 manuals.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 421
Diagnostic data of signal modules
B.2 Structure and contents of diagnostic data bytes 0 and 1

B.2 Structure and contents of diagnostic data bytes 0 and 1

Overview
The section below describes the structure and content of the various bytes in diagnostic
data. General rule: When an error occurs, the bit concerned is set to "1".

Bytes 0 and 1

Table B- 1 Bytes 0 and 1 of diagnostic data

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 0 7 Incorrect parameter in the module
6 No module parameters
5 Front connector missing
4 External auxiliary voltage missing
3 Channel error
2 External error
1 Internal error
0 Module error
Byte 1 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 Channel information available
3
2 Module type (see table "Codes of the module types")
1
0

Module types
The table below lists the module type IDs (bits 0 to 3 in byte 1).

Table B- 2 Codes of the module types

ID Module type
0101 Analog module
0110 CPU
1000 Function module
1100 CP
1111 Digital module

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

422 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Diagnostic data of signal modules
B.3 Diagnostic data of the digital input modules as of byte 2

B.3 Diagnostic data of the digital input modules as of byte 2

Overview
The structure and contents of the different bytes of the diagnostic data for special digital
input modules are described below. General rule: When an error occurs, the bit concerned is
set to "1".
You will find a description of possible error causes and appropriate remedies in the section
"Diagnostics of the modules".

Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V

Table B- 3 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 2 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 Module-internal supply voltage failure
3 0
2 Operating mode 0: RUN; 1: STOP
1 0
0 0
Byte 3 7 0
6 Hardware interrupt lost
5 0
4 0
3 0
2 EPROM error
1 0
0 0

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 423
Diagnostic data of signal modules
B.3 Diagnostic data of the digital input modules as of byte 2

Bytes 4 to 8 of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V

Table B- 4 Bytes 4 to 8 of the diagnostic data of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 4 7 0
6 Channel type B#16#70: Digital input
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte 5 7 Number of diagnostics bits that the module outputs per channel: 8 bits long

0
Byte 6 7 Number of channels of the same type in one module: 16 channels

0
Byte 7 5 Channel error 7
6 Channel error 6
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 1
0 Channel error 0
Byte 8 7 Channel error 15
6 Channel error 14
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 9
0 Channel error 8

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

424 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Diagnostic data of signal modules
B.3 Diagnostic data of the digital input modules as of byte 2

Bytes 9 to 24 of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V

Data record 1 contains the channel-specific diagnostic data, starting at bytes 9 to 24. The
figure below shows the assignment of the diagnostic byte for a channel of the module.

Table B- 5 Diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V

Byte Bit Meaning

Bytes 9 - 24 7 0
6 0
5 Sensor supply missing
4 Wire break
3 0
2 0
1 0
0 Configuring/parameter assignment error

Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V

Table B- 6 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 2 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 0
3 0
2 Operating mode 0: RUN; 1: STOP
1 0
0 0
Byte 3 7 0
6 Hardware interrupt lost
5 0
4 0
3 0
2 EPROM error
1 0
0 0

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 425
Diagnostic data of signal modules
B.3 Diagnostic data of the digital input modules as of byte 2

Bytes 4 to 8 of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V

Table B- 7 Bytes 4 to 8 of the diagnostic data of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 4 7 0
6 Channel type B#16#70: Digital input
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte 5 7 Number of diagnostics bits that the module outputs per channel: 8 bits long

0
Byte 6 7 Number of channels of the same type in one module: 16 channels

0
Byte 7 7 Channel error 7
6 Channel error 6
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 1
0 Channel error 0
Byte 8 7 Channel error 15
6 Channel error 14
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 9
0 Channel error 8

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

426 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Diagnostic data of signal modules
B.3 Diagnostic data of the digital input modules as of byte 2

Bytes 9 to 24 of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V

Data record 1 contains the channel-specific diagnostic data, starting at bytes 9 to 24. The
figure below shows the assignment of the diagnostic byte for a channel of the module.

Table B- 8 Diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 9-24 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 Wire break
3 0
2 0
1 0
0 Configuring/parameter assignment error

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 427
Diagnostic data of signal modules
B.4 Diagnostic data of the digital output modules as of byte 2

B.4 Diagnostic data of the digital output modules as of byte 2

Overview
The structure and contents of the different bytes of the diagnostic data for special digital
output modules are described below. General rule: When an error occurs, the bit concerned
is set to "1".
You will find a description of possible error causes and appropriate remedies in the section
on the special module.

Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A

Table B- 9 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 2 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 0
3 0
2 Operating mode 0: RUN; 1: STOP
1 0
0 0
Byte 3 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 0
3 0
2 EPROM error
1 0
0 0

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

428 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Diagnostic data of signal modules
B.4 Diagnostic data of the digital output modules as of byte 2

Bytes 4 and 8 of the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A

Table B- 10 Bytes 4 to 8 of the diagnostic data of the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 4 7 0
6 Channel type B#16#72: digital output
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte 5 7 Number of diagnostics bits that the module outputs per channel: 8 bits long

0
Byte 6 7 Number of channels of the same type in one module: 16 channels

0
Byte 7 7 Channel error 7
6 Channel error 6
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 1
0 Channel error 0
Byte 8 7 Channel error 15
6 Channel error 14
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 9
0 Channel error 8

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 429
Diagnostic data of signal modules
B.4 Diagnostic data of the digital output modules as of byte 2

Bytes 9 and 24 of the SM 421; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A

Data record 1 contains the channel-specific diagnostic data, starting at bytes 9 to 24. The
figure below shows the assignment of the diagnostic byte for a channel of the module.

Table B- 11 Diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A

Byte Bit Meaning

Bytes 9 - 24 7 0
6 External load voltage missing
5 0
4 0
3 Short-circuit to M
2 0
1 0
0 Configuring/parameter assignment error

Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

Table B- 12 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 2 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 Module-internal supply voltage failure
3 0
2 Operating mode 0: RUN; 1: STOP
1 0
0 0
Byte 3 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 0
3 0
2 EPROM error
1 0
0 0

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

430 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Diagnostic data of signal modules
B.4 Diagnostic data of the digital output modules as of byte 2

Bytes 4 to 10 of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

Table B- 13 Bytes 4 to 10 of the diagnostic data of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 4 7 0
6 Channel type B#16#72: digital output
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte 5 7 Number of diagnostics bits that the module outputs per channel: 8 bits long

0
Byte 6 7 Number of channels of the same type in one module: 32 channels

0
Byte 7 7 Channel error 7
6 Channel error 6
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 1
0 Channel error 0
Byte 8 7 Channel error 15
6 Channel error 14
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 9
0 Channel error 8

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 431
Diagnostic data of signal modules
B.4 Diagnostic data of the digital output modules as of byte 2

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 9 7 Channel error 23
6 Channel error 22
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 17
0 Channel error 16
Byte 10 7 Channel error 31
6 Channel error 30
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 25
0 Channel error 24

Bytes 11 to 42 of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

Data record 1 contains the channel-specific diagnostic data, starting at bytes 11 to 42. The
figure below shows the assignment of the diagnostic byte for a channel of the module.

Table B- 14 Diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

Byte Bit Meaning

Bytes 11 - 42 7 0
6 External load voltage missing
5 0
4 Wire break
3 Short-circuit to M
2 Short-circuit to L+
1 0
0 Configuring/parameter assignment error

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

432 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Diagnostic data of signal modules
B.4 Diagnostic data of the digital output modules as of byte 2

Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A

Table B- 15 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 2 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 0
3 0
2 Operating mode 0: RUN; 1: STOP
1 0
0 0
Byte 3 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 0
3 0
2 EPROM error
1 0
0 0

Bytes 4 to 8 of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A

Table B- 16 Bytes 4 to 8 of the diagnostic data of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 4 7 0
6 Channel type B#16#72: digital output
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte 5 7 Number of diagnostics bits that the module outputs per channel: 8 bits long

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 433
Diagnostic data of signal modules
B.4 Diagnostic data of the digital output modules as of byte 2

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 6 7 Number of channels of the same type in one module: 16 channels

0
Byte 7 7 Channel error 7
6 Channel error 6
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 1
0 Channel error 0
Byte 8 7 Channel error 15
6 Channel error 14
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 9
0 Channel error 8

Bytes 9 to 24 of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A

Data record 1 contains the channel-specific diagnostic data, starting at bytes 9 to 24. The
figure below shows the assignment of the diagnostic byte for a channel of the module.

Table B- 17 Diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A

Byte Bit Meaning

Bytes 9 - 24 7 0
6 0
5 Fuse blown
4 0
3 0
2 0
1 0
0 Configuring/parameter assignment error

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

434 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Diagnostic data of signal modules
B.5 Diagnostic data of the analog input modules as of byte 2

B.5 Diagnostic data of the analog input modules as of byte 2

Overview
The structure and contents of the different bytes of the diagnostic data for the special analog
input modules are described below. General rule: When an error occurs, the bit concerned is
set to "1".
You will find a description of possible error causes and appropriate remedies in the section
on the special module.

Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit

Table B- 18 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 2 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 0
3 0
2 Operating mode 0: RUN; 1: STOP
1 0
0 Measuring range module incorrect or missing
Byte 3 7 0
6 Hardware interrupt lost
5 0
4 ADC/DAC error
3 RAM error
2 EPROM error
1 0
0 0

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 435
Diagnostic data of signal modules
B.5 Diagnostic data of the analog input modules as of byte 2

Bytes 4 to 8 of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit

Table B- 19 Bytes 4 to 8 of the diagnostic data of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 4 7 0
6 Channel type B#16#71: Analog input
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte 5 7 Number of diagnostics bits that the module outputs per channel: 8 bits long

0
Byte 6 7 Number of channels of the same type in one module: 16 channels

0
Byte 7 7 Channel error 7
6 Channel error 6
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 1
0 Channel error 0
Byte 8 7 Channel error 15
6 Channel error 14
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 9
0 Channel error 8

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

436 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Diagnostic data of signal modules
B.5 Diagnostic data of the analog input modules as of byte 2

Bytes 9 to 24 of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit

Data record 1 contains the channel-specific diagnostic data, starting at bytes 9 to 24. The
figure below shows the assignment of the diagnostic byte for a channel of the module.

Table B- 20 Diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 9-24 7 Overflow
6 Underflow
5 Reference channel error
4 Wire break
3 Short-circuit to M
2 0
1 0
0 Configuring/parameter assignment error

Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit

Table B- 21 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 2 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 0
3 0
2 Operating mode 0: RUN; 1: STOP
1 0
0 0
Byte 3 7 0
6 Hardware interrupt lost
5 0
4 ADC/DAC error
3 0
2 EPROM error
1 0
0 0

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 437
Diagnostic data of signal modules
B.5 Diagnostic data of the analog input modules as of byte 2

Bytes 4 and 7 of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit

Table B- 22 Bytes 4 to 7 of the diagnostic data of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 4 7 0
6 Channel type B#16#71: Analog input
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte 5 7 Number of diagnostics bits that the module outputs per channel: 16 bits long

0
Byte 6 7 Number of channels of the same type in one module: 8 channels

0
Byte 7 7 Channel error 7
6 Channel error 6
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 1
0 Channel error 0

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

438 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Diagnostic data of signal modules
B.5 Diagnostic data of the analog input modules as of byte 2

Bytes 8 and 23 of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit

Data record 1 contains the channel-specific diagnostic data, starting at bytes 8 to 23. The
following table shows the assignment of the even diagnostic bytes (bytes 8, 10, to 22) for a
channel of the module.

Table B- 23 Even diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 8-23 7 Overflow
even 6 Underflow
5 0
4 Wire break
3 0
2 0
1 0
0 Configuring/parameter assignment error
The following table shows the assignment of the odd diagnostic bytes (bytes 9, 11, to 23) for
a channel of the module.

Table B- 24 Odd diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 8-23 7 User calibration does not correspond to the parameter assignment
odd 6 Open conductor in the current source
5 0
4 Underrange or overrange
3 Run time calibration error
2 Open conductor in - direction
1 Open conductor in + direction
0 User connection not wired

Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 bit

Table B- 25 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 bit

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 2 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 0
3 0
2 Operating mode 0: RUN; 1: STOP
1 0
0 Thermocouple connection error

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 439
Diagnostic data of signal modules
B.5 Diagnostic data of the analog input modules as of byte 2

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 3 7 0
6 Hardware interrupt lost
5 0
4 ADC/DAC error
3 RAM error
2 EPROM error
1 0
0 0

Bytes 4 to 7 of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 bit

Table B- 26 Bytes 4 to 7 of the diagnostic data of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 bit

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 4 7 0
6 Channel type B#16#71: Analog input
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte 5 7 Number of diagnostics bits that the module outputs per channel: 16 bits long

0
Byte 6 7 Number of channels of the same type in one module: 8 channels

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

440 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Diagnostic data of signal modules
B.5 Diagnostic data of the analog input modules as of byte 2

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 7 7 Channel error 7
6 Channel error 6
5 ......
4 ......
3 ......
2 ......
1 Channel error 1
0 Channel error 0

Bytes 8 to 23 of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 bit

Data record 1 contains the channel-specific diagnostic data, starting at bytes 8 to 23. The
following table shows the assignment of the even diagnostic bytes (bytes 8, 10, to 22) for a
channel of the module.

Table B- 27 Even diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 bit

Byte Bit Meaning

Bytes 8-23 7 Overflow
even 6 Underflow
5 Reference channel error
4 Wire break
3 0
2 0
1 0
0 Configuring/parameter assignment error
The following table shows the assignment of the odd diagnostic bytes (bytes 9, 11, to 23) for
a channel of the module.

Table B- 28 Odd diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 bit

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 8-23 7 User calibration does not correspond to the parameter assignment
odd 6 0
5 0
4 0
3 Runtime calibration error
2 0
1 0
0 0

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 441
Diagnostic data of signal modules
B.5 Diagnostic data of the analog input modules as of byte 2

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

442 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
Accessories and spare parts C
C.1 Accessories and spare parts

Accessories and spare parts

Accessories - spare parts Order number

For racks
Number wheel for slot labeling C79165-Z1523-A22
Spare slot covers (qty 10) 6ES7490-1AA00-0AA0
For power supplies
Spare connector for PS 405 (DC) 6ES7490-0A00-0AA0
Spare connector for PS 407 (AC) 6ES7490-0AB00-0AA0
Backup battery 6ES7971-0BA00
For digital modules/analog modules
Cover foil (10 x) for labeling strips of the SMs 6ES7492-2XX00-0AA0
Cover flap for fuse receptacle on the AC modules 6ES7422-0XX00-7AA0
Measuring range module for analog modules 6ES7974-0AA00-0AA0
Front connector screw-type connection 6ES7492-1AL00-0AA0
Front connector spring connection 6ES7492-1BL00-0AA0
Front connector crimp connection 6ES7492-1CL00-0AA0
Crimping tool for crimp contacts 6XX3 071
Crimp contacts (package of 250) 6XX3 070
Extraction tool for crimp contacts 6ES5 497-8MA11
Fuses, 8 A, quick blow
 Wickmann 194-1800-0
 Schurter SP001.1013
 Littelfuse 217.008
Labeling sheet for the front connector, petrol blue 6ES7492-2AX00-0AA0
Labeling sheet for the front connector, light 6ES7492-2BX00-0AA0
Labeling sheet for the front connector, yellow 6ES7492-2CX00-0AA0
Labeling sheet for the front connector, red 6ES7492-2DX00-0AA0
For IMs
Terminating connector for IM 461- 6ES7461-0AA00-7AA0
Terminating connector for IM 461- 6ES7461-1AA0-7AA0
Terminating connector for IM 461- 6ES7461-3AA00-7AA0
IM 463-, send IM, 600 m to IM 314 of the S5 6ES7463-2AA00-0AA0
IM cable with communication bus, 0,75 m 6ES7468-1AH50-0AA0
IM cable with communication bus, 1.5 m 6ES7468-1BB50-0AA0

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 443
Accessories and spare parts
C.1 Accessories and spare parts

Accessories - spare parts Order number

IM cable with communication bus, 5 m 6ES7468-1BF00-0AA0
IM cable with communication bus, 10 m 6ES7468-1CB00-0AA0
IM cable with communication bus, 25 m 6ES7468-1CC50-0AA0
IM cable with communication bus, 50 m 6ES7468-1CF00-0AA0
IM cable with communication bus, 100 m 6ES7468-1DB00-0AA0
IM cable with current transmission, 0,75 m 6ES7468-3AH50-0AA0
IM cable with current transmission, 1.5 m 6ES7468-3BB50-0AA0
Package with plug adapters for IM 467 FO 6ES7195-1BE00-0XA0
Package with simplex plugs and polishing set for IM 467 FO 6GK1901-0FB00-0AA0
For interfacing / networking
Standard mounting rail 35 mm 6ES5710-8MA...
PROFIBUS 6XV1830-0BH10
6XV1830-3BH10
PROFIBUS 6XV1830-0BH10
PROFIBUS 6XV1830-3BH10
PROFIBUS bus connector without PG socket 6ES7972-0BA00-0XA0
PROFIBUS bus connector with PG socket 6ES7972-0BB10-0XA0
PROFIBUS bus connector without PG socket, with angled cable 6ES7972-0BA40-0X40
outlet
PROFIBUS bus connector with PG socket, with angled cable outlet 6ES7972-0BB40-0X40
PROFIBUS RS 485 bus terminal 6GK1500-0AA00
6GK1500-0AB00
6GK1500-0DA00
PC/MPI cable (5 m) 6ES7901-2BF00-0AA0
For fan subassembly
Spare fan for fan subassembly 6ES7408-1TA00-6AA0
Filters (qty 10) for fan subassembly 6ES7408-1TA00-7AA0
Monitoring PCB for fan subassembly 6ES7408-1TX00-6XA0
Power supply PCB for fan subassembly 6ES7408-1XX00-6XA0
Cabinets
Cabinet 2200 x 800 x 400 with extension set for SIMATIC S7- 8MC 2281-7FC11-8DA1
Extension set for SIMATIC S7- 8MC 1605–BS70–AA0
Cables for printers with
Cable for interface module
 1m 6ES7368-3BB00-0AA0
 2.5 m 6ES7368-3BC00-0AA0
 5m 6ES7368-3BF00-0AA0
 10 m 6ES7368-3CB00-0AA0
Connector housing, gray
 9-pin V42254-A6000-G109
 15-pin V42254-A6000-G115
 25-pin V42254-A6000-G125

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

444 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Accessories and spare parts
C.1 Accessories and spare parts

Accessories - spare parts Order number

Connector housing, black
 9-pin V42254-A6001-G309
 15-pin V42254-A6001-G315
 25-pin V42254-A6001-G325

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 445
Accessories and spare parts
C.1 Accessories and spare parts

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

446 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
Directive on handling electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD) D
D.1 ESD: What are the directives for handling electrostatic sensitive
devices?

Definition
All electronic modules are equipped with large-scale integrated ICs or components. Due to
their design, these electronic components are highly sensitive to overvoltage, and thus to
any electrostatic discharge.
These Electrostatic Sensitive Devices/Modules are commonly abbreviated ESD.
Electrostatic sensitive devices are labeled with the following symbol:

CAUTION
Electrostatic sensitive devices can be destroyed by voltages far below the level perceived
by human beings. These voltages are generated when you touch a component or electrical
connections of a module without having discharged your body. In most cases, the damage
caused by overvoltage is not evident immediately, and results in damage only after a
prolonged period of operation.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 447
Directive on handling electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD)
D.2 Electrostatic charging of persons

D.2 Electrostatic charging of persons

Electrostatic charging
Any person with a non-conductive connection to the electrical potential of its surroundings
may be exposed to electrostatic charge.
The figure shows the maximum electrostatic voltage which may build up on a person coming
into contact with the materials indicated. These values are in conformity with the
specifications of IEC 61000-4-2.

1
(kV)
16
15
14
13
12 2
11
10
9
3
8
7
4
6
5
4
3
2
1
5
5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

(1) Voltage in kV
(2) Synthetic material
(3) Wool
(4) Antistatic materials, such as wood or concrete
(5) Relative air humidity in %
Figure D-1 Electrostatic voltages which can build up on a person

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

448 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Directive on handling electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD)
D.3 Basic protective measures against electrostatic discharge

D.3 Basic protective measures against electrostatic discharge

Ensure sufficient grounding

Make sure all persons, workplaces and packaging are sufficiently grounded when ESD
components are being handled. This prevents electrostatic charging.

Avoid direct contact

You should only touch ESD components if this is unavoidable (for example, during
maintenance work). Handle the modules without touching any chip pins or PCB traces. In
this way, the discharged energy can not affect the sensitive devices.
Discharge your body before you start taking any measurements on a module. Do so by
touching grounded metallic parts. Always use grounded measuring instruments.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 449
Directive on handling electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD)
D.3 Basic protective measures against electrostatic discharge

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

450 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
List of abbreviations E
E.1 List of abbreviations

List of abbreviations

Abbreviations Explanations
AC Alternating current
ADC Analog-to-digital converter
AI Analog input
AO Analog output
AS Automation system
STL Statement list (type of representation in STEP 7)
BAF Battery failure
BUS1F; BUS2F LED bus failure on the MPI/PROFIBUS DP interface 1 or 2
CH Channel
COMP Compensation circuit
CP Communications processor
CPU Central processing unit of the PLC
CR Central rack
DAC Digital-to-analog converter
DB Data block
DC Direct current
DI Digital input
DO Digital output
ESD Electrostatic sensitive device
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EEPROM Electrically erasable programmable read-only memory
EPROM Erasable programmable read-only memory
ER Expansion rack
ID Input delay
SV Set substitution value
EXM Extension module
EXTF Error LED "external fault"
FB Function block
FC Function
FEPROM Flash erasable programmable read-only memory
FM Function module
FRCE Fiber-optic cable
FC Function block diagram

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 451
List of abbreviations
E.1 List of abbreviations

Abbreviations Explanations
GD Global data communication
ES Sensor supply
IC Constant-current line
IFM1F; IFM2F LED error at interface module 1/2
IM Interface module
INTF Error LED "internal fault"
IP Intelligent I/O
L+ Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage
HLV KLV
FOC Fiber-optic cable
LAD Ladder logic diagram
M Chassis ground
M+ Measuring line (positive)
M- Measuring line (negative)
MANA Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
MPI Multipoint interface
MRES Master reset position of the toggle switch for general reset of the CPU
MSTR Master
OB Organization block
OP Operator panel
OS Operator system
PIO Process image of outputs
PII Process image of inputs
PG Programming device
PS Power supply
Q I: Analog output current
QV: Analog output voltage
RAM Random access memory
REDF Redundancy fault
RL: Load impedance
S+ Sensing line (positive)
S- Sensing line (negative)
SCL Structured control language
SFB System function block
SFC System function
SM Signal module
PLC Programmable logic controller
SSL Signal module
TD HMI (text display)
SSL Transducer
UC Universal current
TD Universal rack

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

452 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 List of abbreviations
E.1 List of abbreviations

Abbreviations Explanations
UCM Common mode voltage
UH: Auxiliary voltage
Uiso Potential difference between MANA and local ground
USR User
Vs Sensor voltage
Sign Sign
CR Central rack

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 453
List of abbreviations
E.1 List of abbreviations

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

454 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
Glossary

2-conductor/3-conductor/4-conductor connection
Method of connecting to the module, for example, connecting resistance thermometers or
resistors to the front connector of the analog module or loads to the voltage output of an
analog output module.

2-wire transducer/4-wire transducer

Type of transducer (2-wire transducer: Power supply via terminals of the
analog input module; 4-wire transducer: power supply via separate connectors of the
transducer)

Address
An address identifies a specific operand or range of operands, examples: input I 12.1;
memory word MW25; data block DB3.

Automation system
An automation system is a → programmable controller comprising a → central rack, a CPU
and various input/output modules.

Backplane bus
The backplane bus is a serial data bus over which modules communicate with each other
and over which they are supplied with the necessary voltage. The connection between
modules is established by bus connectors.

Backup battery
The backup battery ensures that the → user program on the → CPU is not lost in the event of
a power failure and that defined data areas, bit memory, timers, and counters are also
retained.

Backup voltage, external

The same backup can be achieved as with a backup battery if a backup voltage (direct
voltage between 5 V and 15 V) is applied to the "EXT.-BATT." socket of the CPU.
The external backup voltage is required to replace a power supply module if the user
program and data stored in a RAM (for example, bit memory, timers, counters, system data,
integrated clock) needs to be backed up while the module is exchanged.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 455
Glossary

Basic error limit

The basic error limit represents the operational limit at 25° C relative to the nominal range of
the analog module.

Baud rate
Speed of the data transmission (bps)

Central rack
An S7-400 consists of a central rack (CR) to which expansion racks (ER) can be assigned.
The central rack is the rack containing the → CPU.

Cold restart
→ Hot restart of the automation system and its user program after all dynamic data (variables
of the input/output image, internal registers, timers, counters etc. and their program sections)
have been reset to a predefined value.
A cold start can be triggered automatically (for example following power outage, loss of
information in the dynamic memory areas etc.).

Common mode voltage

Voltage common to all terminals of a group and that is measured between this group and
any reference point (usually ground).

Communication load
Load on cyclic program execution of a CPU caused by communication activities
(PROFIBUS-DP).
To prevent communication activities putting too much load on program execution, it is
possible to set the maximum permitted cycle load caused by communication in the
parameter assignment in STEP 7.

Communications processor
Programmable module for communication tasks, for example, point-to-point links.

Compensating box
Compensating boxes can be used when measuring temperatures with thermoelements
connected to analog input modules. The compensating box is a circuit for compensating
temperature fluctuations at the → reference junction.

Constant bus cycle time

Constant bus cycle time means a DP bus cycle accurate to a few microseconds that can be
configured in STEP 7.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

456 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Glossary

CP
→ Communications processor

Data block
Data blocks (DBs) are data areas in the user program that contain user data. There are
shared data blocks that can be accessed by all logic blocks and there are instance data
blocks assigned to a specific FB call.

Declaration
Definition of variables (for example parameters or local data of a block) with name, data
type, comment etc.

Default (setting)
The default is a practical basic setting that is always used when no other value is specified.

Destruction limit
Limit of the permitted input voltage/current. If this limit is exceeded, the measurement
accuracy can deteriorate. If the destruction limit is exceeded considerably, the internal
measuring circuitry can be destroyed.

Diagnostic buffer
The diagnostic buffer is a buffered memory area on the CPU in which the diagnostic events
are entered in the order in which they occur.
The user can read the precise cause of the problem from the diagnostic buffer with STEP 7
(PLC -> Module Information menu command) and start troubleshooting measures.

Diagnostic data
All diagnostic events that occur are collected on the CPU and entered in the → diagnostic
buffer. If an error OB exists, this is started.

Diagnostic interrupt
Diagnostics-compliant modules signal detected system errors to the → CPU using diagnostic
interrupts. If a diagnostic interrupt occurs, the CPU calls OB82.

Diagnostics
Generic term for → system diagnostics, process fault diagnostics and user-defined
diagnostics.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 457
Glossary

Direct data exchange

Direct data exchange is sometimes also known as direct communication. In direct data
exchange, local input address areas of an intelligent DP slave (for example, CPU 315-2 with
PROFIBUS DP attachment) or a DP master are assigned to a PROFIBUS DP partner. The
intelligent DP slave or the DP master receives the input data that the PROFIBUS DP partner
sends to its DP master via these assigned input address areas.

DP master
A node with master functionality in PROFIBUS DP. A master that conforms to IEC 61784-
1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1 with the DP protocol is known as a DP master. The token allowing
access to the bus is always passed on among the masters. The slaves, in this case DP
slaves, can only react when requested to by a master. The following distinction must be
made:
DP master (class 1): handles user data exchange with the DP slaves assigned to it.
DP master (class 2): Provides services such as: reading input/output data, diagnostics,
global control.

DP slave
A → slave operated on PROFIBUS with the PROFIBUS DP protocol is known as a DP slave.

Equipotential bonding
An electrical connection (equipotential bonding conductor) that ties parts of electrical
equipment and extraneous conductive parts to the same or approximately the same potential
to prevent disturbing or dangerous voltages between these parts.

FB
→ Function block

FC
→ Function

Fiber-optic cable
The "force" function overwrites a variable (for example, memory bit, output) with a value
defined by the user.
At the same time, the variable is write-protected so that the value cannot be modified from
any other location (it cannot, for example, be overwritten by the user program). After
removing the programming device, this value is retained.
The write-protection is canceled only after invoking the "unforce" function, following which
the variable can once again be written with the value set by the user program.
The "force" function can, for example, be used during commissioning to set specific outputs
to the "ON" state for any length of time even if the logic operation in the user program is not
true (due to missing wiring at inputs).

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

458 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Glossary

A fiber-optic cable is a transmission medium made of glass or plastic fiber. Fiber-optic cables
are insensitive to electromagnetic interference and allow high data transmission rates.

Fiber-optic cable
The "force" function overwrites a variable (for example, memory bit, output) with a value
defined by the user.
At the same time, the variable is write-protected so that the value cannot be modified from
any other location (it cannot, for example, be overwritten by the user program). After
removing the programming device, this value is retained.
The write-protection is canceled only after invoking the "unforce" function, following which
the variable can once again be written with the value set by the user program.
The "force" function can, for example, be used during commissioning to set specific outputs
to the "ON" state for any length of time even if the logic operation in the user program is not
true (due to missing wiring at inputs).
A fiber-optic cable is a transmission medium made of glass or plastic fiber. Fiber-optic cables
are insensitive to electromagnetic interference and allow high data transmission rates.

Floating
In the case of floating I/O modules, the reference potentials of the control and load circuits
are electrically isolated from each other, for example, by optocouplers, relay contacts, or
transformers. The I/O circuits can be connected to a common potential.

FREEZE
Control command, inputs of the → DP slaves are frozen at their current values.

Function
According to IEC 1131-3, a function (FC) is a → logic block without → static data. A function
allows parameter passing in the user program. This makes them suitable for programming
commonly recurring complex functions such as calculations.

Function block
According to IEC 1131-3, a function block (FB) is a → logic block with → static data. An FB
has "memory" so that it is possible to access its parameters (for example outputs) from any
part of the user program.

Functional grounding
Grounding with the sole purpose of ensuring the intended function of the electrical
equipment. Functional grounding, short-circuits interfering voltages that would otherwise
have an unacceptable influence on the equipment.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 459
Glossary

Fuse blown
Parameter in STEP 7 for digital output modules. When the parameter is enabled, the blowing
of one or more fuses is detected by the module. With suitable parameter assignment, a →
diagnostic interrupt is triggered.

Grounding
Grounding means connecting an electrically conductive part to the ground electrode (one or
more conductive parts that make good contact with ground) via a grounding system.

Hardware interrupt
A hardware interrupt is triggered by interrupt-triggering modules due to a particular event in
the process (violation of a limit value, module has completed the cyclic conversion of its
channels).
The hardware interrupt is signaled to the CPU. In keeping with the priority of this interrupt,
the corresponding → organization block is then executed.

Hold last value (HLV)

The module retains the last value output prior to changing to STOP mode.

Hot restart
When a CPU starts up (for example as a result of activating the mode selector or turning on
the power), cyclic program execution (OB1) initially processes either OB101 (hot restart),
OB100 (cold restart: hot restart) or OB102 (cold restart). Backup of the CPU is absolutely
necessary for a hot restart.
The following applies: all data areas (timers, counters, memory bits, data blocks) and their
content are retained. The → process image of the inputs is read in and the execution of the
STEP 7 user program is continued from the point at which it was last stopped (STOP, power
down).
The other startup modes available are → cold restart and → warm restart.

I/O bus
Part of the → backplane bus in the automation system optimized for fast exchange of signals
between the CPU or CPUs and the signal modules.
Useful data (for example, digital input signals of a signal module) and system data (for
example default parameter data records of a signal module) is transferred over the I/O bus.

Input delay
Parameter in STEP 7 for digital input modules. The input delay is used to suppress coupled
interference. Spurious pulses of 0 ms up to the selected input delay are suppressed.
The selected input delay is subject to a tolerance that can be found in the technical
specifications of the module. A high input delay suppresses longer spurious pulses, a lower
delay suppresses shorter spurious pulses.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

460 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Glossary

The permitted input delay depends on the length of the cable between sensor and module.
If, for example, there are long unshielded cables to the sensor (over 100 m), a high input
delay must be set.

Integration time
The integration time is the reciprocal of the → interference frequency suppression in ms.

Interrupt
SIMATIC S7 recognizes 28 different priority classes that control the execution of the
user program. These priority classes include interrupts, such as hardware interrupts. When
an interrupt occurs, the operating system automatically calls an assigned organization block
in which the user can program the required reaction (for example, in an FB).

Interrupt reaction time

The interrupt reaction time is the time from the first occurrence of an interrupt signal to
executing the first statement in the interrupt OB. General rule: Higher priority interrupts are
serviced first. This means that the interrupt reaction time is extended by the program
execution time of the higher priority interrupts and interrupts with the same priority that were
called earlier (queue).

Linearity error
The linearity error indicates the maximum deviation of the measured/output value from the
ideal linear relationship between measured/output signal and digital value. This is specified
as a percentage related to the nominal range of the analog module.

Load memory
The load memory is part of a programmable module (CPU, CP). It contains the objects
generated by the programming device (local objects). It is implemented either as a plug-in
memory card or as integrated memory.

Local data
Local data is the data assigned to a → logic block that is declared in its → declaration section
or in its variable declaration. It includes the following (block-specific): Formal parameters,
→ static data, → temporary data.

Measuring principle, instantaneous value encoding

A module with instantaneous value encoding is always used for extremely fast measurement
methods or for values that change very quickly. With this technique, the module accesses
the variable to be measured as quickly as possible and returns an instantaneous recording
of the signal at a specific time. It should be remembered that due to this measurement
method, the modules are more "sensitive" than the modules using the integrating method. As
a result, interference affecting the measured value can lead to falsification. When using

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 461
Glossary

these modules, you should make sure that the measurement signal is "clean", for example
by adhering to the installation instructions.

Measuring principle, integrating

A module with an integrating measurement technique is always used for measurements that
are not time-critical. The integration time is inversely proportional to the network frequency.
You set the network frequency in STEP 7 and this results in the integration time. At a
network frequency of 50 Hz, the integration time is 20 ms or even multiples of 20 ms. Since
the measured value is integrated over exactly this period, at least one or more entire periods
of the network frequency that may be superimposed on the measurement signal are also
recorded. The mean value of the interference is therefore integrated to zero (positive
component of the first half period = negative component of the second half period) and, as a
result of the principle, only the useful signal is detected.

Measuring range module

Measuring range submodules are plugged onto analog input modules to adapt them to
various measuring ranges.

Memory reset
During a memory reset, the following memory areas of the CPU are erased: Work memory,
write/read area of the load memory, system memory.
The MPI parameters and the diagnostic buffer are retained.

Mode
Mode means the following:
1. The mode in which the CPU operates as set by the mode selector or using a PG
2. The type of program execution on the CPU

Mode selector
Using the mode selector, the user can set the current mode of the CPU (RUN, STOP) or
reset the memory of the CPU (MRES).

Noise suppression
Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. The frequency of the alternating voltage
power supply can interfere with the measured value, in particular when measuring small
voltage ranges and with thermoelements. With this parameter, the user specifies the
predominant power supply frequency in the system.

Non-isolated
With non-floating input/output modules, the reference potentials of the control and load
circuits are electrically interconnected.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

462 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Glossary

Operating state
The automation systems of SIMATIC S7 recognize the following operating modes or simply
modes: STOP, → STARTUP, RUN and HOLD.

Operational limit
The operational limit is the measurement or output error of the analog module throughout the
entire temperature range related to the nominal range of the analog module.

Parameters
1. Variables of a → logic block
2. Variable for setting the properties of a module (one or more per module). When shipped,
every module has practical basic parameter settings that the user can modify in STEP 7.

Point-to-point link
On a point-to-point link, only two nodes are physically linked to each other. This type of
communications link is used when the use of a communication network is not practical or
when different types of nodes need to be connected (for example, PLC with process
computer).

Priority class
The S7 CPU operating system provides up to 28 priority classes (= program execution
levels"), for example for cyclic program execution, hardware interrupt-controlled program
execution.
Each priority class is assigned to → organization blocks in which the user can program a
reaction. The OBs have different default priorities and if the OBs are called at the same time,
the priority decides which executes first and which can interrupt another. The default
priorities can be modified by the user.

Process image
The signal states of the digital input and output modules are entered in a process image on
the CPU.
A distinction is made between the process image of the inputs and the outputs. The process
image of the inputs (PII) is read from the input modules by the operating system prior to
execution of the user program. The process image of the outputs (PIQ) is transferred to the
output modules by the operating system on completion of program execution.

Product version
The product version distinguishes products with the same order number. The product
version is incremented when upwards-compatible functional enhancements are made, when
there are modifications relating solely to production (use of new components) and when
bugs are fixed.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 463
Glossary

PROFIBUS DP
Digital, analog and intelligent modules, along with a wide range of field devices complying
with IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1, such as drives or valve clusters are moved away from
the automation system to the local process over distances of up to 23 km.
The modules and field devices are interconnected with the automation system over the
PROFIBUS DP Fieldbus and are addressed in the same way as centralized I/O.

Programming device
A programming device (PG) is a personal computer with a special compact design, suitable
for industrial conditions. A programming device is completely equipped for programming the
SIMATIC automation systems.

RC element
Connection of ohmic resistor and capacitor in series. When a consumer is turned off, an
overvoltage occurs in circuits with an inductive load that can cause an electric arc and can
reduce the life of the contacts. To extinguish this electric arc, the contact can be bridged by
an RC element.

Reaction time
The reaction time is the time from detecting an input signal to changing the output signal
associated with it.
The actual reaction time is between a longest and a shortest reaction time. When configuring
a plant, the longest reaction time must always be assumed.

Reference channel error

Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. This parameter enables the error group
message of the reference junction when using thermoelements. A reference channel error
occurs when using thermoelements:
● When a fault occurs (for example broken wire) in a reference channel to which a
thermoresistor (RTD) is connected (channel 0) to compensate temperature drift.
● When the → reference temperature is outside the permitted range of values.
Each input channel to which the reference junction "RTD on channel 0" is assigned has the
reference channel error in the situation described above - the measured temperature is no
longer compensated.

Reference junction
Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. This parameter specifies the reference point
(point with known temperature) when using the thermoelements. Reference points can be:
Thermoresistor on channel 0 of the module; → compensating box, → reference temperature.

Reference potential
Potential on the basis of which the voltages of the circuits involved are measured.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

464 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Glossary

Reference temperature
Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. The reference temperature is the
temperature of the reference junction of thermoelements. The reference temperature allows
correct temperature measurement with thermoelements. The temperature of the reference
junction must be known because a thermoelement always detects the temperature
difference between the measuring point and the reference junction.

Repeater
Device for amplifying bus signals and for linking → bus segments over long distances.

Repetition accuracy
The repetition accuracy is the maximum deviation of the measured/output values when the
same input signal is applied or the same output value is specified repeatedly. The repetition
accuracy relates to the nominal range of the module and applies to the settled state (in terms
of temperature).

Resolution
With analog modules, this is the number of bits that represent the digitalized analog value in
binary format. The resolution depends on the module and, with analog input modules, on the
→ integration time. The longer the integration time, the more precise the resolution of the
measured value. The resolution including sign can be up to 16 bits.

Retentive memory
Data areas in data blocks along with timers, counters and bit memory are retentive when
their content is retained through a warm restart or power cycle.

S7 basic communication
Communication functions integrated in the CPU of SIMATIC S7/C7 that can be called up by
the user. These functions are called in the user program with → system functions. The user
data length is up to 76 bytes (small amounts of data). S7 basic communication is
implemented over → MPI.

S7 communication
Communication functions integrated in the CPU of SIMATIC S7/C7 that can be called up by
the user. These functions are called in the user program with → system function blocks. The
user data length is up to 64 Kbytes (large amounts of data). S7 communication provides a
network-independent interface between devices of the types SIMATIC S7/C7 and PG/PC.

Segment
→ Bus segment

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 465
Glossary

Shunt
Conductor connected in parallel in electric circuits.

Signal module
Signal modules (SMs) form the interface between the process and the automation system.
There are input modules, output modules, input/output modules (in each case, digital and
analog)

Smoothing
Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. The measured values are smoothed by
digital filtering. It is possible to select between no, weak, medium and strong filtering for each
individual module. The stronger the smoothing, the higher the time constant of the digital
filter.

Standard communication
Communication over standardized protocols such as PROFIBUS-DP, PROFIBUS-FMS.

Static data
Static data is data that is used only within a → function block. This data is stored in an
instance data block belonging to the function block. Data stored in this way is retained until
the next function block call.

Substitute value
Substitute values are values that are output to the process or are used in the user program
instead of a process value if a signal output module is defective.
The substitute values can be selected by the user in the parameter settings in STEP 7
(retain old value, substitute value 0 or 1). Are the values to be output at an output or outputs
in the CPU changes to STOP.

SYNC
Control command from the → master to the → slave: freezes the outputs at their current
value.

System diagnostics
System diagnostics is the detection, evaluation and signaling of faults/errors occurring within
the automation system. Examples of such faults and errors include: Program errors or
failures on modules. System errors can be indicated by LEDs or in STEP 7.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

466 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Glossary

Temperature coefficient
Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules during when measuring temperature with
thermoresistors (RTD). The temperature coefficient is selected to suit the thermoresistor
used (according to DIN standard).

Temperature error
The temperature error is the drift of the measured/output values caused by changes in the
ambient temperature of the analog module. It is specified as a percentage per degree Kelvin
and relates to the nominal range of the analog module.

Temperature error of the internal compensation

The temperature error of the internal compensation occurs only when measuring with
thermoelements. It indicates the error that must be added to the actual temperature error
when the "internal reference" mode is selected. The error is specified either as a percentage
of the physical nominal range of the analog module or as an absolute value in °C.

Temporary data
Temporary data is → local data of a block that is entered in the L stack during execution of
the block and that is no longer available on completion of execution.

Total current
Total of all the currents of all output channels of a digital output module.

Unforce
→ Force

Ungrounded
Without electrical connection to ground.

Warm restart
Warm restart following a power down with a set of dynamic data programmed by the user
und a user program component specified in the system.
A warm restart is characterized by the setting of a status bit or other suitable means that can
be read by the user program and indicate that the stoppage of the automation system
caused by a power down was detected in RUN mode.

Wire break
Parameter in STEP 7. A line continuity or wire break check is used to monitor the connection
from the input to the sensor or from the output to the actuator. If a broken wire is detected,
the module senses a current flow at the input/output set in the parameter assignment.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 467
Glossary

Work memory
The work memory is a → RAM area on the → CPU that is accessed by the processor during
execution of the user program.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

468 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
Index
IM 463-2, 361
Mechanical, 34
2 Analog functions
STEP 7 blocks, 179
24 VDC fan subassembly
Analog input channels
Features, 400
Basic execution time, 212
Installation, 401
Conversion time, 212
Specifications, 401
Cycle time, 212
wiring, 400
Measuring method, 205
2-conductor connection, 230
Measuring range, 205
2-wire transducer, 224
Representation of analog values, 185
Analog input module
ADC-DAC error, 244
3
SM 431, 293
3-conductor connection, 229 Auxiliary voltage missing, 244
Causes of error and remedies, 244
Channel error, 244
4 Channel information available, 244
Configuration error, 244
4-conductor connection, 228
Connecting resistance thermometers, 228
4-wire transducer, 226
Connecting resistors, 228
Connecting sensors, 220
Connecting thermocouples, 231
A
Diagnostic data, 435
Abbreviations, 451 Diagnostic interrupt, 217
AC diagnostic message in measured value, 242
Meaning, 451 Diagnostic messages, 242
Accessories Diagnostics, 217
Order numbers, 443 EPROM error, 244
S7400, 443 External error, 244
ADC Front connector missing, 244
Meaning, 451 Hardware interrupt lost, 244
ADC-DAC error Incorrect parameters, 244
Analog input module, 244 Internal error, 244
Additional support, 4 isolated, 220
Address area Limit, 217
Setting, 369 Measurement, 217
Addressing Measuring method, 217
S5 modules, 363 Measuring range, 218
AI Measuring range module incorrect/missing, 244
Meaning, 451 Module error, 244
SM 431 No parameters, 244
Block diagram, 294 Noise suppression, 218
Features, 293 non-isolated, 220
Specifications, 296 Overflow, 245
Wiring diagram, 295 Parameter assignment error, 244
Ambient conditions, 34 Parameters, 217, 418
Climatic, 35 potential difference, 220

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 469
Index

RAM error, 244 Cables, 237

Reference channel error, 245 Analog value
Reference junction, 218 Converting, 184
Reference temperature, 218 Sign, 184
Run time calibration error, 245 Analog-to-digital conversion, 212
Short-circuit to M, 244 AO
SM 431, AI 16 x 13 Bit, 284 Meaning, 451
SM 431, AI 8 x 13 Bit, 248 Application
SM 431, AI 8 x 14 Bit, 257, 274 IM 467/ IM 467 FO, 377
SM 431, AI 8 x 16 Bit, 321 RS 485 repeater, 404
SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 311 Approval
Smoothing of analog input values, 212, 218 CSA, 24
STOP mode, 244 UL, 23
Structure of data record 1, 419 Area of application
Temperature coefficient, 218 IM 463-2, 361
temperature unit, 218 AS
Underflow, 245 Meaning, 451
Wire break, 244 Australia
Wire break monitoring, 217 Marking, 23
Analog module Auxiliary voltage missing
Behavior, 208 Analog input module, 244
Commissioning steps, 183 Digital module, 101
Determination of the measuring error/output
error, 211
Diagnostics, 242 B
EXTF LED, 242
Backplane bus, 57
Interrupt, 246
Backup battery, 53
INTF LED, 242
Function, 53
Load voltage failure, 209
Shipping and storage conditions, 32
Parameter assignment, 216
Specifications, 54
Analog modules, 179
Storage, 32
Diagnostic interrupt, 246
Backup time, 54
Analog output channel
Calculating, 54
Conversion time, 214
BAF
Response time, 215
Meaning, 451
Analog output channels
Basic error limit, 211
Basic execution time, 214
Basic execution time
Cycle time, 214
Analog input channels, 212
Analog output module
Analog output channels, 214
Connecting loads to a voltage output, 238
Basic knowledge required, 3
Connecting loads to current outputs, 241
Battery, 32, 53
Connecting loads/actuators, 237
Battery type, 53
electrically isolated, 237
Battery voltage, 57
Output, 219
Bending radius
Output range, 219
For FOC, 388
Output type, 219
Block diagram
Parameters, 219
SM 431, AI 8 x 14 Bit, 258, 274
Response time, 214
SM 431, AI 8 x 16 Bit, 322
Settling time, 214
SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 312
SM 432, AO 8 x 13 Bit, 335
Block diagram
Analog output modules:
SM 431, AI 16 x 13 Bit, 285
Features, 182
Block diagram
Analog signals

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

470 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Index

SM 431, 294 Digital module, 101

Block diagram CiR, 96
SM 431, AI 8 x 16 Bit, 335 Climatic ambient conditions, 35
Block diagram of the SM 431, AI 8 x 13 Bit, 248 Commissioning analog modules
Bus connector, 383 Steps, 183
BUS1F Commissioning digital modules
Meaning, 451 Steps, 95
Bytes 0 and 1 Communication bus, 39
of diagnostic data, 422 Communication services
IM 467, 379
IM 467 FO, 379
C COMP
Meaning, 451
Cable
Compatibility
Plug in, 366
IM 460-4 and IM 461-4, 360
Prepare, 366
Compensating
Cable 721
Reference junction temperature for
Pin assignments, 372
thermocouples, 232
Cable duct and fan subassemblies
Compensating box, 233
Features, 393
Connecting, 234
Cable length
compensation
IM 463-2, 363
external, 233
Segment, 404
Internal, 233
Selecting, 366
Configurable diagnostic messages, 99
Cable length selector switch, 365
Configuration
Cable Lengths
IM 467, 382
For PROFIBUS DP, 384
IM 467 FO, 382
Cables, 347
Interface modules, 343
for analog signals, 220, 237
S5 modules, 370
Calculating
Configuration error
Backup time, 54
Analog input module, 244
Calibration software, 311, 321
Configuration in RUN, 96
Causes of error and remedies
Configuration in RUN (CiR)
Analog input module, 244
Changing, 216
Digital module, 101
Configuration of analog output circuits
CE marking, 21
SM 432, AO 8 x 13 Bit, 340
Certifications, 21
Connecting
CH
Reference junction, 235
Meaning, 451
Connecting actuators
Changing
to analog output module, 237
Configuration in RUN (CiR), 216
Connecting loads
Fuse, 164, 168, 172
to analog output module, 237
Parameter assignment in the user program, 216
Connecting loads to a voltage output
Rack number, 349
to analog output module, 238
Changing fuses, 168
Connecting loads to current outputs
Channel cable, 396
to analog output module, 241
Function, 396
Connecting resistance thermometers
Specifications, 396
to analog input module, 228
Channel error
Connecting resistors
Analog input module, 244
to analog input module, 228
Digital module, 101
Connecting sensors
Channel information available
to analog input module, 220
Analog input module, 244
Connection

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 471
Index

Compensating box, 234 for parameters, 411

Connecting loads to current outputs, 241 Data record 1
Electrically isolated sensors, 221 Analog input module design, 419
IM 463-2, 366 Digital input module configuration, 413
IM 467 FO with fiber-optic cable, 385 Digital output module design, 416
Non-isolated sensors, 222 DB
Resistance thermometers and resistors, 228 Meaning, 451
rules, 345 DC
Rules, 345 Meaning, 451
Thermocouples to resistance thermometers, 236 Definition
Voltage sensors, 223 Electrostatic sensitive devices, 447
Connection scheme Definition of EMC, 29
RS 485 repeater, 407 Degree of protection, 36
Connector IP20, 36
Mounting, 386 Dependencies
Connector pin assignment, 384 Input values, 118
Contact, direct, 449 Output values, 160
Controlling Design
Operating state, 380 CR2, 43
Conversion time CR3, 45
Analog input channels, 212 ER1, ER2, 47
Analog output channel, 214 IM 467/ IM 467 FO, 377
Converting Power supply, redundant, 51
Analog values, 184 Rack, 37
Cover, 58 UR1, 39
CP UR2-H, 42
Meaning, 451 Destination CPU for interrupt
CPU Digital output module, 98
Meaning, 451 DI
CR Meaning, 451
Meaning, 451, 453 Diagnostic data
CR2 Analog input modules:, 435
Design, 43 Bytes 0 and 1, 422
Specifications, 44 Data record, 421
CR3 Digital input modules, 423
Design, 45 Evaluating, 421
Specifications, 45 of the digital output modules, 428
CSA of the SM 421, DI 16 x DC 24 V, 423
Approval, 24 Signal modules, 421
cULus approval SM 421, DI 16 x UC 24/60 V, 425
Relay modules, 25 SM 422, DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A, 433
cULus approval, 24 SM 422, DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A, 428
Cycle time SM 422, DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, 430
Analog input channels, 212 SM 431, AI 16 x 16 Bit, 435
Analog output channels, 214 SM 431, AI 8 x 16 Bit, 439
SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 437
Diagnostic data entry, 210
D Diagnostic interrupt
Analog input module, 217
DAC
Analog modules, 246
Meaning, 451
Digital modules, 103
Data record
Diagnostic message, 100
for diagnostic data, 421
Channel error, 100

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

472 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Index

Channel information available, 100 Digital module

EPROM error, 100 Auxiliary voltage missing, 101
External auxiliary voltage missing, 100 Causes of error and remedies, 101
External error, 100 Channel error, 101
Front connector missing, 100 Channel information available, 101
Fuse blown, 100 Commissioning steps, 95
Hardware interrupt lost, 100 Diagnostic messages, 100
Incorrect parameters, 100 Diagnostics, 99
Internal error, 100 EPROM error, 101
Internal voltage failure, 100 External error, 101
Load voltage L+ missing, 100 EXTF LED, 99
Module error, 100 Front connector missing, 101
No module parameters, 100 Fuse blown, 102
Parameter assignment error, 100 Hardware interrupt, 104
Sensor supply missing, 100 Hardware interrupt lost, 101, 104
Short-circuit to L+, 100 Incorrect parameters, 101
Short-circuit to M, 100 Internal error, 101
Wire break, 100 Internal voltage failure, 101
Diagnostic messages, 99, 242 Interrupt, 103
Analog input modules:, 242 interrupt-triggering channels, 104
Digital modules, 100 INTF LED, 99
Reading, 99, 242 Load voltage L+ missing, 102
Diagnostics Module error, 101
Analog input module, 217 No parameters, 101
Analog modules, 242 Parameter assignment, 96
Digital input module, 97 Parameter assignment error, 101
Digital output module, 98 Sensor supply missing, 102
for digital modules, 99 Short-circuit to L+, 101
Diagnostics interrupt enable Short-circuit to M, 101
Digital input module, 97 STOP mode, 101
Digital output module, 98 Wire break, 102
Digital input module Digital output module
Diagnostic data, 423 Destination CPU for interrupt, 98
Diagnostics, 97 Diagnostic data, 428
Diagnostics interrupt enable, 97 Diagnostics, 98
Hardware interrupt enable, 97 Diagnostics interrupt enable, 98
Input delay, 97 Fuse blown, 98
Keep last value, 97 Keep last value, 98
Load voltage L+ missing, 97 Load voltage L+ missing, 98
Parameters, 97, 413 Parameters, 98, 416
Sensor supply missing, 97 Short-circuit to L+, 98
SM 421, DI 16 x AC 120 V, 120 Short-circuit to M, 98
SM 421, DI 16 x DC 24 V, 110 SM 422, DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A, 165
SM 421, DI 16 x UC 120/230 V, 130, 134 SM 422, DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A, 169
SM 421, DI 16 x UC 24/60 V, 124 SM 422, DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A, 146
SM 421, DI 32 x 24 V DC, 106 SM 422, DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A, 142
SM 421, DI 32 x UC 120 V, 138 SM 422, DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, 155
Structure of data record 1, 413 SM 422, DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, 151
Substitute a value, 97 SM 422, DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A, 161
Substitute a value "1", 97 Structure of data record 1, 416
Wire break monitoring, 97 Substitute a value, 98
Digital input modules Substitute a value "1", 98
Features, 93 Wire break monitoring, 98

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 473
Index

Digital output modules Diagnostic data, 421

Features, 94 EXM
Discharge of static electricity Meaning, 451
Protective measures, 449 Explosion protection guidelines, 23
Discharge, electrostatic External error
Persons, 448 Analog input module, 244
Displaying parameter assignment errors Digital module, 101
SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 319 EXTF
DO Meaning, 451
Meaning, 451 EXTF LED
Documentation package, 4 Analog module, 242
Dynamic parameters, 96 Digital module, 99

E F
Edge, 97 Failure
EEPROM Supply voltage, 117
Meaning, 451 Fan monitoring, 394
Electrical isolation, 408 Fan subassemblies
Electrically isolated sensors, 221 120/230 VAC, 397
Connecting, 221 24 VDC, 400
Electromagnetic compatibility, 29 Fans, 394
Electrostatic sensitive devices FB
Definition, 447 Meaning, 451
EMC FC
Definition, 29 Meaning, 451
Meaning, 451 Features
EMC directive, 22 24 VDC fan subassembly, 400
Emission of radio interference, 30 SM 431, 293
Enabling Analog output modules:, 182
Interrupt, 103, 246 Cable duct and fan subassemblies, 393
Ensuring Digital input modules, 93
Wire break monitoring, 116, 128 Digital output modules, 94
EPROM, 451 Power supply modules, 49
EPROM error Power supply, redundant, 51
Analog input module, 244 Relay output module, 94
Digital module, 101 SM 421, DI 16 x AC 120 V, 120
ER SM 421, DI 16 x DC 24 V, 110
Meaning, 451 SM 421, DI 16 x UC 120/230 V, 130, 134
ER1 and ER2 SM 421, DI 16 x UC 24/60 V, 124
Specifications, 47 SM 421, DI 32 x UC 120 V, 138
ER1, ER2 SM 422, DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A, 165
Design, 47 SM 422, DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A, 169
Error SM 422, DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A, 146
of an analog module, 211 SM 422, DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A, 142
Error messages SM 422, DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A, 174
Power supply modules, 59 SM 422, DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, 151, 155
ES SM 422, DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A, 161
Meaning, 452 SM 431, AI 16 x 13 Bit, 284
ESD SM 431, AI 8 x 13 Bit, 248
Meaning, 451 SM 431, AI 8 x 14 Bit, 257, 274
Evaluating SM 431, AI 8 x 16 Bit, 321

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

474 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Index

SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 311 Analog input module, 244

SM 432, AO 8 x 13 Bit, 335 Digital module, 101, 104
FEPROM HLV
Meaning, 451 Meaning, 452
Firmware, 381
FM
Approval, 27 I
Meaning, 451
I/O bus, 39
FOC
IC
Meaning, 452
Meaning, 452
Reusing, 387
ID
FRCE
Meaning, 451
Meaning, 451
Module types, 422
Front connector missing
IEC 61131-2, 21
Analog input module, 244
IFM1F
Digital module, 101
Meaning, 452
Function
IM
Backup battery, 53
Meaning, 452
Channel cable, 396
IM 460-0 and IM 461-0
IM 460-0 and IM 461-0, 348
Function, 348
IM 460-1 and IM 461-1, 351
Operator controls and indicators, 348
IM 460-3 and IM 461-3, 355
Parameter assignment, 349
IM 460-4 and IM 461-4, 358
Specifications, 350
Interface modules, 343
IM 460-1 and 461-1
Operator controls, 57
Specifications, 354
Functions
IM 460-1 and IM 461-1
Power supply modules, 49
Function, 351
Rack, 37
Operator controls and indicators, 352
Fuse, 401
Parameter assignment, 353
Changing, 164, 172
IM 460-3 and 461-3
The 120/230 VAC fan subassembly, 397
Specifications, 357
Fuse blown
IM 460-3 and IM 461-3
Digital module, 102
Function, 355
Digital output module, 98
Operator controls and indicators, 355
Parameter assignment, 356
IM 460-4 and 461-4
G
Specifications, 360
GD IM 460-4 and IM 461-4
Meaning, 452 Compatibility, 360
Grounded operation Function, 358
RS 485 repeater, 406 Parameter assignment, 359
Grounding, 449 Position of operator control and display
elements, 358
IM 463-2
H Ambient conditions, 361
Area of application, 361
Hardware interrupt
Cable 721, 372
Digital modules, 104
Cable length, 363
End of scan cycle, 247
Connecting, 366
when limit is exceeded, 246
EMC resistance, 361
Hardware interrupt enable
Indicators, 364
Digital input module, 97
LEDs, 365
Hardware interrupt lost

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 475
Index

Operator controls, 364 IM 461-3, 355

Order number, 361 Interface selector switch, 365
Rules for connecting, 363 Interference
Specifications, 375 Pulse-shaped, 29
Terminator, 374 Sinusoidal, 30
IM 467, 377 Interference frequency suppression 10 Hz
Communication services, 379 Step response, 330
Configuration, 382 Interference frequency suppression 400 Hz
Connection to PROFIBUS DP, 383 Step response, 331
Specifications, 389, 390 Interference frequency suppression 50 Hz
IM 467 FO, 377 Step response, 330
Communication services, 379 Interference frequency suppression 60 Hz
Configuration, 382 Step response, 331
Connection to PROFIBUS DP, 383 Internal error
Fiber-optic cable, connecting, 385 Analog input module, 244
IM 467/ IM 467 FO Digital module, 101
Application, 377 Internal voltage failure
Design, 377 Digital module, 101
IM operating mode, 380 Interrupt
Incorrect parameters Analog modules, 246
Analog input module, 244 Digital modules, 103
Digital module, 101 Enabling, 103, 246
Indicators, 55 Interrupt-triggering channels
IM 463-2, 364 of the digital module, 104
Input characteristic curve to IEC 61131 INTF
for digital inputs, 105 Meaning, 452
Input delay, 119 INTF LED
Digital input module, 97 Analog module, 242
Input values Digital module, 99
Dependencies, 118 IP
Installation Meaning, 452
24 VDC fan subassembly, 401 IP20, 36
RS 485 repeater, 404
Safety requirements, 28
The 120/230 V DC fan subassembly, 398 K
Insulation resistance, 36
Keep last value
Insulation test, 36
Digital input module, 97
Interface
Digital output module, 98
Selecting, 366
Interface module
IM 460-1 and IM 461-1, 352
L
IM 460-3 and IM 461-3, 355
IM 460-4, 358 L+
IM 460-4 and IM 461-4, 358 Meaning, 452
IM 461-4, 358 LAD
Interface modules Meaning, 452
Configuration, 343 LED, 380
Function, 343 BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F, 56
IM 460-0, 348 BAF, BATTF, 56
IM 460-1, 352 Parameter assignment error, 305
IM 460-3, 355 LEDs, 56, 394
IM 461-0, 348 BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F, BATT INDIC on 1BATT, 63
IM 461-1, 352 BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F, BATT.INDIC on 2BATT, 63

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

476 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Index

BAF, BATTF, 62 EMC:, 451

IM 463-2, 365 EPROM:, 451
INTF, 5 VDC, 24 VDC, 60 ER:, 451
LEDs INTF, 5 VDC, 24 VDC, 56 ES, 452
Limit ESD:, 451
Analog input module, 217 EXM:, 451
Load voltage failure EXTF:, 451
of the analog module, 209 FB:, 451
Load voltage L+ missing FC, 451
Digital input module, 97 FC:, 451
Digital module, 102 FEPROM:, 451
Digital output module, 98 FM:, 451
Low voltage directive, 22 FOC, 452
FRCE:, 451
GD, 452
M HLV, 452
IC, 452
M
ID:, 451
Meaning, 452
IFM1F, 452
M-
IM, 452
Meaning, 452
INTF, 452
M+
IP, 452
Meaning, 452
L+, 452
MANA
LAD, 452
Meaning, 452
M, 452
Manual
M-, 452
purpose, 3
M+, 452
Manual package, 4
MANA, 452
Marine approvals, 27
MPI, 452
Marking
MRES, 452
Australia, 23
MSTR, 452
New Zeeland, 23
OB, 452
Meaning
OP, 452
Abbreviations, 451, 452
OS, 452
AC:, 451
PG, 452
ADC:, 451
PII, 452
AI:, 451
PIO, 452
AO:, 451
PLC, 452
AS:, 451
PS, 452
BAF:, 451
QI, 452
BUS1F, 451
QV, 452
CH:, 451
RAM, 452
COMP:, 451
REDF, 452
CP:, 451
RL, 452
CPU:, 451
S +, 452
CR, 453
SCL, 452
CR:, 451
SFB, 452
DAC:, 451
SFC, 452
DB:, 451
Sign, 453
DC:, 451
SM, 452
DI:, 451
SSL, 452
DO:, 451
SSV:, 451
EEPROM:, 451
STL:, 451

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 477
Index

TD, 452 Mounting

UC, 452 Connector, 386
UCM, 453 MPI
UH, 453 Meaning, 452
Uiso, 453 MRES
USR, 453 Meaning, 452
Vs, 453 MSTR
Measured value resolution, 185 Meaning, 452
Measurement Multiprocessor operation, 382
Analog input module, 217
Measuring method
Analog input channels, 205 N
Analog input module, 217
New Zeeland
Measuring methods
Marking, 23
SM 431, AI 16 x 13 Bit, 291
No parameters
SM 431, AI 16 x 16 Bit, 306
Analog input module, 244
SM 431, AI 8 x 13 Bit, 255
Digital module, 101
SM 431, AI 8 x 14 Bit, 269, 281
Noise suppression
SM 431, AI 8 x 16 Bit, 333
Analog input module, 218
SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 320
Non-configurable diagnostic messages, 99
Measuring range
Non-isolated sensors, 221
Analog input channels, 205
Connecting, 222
Analog input module, 218
Measuring range module, 205
Replugging, 206
O
Setting, 205
Measuring range module incorrect/missing OB
Analog input module, 244 Meaning, 452
Measuring range modules OB 40, 104, 246
SM 431, AI 16 x 13 Bit, 290 Start information, 247
SM 431, AI 16 x 16 Bit, 303 OB 82, 103, 246
SM 431, AI 8 x 14 Bit, 267, 279 OP
Measuring ranges Meaning, 452
SM 431, AI 16 x 13 Bit, 292 Operating conditions, 34
SM 431, AI 16 x 16 Bit, 308 Operating state
SM 431, AI 8 x 13 Bit, 256 Controlling, 380
SM 431, AI 8 x 14 Bit, 272, 282 the CPU, 209
SM 431, AI 8 x 16 Bit, 333 Operational limit, 211
SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 320 Operator controls, 55
Mechanical ambient conditions, 34 Function, 57
Testing, 35 IM 463-2, 364
Mode selector, 381 Operator controls and indicators
Module error IM 460-0 and IM 461-0, 348
Analog input module, 244 IM 460-1 and IM 461-1, 352
Digital module, 101 IM 460-3 and IM 461-3, 355
Module overview, 180 PS 405 10A and PS 405 10A R, 85, 87
Digital modules, 93 PS 405 20 A, 89, 91
Module replacement, 382 PS 405 4A, 81, 83
Module types PS 407 10A and PS 407 10A R, 71, 74
ID, 422 PS 407 20 A, 77, 79
Modules PS 407 4A, 65, 68
Shipping and storage conditions, 32 Receive IM, 349, 353, 356, 359
Storage, 32 Send IM, 349, 353, 356, 359

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

478 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Index

The 120/230 VAC fan subassembly, 397 6ES7 460-1BA00-0AB0, 352

Optimum 6ES7 460-1BA01-0AB0, 352
Signal propagation delays, 116 6ES7 460-3AA01-0AB0, 355
Order number 6ES7 460-4AA01-0AB0, 358
6ES7 400-1JA01-0AA0, 39 6ES7 461-0AA01-0AA0, 348
6ES7 400-1JA11-0AA0, 39 6ES7 461-1BA00-0AA0, 352
6ES7 400-1TA01-0AA0, 39 6ES7 461-1BA01-0AA0, 352
6ES7 400-2JA00-0AA0, 41 6ES7 461-3AA01-0AA0, 355
6ES7 400-2JA10-0AA0, 41 6ES7 461-4AA01-0AA0, 358
6ES7 401-1DA01-0AA0, 45 6ES7 467-5FJ00-0AB0, 377
6ES7 401-2TA01-0AA0, 43 6ES7 467-5GJ00-0AB0, 377
6ES7 403-1JA01-0AA0, 46 6ES7 467-5GJ01-0AB0, 377
6ES7 403-1JA11-0AA0, 46 6ES7 467-5GJ02-0AB0, 377
6ES7 403-1TA01-0AA0, 46 6ES7405-0KR00-0AA0, 85
6ES7 405-0KA01-0AA0, 85 6ES7407-0KR00-0AA0, 71
6ES7 405-0KA02-0AA0, 87 IM 463-2, 361
6ES7 405-0KR02-0AA0, 87 Power supply modules, redundant, 51
6ES7 405-0RA01-0AA0, 89 Order numbers
6ES7 405-0RA02-0AA0, 91 Spare parts, 443
6ES7 407-0DA01-0AA0, 65 OS
6ES7 407-0DA02-0AA0, 68 Meaning, 452
6ES7 407-0KA01-0AA0, 71 Output
6ES7 407-0KA02-0AA0, 74 Analog output module, 219
6ES7 407-0KR02-0AA0, 74 Output of analog values
6ES7 407-0RA01-0AA0, 77 STEP 7 blocks, 179
6ES7 407-0RA02-0AA0, 79 Output range
6ES7 408-0TA00-0AA0, 396 Analog output module, 219
6ES7 408-1TA01-0XA0, 400 Output ranges
6ES7 408-1TB00-0XA0, 397 SM 432, AO 8 x 13 Bit, 340
6ES7 421-1BL01-0AA0, 106 Output type
6ES7 421-1EL00-0AA0, 138 Analog output module, 219
6ES7 421-1FH00-0AA0, 130 Output values
6ES7 421-1FH20-0AA0, 134 Dependencies, 160
6ES7 421-5EH00-0AA0, 120 Overflow
6ES7 421-7BH01-0AB0, 110 Analog input module, 245
6ES7 421-7DH00-0AB0, 124 Overload
6ES7 422-1BH11-0AA0, 142 On 24 V, 62
6ES7 422-1BL00-0AA0, 151 On 5 V, 62
6ES7 422-1FF00-0AA0, 161
6ES7 422-1FH00-0AA0, 165
6ES7 422-1HH00-0AA0, 174 P
6ES7 422-5EH00-0AB0, 169
Parameter assignment
6ES7 422-5EH10-0AB0, 146
Analog modules, 216
6ES7 422-7BL00-0AB0, 155
IM 460-0 and IM 461-0, 349
6ES7 431-0HH00-0AB0, 284
IM 460-1 and IM 461-1, 353
6ES7 431-1KF00-0AB0, 248
IM 460-3 and IM 461-3, 356
6ES7 431-1KF10-0AB0, 257
IM 460-4 and IM 461-4, 359
6ES7 431-1KF20-0AB0, 274
to digital modules, 96
6ES7 431-7KF00-0AB0, 321
User program, 411
6ES7 431-7KF10-0AB0, 311
Parameter assignment error
6ES7 431-7QH00-0AB0, 293
Analog input module, 244
6ES7 432-1HF00-0AB0, 335
Digital module, 101
6ES7 460-0AA01-0AB0, 348

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 479
Index

LED, 305 PS 407 10A, 71, 74

SM 431, AI 16 x 16 Bit, 305 PS 407 10A R, 71, 74
SM 431, AI 8 x 16 Bit, 332 PS 407 20 A, 77, 79
Parameters PS 407 4A, 65, 68
Analog input module, 217, 418 Power supply modules
Analog output module, 219 Error messages, 59
Data record, 411 Features, 49
Digital input module, 97, 413 Functions, 49
Digital output module, 98, 416 Power supply, redundant
Dynamic, 96, 216 Design, 51
Editing in the user program, 96, 216 Features, 51
SM 421, DI 16 x DC 24 V, 115 Prepare
SM 421, DI 16 x UC 24/60 V, 128 Cable, 366
SM 421, DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A, 150 PROFIBUS DP, 379
SM 422, DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A, 173 Cable Lengths, 384
SM 422, DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, 159 PROFIBUS DP master interface, 377
SM 431, AI 16 x 13 Bit, 290 Protection class, 36
SM 431, AI 16 x 16 Bit, 303 Protective measures
SM 431, AI 8 x 13 Bit, 254 Avoiding contact, 449
SM 431, AI 8 x 14 Bit, 267, 279 Discharge of static electricity, 449
SM 431, AI 8 x 16 Bit, 328 Grounding, 449
SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 317 PS
SM 432, AO 8 x 13 Bit, 340 Meaning, 452
Static, 96, 216 PS 405 10A
Parameters, modifiable, 411 Specifications, 86, 88
PARM_MOD PS 405 10A and PS 405 10A R
SFC 57, 411 Operator controls and indicators, 85, 87
PG PS 405 10A R
Meaning, 452 Specifications, 86, 88
PII PS 405 20 A
Meaning, 452 Operator controls and indicators, 89, 91
Pin assignment PS 405 4A
RS 485 repeater, 409 Operator controls and indicators, 81, 83
Pin assignments Specifications, 82, 84
Cable 721, 372 PS 407
PIO Specifications 10A, 72, 75
Meaning, 452 PS 407 10A and PS 407 10A R
Plant changes in runtime, 96 Operator controls and indicators, 71, 74
PLC PS 407 10A R
Meaning, 452 Specifications, 72, 75
Plug in PS 407 20 A
Cable, 366 Operator controls and indicators, 77, 79
Position of operator control and display elements Specifications, 78, 80
IM 460-4 and IM 461-4, 358 PS 407 4A
potential difference Operator controls and indicators, 65, 68
with analog input modules, 220 Specifications, 66, 69
Potential difference, 363 Pulse-shaped interference, 29
Power supply module
Invalid slot, 50
PS 405 10A, 85, 87 Q
PS 405 10A R, 85, 87
QI
PS 405 20 A, 89, 91
Meaning, 452
PS 405 4A, 81, 83

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

480 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Index

QV SM 422, DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel.5 A, 174

Meaning, 452 Repeater see RS 485 repeater, 403
Replugging
Measuring range module, 206
R Representation of analog value
for resistance thermometer Cu 10 Climatic, 195
Rack
Representation of analog values, 184
CR2, 43
Binary representation of input ranges, 186
CR3, 45
binary representation of output ranges, 201
Design, 37
for ±1 V to ±10 V voltage measuring range, 188
ER1, 46
for ±25 to ±500 V voltage measuring range, 188
ER2, 46
For analog input channels, 185
Functions, 37
for analog output channels, 201
UR1, 39
for resistance thermometer Cu 10 Climatic, 195
UR2, 39
for resistance thermometer Cu 10 standard, 195
UR2-H, 41
for resistance thermometer Ni x00 Standard, 194
Rack number
for resistance thermometer Pt x00 Climatic, 193,
Changing, 349
194
Radio interference
for resistance thermometers Pt 100, 200, 500,
Emission of, 30
1000, 193
RAM
for resistance-type sensors from 48 Ω to 6 kΩ, 192
Meaning, 452
for thermocouple type E, 196
RAM error
for thermocouple type L, 198
Analog input module, 244
for thermocouple type N, 198
Rating plate, 21
for thermocouple type T, 199
RC network, 407
for thermocouple type U, 200
Reading
for thermocouple types R, S, 199
Diagnostic messages, 99, 242
for thermocouples type B, 196
Reading analog values
for thermocouples type J, 197
STEP 7 blocks, 179
for thermocouples type K, 197
Receive IM
for voltage measuring ranges, 188
Operator controls and indicators, 349, 356, 359
for voltage output ranges, 203
Operator controls and indicators, 353
for voltage output ranges ± 10 V, 203
REDF
in current measuring ranges 0 to 20 mA, 190
Meaning, 452
in current measuring ranges 4 to 20 mA, 191
Reducing
in the 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA current output
Vibrations, 34
ranges, 204
Redundant operation, 51
in the 0 V to 10 V and 1 V to 5 V voltage measuring
Redundant power supply modules, 51
ranges, 203
Reference channel error
in the 1 V to 5 V and 0 V to 10 V voltage measuring
Analog input module, 245
ranges, 189
Testing, 310
in the current output range ±20 mA, 204
Reference junction, 234
in the current output ranges, 204
Analog input module, 218
Representation of analog values in the ±3.2 mA to
Connecting, 235
±20 mA current measuring ranges, 190
Reference junction temperature for thermocouples
Resistance measurement
Compensating, 232
SM 431, AI 8 x 14 Bit, 271, 282
Reference temperature
Resistance thermometers and resistors
Analog input module, 218
Connecting, 228
Relay modules
Resolution, 184
cULus approval, 25
Response time, 214, 215
Relay output module
Reusing
Features, 94
FOC, 387

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 481
Index

RL Digital module, 102

Meaning, 452 Sensors
RS 485 repeater, 403 electrically isolated, 221
Application, 404 Non-isolated, 221
Connection scheme, 407 Service
Design, 405 On the Internet, 5
grounded, 406 Setting
grounded operation, 406 Address area, 369
Installation rules, 404 Measuring range module, 205
Pin assignment, 409 S5 expansion unit, 368
Specifications, 409 Settling time, 214
Ungrounded, 406 SFB
ungrounded operation, 406 Meaning, 452
Rules SFC
Connection, 345 Meaning, 452
Run time calibration error SFC 51, 103, 246
Analog input module, 245 SFC 55 WR_PARM, 411
SFC 56 WR_DPARM, 411
SFC 57 PARM_MOD, 411
S SFC 59, 103, 246
Shielding clamps, 401
S-
Shipping, 32
Meaning, 452
Short-circuit
S+
Vs Sensor supply, 117
Meaning, 452
Short-circuit to L+
S5 expansion unit
Digital module, 101
Setting, 368
Digital output module, 98
S5 interface modules, 362
Short-circuit to M
S5 modules
Analog input module, 244
Addressing, 363
Digital module, 101
Configuration, 370
Digital output module, 98
S7 functions, 379
Sign
S7400
Analog value, 184
Accessories, 443
Meaning, 453
Spare parts, 443
Signal modules
Safety requirements
Diagnostic data, 421
Installation, 28
Signal propagation delays
SCL
Optimum, 116, 129
Meaning, 452
Signaling concept, 400
Scope
Sinusoidal interference, 30
of the manual, 3
SM
Segment
Meaning, 452
Cable length, 404
SM 421, DI 16 x AC 120 V
Selecting
Features, 120
Cable length, 366
Specifications, 122
Interface, 366
Wiring, 121
Send IM
SM 421, DI 16 x DC 24 V
Operator controls and indicators, 349, 353, 356,
Diagnostic data, 423
359
Features, 110
Sensor
Parameters, 115
Supply voltage, 224
Specifications, 112
Sensor supply missing
Wiring and block diagrams, 111
Digital input module, 97
SM 421, DI 16 x UC 120/230 V

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

482 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Index

Features, 130, 134 Measuring methods, 291

Specifications, 132, 136 Measuring range modules, 290
Wiring and block diagrams, 131, 135 Measuring ranges, 292
SM 421, DI 16 x UC 24/60 V Parameters, 290
Diagnostic data, 425 Specifications, 287
Features, 124 Wiring diagram, 286
Parameters, 128 SM 431, AI 16 x 16 Bit
Specifications, 126 Diagnostic data, 435
Wiring and block diagrams, 125 Measuring methods, 306
SM 421, DI 32 x DC 24 V Measuring range modules, 303
Specifications, 108 Measuring ranges, 308
Wiring and block diagrams, 107 Parameter assignment error, 305
SM 421, DI 32 x UC 120 V Parameters, 303
Features, 138 Wire break monitoring, 309
Specifications, 140 SM 431, AI 8 x 13 Bit
Wiring and block diagrams, 139 Block diagram, 248
SM 421, DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A Features, 248
Parameters, 150 Measuring methods, 255
SM 422, DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A Measuring ranges, 256
Features, 165 Parameters, 254
Specifications, 167 Specifications, 251
Wiring and block diagrams, 166 Wiring diagram, 250
SM 422, DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A SM 431, AI 8 x 14 Bit
Diagnostic data, 433 Block diagram, 258, 274
Features, 169 Features, 257, 274
Parameters, 173 Measuring methods, 269, 281
Specifications, 171 Measuring range modules, 267, 279
Wiring diagram, 170 Measuring ranges, 272, 282
SM 422, DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A Parameters, 267, 279
Diagnostic data, 428 Resistance measurement, 271, 282
Features, 146 Specifications, 260, 276
Specifications, 148 Wiring diagram, 259
Wiring diagram, 147 Wiring diagram, 275
SM 422, DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A SM 431, AI 8 x 16 Bit
Features, 142 Block diagram, 322
Specifications, 144 Block diagram, 335
Wiring and block diagrams, 143 Diagnostic data, 439
SM 422, DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A Features, 321
Features, 174 Measuring methods, 333
Specifications, 176 Measuring ranges, 333
SM 422, DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A Parameter assignment error, 332
Diagnostic data, 430 Parameters, 328
Features, 151, 155 Specifications, 324, 337
Parameters, 159 Wiring diagram, 323
Specifications, 153, 157 Wiring diagram, 336
Wiring and block diagrams, 152, 156 SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit
SM 422, DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A Block diagram, 312
Features, 161 Diagnostic data, 437
Specifications, 163 Displaying parameter assignment errors, 319
Wiring and block diagrams, 162 Features, 311
SM 431, AI 16 x 13 Bit Measuring methods, 320
Block diagram, 285 Measuring ranges, 320
Features, 284 Parameters, 317

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 483
Index

Specifications, 314 The 120/230 VAC fan subassembly, 398

Wiring diagram, 313 UR1, 40
SM 432, AO 8 x 13 Bit UR2, 40
Configuration of analog output circuits, 340 UR2-H, 42
Features, 335 Specifications of the PS 405 20A, 90, 92
Output ranges, 340 SSL
Parameters, 340 Meaning, 452
Smoothing of analog input values, 212 Standards, 21
Analog input module, 218 Start information
Spare parts OB 40, 247
Order numbers, 443 Static parameters, 96
S7400, 443 STEP 7 blocks
Specifications for analog functions, 179
24 VDC fan subassembly, 401 Step response
SM 431, 296 Interference frequency suppression 10 Hz, 330
Backup battery, 54 Interference frequency suppression 400 Hz, 331
Channel cable, 396 Interference frequency suppression 50 Hz, 330
CR2, 44 Step response
CR3, 45 Interference frequency suppression 60 Hz, 331
ER1 and ER2, 47 STL
IM 460-0 and 461-0, 350 Meaning, 451
IM 460-1 and 461-1, 354 STOP mode
IM 460-3 and 461-3, 357 Analog input module, 244
IM 460-4 and 461-4, 360 Digital module, 101
IM 463-2, 375 Storage, 32
IM 467, 389, 390 Backup battery, 32
PS 405 10A, 86, 88 Modules, 32
PS 405 10A R, 86, 88 Substitute a value
PS 405 20 A, 90, 92 Digital input module, 97
PS 405 4A, 82, 84 Digital output module, 98
PS 407 10A, 72, 75 Substitute a value "1"
PS 407 10A R, 72, 75 Digital input module, 97
PS 407 20 A, 78, 80 Digital output module, 98
PS 407 4A, 66, 69 Supply voltage
RS 485 repeater, 409 Failure, 117
SM 421, DI 16 x AC 120 V, 122 Sensor, 224
SM 421, DI 16 x DC 24 V, 112 support
SM 421, DI 16 x UC 120/230 V, 132, 136 Additional, 4
SM 421, DI 16 x UC 24/60 V, 126 Support
SM 421, DI 32 x DC 24 V, 108 On the Internet, 5
SM 421, DI 32 x UC 120 V, 140 SV
SM 422, DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A, 167 Meaning, 451
SM 422, DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A, 171 System perturbation, 31
SM 422, DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A, 148
SM 422, DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A, 144
SM 422, DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A, 176 T
SM 422, DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, 153, 157
TD
SM 422, DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A, 163
Meaning, 452
SM 431, AI 16 x 13 Bit, 287
Temperature coefficient
SM 431, AI 8 x 13 Bit, 251
Analog input module, 218
SM 431, AI 8 x 14 Bit, 260, 276
temperature unit
SM 431, AI 8 x 16 Bit, 324, 337
Analog input module, 218
SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 314

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

484 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06
 Index

Terminator, 345 V
IM 463-2, 374
Vibrations, 34
Test voltages, 36
Reducing, 34
Testing
Voltage sensors
Mechanical ambient conditions, 35
Connecting, 223
Reference channel error, 310
Vs
Underflow, 310
Meaning, 453
The 120/230 V DC fan subassembly
Vs Sensor supply
Installation, 398
Short-circuit, 117
The 120/230 VAC fan subassembly
Fuse, 397
Operator controls and indicators, 397
W
Specifications, 398
Thermal voltage, 231 Wire break
Thermocouple Analog input module, 244
Connecting to an analog input module, 231 Digital module, 102
Design, 231 Wire break monitoring
Operating principle, 231 Analog input module, 217
Thermocouples to resistance thermometers Digital input module, 97
Connecting, 236 Digital output module, 98
Training center, 4 Ensuring, 116, 128
SM 431, AI 16 x 16 Bit, 309
Wiring
U 24 VDC fan subassembly, 400
SM 421, DI 16 x AC 120 V, 121
UC
Wiring and block diagrams
Meaning, 452
SM 421, DI 16 x DC 24 V, 111
UCM
SM 421, DI 16 x UC 120/230 V, 131, 135
Meaning, 453
SM 421, DI 16 x UC 24/60 V, 125
UH
SM 421, DI 32 x DC 24 V, 107
Meaning, 453
SM 421, DI 32 x UC 120 V, 139
Uiso
SM 422, DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A, 166
Meaning, 453
SM 422, DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A, 143
UL
SM 422, DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, 152, 156
Approval, 23
SM 422, DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A, 162
Underflow
Wiring diagram
Analog input module, 245
SM 422, DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A, 170
Testing, 310
SM 422, DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A, 147
Ungrounded operation
SM 431, AI 8 x 13 Bit, 250
RS 485 repeater, 406
SM 431, AI 8 x 14 Bit, 275
UR1
SM 431, AI 8 x 16 Bit, 323
Design, 39
SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 313
Specifications, 40
Wiring diagram
UR2
SM 431, AI 8 x 14 Bit, 259
Specifications, 40
Wiring diagram
UR2-H
SM 431, AI 16 x 13 Bit, 286
Design, 42
Wiring diagram
Specifications, 42
SM 431, 295
User program
Wiring diagram
Parameter assignment, 411
SM 431, AI 8 x 16 Bit, 336
USR
WR_DPARM
Meaning, 453
SFC 56, 411
WR_PARM

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06 485
Index

SFC 55, 411

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

486 Reference Manual, Edition 09/2009, A5E00850736-06